_> >. " ty) a r iN ha JOURNAL & PROCEEDINGS OF THE ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL. New Series, Vol. IX. 1913, [SIRWILLAMJONES] MDCCXLV]-MDCCXCIV CALCUTTA : PRINTED AT THE BAPTIST MISSION PRESS, AND PUBLISHED BY THE ASIATIC SOCIETY. 1, PARK STREET, CALOUTTA. 1918. DATES OF PUBLICATION. Journal, pp. 1-88 Proceedings, pp. > 2 : 22 9 : tii 16th June 1913. t A XVii st August ., o° xxix-Ixxxi fe lxxxiii-lxxxv 18th ,, 30th: .,, 10th Sept. ,, Xevii-xevili eg aan Ci 2 6th D ciii-ev 11th March 1914. ch evii-cix 20th Mar DIRECTIONS FOR BINDING. The pages of ae ae should be bound ph after the ; erals. The continuation of the Proceedings. Plates i-v to follow page 88 ee We og nes ee vii ae See a3 Vie, fs RAG se 1s: Pea Ps) oo x1 5 482 a Xli-xiv ,, e 258 . XV-xvVi ,, 3 pe on 0 » ol4 . EVE » 424 2) SEP ey 8 , 290 * >t San gEr », 390 ae xxvi ,, face .» 465 ce) 23 477 - xXVH. ;, ERRATA. P. 348, eee jine from bottom of page. For “ Laiop- ery.’ read ‘ Laiopteryx’ ' Pp. 403, Opcones the nam Bader Spelaea (Dobson)”’ add in the third column after the word ‘ own” the words “in Burma.’ P. 409, aap op. cit., Vol. IV, p. 485) retracts the “Collocalia francica (Gmel.) ” in favour of EO elieatad unicolor P. 409, Fourth line from bottom of page. For “ridleyi, Boulenger” read “‘ridleyi, Butler” and add reference: Journ. Bombay Nat. Hist. Soc., xu, p. 425. LIST OF PAPERS AND ABSTRACTS ARRANGED ACCORDING TO AUTHORSHIP. Ananp Kou: See Koun, ANAND, ANNANDALE, N. An Account of the gb tino of the Lake of ‘iota with obser- vatio gilli Tneasaebdon to a Report on the gee of ee Lake of Tiberias ber. The Leeches of the Lake of" Ti Notes on the Fishes, Dateashi«’ rea Reptiles of the Lake of ae 1as es Note on a Sponge e-Larva from the iad of Tiberias . . The Polysea of the Lake of Tiberia: tes ANNANDALE, N., and Stantey Kemp The Crustacea Decapoda of the Laks of Tiberias ANNANDALE, N., J. Coaain Brown, and F. H. Grave ty. The Limestone Caves of Burma and the Malay Peninsula BANERJEE, RAKHALDAS. . Laksmanasena Brown, J. Coae The A- aia (Maingtha) Tribe of Hohsa-Lahsa, Yunnan Brown, J. Coaain, N. ANNANDALE, and F. H. GRAvEty. The Limestone Caves of Burma and the Malay Peninsula Brunetti, E. Some Noxious Diptera from Galilee Burr, Macon. Indian Dermaptera collected by Dr. A. D. Imms CARPENTER, GEORGE H. A New Springtail from Galilee CurpBer, H. M. On a in the Flowers of Limnanthemum shes Curistiz, W. A. K. The Composition of the Water of the Lake of Tiberias CiueGHorN, Maupe L. Notes on the Pollination of Colocasia Antiquorum Das-Gurta, Hem CHANDRA. On Two-Shouldered Stone Implements from Assam. . Page 271 137 313 291 viii Datta, Rasrk Lat. The ge eres of Nitrosyl Chloride on Secondary Amines. Methyl- nitrosamine and Ethylbenzyinitrosamine The Bionerseiie and — ee of | Monochloro and Di- chlorobenzylamine Datta, Rastk Lat, and Haripas MUKHERJEE. The Double Mercuri- ~periodides of substituted Sapa eprne Bases Tetrapropylammonium Mercuri-periodide Diesy, E. Nor’westers and Monsoon Prediction. Epwarps, F. W. Tipulide and Culicide from the Lake of Tiberias and Damascus EKENDRANATH GHOsH: See GuosH, EKENDRANATH. FIRMINGER, Rev. W. K. Two Letters of Major James Rennel GuHosH, EKENDRANATH. On ee Internal Anatomy of the Blind ante of ego Scan aris galilea, Calman) Gitte, Rev. A. sages of an Expedition among the Abors in 1853, By Rev Krick (of ae epee ar Paris and i ca of the South Tibetan Mis: GRAVELY, F. H., N. ANNANDALE, and J. Gouaix Brown: The Limestone Caves of Burma and the Malay Peninsula GURNEY, RoBER becca: from the Lake of Tiberias. . Haripas, MukerseEE: See MuKkerser, Haripas. Hemconanpra Das-Gupta: See Das-Gupra, HEMCHANDRA- Hipayar Husain: See Husain, Hwayar. Hoopsr, Dr. Davin. Sarcocolla Horvata, G. — _ Semi-aquatic ae from the Lake of Piberiems d its immediate vicin Hosten, Rev. H. Earliest Jesuit ctiate in India. From the J ane of the Rev. Cecilio Gom pipiens S.J. pris casei. by e Rey, L. Cardon, § os a sae Y ad age -—— 1. The Mirza Namah (The Book of the Perfect Gentleman) of Mirzéi Kamran with an English Translation. By Mawtavi M. Hipayat Hosa, Lecturer, Presidency College, Calcutta . Last year during the vacation I was invited by my much esteemed friend Qadi Muhammad Mahmid Sahib of Chakdah prudence, Tradition, etc. Among them I came across this unique MS. entitled Mirza Namah.' He generously lent it to m is in a bad shikastah and consequently I took a long time to decipher it and make the transcript for the press. Although the title-page goes to prove that this was written by Mirza Kamran, yet there is nothing in the context of the book which might establish the identity of Mirza Kamran the learned son of Emperor Babur with this Mirzi Kamran. The only persons mentioned as his phetiantinir ty in this pamphlet are Rafi‘-i-Shirazi, Jalala-i-Ardastani and Qadi Zada-i-Girahridi. Mirza Rafi 4-Shirazi was the author of the Tazkirat al-Mulik, and he has mentioned in his preface that in the year 1017 A.H. when his age was seventy years he began this book. 8 onag ar the ‘‘Catalogue of Persian ie of the British SMisnotinns p. o. V, mentions another work of same name and says the work, eek. is anonymous, was oleae pines in India. It ins: Et AS lat tO ols ai pow gles A copy of this book also exists in the library of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. It contains the author’s name which is Mirzé Mu ,ammad Khalil. 2 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. |January, 1913. According to this statement Mirza Rafi‘ was born in 947 A.H. whereas Mirza Kamran, son of Emperor Babur, died $64 a.H., so that when Rafi‘ was about 17 years, Mirza Kamran died. So far as I can ascertain this pamphlet is not the work of the Prince Mirzé Kamran, because at the age of 17, Rafi‘ Shirazi could not have been such a scholar that Prince Kamran would write about him thus:— ly oS Gspelo wryip “He (the Mirza) must consider him the best of his contemporaries.’’ ! _ However there is no doubt about the pamphlet belonging to the eleventh century Hijra. e word Mirza is a short form of Amir Zadah. Mirza was used in ancient times for kings and princes only. The Timuride sovereigns from Tamerlane down to Babur are called Mirza, Babur is the first sovereign of the dynasty who gave up the title of Mirza, and used the title of Badshah. We find the following statement in the Ma’ asir-i-Rahimi® oypa> sVyt a5, wf wit lool eb (2d OSES is? Hee ty cgi pdaale “up to this time (913 a.H.) the descendants of Tamerlane were called M trea, but from 913 a.H. they were called Badshah.’’ In India this word began to be used for Muharrirs (clerks) from the time of Nadir Shah’s invasion. It is found in the Bahar-i-‘Ajam that, from the time Nadir Shah came and conquered India, people who the wise that (while travelling) through Hindustan, the abode of safety, in the year 14th, according to the dictates of fate, (He observed that), as accident would have it, a body of reck- 1 This occurs in context, p. 5, 2 Vol. I, p. 495. peas J. esa eels Vol. IX, No. 1.] The Mirza Namah of Mirza Kamran. 3 [NV .8.] Mirza is based. It being a matter of great importance, I thought I ought to bah a dae on this subject, which may become the guide of mankind, so that no one may venture to claim this great a re ‘eithoat deserving it. Verses. (Though) you may know much (but) speak little ; Do not speak one as a hundred (or do not exaggerate), (but rather) make one of a hundred. It ought to be known, that, as I have become a Mirza y the force of personal exertions and the practice of laudable good will, Though my words are mixed with wit and humour, yet this pamphlet will effect certain conclusions, each one of which may be called the guide of Plato and the he Iper of Avicenna. In short, if any careless and dull-headed fellow forms a slight opinion of my work owing to his defective intelli- gence, what fear has the Sun from the inattention of the bat, and what anxiety has the firmly-seated mountain from the undermining of the wild rat. Verses. A few unskilful fellows, ignorant of their own selves, Take delight in defects, thinking them to be merits. (Their self-conceit and vanity) act like smoke vo they reach the brain (making it cloudy and defectiv (And) act like the wind, if they reach the light As clear intellect, by extinguishing it). one has a fancy for becoming a Mirza, should If any ‘attain to the state defined in this treatise. But eh e fails, why should he attempt such a hazardous idiekival, and er! let a large body of Lena distinctly see into his mean gin and vain aspirations Chapter I.—On the Main Rules of the Code of Mirzaship. It should be known, that, in the code of Mirzaship, there are ten main rules or principles , and several subsidiary ones. Among the main principles, the first is, that (an aspirant qin Mirzaship) should know God, because the perfection of every individual is shown by his knowledge of God. The second is, that he should acquire knowledge and virtue, with a view to himself from the deception (or betrayal) of es, and not with an aim (simply) to gain eminence. the begin- ning he must swiftly pass through the subject of Accidence and Syntax (or Grammar); and an acquaintance with these 7 4 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (January, 1913. two branches of learning must be deemed necessary by him so far as to enable him to be correct in his everyday conversa- tion and modes of writing and speaking Arabic and Persian words. In society he should try to guard against the shame of committing any mistake in conversation, for such incorrectness . . . - - . in speech is considered a great fault ina Mirza. The thi at the age of thirty (2). The fourth is, that he should possess a knowledge of men (and the world), because it is the best of all perfections ; and he must not be carried away by the words of every impudent fellow or deceitful person, who says that he has captured the genii several times, unless he sees all these with his own eyes, but even then there is room for suspicion; inasmuch as those who know such things are usually silent, while those who do not know pretend to such powers in order to deceive the simple. The fifth is, that he should not engage himself in a literary controversy with a student fresh from the nook of the college, who will destroy the tranquillity of his fit) companions (for him). The seventh is, that he must know the Arabic, Persian, Hindustani and Turkish languages. But he should know the other questions of philosophy, but only to an extent that he may be able to say “ I know.’” with those ten. If they have named him Mirza Jalal al-Din Yusuf, he must not encumber himself with all this, but shorten- ing it style himself Mirza Yisuf. When purchasing a thing wanted by him, he should not make any difficulty about 1 Died 690 a.n. Vol. IX, No. 1.] The Mirza Namah of Mirza Kamran. 5 [N.S.] the price, and ought not buy like traders. Ruby should be regarded by him as the best among all jewels, and the palan- quin as the best of all conveyances. He should like a water- melon as the best of all fruits. If he wishes to keep his head and hands entire or unbroken, let him not accompany an army through Kashmere. Rice boiled with spices should be preferred by him above all other eatables. He should keep pure love on a high arch, and if possible, he should have no connection with it at. al e should not follow a beautiful person whose demeanour displays tokens of wickedness, and he must not make ch use of tobacco. As | as he is in India t the best of his power he should try to keep himself safe from the attack of diseases, so that he may not have the need to see the face of the court physician. If heis introduced to a family, paying is ee he may continue to frequent the place, otherwise he should not trouble himself for nothing, and incur dishonour, because respect, once lost, is hardly to be regained. He should regard Lahore as the best of the townsin India. He should recognize the fort of Agra as unequalled in the whole world. If there be no controversy or dispute on that point, then he must think /sfahan as the best town in Persia. Ina multitude he must always be on the alert from attacks of swords kept under the garment. He must have funds enough to supply him with twenty rupees for the expenses of palan- uin and a door-keeper. He must not hire a room in any inn for it is beggarly todo so. He must value life and should not go near war. If he happens to be in a battle-field he must keep out of the reach of musket-balls. If victory takes place, he must not pursue the defeated and flying army; on the con- trary if his party suffer a defeat, he must run away as fast as The compositions of a Mirza should be full of expres- sion, and in a short compass of words should convey a number of ideas and meanings. If they are not so, what is then the difference (between a Mirza and others). Wherever he ma see (or meet) the narcissus, the violet and the orange, he should take all three. He must know the bad people, but should not call them bad for this is contrary to wisdom. He should know the game of dice, but must not turn a nuh and should not bet thousands while playing chess. He m not be fond of obscure verses (and spend his time in tryi oh understand them), because this precious life should not be thus wasted away. He must not follow a companion who is a fast rider, and should let him go wherever he likes. If a friend of the Mirza ‘ask what his salary is, he may tell the man if he is sure that the latter will not be appointed in his place ; other- wise he should run away from him to a distance of about 6 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [J anuary, 19133. twenty kuruh,' i.e. forty miles. If a Mirza happens to sit at the same table with a Mufti (or lawyer), he should not take anything, and in case he dies of hunger (by so doing) he shall have a great reward in next life. Ifa Mirza has beauty and good voice, he may without inconvenience recite a verse or two before his companions; but if he sings regularly at some d if the Mirza happens to get the better of him, he should com- pletely defeat him, but if it be otherwise, then he must make up with his adversary. If a Mirza happens to be in company with some persons of eminence, and if the topic of conversation refers to one’s income and ability, he should try to get the topic changed; if not, he should leave the house to its owner and run away as fast as his feet can carry him, and must not look back at all. The Mirza should visit Egypt because it is worth seeing. If he wants to settle in a place, let him take up his abode in Syria where nice bread, cheese, and sweet melons honour of anyone. He must not joke with every good-for- nothing fellow, nor allow all people to eut jokes at him. He should meet his friends occasionally, and when seen once, he must not go to them again that very day, because this will cause a recurrence (of the visit). With a monthly salary of Rs. 109 let him allot Rs. 10 for the belt and embroidered badge. And if these are supplied by his master he must not sell them. If he spends Rs. 50 for a fur, it will not be prodigality. He must not speak while people are playing draughts. He should not bring courtesans to other people’s house, especially if the eee a 1 Kurth is a road-measure of about two miles. ? One of the sect cf the shitahs or followers of Hadrat ‘All. 8 ind of garment. eR a eS ee ee ee a Vol. IX, No. 1.] The Mirza Namah of Mirza Kamran. 7 [N.S.] master of the house happen to be richer than he. If dirt happen to be on his auspicious face, he must wash it out with salt and vinegar; and he should not rely upon anyone except a worthy darvish. In reciting a he should not omit the first line of a poem, evenif it be simple. Ifa man recite the first line off a couplet, the Mirza wat not read out the second line. In India if he secures a house, he must not be in search of mere architectural beauty, but must pay due consideration to its stability lest he may not suffer an untimely death in the rainy season. In a bath he must not allow the body of a sick barber to touch his body, but he should be civil to his son. He may pour from the store a small quantity of water on his head, if he has bathed in a narrow reservoir used by several persons. If he wants to avoid insults, he must drive out from his head the weakness of sitting in a prominent place. In India he should not expect intelligence and good ee from those who put big turbans on their heads. If he doe not want to undergo insult and disrespect, he must not mee tain expectations from familiar pa Sway with people, say- in I am going to see such and such a rich man; he will give me a thousand rupees and Sacto many presents.” In India do not make the taking of Paludah' and Firnt® grow into a habit, for this brings in idleness and loss of spirit. With the rank of a centurion (Mansab-i- Sadi), the Mirza must not cause the cover of his hubble-bubble to be made of silver and put silver on the reins of his horse, because they would not remain with him. If he is riding with a superior officer, he must keep a step or two behind him; but on reaching a bridge he must lead the way, and return to his old place when the bridge is passed in safety. In times of misfortune he must not take anything i in a brass pot if its edges are engraved, for dust remains there and is not removed even by washing. If get he should not open his mouth at the door of the inn Sambal Khan, for there are many absurd reasoners. -He sek keep himself aloof from a few things, if he wants to render himself free from trouble. If any one begins a long story, he should not attend it, because it is styled t the prison-house of intercourse ; he must in no case discuss anything with those who are addicted to discussion, because this is a plague of tion is the book, called Kaiilah wa Damnah.’ In an assembly where fect} Bore: have been invited, the Mirza must not go 1 A kind of sweet Seiauia made of water, flour, sugar, etc. ; = kind of sweet dish prepared by flour, milk and sugar very famous work of ne tales, tra nstated into Arabic by ‘Abdulls bin al-Muqaffa‘, died a.p 8 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (January, 1913. first, because if he does so, he shall have to do respect to many people, and this case is called char mawja-i-tkhtilat (four-sided waves of intimacy, i.e. a case productive of troubles). How- ever if any one has a fancy to become a Mirza let him consult this treatise first. pomyl yoy! al) pa a5 yen ru wl yo lyre Riyeh H st wld aS cele ty gtd olay urbe y den rame pda phe sho dye y cubs | 299 = Githee wliglave Ui in 50 25 ales yin pine Oh) y)~ plny aif, sale allighe yabune Re glas acne presi yaw 5! O81 liwgaia boy! No yd oRUt comm 3S gee Sa es slay p22Y Ribbit ty cee REO oy! rer? Hine cma) I dod BEBO Cope IS Socld 3} Lo whszeie ee wil a eda It on pot crt Glasi~| I) BOS. yom - ditd]on0 Ue, aS ore) bly - gy% ait, sire e195 eyes 59 oy gid y Nai 15-9) Dat Usut yyiws as Caont pth yot pot ost a rddyd oly wl eyo SS teobe salbo ria oul dots Gast.) jt ep® Code - asf sr Sil) de she do ty go 59 S51 pity slaw ae yr? BOYD GIRS nny caeilsy yyis griz wr A Sauity os re D182 OA G9 yp Ase wt Oia Gulls Ler cat UST J3* 3 a345 Pa ast wth ras Paes wind wts3 estes hiner, web dst colors, Byrd Estey? ee sth Gls Dybese Ch cae hy pods giles, & os» J! csr - hit ae bly Goby BoE AS 11) BY IS B96 5 — Igy oe a a NN a) i 7 i alt Vol. IX, No. 1.] The Mirza Namah of Mirza Kamran. 9 [NV.S.] Te eS Ooh ns AS gt og jp dip he dw) ost ly y! Oi ga ob dbwsy pssloas s dye d9d Sdue ous os) we eat obs} wo yo stl ets) Iy wows 5S emits duly & silae alho od Esilers 02 9 PB pS 9 ty ore 9 - doy5 ASF Jot Joel Hem 3! - obe pgs yg Cml 89 yet iio wy 59 af gsi lod 4} gst at st 3 sey! a lek aS owls, 1) GghoS wh us” whe 3 ty CyB 8ST sty? oss dans wm asf poise mt day5 us” pele ye ple 3! Joist yo 5 - oS ) gbic a yblay gins ow 9 - of Use £'a)} eres sly Sale jot ple 90 wit bey - 26 o95 psd y . ‘ : . ; Prd a ‘. q we . . att ve 3 uvtbe ti BS i Kins oo ble & silk Ey2s0 By 39) ble sJlsa 3 ike ee ee ” OTT gph a8 8 oh 2358 Woe peed JL Gyoig af ough af woh y ast pry A alee see Vol. IX, No. 1.] The Mirza Namah of Mirza Kamran. 1} [N.S.] grt dBi 5 - 339 Ih glo eizh® yo - adi 5b jL5 bel ator ty oy) ob Ny Sp ml BF gary yg - ot st Sey es ailei1S yee as aah gla SRS 9 - ogy? Mtg BF sim gp UG sfdG = ayds gh oho iS ole 1h yee yS - Boxe, &eeo azy Ld Ki lale BF Omer y OSL hy Cg bT as if ByyS Same oly Che 51 9 oughs OaS coed g! Gages ty gf AF Io cla jf crmed Hyte ay Crtyd Lyne b gside Spt FQ ysl - 352 dix} y sie 9 wm Iyyxe_yS! - ojo erbe Je! oyte shies Jf 5 xl « dass Sys sla Sy oye HIRT wipes Gepae ad Ylalac lb orb I pk? 9 oda y® gS 801} GPUS creel BOIS AF OS Lom ty Gl 8595 4 dull - Slo Fy vlyelas oy DG 1 oliyt giles! Vay cojl* ey ly idee gh5 9 = 216 eee gd Gb oS SN FS die En! ypirdyo ys OF IE gp! Ih p89 oy Bly SY GS Nhyne Kilgoys pS} - 25S nic dy° Die a cgwlre yd - DIF Hylove ead b aml wSeys $1 9 oi pai ObsyS o3y> od stonbwt y Bele oh Sy 9% y OSL aid hy? 9 je 58 ale Hy las aif Gli alo & oSl Ail sya ay OSI hype pre ly 2g ~ OSS Srbdas IG 4 ogy? aslo oh wd U abmad ailerale Se 9 wh a& oyled Cyky alo yo d9% sgdieshes Dated SF - ayto wous a5 WF coliye Sawoe Sh let et lads Sty 9d days! osto wie Boyd y g7hdle elinegoi® yy = ues god CRUD (jadi AF oydu vist (Slolave dyed eeu ayb pox? b cplre yy - OGLE og Gye Gale y ome we dt lolye aF syly Bortiga ato a atone y - too ol os lepad ope BE yy lege apd (coals Ghraie GU abb aday gS) sft - ay gh porby GS Satle af o98) Glo Jit! SK 5o cgilige ell yo - oy% = 24953 mS Gugell Gray - vito pile gllOLS fa I) jledy wT Ge I GUUAT - 2805 at) o9dy 1) US p# Aulbe y - 016 aylbe Glnene z@ & 4429) 89 ALal« Sdiy) Oe L - soe w* ys aS dule ty oo 9 dias 8s 52f 12 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (January, 1913. ok calle uF Sarg 8) OB) role yl 9 Od Aol Kye 9 SryeS creak 98.7 Eg jle ay US yy - com lyeel OBO?) per cred dig, slr Pie iis ce estla yo Lepad ays pe dla yo oy - 855 Gye jt OL ahs (BS lee Coys 9p Se Hy = OSL UHI Gy ala Gale JA 999 BG yahet Coykior 61S Cshagyo jf gat y - oupdy Kas y a5, eskts wh 5! af cepae = OSL ym ages! dilgay 1) elho Que Woilyd silos) ae BL St Bh® Nog - oStgau aS It ty ne gree ol wi SSH pl yo a a alld pmo» 5B) Yyty a Gripe 1) Gale D6 UST yd Gow fy la Gti elma yo plea yo9 - aye del ue DMB19 B95 abe yloens poy? a SiS &ls,s ~ WLS ees dle pire pmsl y “dd Habe Sty! ep! B55 3! =) ese pee} wT wary m5, » Paz? HOM y9 9 - 4S 59d pe HH 1p cola YL rye OES VBS oalyd 5S olds csilesy Oalyd St - dob aldo ) gad C393 we 5) S52 Dyado Anta 2% 9 Me paly> 1) Gp wF af 5905 pope LMA! py aul ob) srs Soply ty oak Oko 9d 9 -OyF OB1gA shams (SbSYy 4 oy O@IFa wr soe rato UY - oie (92 ly Seay sl2l aS lepte wole pryeo Kila sere U- aile dalrti Ih ne U af Seo $85 ty at clad ale Vary” Uo} - SOP BRAT fy Sst lhe gt englBi cls & aoe GH, 5 x1, Us 50 pile Foely 5 yp gp cvellenn'y a3fail tay Jy a9S Ouny oo Oy yo MAL BAS Hy WT US AF we Gorb yp siltayy all yoy - oylei syles S28 ooh Sle cat oper y aintd ye gt By ye SF oy gi flab lSuT yo Sm é a 033 Gym odh Lsywre 5) wh dain aly Sats nF - OES yh af oalyd 55! abs lis ty SoS Sag Oba ity — camel Lae Sls css ty toe Gul a 2,5 gf Uklarve sis wpb JRL ex st O3tg5 (S - comet SMES well SF yin rb Som, = cols : diy 95 LMA] ae ee ae ee CF ee a ee pe ee ae Pen et eee ee ee Vol. IX, No. 1.] The Mirza Namah of Mirza Kamran. 13 [N.S.] as gilosas su a3 Ht 9 BOAay? Sa: esle ous m0 EMAY 035 ph os eo)” as wine » ST Pr | wl sat oS otf oy Sk diwy 3 alls Us as 61 aS Iys5 ~ agp oh ad ih pbog a 00U Kye OBL toll lige Jes 1) awoke Gils o,f Sel} OL pase plot Le o9% Sto ued de 3! sey IH gre 59 iy Curt! eaS 1 p08) gy - Odyf EMR! Boye je a y: Se : epee un: ree A REPORT ON THE BIOLOGY OF THE LAKE OF TIBERIAS. First SERIES. List of Subjects dealt with in First Series. Introduction .. ~ ee of the Water of e Lake Pet: Batrachia iad Rep: tiles Some oe ‘Divi Culicidae and Tipulidae Aquatic Oligochaeta. . Sponges N. Annandale, D.Sc., F.A.S8.B. W. A. K. Christie, B.Sc., Ph.D. N. Annandale D.Sec., F.A.S.B. E. Brunetti ae he pte: IF. W. Edwards, B.A. ee J. Stephenson, D. ie A M. 8. N. Annandale, D.Sc., F.A.S.B. Page 2. Introduction to a Report on the Biology of the Lake of Tiberias. By N. ANNANDALE, D.Sc., F.A.S.B. The papers to be published in this series are the result of five weeks’ visit to Palestine and Syria in October and Nov- ember, 1912. The object of the visit was, if possible, to trace the genera of sponges, coelenterates and polyzoa characteristic of the fresh waters of India and tropical Africa northwards up the Jordan valley, should they prove to have a distribution in any way similar to that of the Jordan fishes, whose African affinities have long been known. Collections of other inverte- brates, more particularly the crustacea, worms and mollusca, were also to be made. For this purpose it seemed best in the resident European community, among whom I may mention in particular Herr R. Grossmann, the proprietor of the Hotel an ardent naturalist. I was also indebted for much valuable information to Dr. D. W. Torrance and the Rev. 8. Semple. I was provided with a twelve-inch dredge of the type sup- plied by the Marine Biological Association at Plymouth and with various tow-nets and hand-nets, but, although the dredge exit of the Jordan and thence eastwards to the village of Semakh: from Tiberias across the lake to Wad-es-Semakh on the western shore, and from the former place northwards to Mejdal or Magdala. The tow-net was used over this area both by day and by night and also at a point further north than any of the places hitherto mentioned, off the mouth of the Jordan. The fountains at Ain-et-Tineh and Tabghah were carefully examined and also the stream in the Wad-es-Semakh and the.Jordan at its entry and exit, while a more cursory 18 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [January, 1913. investigation was made of the springs in the plain of Gennesa- ret. A few specimens were collected later in the R. Barada at Damascus and in the Dog River (Nahr-el-Kelb) near Beirut on my way to the coast, but only one day was devoted to col- lecting in each locality. A few blood-sucking and “ house ” flies were also obtained at Nazareth and at Kefr Kenna, half way between Nazareth and Tiberias, but no attempt was otherwise made to collect purely terrestrial animals. e Lake of Tiberias (also known as the Sea of Galilee) is termed in modern Arabic Bahr Tubariya.' It is a pear-shaped mass of water through which the Jordan flows from north to south, its length being about 13 miles and its greatest breadth about 43 miles. Tiberias, the only town that now exists on its shores, is situated on the west side a little south of the broadest _ On maps of the lake numerous streams are depicted enter- ing it. Most of these streams are, however, in summer either dry ravines or else merely the outflow of Springs that rise at a consist of more or less saline water and some of them are warm. Near Tiberias there are, on the margin of the lake, hot ; In this and other place-names I follow the spelling of Bartholo- mew s most recent map of Palestine. > Recent surveys have not confirmed Lortet’s statement that there are pockets of over 250 metres deep in the neighbourhood of the mouth at which various species of molluscs occur are contradicted by my own intesiigationan See Lortet, Arch. Mus. d’Hist. Nat. Lyon III, pp. 104, 108 Vol LX, No. 1.] The Biology of the Lake of Tiberias. 19 [NV.S.] sulphur springs, yee have enjoyed, at any rate since the first century-a.D., a reputation for their curative virtues i cally the only supply to which the people of Tiberias have access. One artesian well sunk in the town produces a copious supply of water that can be drunk without ill-effect or unplea- ¢ é o a LAKE OF TIBERIAS *\Tiberias- from another borin ng only a few hundred yards away was strongly impregnated with brine. 3 W. A. K. Christie has kindly promised to analyze ones | of water I brought back, and I propose | to discuss his analys A The climate of Tiberias is eactically Noone in character, the highest shade temperature recorded being 117° F.: in summer the shade ote sic aass's often reaches 110° F. and during 20 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. {January, 1913. my visit in October it rose on several occasions to 106° F. The rainy season is in winter, the first heavy showers usually falling in October or November. of oleander and thorny shrubs. The banks of the streams, whether true streams or merely the outflow of fountains, sup- port a fairly dense growth of gigantic reeds and, if the water is fresh, permit thickets of willow, wild fig and Ricinus to flourish. In the pools themselves there is often a dense growth of Ranunculaceous water-plants. Later I propose to discuss in detail the effects that local and geological conditions have had on the fauna: at present it will be sufficient to call attention to one or two of its most outstanding features. As is the case with most if not all lakes the edges of which are covered with small stones, there is a marginal or inter- mediate fauna. This merges gradually into the true terrestrial tween the village of Semakh (which must not be con- fused with Wad-es-Semakh) and the exit of the Jordan there is a a es Pre, ee ee Vol. LX, No. 1.] he Biology of the Lake of Tiberias. 21 [N.8.] In the short distance (not more than two hundred yards) that intervenes between the channel and the southern shore, although the water is at some points nearly as deep as the channel itself, the sandy clay washed down from the cliffs, which are in a state of steady disintegration, interferes to some extent with animal life, to which the organic débris deposited immediately opposite the village is even more detrimental. Molluscs of the genus Melania are fairly common in a living condition in the channel just west of Semakh, but only their dead shells are to be found in the Jordan itself immediately on its exit from the lake. It was in the channel also that I dredged the only non-operculate gastropod molluscs seen in the lake, as well as the only polyzoon of the genus Plumatella and three of the four sponges of the subfamily Potamolepidinae obtained. he zooplancton of the lake was not, at the time of my visit, abundant or conspicuous in any way. It consisted for the most part of minute copepods and rotifers, only a few species of each group being represented. ew small muddy pools on the shore microscopic life was abundant, but none of the larger entomostraca were seen pep hironomidae were well represented, as well as adult water- beetles and Rhynchota. any of the fountains is the blind prawn Typhlocaris galilaea, which is only found in one pool among the springs of Tabghah. Its habitat will be discussed later in a separate paper. ish and mollusca are certainly the most richly represented groups in the lake itself. The latter live to a large extent on the minute algae that are extremely abundant. The almost complete absence of non-operculate gastropod genera is a note- worthy feature. The higher crustacea are not well represented, the only common decapod being the crab Potamon potamios. Several species of the Amphipoda and Isopoda are, however, abundant round the edge. Except in the small muddy pools already referred to, the ime of my visit w 8 ; under stones at the edge of the lake. Only two species of this group were, however, observed as adults, and even dragon-flies 22 ~=Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (January, 1913. could find no representative of the group in this position, although at least two species were common in small streams on and near the shore. wo species of Polyzoa Phylactolaemata and five of fresh- water sponges were obtained. The only coelenterate I saw was a single specimen of the common Green Hydra (H. viridis, Linn.), which I found among weeds in a little limestone basin at Ain-et-Tineh. Several distinguished naturalists, among whom the names of Giinther, Tristram, Lortet and Locard are prominent, have devoted their attention to the fish! and molluscs of the Lake of Tiberias, and although the less conspicuous groups have not been so strictly investigated, the collections of Dr. Th. Barrois and Dr. E. Festa have provided material for two valu- 1 Dr. E. W. G. Masterman of Jerusalem has published a very interesting account of the inland fisheries of Galilee including those of the lake, in his Studies in Galilee (Chicago: 1909). ” 2 Only a comparatively small number of Dr. Festa’s specimens were actually from the Lake of Tiberias. Vol. IX, No. 1.] The Biology of the Lake of Tiberias. 23 [N.S.]. for help in the preparation of which I have to thank a number of naturalists in Europe and America as well asin India. I have also to thank the Council of the Asiatic Society of Bengal for publishing the papers in separate instalments and for liberal treatment in other respects. EXPLANATION OF PLATE I. PHOTOGRAPHS OF THE LAKE OF TIBERIAS. Fig. 1. View on the western shore, looking north : to show the loose stones on the lower surface of which Ephydatia fluviatilis syriaca, : udospongilla mappa and Fredericella a occu A corner of the city-wall of "Tiberias abtens out into the lake. The upper margin o e pale streak on the wall represents the level cision by the water in winter. The photograph was takenin the middle of October, before the rainy season had commenced. . Outflow of asmall spring in the Plain of Gennesaret (October): to show the pebbly beach. Fig. 4. Outflow of the Jordan, looking towards the village of Semakh from the western bank of the river. The strip of water shown outside the actua exit, which is well defined by projecting spits, is the only known habitat of the sponge Cortispon- gilla barroisi (Topsent) and other endemic species. bo Fig. i? _e = i) 3. The Composition of the Water of the Lake of Tiberias, By W. A. K. Curistiz, B.Sc., Pa.D. The sample of water from the Lake of Tiberias whose analysis is given below was collected by Dr. Annandale at 7-30 a.m. on October 27th, 1912, a mile south of Tiberias. It was token at the surface from a steamer plying on the Lake. One true liter contains the following i inorganic constituents in grams, the results being expressed in the ionic form Na 0°12] Mg 0°023 Ca 0°049 Cl 0-239 So, 0016 Co, 0:075 SiO, 0-013 TotaL .. 0°536 Its err is 536 parts per million, its specific gravity 100043 (5 :) or 0°99775 (= in vacuo J. 24° The amount of water peat for analysis was unfortu- nately insufficient for an exact or detailed examination, and rom perfect analytically, and though the composition of the lake water will undoubtedly vary with the locality of the sampling place and the time of year, the figures are sufficiently accurate to show how remarkably the water of the Lake of Tiberias differs from that of other lakes with an outflowing stream, and from that of rivers, with which the water from lakes with an outlet has of course many similarities. The prevailing charac- teristics of analyses of ordinary lake and river waters are a high percentage of carbonate and of calcium, and a low percentage of chloride and alkalies. Here we have the reverse. The compo- sition of this water resembles that of no other river or lake with an outflow of which I have found data, with the excep- tion of some ofsthe rivers flowing from arid saline regions in the middle of the United States, and of the Jordan itself. On the ; ! Published with the permission of the Director, Geological Survey of India 26 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. {January, 1913. other hand, the composition of we soluble constituents resem- bles that of the reservoirs of many enclosed basins—where chlorides predominate over oasoniine and alkalies over calcium ; and though its salinity is much less than is generally the case with waters which accumulate in areas of internal drainage, it is still considerably greater than that of the average lake with an outflow. The water of the Caspian Sea may be taken as an example for comparison. A is the mean of five analyses by C. Schmidt ! of water solinobad: off Baku, B is one by H. Rose* of water collected 80 kilometers 8.-W. of the outer- ~ most delta island of the Volga, and C is the above analysis of Tiberias water, all calculated to the same percentage form. A. B. C. — Caspi | Caspian ‘Tiberias. '(Schmidt).| (Rose). Na 24-70 54 || 93-6 22:6 Rb 02 | Me [Ns OR 3-9 43 Cs 2-29, 9-5 91 42-04 sg ae i 34:5 44:6 SO, 23:99 | 195 3-0 Co. ‘37 9-0 140 SiO 03 ae 2°4 a6 10000 =: 100°0——=s—«*2100°0 Salinity (parts per million) 12940 | = 1820 _~| 536 The satiteat in the southern part of the Caspian is much greater than that of the Sea of Galilee, and even in the north, where the water is diluted by the Volga and the Ural, it is 24 times asigreat, but with the exception of the replacement of carbonates by sulphates the analyses resemble one another reasonably close The immediate reason for the peculiar composition of the water of the Lake of Tiberias is not far to seek, if the water from the springs at Tiberias is at all representative of many of its other sources of supply. An analysis of the water from one Bull. Ac. Se. St. Peter z lated by F. W. Clarke, Bull. U8 Ged 3 I Surv wi91, 091), p15 Poggendorff’s Annalen, 395, (1835), p q DT Renee Se ras, ee | RE ee Te Vol. IX, No. 1.] The Water of the Lake of Tiberias, 27 [N.S.] of these springs, Birket el Ezair, is given by M. Blankenhorn.! The sample was taken in i Reduced to the percentage ionic form, the results are— NGS eee Ie Ge. kee Ol. Er % SO ees CO; SBS Y SiO; 22 P12°%, 100-00 The salinity is 3544 parts per million. Another analysis is given by Blankenhorn (loc. cit., p. 344) of water from the octagonal pool described below or from the stream stated to flow out of it. Recalculated to the same form, it is— Na 30°7 % a 8-1 9, Cl 473%, CO. ie}, SiO rs % 100-0 The salinity is 1350 parts per million. This pool is the only known locality of the blind prawn Typhlocaris and a sample for analysis was therefore collected by Dr. Annandale on October 28rd, 1912. His description of the place is as follows :-— ‘* The octagonal pool in which 7'yphlocaris occurs is situated about 200 yards in a direct line from the edge of the Lake of Tiberias, in a little plain containing other springs of varying salinity and temperature; it is probably the largest pool in the immediate neighbourhood of the lake. The circumference (if the eight sides be equal, as is apparently the case) is 58 metres, and the greatest depth of water is stated to be in spring about 3 metres; in October it was 6 to 10 cm. less. The local name of the pool is Birket ’Ali edh Dhaher, ’Ali edh Dhaher having been a local robber-chief of the eighteenth century, who is said to have repaired many buildings in the neighbourhood of Tiberias. A description of the pool is given in vol. I of the Memoirs of the Survey of Western Palestine, another in the unabridged editions of Thomson’s Land and the Book, and a third in Masterman’s Studies in Galilee. The water is entirely enclosed in walls that are clearly of two different dates, the lower part being of large well-dressed stones, and the upper of much smaller and more irregular stones covered with plaster, of which remains still exist. 1 ** Wissenschaftliche Studien am Toten Meer und im Jordantal,’: p. 344. Berlin, 1912. 28 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. {January, 1913. The lower part may be Roman, as I am inclined to believe; but some authors regard it as good mediaeval Arabic work. The name of the place is et-Tabgha, which recent authorities believe to be a corruption of the Greek Heptapegon (‘‘ seven pool to work a water-mill or water mills in a totally different direc- tion from that of the existing water-course. There is, indeed, evidence that the distance to which this water was conducted was different at different periods. I believe that now, whatever may have once been the case, there is no connection between the pool and the lake. In October, 1912 the whole surface was overgrown with floating grasses of great size. At 11 a.m. on October 22nd, the air-temperature imme- diately above the surface of the water in the pool being 30°C., the water itself at the surface had a temperature of 27°C. At the same time that of the existing mill-race, at the point at which it issued from the ground, was 25°C., all being in the shade. Bubbles of gas were observed ascending almost con- tinuously from the bottom of the pool at this time, but no smell could be detected.’’ The specific gravity of the water is 1:00295 (55) or 24°. 1-00026 pu vacuo ), the salinity 3710 parts per million. One true liter contains, in grams, : Na 901 K ‘0576 Mg 0874 Ca “3538 1 2-074 so, ‘0251 0248 Co. ye: S10 ‘0260 Total: } 7907 The percentage composition of the inorganic matter in solution is given below Vol. IX, No. 1.]| The Water of the Lake of Tiberias. 29 [N.8.] Na... 24°21. | EE Ean Mg 2°35 % Ca 9°51 % Cl 55°74 9, SO, 07 2, 8 167% CO; 4°60 % SiO, .. ak 100-00 ough the assumption of the presence of definite salts in such a solution is purely arbitrary, it ma ointed out as than the European balneologist considers necessary for the designation ‘‘ sulphur spring.’’ In composition and salinity this water resembles that represented by M. Blankenhorn’s analysis of Birket el Ezair water much more closely than it does the sample collected ws him on the same day from the Birket Ali h Dhaher or, as he calls it, el-Hasil. The similarity of all three analyses with that of the lake water is sufficiently obvious. The strata from which these springs take their rise must be very saline in character, and it may weil be that they repre- sent the leachings of the d deposits of the inland sea which, according to E, Hull,! filled the present Jordan Valley in Plio- cene times. ** Geology and i Gecechy of coe « Petraca, P Palestine and adjoin- ing Districts, »” p. 79 et seg., London, ity ies fs Fos ea 4. Notes on the Fishes, Batrachia and Reptiles of the Lake of Tiberias. By N. Annanpag, D.Sc., F.A.S.B. (Published by permission of the Trustees of the Indian Museum.) was not part of the plan of my visit to Palestine to collect vertebrates of any kind and only a few specimens were obtained incidentally ; but it will be convenient to commence this series by considering the aquatic vertebrates of the lake, although the papers will be devoted mainly to the inverte- brates, about which there will be more that is strictly original to be said. I. FISHES. (a) AN ANALYSIS OF THE FisH-FaunNa. The following list is compiled for the most part from well- known works, among which I may mention in particular Gin- enger’s The Fishes of the Nile (1907) and Catalon of the Fresh- water Fishes of Africa (1909-10).!_ The two last works in par- ticular have been of the greatest use in settling the somewhat complicated synonomy of genera and species, although they refer only to African fish. I have added to this compilation a few notes on species actually observed and have analyzed the pccareunion! distribution of the fish in some detail, leaving all discussion of origins for a later paper. List oF THE FIsH OF THE LAKE OF Li AND THE NEIGHBOURING Fountain Fam. BLENNIDAE. . V. socialis (Hckl.) hoe Se) o~ s ee ~ & vs) ° 5 2 ao) 6 8. Barbus canis, C. & 9. Fam. CyPpRINIDAE. . Discognathus lamta rufus, 10. B. longiceps, C. & V. Hekl. 11. Leuciscus zaregi, Hckl. 12. Alburnus sellal, Hckl. 13. Nemachilus galilaeus, Gthr. i) Varicorhinus damascinus ~ (C. & Vi. syriacus (Gthr.) 1 Owing to the sakage that takes place it in » the distribution of cette oes ig periodicals, Dr. Pe sllegrin’s account of the fish collected in Syria y M. a8 au de Kerville is not yet faaek, 1913) eeaitatae for reference ie Y Caloute 32. ~— Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, (January, 1913. Fam. CypRINIDAE (continued). 14. N. leontinae, Lort. Fam. CICHLIDA Wows Hi paciee 19. Hemichromis sacra, .. Gthr. 15. Clarias lazera (C. & V.) 2. oa mag dalenae Fam. CYPRINODONTIDAE. 21. Tilapia zillit (Gervais). 16. Cyprinodon richardsoni, 22. 7. nilotica (Hsslqt.) Blgr 23. T. galilaea (Artedi) 4d...C. sophiae, Hekl. 24. 7’. simonis (Gthr. 18. C. mento, Hckl. 25. T’. flavi-josephi (Lort.) The twenty-five species in the foregoing list can be sepa- rated into four Boorse mon! categories as follows :—I. “ Pales- tinian’’ species, that is to say species that do not occur east, wie jor south of Palestine or north of Asia Minor: IT. “ Afri- species, an neither i in Europe nor east or north of Syria in Anil: TIT. * Asiatic ’ x ir found in Mesopotamia or ranean: IV. i editatanane * species that occur in European streams entering the Mediterranean but have not been found east or south of Palestine. The various species may be tabu- lated as follows :— I. PALESTINIAN SPEcIEs. Fam. CyPRINIDAE. Fam. CYPRINODONTIDAE. Varicorhinus socialis. Cyprinodon richardsoni. V. damascinus Barbus canis. Fam. CICHLIDAE. B. beddomei. Hemichromis sacra. B. longiceps. Paratilapia magdalenae Leuciscus zareyi Tilapia simonis. Nemachilus tae T’. flavi-josephi. N. leontina II. Arrican Spectzs. Fam. CICHLIDAE. Fam. Smuripar. Tilapia zillit. Clarias lazera. T. nilotica T. galilaea III. Astatic Sprotss. Fam. CyPRINIDAE. Fam. one Discognathus lamta. de lg sophiae Varicorhinus syriacus. . OC. m IV. MEDITERRANEAN Spxciss. Fam. BLENNIIDAE. Blennius varus. Blennius lupulus. | 0S Se ec ehh Rann pees eo ve a ee ee ee ee Vol. IX, No. 1.] The Fishes, etc., of the Lake of Tiberias. 33 [N.8.] A glance at these lists will show that there is a consider able endemic element in the fish fauna of Palestine, represented by no less than fourteen of the twenty-five species nown from the Lake of Tiberias. We may rot divide the species named under the first heading as follow (a) Species pee, known from the vee and the surrounding fountains :—Varicorhinus sauvagei, Barbus beddomei, Tpilehsons ‘zaregi, Nemachilus galilaeus, N. leontinae and Hemichromis sacra (6 in all). (b) shane only known from the Jordan system :—Va corhinus socialis, Barbus canis, B. longiceps, Tides stmonis and 7’. flavi- josephi (5 in all). (c) Loree’ of wider range in Syria and Palestine :—Vari rhinus damascinus, Maia sellal and Piiiaene: peiiaalonas (3 in all). Most of the species apparently confined to the lake are small, inconspicuous or exceedingly rare, _ although it is possible that its dépths may provide a suitable habitat for species which cannot exist in any other pa et of the Jordan system, there is no reason to regard the fish-fauna of the lake as distinct in any very marked manner from that of other parts of the system with which it is in direct communication. Onl a small proportion of the endemic species, however, have suc- ceeded in extending their range beyond the Jordan, its aftluents and its lakes. The African element in the fish-fauna of Palestine is the one that has hitherto attracted most attention. As will be as in Syria, but one (Discognathus lamta) has a much more extraordinary range, various races being common in all parts of India in which “rocky streams are present. The race that occurs in the Lake of Tiberias is not, however, identical with the typical Indian weir of the species or even with that of the North-West Himala The two Marien sar fish belong to a genus whose mem- bers frequent the extreme margin of streams and of the sea t. Five families of fish are represented in the Lake of Tiberias, the Blenniidae, the Cyprinidae, the Siluridae, the Cyprinodontidae and the Cichlidae. Neither the Holarctic Salmonidae! nor the Ephiopian Mormyridae extend into it or 44 trout (Salmo trutta macrostigma) occurs at Smyrna but does not ene its way southwards into Syria, es it occurs = Teheran in and also in North Africa. See Boulenger, Ann N ist. ) VIEL p. 153 (1896), and Cat. Daidicater Fishes a soe a ss p. 167, g. 1 909). 34 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (January, 1913. into any part of the Jordan system, and all the families that do occur have a wide range in different geographical regions: except the versatile Siluridae and Blenniidae, they are essen- tially freshwater fish. The Cyprinidae are found all over the world except in South America and Australasia ; the Cyprino- dontidae are common in ull warm and tropical parts of both Hemispheres, except in Australasia and the east of Asia. One genus (Htroplus) is found in India and Ceylon. The Siluridae include many freshwater species in their ranks, and some of the blennies frequent brackish, a few fresh water. The Galilean species are among these few, in Europe as well as in Palestine. There is, therefore, no marine element in the fish-fauna of the Lake of Tiberias, unless Blennius lupulus and B. varus be regarded as‘comparatively recent immigrants from the Medi- terranean Sea, a view that has little evidence to support it. re is no endemic genus of. fish in the Jordan system. Perhaps the most interesting genera that have been found in this system are those that belong to the family Cichlidae, =~ sacra) is quite distinct from the Nilotic one. In the opinion of gascar as well as in continental Africa. Chromis is essentially a tropical African genus, occurring on both sides of the con- tinent and making its way down the Nile and up its various Introduction to the Siudy of Fishes, p- 229 (1880). Mr. Bou- peci: ere ¢ Hemichromis toire naturelle d. e Lyon 2 Pishes of the Nile, p. 460. Fin ae eee aL m ee Vol. IX, No. 1.] The Fishes, etc., of the Lake of Tiberias. 35 [N.8.] (Clarias) includes a large number of African species, many but not all of which are tropical, and is also represented, soni is found as far south as Sind, occurring also in north- eastern Africa and south-western Asia The other two Syrian t known from Persia, but in Peninsular India the genus is re- placed by Haplochilus and Panchax. Some authors! separate the African and Asiatic species under the name Lebias from Cyprinodon s.s., which they retain for American forms: but there is little justification for this course. (6) NoTEs ON SPECIES OBSERVED. The following are a few notes on species actually examined. Tam much indebted to the assistance of Mr. B. L. Chaudhuri in their preparation. Blennius varus, Risso. This little fish is extremely common at the very edge of the lake, where it hides among small stones the upper surface of which is frequently dry. On two occasions (in October) I found what I take to be its eggs. They were deposited in a flat’ mass, sometimes one egg and sometimes several eggs deep, on the lower surface of a stone, and on each occasion an adult blenny was observed apparently on guard just outside the ! See Gorman, Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool. Harvard XIX, 29 (1895). 36 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. {January, 1913. cavity formed by the stone and the bottom. Unfortunately I was unable to catch either of these fish. One lot of eggs was seen off the mouth of the stream of the Wad-es-Semakh, the other just off the exit of the Jordan. In each case the water was less than two feet deep. Discognathus lamta (Ham. Buch.) Race rujus Heckel. careful comparison of specimens from northern Bengal (fig. 2 (as the Province was formerly constituted) and my Syrian exam- ples (fig. 3) brings out the following differences :— (1) In the Bengal form the anterior barbel is distinctly longer than the posterior, while in the Syrian race the posterior barbel is usually the longer of the two. (2) In the Bengal form the sucker formed by the lower or posterior lip is almost semicircular, while in the rian race it is subtriangular. (3) In the Bengal form the anterior lip is broader and the mouth situated further back than in the Syrian race. (5) The ventral profile in the Bengal form is almost Straight, while in the Syrian one it is distinctly sinuous, becoming markedly concave between the pectoral and the pelvic fins. As Mr. Boulenger points out, the Asiatic species of Discogna- thus are in need of revision. At least four races occur in the northern Assam, and an undescribed form from Manipur. The common Assam form! is distinguished from the others by the small size of its eye and by the fact that the barbels are practically equal. The snout of the male is constricted in : Platcara nasuta, 5 Tees Discognathus modestus is perh aps the female. Geuta, of which Day ~ + San ag eT ae ee On eR a ee ——ee ili je i eal el Vol. IX, No. 1.] The Fishes, etc., of the Lake of Tiberias. 37 [NV .S.] front of the eyes. In the W. Himalayan race the snout of the specimens. In the typical form from Bengal no such appendage is produced and the snout is not strongly constricted, although ation. Giinther’s D. macrochir, also from Assam, probably represents a fifth race; in it the belly is bare as far back as the base of the pelvic fins and the pectoral fins are greatly elongated. The Fie. 1.—Discognathus lamta (H. B.), Fic. 2.—Discognathus lamta rufus, forma typica from Chota Nagpur. Heckel, from Tabghah, Galilee. race that occurs near Aden is apparently very like if not iden- tical with that of the W. Himalayas. The typical form of D. lamta is a dweller in rapid-running streams, in which its labial sucker is of great use in enabling it to adhere firmly to the bottom or sides. In the fountains round the Lake of Tiberias, however, the race rufus lives for the most part in still water. If a man puts his bare feet into the water the fish frequently clings to them by means of the sucker and apparently attempts to suck or nibble at the skin. Owing to the fact that the mouth is ventral, Tabghah numbers of individuals attacked the bones of chickens and pigeons that were thrown into the water fastened to 38 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (January, 1913, strings, often turning over in order to nibble at them. A dead fish of their own species was thrown in in two pieces. At first they left it alone, but after about half an hour attacked and devoured it. They appeared to be unable to carry off any but the smallest particles bodily. As has already been pointed out D. lamta includes several local races in India, Assam and Burma and also occurs in southern Arabia. The form common in Mesopotamia, and also in the Helmand basin, is not D. lamta but D variabilis, Heckel, a very distinct species as species go in the genus. D. variabilis is also found in Syrian rivers. e form from Abyssinia referred by Blanford ! to D. lamta has been separated therefrom by Boulenger® under the name D. blanjo: ig It would seem probable that a race or races of D.lamta occur in central Arabia, but the ichthyology of that aay is still unknown and all that we can say is that one race is found in Syria and Palestine, another, probably identical with one from north- Fie. 3.—Young of Hemichromis sacer (nat. size). western India, near Aden, and others in Bengal, Assam and Burma. § Hemichromis sacer, Giinther. A young individual (fig. 4) of this species was taken in one of the limestone pools at Ain-et-Tineh. As this species is said - breed in ae my specimen was probably about four onths old. It measures 53 mm. in total length and is restos deeper thea the adult fish. The snout is also less prominent. The colour is silvery grey and there are nine or ten vertical dark bars on each side of the body. Those on the caudal peduncle-are somewhat indistinct. The fin-mem- branes are greyish, faintly marbled with white on the dorsal fin. There is a black spot on each operculum. nly other fish of which I obtained specimens were Clarias lazera, Cyprinodon richardsoni, C. mento, C. ne e, ! \ Geob Zool, Abyssin., p. p. 460 ( (ii), eee s 2 Zool. Soc. 1901 P- 160; 1903 Wi sal. Di wwe, Cat. Freshvate Fishes of Africa I, p. 349. aS bee A 1909 a 3 > Tristram, hers Flor, Palest., p.168. Lortet, A Mus d’ Hist. Nat. ae TIL p. 149. . reh. r ee ot a ee Vol. IX, No. 1.] The Fishes, ete., of the Lake of Tiberias. 39 [WV.S.] —— zillia and 7. is re three Cyprinodonts are nh among water-weeds i e Jordan both at its entry fata pin its exit from the lake eat also in the pools at Ain-et- Tineh. I did not see them in the lake itself. Together with them, in each locality, — of the little Atyid prawn Atyaéphyra desmarestii were take II. BATRACHIA AND REPTILES. The following notes are based on a few specimens taken incidentally and on a collection generously eegaing to the Indian Museum by Herr R. Grossman of Tiberia (a2) AQuaTIC SPECIES. he list of aquatic or rather amphibious reptiles and batrachia that inhabit the shores of the Lake of Tiberias is a short one, and I Rave no species to add. It comprises only the following names Rana ees ridibunda, Pallas. lemmys caspica rivulata, Valenc. Emys orbicularis (Linn.). With one exception (that of the tree-frog), these forms occur in south-eastern Europe; while two of them have also a wide distribution in western and central Asia—Rana esculenta the g o through Persia, ‘ASichasiiagal and central Asia: that of the latter is even more extensive, including Kashmir and north-western India. Hyla arborea savignyi is common throughout Asia Minor and Syria and has also been found in Egypt ; “the species of which it is a race has, like Rana esculenta, a habitat only northern Palestine, being replaced in Persia by the typical form of the species. mys orbicularis is oe hee in southern ante does not occur in Egypt or in Asia south of Pale Of the two African amphibious reptiles (Crocodilus ‘niloti- cus, Laur., and Trionyx triunguis ,Forsk.) that occur in Palestine proper and i in Syria, neither has been reported to exist in the Lake of Tiberias, and I could obtain no evidence of their. occurrence, aidiodeh the mud-turtle has been found as far north 40 Journal of the Asiutic Society of Bengal. (January, 1913. system 1. Rana esculenta ridibunda, Pallas. Boulenger, P.Z.S. 1891, pp. 375, 376, 377. This race of the edible frog is very common in the small fountains round the lake, and I also found it occasionally under stones at the edge of the lake itself. Mr. Boulenger tells me that he has examined specimens of very large size from this neighbourhood. 2. Hyla arborea savignyi, Aud. Boulenger, Cat Batr. Sal. Brit. Mus., p. 380. found a small specimen sitting dead but apparently unin- jured on a stone at the edge of the lake, and at N azareth, I saw many adults clinging to the walls of a large cistern lined with cement. In about half of them the dorsal surface was uniform leaf-green ; in some it was pale clay-colour and in others of a udouin ; in none is there any trace of a line onthe groin. The colour-characters on which the racial distinction of the form is based seem, therefore, to be constant. 3. Bufo viridis, Laur. Boulenger, op. cit., p. 297. is toad is common at Tiberias b : ut not often seen as it is strictly nocturnal in its habits. 4. Clemmys caspica rivulata, Valenc. small pools and springs bask in the sun at the edge, ed and immediately dive and he bottom. Probably the older f, but they are seldom seen. I watched a half-grown individual eating grape-skins that had been thrown into a pool at Ain-et-Tineh, | Boéttger, Ber. Senck. Ges. 1880, p. 208. Vol. IX, No. 1.] The Fishes, etc., of the Lake of Tiberias. 41 [V.8.] 5. hy orbicularis (Linn.) Bauett. op. cit., p. e European aren is said to reach a great size in the lake, but I did not obtain specimens. (6) TERRESTRIAL REPTILES. e smal collection : terrestrial reptiles brought back comprises the following species :— H emidactylus turcicus ie ) yphlops simoni a r. Eryx jaculus (Linn.) Vipera libetina xanthina (Gray). Except the Typhlops, these are all common species in Galilee. tmont is, however, a ently scarce. It was originally described from Haifa on the coast of Palestine by Béttger as Oe stmont ,! ite most remarkable feature being the compression and production forwards of the rostral scale to form a flattened triangular snout bo cag oa edges. A speci- men from Tiberias given me by rrossman differs from Bottger’s figures (and from his and Boulenger s descriptions) in having the eyes visible as minute black spots. _ It has also a rather longer tail than the specimen figured by Bottger. I cannot, however, detect any other difference. Living specimens of J'estudo ibera, Pallas, and Chamaeleon vulgaris, Gray, were also observed in ee neighbourhood of Tiberias, as well as lizards of several ener | Ber. Senck. Ges. 1878-1879, 58. See also the same igre for ga p. 135, pl. IIT, fig. 1, and ictosigae? s Cat. Snakes, Brit. Hs SLL LNA NLD at a al gt A A at 5. Some Noxious Diptera from Galilee, By E. Brunetti. The specimens noted here eg taken in Galilee by Dr. N. Annandale in October, 1912. separate report will be pub- lished on his collection of Culjaidae Family MUSCIDAE. Sub-family Musctnagz. Musca domestica, L. Several specimens of both sexes, the species common in houses at both Nazareth and Tiberias. One specimen is labelled ‘‘sucking blood of horses,’’ Kefr Kenna. (This specimen was taken full of blood. It had evidently been sunGleg blood at the wound made by some other fly.—N. A.) Musca sp.? nov. and 5 9 Q represent a species that does not agree with such ‘descriptions of Palaearctic species as are available for reterence. It is rather smaller than domestica, and the thorax has a whitish ps appearance, with two narrow black stripes. The abdomen has. an ill-defined dorsal black stripe, the hind edges of the segments are black, and in the single ¢ the general colour of the abdomen is yellowish instead of dark grey. Common in houses, Nazareth and Tiberias. Philaematomyia insignis, Aust. Two 2 2 of rather pay size than usual, but undoubt- edly of this common and widely distributed species labelled ‘* sucking blood of horse ,’’ Kefr Kenna, 12-x-12 (This was by far the commonest blood- sucking fly on horses and cattle.—N. A.) Stomoxys calcitrans, L. Four 2 2, including a dark variety devoid of distinct spots. tk houses, Nazareth and Tiberias. (Also seen com- monly on cattle.—N. A.) Lyperosia minuta, Bezzi. Asingle 2 , Tiberias, October. (The specimen iu caught biting my hand at night. What I take to be t 44 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [J anuary, 1913, very troublesome, especially in the early morning and at sunset, on the shores of the Lake of Tiberias, easily piercing ordinary flannel with its proboscis. e wound is not very painful and does not as a rule become inflamed.—N. A.) Sub-family ANTHOMYINAE. Limnophora tonitrui, Wied. This is reported by Dr. Annandale as the commonest of the ‘‘house flies’’ after Musca domestica. The specimens seem to form a local race as the usual broad black transverse stripe is broken up into three large spots, in only one instance out of 2 3 & and 5 Q Q being entire (a 7). There can be no reasonable doubt as to the identity of the species, which is quite common in houses, greenhouses, and similar habitats in India. Nazareth and Tiberias. (This fly is just as troublesome in its habits as Musca domestica, so far as settling on the face and hands is concerned.—N. A.) N.B.—In addition to L. tonitrui there is a single specimen of a second species of Anthomyinae from Nazareth (‘fin house ’’) which I am unable to identify. Family HIPPOBOSCIDAE. Hippobosca equina, lL. Four specimens from Tiberias, Nazareth and (‘sucking blood of horses’’) Kefr Kenna. (Very common on_ horses and cattle.—N. A.) [By far the most troublesome blood-sucking flies at Tiberias and Nazareth in October are the so-called sand-flies of the Medicine, who has been kind enough to examine the adult specimens I collected, finds only two species (Ph. papatasi Scop. and Ph. minutus Rond.) among them, thus confirming the pre- he found the same two Species, and them only, in a large collec- tion from Aleppo. Phlebotomus apparently occurs at Tiberias amascus, in which ntirely disappeared before n Ph. minutus at Nazareth it is troublesome in summer, it had e the end of October. I did not obtai Vol. IX, No. 1.] Some Noxious Diptera from Galilee. 45 [N.S8.] and at Tiberias it was much less common than Ph. papatasi. Another irritating blood-sucker common at Tiberias in October, though much less so than Ph. papatasi, is a minute Chiro- nomid of the subfamily Ceratopogoninae. Like Phlebotomus it is ae: in habits. erias is notorious even in Palestine for its fleas | Bed 1 irritans) but in the German hotel in which I stayed I saw and felt none.—N. Annandale.]| 6 NS eS oe See a 6. Tipulidae and Culicidae from the Lake of Tiberias and Damascus. By F. W. Epwarps, B.A., F.E.S.! The collection = Tipulidae and Culicidae made by Dr. Annandale in October 1912, and forwarded to me for deter- mination, though far from numerous either in sta cidtials or species,—only three species of Tipulidae and seven of Culicidae eing present,—has yet proved of very considerable interest. Three species at least are new to science, one of them (the Palaearctic region. The occurrence of Conosia irrorata makes a notable extension of the known range of this widely spread species. TIPULIDAE. l. Geranomyia annandalei, sp. n. ¢. Whole body dingy ochreous-brown ; antennae, pro- boscis, tips of femora, _wing-veins and knobs of halteres darker be End of first longitudinal vein turned sharply up to the costa long as broad, the vein arising from it — equidistant at their base. Great cross-vein exactly at base seal cell in the type, slightly before it in one paratype, slightly after in the other. Length of _— (without proboscis) 5°5 mm., of proboscis 3 mm., of win Three on te Plain of Gennesaret. ‘‘ Taken on limestone cliff overhanging spring. Dancing in the air and then alighting on iis cliff and swaying up and down.’ A.) ! Published by permission of the Trustees of the British Museum. 48 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. |January, 1913. ype in the British Museum, paratype in the Indian Museum, Calcutta. e unspotted wings distinguish this species from all others found in the Palaearctic region, and there is no describ Oriental species which it resembles at all closely. 2. % Antocha opalizans, O.S. One male and one female taken on lower side of stone af edge of stream, R. Barada, c These specimens may represent a species distinct from A. opalizans, as the wings are blackish-grey instead of milk- white; they are however immature, and so hardly fit to describe. In general colour and in the structure of the genitalia they closely resemble British specimens of A. opalizans. 3. Conosia irrorata (Wied.) Aus. Zweif. Ins. I, p. 574 (1828). One male, Wad-es-Semakh, L. Tiberias, ‘‘ taken among — at the edge of small stream flowing into the lake” (N. A.). CULICIDAE. _ 4 Anopheles palestinensis (Theo.) hay ee palestinensis, Theo., Mon. Cul., iii, p. 7! Pyretophorus nursei, Theo., Mon. Cul., iv, p. 66 (1907). Pyretophorus cardamitisi, Newst. and Cart., Ann. Trop. Med., iv, p. 379 (1910). 5. Anopheles culicifacies, Giles, Anopheles culicifarcies, Giles, Ent. Mo. M ) ; : ; ‘ ., p. 197 (1901). Pyretophorus sergentii, Theo, } ied ace ee ee eo., Mon. Cul., iv, p. 68 (1907). These specimens differ from having about five distinct pale of only two, but otherwise the typical Indian form in spots on the wing-fringe instea they are perfectly normal. A Vol. IX, No. 1.] Diptera of the Lake of Tiberias. 49 [NV.8.] similar variation occurs in the closely allied Ethiopian species, A. funestus. The collector has made the following note on this species. ‘* Between October 2nd. and October 20th. I saw only one Anopheline mosquito at Tiberias. On October 16th the first rain of the season fell and on the morning of the 20th. I noticed numerous Anophelines of both sexes flying into my room through the window. The same species continued to be common in ‘the tise vantil I left Tiberias on October 27th, I found the larvae in small pools and springs among stones at the edge of the lake. Some of the springs were slightly saline.’” The single larva sent was too denuded to be of any 6. Stegomyia fasciata, F., Syst. Ant., p. 13 (1805). Tiberias, 22. ‘‘ Not uncommon (N. A.).’’ 7. Culex modestus, Fic., Boll. Soc. Ent. It., xxi, p. 93 (1890). One female under stones, edge of L. Tiberias. Determined by comparison with specimens sent from Hun- gary by Dr. Kertesz. There are very small pale a ep lateral spots on the abdominal segments. 8. Culex pipiens, L., Syst. Nat. Ed., x, p. 602 (1758). Nazareth, in house, 12 ; Tiberias, 2 2 ; Plain of Gennesaret, 1 3. I have mounted a hypopygium of the male specimen, and find it to correspond exactly with typical C. pipiens from North Europe. It may be mentioned in passing that Dyar and Knab’s figure of the hypopygium (Proc. Ent. Soc. Wash- ington, xi, 1909, pl. ii, fig. 4) does not show the parts in their normal positions, ore ee the figure having been made from pecimen moun flat on a slide. There is also an error in their ong gaa op: cit., p. 33): ‘* fourth’’ plate should read ** firs mos dorsal ‘* upper ’’ should be ‘‘ second ’’ and ‘ nuns ony tea One female — “Tiberi has the usual pale bands of the abdomen reduced to inconspicuous white lateral spots, but it has the long first submangina al cell as in normal C. pipiens. have seen specimens (of both sexes) similar to this from Gibraltar, and (females) from British East Africa. 9. Culex laticinctus, sp. n. 3. Head dark, clothed with the usual ‘‘ narrow curved ’’ (whitish) and upright forked scales (black). Proboscis black- scaled, a little shorter than the abdomen. Palpi dark brown, exceeding the proboscis by less than the length of the last joint. Last two joints ie very slightly hairy, small 50 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [January, 1913. patches of whitish scales towards their bases beneath, extend- ing apically as a narrow ill-defined whitish line, not so con- spicuous as that of C. pipiens. Hairs of antennae dark brown, golden towards the base. orax light brown, scarcely at all tinged with red, mesono- tum and scutellum clothed with narrow light ochreous scales not very closely placed. Median lobe of scutellum with about eight, lateral lobes with about four bristles. Wings : lateral vein scales very narrow, almost hair-like; median short and Upper fork-cell about as long as its stem, its base slightly nearer the base of the wing than that of the lower. Halteres light brown, knob blackish. Legs black scaled ; femora (especially the hind pair) whitish beneath ; fairly distinct white spots at the apices of the femora and tibiae. Claws of fore and mid legs each with a single tooth. Abdomen.--Each of segments 2-7 clothed with blackish brown scales on its apical half (or rather more), white scales on its basal half. The white bands are somewhat indented on each side of the middle, leaving a median projection, the last two being somewhat expanded laterally. Venter whitish. Hypopygium: Side pieces with a distinct tuft of hairs at the apex, plainly visible with a hand lens, but apt to become lower one toothed. - Resembles the male. Palpi black scaled, about one- fifth as long as the proboscis. Upper fork cell about twice as long as its stem, its base considerably nearer the base of the wing than that of the lower. emarks.— 'This species comes near C. pipiens, from which, however, it is abundantly distinct by the lighter thorax, shorter which it most resembles in coloration is the Oriental C. pallido- thorax, Theo. ( = C. albopleura, Theo. = Culiciomyia annulo- abdominalis, Theo.), but that species has very different fork- ceils, the base of the lower being nearer to the base of the wing than that of the upper ; it also has the row of transparent out- standing scales on the male palpi characteristic of the genus (or group) Culiciomyia, which is certainly not present in C. lati- cinctus. Occurrence.—Tiberias, 2¢ {including type, in the British Museum), 52. Also Gibraltar, July 1909, 5¢, 52 (Major C. E. P. Fowler). ee ae | ee kr ness ase Paes ee Vol. IX, No. 1.] Diptera of the Lake of Tiberias. 51 [V.8.] . 10. Uranotaenia unguiculata, sp.n. o&. Head black scaled, a rim of bluish-white scales round the eyes and a patch of similar ones on the nape. Proboscis, palpi and antennae dark b Thorax dark bein, ere black towards the margins of the mesonotum ; a line of flat bluish-white scales extends from the wing-base forwards to the very front of the mesonotum, not, however, meeting its fellow; a similar line of scales, parallel with the first, extends across the pleurae and protho- racic lobes. Wings with dark brown scales, except for a short space at the base of the first longitudinal vein, where the scales are white. Lateral vein scales about three times as long as broad. Upper fork-cell rather narrower, but almost as long as lower. Halteres dark-brown, stem light brown. Legs dark- fied, except that the claws are much larger than usual and unequal ; they are not, however, so unequal as those on the mid legs, which are normal. Abdomen clothed with dark-brown scales above, except the — segment, which is white. Venter pale. Rema In two respects—the unusual front claws, and = prolongation of the upper of the two lines of bluish scales the fro the mesonotum—this species differs from all cae Oriental or Ethiopian species of the genus, and its mayeri ; the former however has banded hind tarsi and no pale line on the middle femora, and the latter has white at the base of — fifth (not first) vein, and has white markings on the abdom ecurrence. i Tiberios, 1g (type: in the Indian Museum, Calcutta). mame eRe ee ee Oem ee 7. Aquatic Oligochaeta from the Lake of Tiberias. By J. Srepuenson, D.Sc., Mayor, I.M.S., Professor of Biology.in the Government College, Lahore. N. Annandale, of the Indian Museum, Calcutta several other forms, which were cel areca immature and therefore unidentifiable. These comprise one Enchytraeid, two Tubificids, and one Lumbricid (Hisenia or Helodrilus). Criodrilus lacuum, Hoffm. In wet mud under stones at edge of lake, near Tiberias, Palestine; October 18, 1912, October 24, 1912: in a similar situation near Mejdal (Magdala), on Lake Tiberias: October 25, 1912. A number of specimens, both mature and immature. is worm has previously been recorded from Syria and Palestine by Rosa (Boll. Mus. Torino, vol. viii, no. 160, 1893), whose specimens were quite typical. The specimens in the present collection which I assign to this species show, however, certain peculiarities and a short description is ’ therefore appended. Length 6-7 ins.; breadth 4mm. at broadest part, diminish- ‘aie blue wee near the posterior end. The shape of the So ikata s 303. Prostomium wiganeeem anus dorsal. The gens = may be broken off; one specimen, whic gh mmature, probably ee to ‘this species, there were two ponte otige near the posterior end, one of which, at one part of the circumference, was deep enough to open into the body- cavity. The constrictions are exaggerations of the inter- segmental furrows, and would seem to represent an attempt at autotomy. The setae are closely paired ; te is greater than aa pepe the centre of the slit is a little outside the line of ae b. The papilla reaches on its outer side nearly half way 54 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [{January, 1913. between lines of setae 6 and c: where the pore is on xv, the papilla takes up the whole length of xv and xvi, and quite half of xiv. (In what follows, the description will assume that the male aperture is on xv. e female apertures are*situated in obliquely running cracks which bound the male papillae anteriorly and internally, these apertures are in line with setae a. A ‘ genital area’ may be described as follows: the fissures t xvii, or even partially on to xviii, between and behind the male papillae. On a certain number of segments behind the male apertures the setae of series a are implanted in small circular papillae ; this may be the case in xvii, Xvili, xix, xx and xxi, but the oe of the papillae may not be the same on the two sides. ' The clitellum is very indistinct, and seems to vary ; it seems to begin anteriorly about xxi-~xxiy (once about xv), and to extend posteriorly to xxxvi or xxxvii. the long axis of the oval was parallel to the surface of the body, prostates in Ovary, funnel, and ovisac were all prominent structures in the normal situations. There were no sperma- t What were probably large sporozoan it ben ihaaen those described by Benham (Q 5 M.S., eae es, simila Vol. IX, No. 1.] Oligochaeta from the Lake of Tiberias. 55 [N.S] The chief points of interest in the foregoing description re i) The clitellum. Hoffmeister (quoted in Vejdovsky, System u. Morphologie der Oligochaeten, Prag, 1884) and ined (Q.J.M.8., ns., vol. xxvii) found no clitellum. Benha estimate of its length (Q./J.M.S., n.S., vol. xxvii) is on the ee hand considerably greater than (ii) The distribution of the venitat papillae differs from what is given by Orley, or by Michaelsen (Oligochaeta, in Tierreich). (iti) With ae and Benham, whose statements are therefore, it may not have developed, owing perhaps to their eing in an early stage of sexual maturity ; that this was so is perhaps indicated by the fact that in one specimen the testes and funnels were noted as being large and conspicuous ; Ben- ham, who found the testes deeply situated eg difficult of discovery, probably had later stages to deal w v) The shape of the spinosa is however not reconcilable with earlier observations, e.g. Hoffmeister (ap. part of the 6-8 mm. long tubular spermatophore described by the latter author has regularly been broken off, leaving only the basal portion. Helodrilus (Dendrobaena) lacustris, sp. nov. In wet mud under stones at edge of lake, near Mejdal (Magdala), Lake Tiberias, Palestine ; October 25, 1912. With Criodrilus lacuum. Three specimens. Length 1} ins.; breadth 1-1} mm. ; colour greyish, with blue am anteriorly. Segments 71-87 Prostomium proepilobous (in one case only slightly so). Clitellum saddle-shaped, xxiv or xxv~xxx, = 6 or 7; with lateral ridges xxvi-—xxvili or xxix at its ventral limit on each side. Male pores xv (only made out in pepe’ Copulatory 56 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. {January, 1913.] there is a small interval in the middle line between the medially situated areas of the two sides. As seen in sections, the integu- ment of the ventral surface of segment xv also contains more glandular cells than neighbouring regions, though no difference was noted externally. : The setae are not arranged in pairs, and the intervals appear to be a little variable. In one case these were estimated as aa=ab=be=cd=} dd approximately; in another aa slightly > ab, ab=cd, aa approx.=be, dd=21 cd. The length of an ordinary seta is °3 mm. Setae a and 6 in segment ix may be described as genital setae. They are implanted in the middle of the copulatory areas, and are long and straight ; the setal sac and its muscles go much deeper into the body in the case of the genital than in the ordinary setae. A perfect seta was not obtained in any ae section; the length however is probably approximately “49 mm. The specimens being so small, the internal anatomy could only be investigated by sections; the first 22 segments of one specimen was therefore sectioned longitudinally. e oesophagus shows dilatations in xi-xii and in xiii-— xiv, with longitudinal ridges projecting into the lumen. In xv is a larger thin-walled dilatation, with vascular walls, but no marked ridging. The gizzard extends from 4 xvi-xix = 3}. he last heart is in xi. and of about the same size. The sacs in ix are paired, as also those in xii, those these latter meet dorsally over the intestine ; in x and xi the sacs of each segment are completely fused above the gut. The spermathecae are in segments x and xi, they are slightly ovoid, almost spherical sacs, paired, with narrow and some- ays , and in the presence o the large seminal vesicle in segment x; indeed, in respect of the : : ts ix and x (small in ix, large in x) it appears to be peculiar in the subgenus. ae. S,hlUC ehh i j 4 8. An Account of the Sponges of the Lake of Tiberias, with Observations on Certain Genera of Spongillidae. By N. AnnanpaLe, D.Sc., F.A.8.B. (With Plates II to V.) TABLE OF CONTENTS. Introductory Note eer ects: Systematic ACCOUNT OF THE COLLEC- Key te the Sponges of the Lake of Tiberias. . Subfamily Spongillinae Subfamily Potamolepidinae, n Key to the genera of Patginelepidiriss and § some other freshwater genera i to be confused with them . Dermal pore-cells i in the Spongillidae Section 2.—BioLoGy AND DISTRIBUTION OF THE Spon- GES OF THE LaKE OF TIRERIA Conditions under which the different species are found.. Hardness of most of the species: its apparent object Production or non-production of gemmules . Central cavity of Cortispongilla and Pachydictyum Function of the skeletal! cortex in ee lla Geographical distribution Section 3.—-CLASSIFICATION OF THE POTAMOLEPIDINAE AND OF SOME OBSCURE GENERA OF SPONGILLINAE. Relationship of Veluspa, Miclucho- onion ta to the ent lidae Virsdapemples Annandale Uruguaya, Car Potamolepis, } Marshall ° Pachydictyum, Weltner pearl of the genera puede’ and Nudospongil of the family ee suis a BIBLIOGRAPHY i DESCRIPTION OF pare Page 58 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (January, 1913. IntRoDUCTORY NOTE. The sponges of the Lake of Tiberias are of considerable interest. They fall naturally into two groups, one of which is represented by a race of the widely distributed Ephydatia flu- viatilis, while the other consists of four species confined, so far as we know, to the lake and its immediate vicinity. The latter group includes representatives of two genera that seem to claim recognition as new, although I have been acquainted for some years with forms belonging to one of them. ollowing is a list of the species obtained :— 1. Ephydatia fluviatilis syriaca, Topsent. 2. Nudospongilla reversa, gen. et sp. nov. 3. N. mappa, sp. nov. 4. N. aster, sp. nov. 5. Cortispongilla barroisi (Topsent), gen. nov. perhaps not really allied to the Potamolepidinae, but liable to be confused with genera included among them. paper. The following key may be useful to naturalists who visit the lake :— Key to the Sponges of Lake Tiberias. 1. Sponge soft, by no means to : gemmules present if conditions are smooth; birotulate gemmule-spi- cules as a rule more than 0-03 mm long) : : .. Ephydatia fluviatilis J . 59). 2. Sponge hard; no gemmules. ple Bah Tee ase Vol. IX, No. 1.] Sponges of the Lake of Tiberias. 59 [N.S.] A. Sponge massive, with deep - round oscula i na al adie beee bar- st (p. 67). B. Sponge encrusting the lower surface of stones; oscula never consisting of large rounded apertures. a. Oscula consisting of deep open eet es of a simple chara < .. Nudospongilla rever- sa (p. 63) 6. Oscula approached by deep by the dermal membrane... N. mappa (p. 64). ule groups on Mer surface with- out a ite osculum; BC Oras oak more mas- — sive, less regular and more friable than in other indi- genous species. . .. NV. aster (p. 65). Fam. SPONGILLIDAE. Subfamily SPONGILLINAE. To this subfamily I assign all the freshwater sponges in which true microscleres are foun Ephydatia fluviatilis syriaca, Topsent. (Plate iii, fig. 1.) Ephydatia fluviatilis, Topsent, Rev. biol. Nord France, 1893, i eee H. fluviatilis var. syriaca, id., Bull. Soc. Amis Sci. Nat., Rouen, 909, p. 1. Specimens 2 Ephydatia pet oor were not uncommon in October 1912, on the lower surface of stones standing in the water at the Bae of the lake near "Tiberias, “Mejdal and Tab- ghah. They formed small crusts not more than two or three millimetres thick and three or four centimetres in diameter. In places were sunlight penetrated under the stones they had green corpuscles in their parenchyma-cells, and were as a rule of a bright leaf-green colour. In some places, however, notably in the neighbourhood of Mejdal, the green was ma yore but not altogether obscured, by a blackish tinge due to minute dark particles, apparently inorganic, in the smbenkeynnaceli In 60 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. {January, 1913 places to which little or no light penetrated, the sponge was of a dirty white On two occasions I found (near Tiberias) specimens that had become completely or partly desiccated owing to the sea- sonal shrinkage of the lake. These contained numerous gem- mules and were in a state of partial disintegration. Topsent in describing his ‘‘ variety ’’ syriaca laid stress on two points, (2) the presence of spined as well as smooth macros- cleres and (zi) the large size of the gemmule-spicules. In none relatively slender. ‘They are very variable in size, those that were actually incorporated in the skeleton varying in length rom 0°285 to 0°374 mm. and in greatest transverse diameter from 00123 to 00205 mm. Smaller spicules were observed lying free in the interstices of the skeleton, but resembled the larger ones in outline. e gemmule-spicules were also variable in size, being from 0:0246 to 0-046 mm. long; but very few were as short as 0-03 mm. The spines on the shafts were as a rule more slender than those represented in Topsent’s figure of the gemmule- spicules of the form syriaca. They thus provide a link between the gemmule-spicules of typical European specimens of the species and of the form from Lake Huleh and the Barada. 8, however, they are on an average distinctly larger than those of the former, I consign my specimens to the race syriaca. can detect no bubble-cells (cystocytes) in the parenchyma of well-preserved specimens. Subfamily POTAMOLEPIDIN AE, nov. _ This subfamily is distinguished from the Spongillinae (that is to say from the remainder of the Spongillidae) by the total absence of true microscleres. In some species there are two kinds of macroscleres, but although one of them is usually more slender than the other, there is no marked difference in length. semmules are as a rule completely absent: if they are present they lack not only microscleres but also pneumatic coverings and foramina. ; The sponges of this subfamily are, as a rule, at least mode- rately hard; they have not, however, the stony hardness of Uruguaya, and some are much less hard than others. Vol. LX, No. 1.| Sponges of the Lake of Tiberias. 61 a4 To the subfamily Potamolepidinae I assign the following genera :— Nudospongilia (gen. nov.), Pachydictyum, Weltner, Corti- sg bea (gen. nov.) and Potamolepis, Marshall. Whether or i) s Metschnikowia'! should be associated with these Santa is "doubtfal. e two new genera are described below, being represented by species from the Lake of Tiberias, and in the third section prove of use in distinguishing all these genera. — The names of mules, are Gasikbed 3. the names of those genera in whieh gemmules are kiows oe occur are marked with | an asterisk. Key to certain genera of Freshwater Sponges. Minute birotulate microscleres present in the parenchyma. (Sponge hard; skeletal fibres as a rule somewhat ill- defined ; neonate stout vertical fibres sometimes present). . -. [Corvospongilla.*| Il. No microscleres trace of a subdermal cavity or of efferent grooves under the dermal membrane in th neighbourhood of the oscula. (External membrane delicate; ~ i ise in strong chitinous substance) . (Veluspa.*) 200A subdermal cavity “usually pre. sent effer ubderma grooves as a mp well ee oped. A. Athick chitinized external membrane present. bres similar; sponge o stony hardness) [Uruguaya.*} B. External membrane delicate. A The aisahige’ s s originat daanion is not atailabies but canes genus is redescribed by Dybowski in the paper ci ited in the bibliography opposite his name. for) bo Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [J anuary, 1913. 6. A skeletal cortex pro- uced a short distance enin of transverse. in central part of ar aC . Cortispongilla, b'. No skeletal cortex. (Vertical fibres better developed than trans- verse ones). B. Large elliptical central cavity. (Sponge hard) .. Pachydictyum. B. Central cavity small and ill- defined. 6. Sponge not more than moderately hard, fri- able ea .. Nudospongilla.* b'. Sponge very hard, not friable ., .. Potamolepis. NUDOSPONGILLA, gen. nov. Sponge as a rule moderately hard; never very soft ; friable. No well-defined central cavity ; oscula sm afferent subdermal cavity well developed: A chitinous basal membrane usually present. Cystocytes apparently absent. Skele ariable, never very stout: both. moderately slender mooth but sometimes siliceous bodies in any Gemmules, if present, devoid of foramina, pneumatic coat and spicules, adherent at the base of the sponge, ovoid in outline and somewhat flattened. T ype-species. Spongilla coggini , Annandale. Distribution.—The type-species is from Western China, whence a second species (NV. yunnanensis) also comes. Three Vol. IX, No. 1.] Sponges of the Lake of Tiberias. _ 63 [W.S.] Galilean forms are described below ; but I am not fully satis- fied that they are actually congeneric. ‘Three species from Central Africa (S. tanganyikae and S. moorei, Evans, and S. (4) cunningtoni, Kirkpatrick) and at least one from Gelebes (S. (@) — Weltner) should also be assigned provisionally to the g Nudospongilla reversa, sp. nov. (Plate ii, fig. 2; plate iii, figs. 2, 2a; plate v, fig. 3.) ponge hard but friable, forming crusts or lamellae on the delicate chitinous membrane. On the upper surface there are broad, deep, patent oscular grooves which are not covered by the dermal membrane except at their narrower extremity, 7.¢. at the extremity furthest from the larger exhalent apertures. The main efferent channels open directly into the sides of these grooves, running a slightly oblique, but ee horizontal course through the substance of the nge. Some of the - channels measure as much as 3 mm. in iiarcter the greatest depth of the grooves is 4mm. and the greatest width 5 mm ‘hen the surface of the sponge is examined with a lens the the main horizontal channels the network is of a more definite nature, but the vertical fibres are not much more distinct than the transverse ones; at first sight both appear to be thick, but a closer examination shows that each fibre is composite, con- sisting of at least two strands not quite parallel to one another. The spines on the surface consist of much more slender fibres, as a rule not more than three spicules thick, projecting upwards through the dermal membrane. At the base of these fine fibres there is a distinct horizontal network of iplutiles, but it is not thickened or compressed to form a cortex. The meshes of the skeleton are small throughout. There is not very much chiti- nous matter present. Spicules.—The skeleton-spicules are short, smooth, moder- ately stout wo feebly hey and by no means sharply pointed. ey ro o 0°34 mm. long, but the majority are approximately of a sca length ; ay greatest transverse diameter varies from 0-024 to 0°029 m few smaller and more sharply painbed amphioxi occur in ‘all spicule- sl praia sana but these lie loose in the interstices of the skele- n, and are probably immature or abortive spicules. 64 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. {January, 1913. a No gemmules were found. Type.—Z.E.V. No. 2° Ind. Mus. Habitat.—Lake of Tiberias, Palestine. The unique speci- men was taken (15-x-1912) close to the edge in less than one metre of water and within a few hundred yards of the exit of the Jordan on the east side, but not in the actual channel of the river. It grew on the lower surface of a stone, projecting out under another stone, and including a small twig in its substance. The free portion was about 5 mm. thick and some 30 mm. long and broad, but the shape was irregular. e most remarkable feature of N. reversa is the manner run sideways into a deep groove. The great breadth of these channels and their regular horizontal course are also character- istic. The spicules are intermediate in form between those of Cortispongilla barroisi and those of Nudospongilla aster. They are considerably stouter than those of N. mappa, specimens of which were taken together with the type. Nudospongilla mappa, sp. nov. (Plate ii, fig. 4; plate iii, figs. 3, 3a; plate v, figs. 2, 2a, 2b.) Sponge hard, forming thin films on the lower surface of stones, bright green in sunlight. white or yellowish in the dark. € upper Surface is very minutely hispid; the lower surface ‘bears a delicate chitinous membrane. On the upper surface sponge. The pores are larger than is usually the case in the Spongillidae, measuring about 0-052 mm. in diameter. They are grouped together immediately over the mouths of the main efferent channels, which run vertically downwards into the .—Except near the surface of the sponge, the pe ese reticulation is not well defined, but slender vertical res -such well-defined spines as in N. reversa. On the surface there is @ very distinct transverse reticulation, which, viewed from Vol. IX, No. 1.] Sponges of the Lake of Tiberias. 65 [N.S.] above, looks’ very regular, the meshes being nearly circular in outline ! STAR v, fig. —The spicules are more slender and more sharply pointed ‘hae those of the other species of Nudospongilla found in the lake. No gemmules were found. Type.—Z.B.V. No. *23° Ind. Mus Habitat.—Lake of Tiberias and R. Jordan at and near its exit therefrom. N. mappa was found at every spot to smaller stones covered by fairly large ones. The largest specimens were taken actually in the adaan near its exit. None were taken in more than one metre of w mappa resembles some species of Stratosponita in structure, but I could find no trace of mules in any of the many a examined both preserved raat in a living condition. Desiccated sponges of the species were often found above ‘He pipet water-level. From £. fluviatilis syriaca the new species, which resembles it in external appearance, can be at once distinguished by is not a feature of any importance in the Spongillidae, in which species with spiny ng seen are often closely allied to Species with smooth ones Nudospongilla aster, sp. nov. (Plate ii, fig. 3; plate iii. figs. 4, 4a). Sponge hard but very friable, forming a crust of no great. and shells. Th ea, stones shells. e main efferent channels open poi re on the surface, as a rule in little star-shaped groups, so that there is no true osculum. Sometimes —. eae distal st are only covered by the dermal membra: The external surface of the sponge is smooth. The atone is . car The pare iahpoies is bulky in spite of the compactness of the skeleton, and the cartion offerent apg nels have stout and clearly marked walls. Their tubular character is reflected to some extent in the skeleton of the sponge, but gives it a L oiokter appearance of regularity than it actually possesses. 66 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (January, 1913. leaf-green or dull grey, the former shade being due to the presence of intracellal corpuscles. There is no definite chitin- ous basal membra: eleton. = Tie! reticulation of the skeleton fibres is some- what loose in the basal part of the sponge, but traces of thick transverse and horizontal fibres can be detected. In the upper part it becomes more compact, a noteworthy feature being the fact that single transverse fibres often run obliquely for a con- siderable distance through the sponge; but the reticulation is nowhere of a regular character, although extremely massive at all points. On the surface the transverse network is close and the fibres stout, but vertical fibres do not project upwards through the dermal membrane in the form of spines Spicules. —The spicules closely resemble those of N. reversa but are longer and relatively more slender of C. barroisi, and I have little doubt that the patch sire a young sponge of the former species. The specimen was ta close to the spot at which two of N. aster were obtained. The best developed and largest of my specimens of this species, and also the only one (with the exception of the ‘*green patch’’ just alluded to) that exhibited the colour 7 chlorophyl, was the one taken off the exit of the Jordan. the river flows out of the lake obliquely, the specimen pbs. rently did not come from its actual channel, but from what may be regarded as the main area iad the lake. Although harder than N. reversa, N. aster is more friable than any other species of Poladilenaiins from the lake. Its ‘smooth surface distinguishes it, if it be examined with a hand- lens, from either N. reversa or N. mappa. It is much harder than Ephydatia fluviatilis and differs from “Oorkivoonals barroisi, apart from other characters, in having no cent tral cavity or well-defined oscula, CORTISPONGILLA, gen. nov. Sponge hard, but not of stony hardness, more or less friable, with a well-developed branching central cavity from. which a large osculum opens directly. In large sponges several sys- a et a oe Vol, IX, No. 1.] Sponges of the Lake of Tiberias. 67 [V.S.] tems of the kind are found. The subdermal (afferent) her is poorly represented or absent, but efferent channels covered only by the dermal often be detected in the ieee bourhood of the oscula. “Cystocytes are apparently absent. Skeleton.—The skeleton consists of well-developed vertical fibres crossed at frequent intervals by less well-developed trans- verse ones. Near ie external surface the latter fibres are greatly thickened so as to form a strong casement or it eyond which t feleeined vertical fibres project upwards, su porting the dermal membrane, which is not strongly ohitinized, but apparently somewhat collenchymato ous. Spicules.—In the only known species a skeleton-spicules are sient and rather blunt amphioxi. More slender a amphioxi are occasionally found, but appear to be sasealy im- mature spicules. Spherical siliceous bodies have not been found. emmules.—No o gemmules have been foun Type-species (unique).—Potamolepis barroisi st, Topsent Distribution.—Only known from the Lake of Tiberias on the Jordan system in Palestin ne. The only other genus that approaches Cortispongilla in structure is Pachydictywm, Weltner, from which it is distin- guished chiefly by the formation of a regular skeletal cortex. The hardness of the sponge is due in a very large measure to this structure (pl. iv, figs. 3, 4). In the genus Veluspa, Miclu- cho-Maclay, which apparently occurs both in Lake Baikal (fresh water) and in Arctic Seas, a somewhat similar cortex is formed, but in an entirely different manner and not quite in the same position (pl. iv, fig. 5). Cortispongilla barroisi (Topsent). (Plate ii, figs. 1, la; plate iii, fig. 5; plate iv, fig. 4.) Potamolepis barroisi, Topsent, Rev. biol. Nord France, v, (1892). Weltner, Wiegm. Archiv. f. Naturgesch., Ixvii (1), p. 195 (1901) My specimens of this species, which were taken in October, appear to be in a different phase of growth from those taken by Barrois in May, and also perhaps are somewhat better pre- served. It seems probable, to judge from Topsent’s figures, that, between these two months, the whole outer part of the I x amine ements of one of Topsent’s co-types. It is evident that this specimen was heavily parasitized by an alga and therefore sot probably more fragile than my own and some- external parts. There can, however, be no question as to the specific identity. 68 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (January, 1913. 1 obtained five specimens, which varied in size from 35 x 23 x 21 mm. to 85 x 75 x 60 mm., the last measurement being that of the greatest depth of the actual sponge in each case. Two. approached the largest specimen in bulk, and one was only a little bigger than the smallest. The colour in life was dull grey with a tinge of glaucous green. This tinge has com- pletely disappeared from dried specimens, but traces of it still remain in fragments preserved in alcohol. An examination of both living and preserved material convinces me that it was due not to intracellular, but to extracellular parasitic algae such as Topsent found in much greater profusion in his examples. case, and sometimes in that of the main oscula also, there are radiating channels entering the osculum on the surface and only covered by the dermal membrane. e dermal membrane is not easily separated from the sponge. Although not greatly thickened, it has a somewhat he dermal pores are minute, but I have not been able to detect pore-cells on the external surface or in any other part of the sponge, although I have made a careful examination of well-stained histological material. The most characteristic feature of the skeleton did not at- tract the attention of the author of the species, probably because his material was imperfect. I mean the skeletal cortex formed by the apparent thickening of the transverse spicule- fibres a short distance below the dermal membrane. ‘The distal part of the vertical fibres, which are interrupted in their Vol. IX, No. 1.] Sponges of the Lake of Tiberias. 69 [V.S.] upward course by the cortex cutting across them, is also greatly thickened, containing a large number of spicules lying more or less parallel. In both cases, however, the apparent thickening is due not to a thickening of individual fibres, but to a massing together of separate fibres. In the cortex the individual fibres can be seen crossing one another at right angles, and in a verti- cal section the spicules of some of them are always cut through the middle. The thickened ends of the vertical fibres are also composite and have extra transverse fibres linking them to- Of the internal soft part of the sponge there is, in the pre- sent state of our knowledge, very little that can be said with g abundan | although the sponge-cells are well preserved in some of m specimens, the vegetable cells are not and I can say little about their peste ave been unable to find any trace of gmmules. Sper dietiler Gulla are abundant in one specimen and another contains young embryos, which resemble those of Spongilla and Ephy- datia I only found C. barroist on small pebbles in the actual channel of the Jordan as it runs through the south end of the Lake of Tiberias between the village of Semakh and the exit of the river from the lake. The water in this channel is from 4 to 8 metres deep. apeerees Barrois found his specimens in exactly the same spot; the differences between them and my own are to be attributed, directly or indirectly, to seasonal changes. Notre oN DeRMAL PORE-CELLS IN THE SPONGILLIDAE. Owing to its pei a and to the comparatively large size of its pores, NV. affords unusually good material for the study of the donsat gece Some of my specimens are very well preserved, having been fixed in picro-formol-acetic solu- tion, and I have been able to eigen aobangsot preparations of the dermal membrane and in some cases even of the whole sponge, that exhibit the structure “of that membrane with great clearness. ! method of preparation, originally sug; nines hed an accident, A nsv 70 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (January, 1913. The pore-cells in N. mappa are highly specialized (plate area varying from about 12 to about 20. The orifices vary in diameter from 0°045 to 0°0675 mm. They are naturally circular but in mounted preparations are liable to distortion. Each pore-cell consists of a slender ring of cytoplasm which stains a little darker than that of the ordinary flattened epithelial cells and has an obscurely reticulate structure. The nucleus is ellip- tical in form, measuring about 0:006 x 0-003 mm., the greater axis lying parallel to the circumference of the aperture, on which the cell encroaches in the form of a slight bulge opposite the nucleus. So far as I have been able to discover there is no break in the continuity of the ring formed by the pore-cell. In specimens of the sponge that have been dried after careful preservation in a liquid medium (plate v, fig. 2) the to stand out in sharp contrast to the imperforate roof of the branching exhalent grooves. In part of the type of NV. reversa (plate v, fig. 3) which I have dried there is a comparatively large area of perforate membrane, but it is not confined to the orifices of the inhalent channels or defined in any exact manner. either in N. reversa, N. aster or Cortispongilla barroisi. The mechanical difficulties involved in a careful examination of the lermal membrane in the two last species are, however, con- siderable. so readily, are more difficult to detect. They resemble those of N. mappa in structure but are smaller, the aperture of the largest pores having a diameter of about 0-02 mm. My specimens of N. mappa and E. fluviatilis syriaca were scraped from stones with a knife before being preserved, but notwithstanding this violent treatment, their pore-cells appear upon the cover and rotated until the glass is broken and the section completely crushed. The fragments of glass and all but the smallest fragments of sponge are then removed with a pair of fine forceps and 4 new cover-glass is put on. * Vol. IX, No. 1.] Sponges of the Lake of Tiberias. 71 [V.S.] to be fully expanded. I havé pointed out elsewhere,!' it is doubtful whether the pore-cells of Spongillidae can contract in such a way as to obliterate the aperture they contain. re-examination of old preparations and a careful com- parison between them and those recently made leads me to the conclusion that highly developed pore-cells actually exist in the dermal membrane of most Spongillidae but can only be detected in unusually well-preserved specimens. In serial sections it is difficult, if not impossible, to see them. Their arrangement differs in different species; in some they are grouped as in N. mappa; in others they are practically confined to the edge of the sponge; in others again they occupy more or less clearly defined areas on the surface, and in some they are probably scattered. In those species such as Spongilla cartert in which the inhalent apertures appear to be comparatively large in ordinary well-preserved material, they are probably protected in the living sponge by a delicate dermal network in which the meshes are outlined by pore-cells. atever the exact origin of the pore-cells of the Spongil- lidae may be, and this is a problem that calls for a careful embryological iieatibation: that would be foreign to my own inquiries, they appear to be highly differentiated as mature cells from the ordinary pinacocytes of the dermal anaes In Spongilla crassissima, apart from their ring-like form, t closely resemble the cells that line the orifices of the ciliated crescent-shaped cells of similar structure joined together at the tips to enclose the aperture between them. My mistake was due to a slight folding of the membrane in some of my prepara- tions whereby two cells were brought into unnatural relations with one another. 2. BIOLOGY AND ee ae OF THE SPONGES OF THE LAKE oF TIBERIAS. From a biological point of view the sponges of the Lake of Tiberias fall into two groups in accordance with the precise of the Jordan as it traverses the lake. The former group may be conveniently known as the littoral sponges; the latter as the sponges of the Jordan channel. ! Faun. Brit, Ind.—Freshwater Sponges, etc., p. 32 (1911). 2 Ree. Ind. Mus., I, p. 271 (1907). 72 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (January, 1913. The littoral sponges (of which N. mappa was very, and Z fluviatilis syriaca fairly, common in October, 1912) were found without exception either on the lower surface of stones of large or moderate size or, much more rarely, on the upper surface of small stones covered and protected by large ones. Only one specimen of N. reversa was preserved, but I did not distinguish this species from N. mappa in the field and have reason to think that many specimens I failed to collect, actually belonged to it. While NV. mappa and the Ephydatia invariably form adherent crusts, this species sometimes extends outwards from its support in thin lamellae. There was no difference in the manner of growth of the former two species, except that while single sponges of N. mappa often covered an area of moderate extent, those of the Ephydatia were always quitesmall. In the as to have the appearance of a mosaic. N. mappa is certainly commoner on fragments of basalt than on pieces of limestone, but was found on several occasions on the latter. The two sponges of the Jordan channel as a rule adhere pieces and washed -™ great advantage in stormy weather, when the waves beat on the stones to which it is attached. The largest specimens of a Se ee eS Fee ee SR ee ee ee Pe ee er i Ee eR ee | A ae aes eee Vol. IX, No. 1.] Sponges of the Lake of Tiberias. 73 [N.S.] this species I obtained were, moreover, actually in ‘the Jordan just after it had left the lake, and when i n flood the stream must flow with great strength at this point. The case of the sponges of the Jordan channel in the lake is not quite the same. They cannot be affected by storms to but that there is a considerable current, perhaps increased in wet weather, in that part of the lake in which they live, is proved by the fact that the bottom is there devoid of fine silt and covered with coarse grit and small stones. Only a very small part of the channel has yet been explored, but, so the as is at present known, Cortispongilla barroisi is confined to an area of not more than two square miles. This was found to be the case both by Barrois, whose investigations were made in om d by myself in October. N. aste er, on the other hand, tural peculiarities of C. barroisi and their biological significance I shall deal presently, but it is noteworthy that N. aster is by far the most friable of the Potamolepidinae known from the lake. A most important question both from a taxonomic and a biological point of view is that of the production or non-pro- duction of gemmules by the Potamolepidinae. The evidence Galilean species that gemmules are at any rate not habitually produced, and we know that in a few species (Nudospongilla caggini, N. moorei and N. Be pp a: of the sub-family these bodies are sometimes fou I have found them also in a ar of Veluspa Pa from Lake Baikal. In all these sponges they are devoid not only of microscleres but also of asta coat and foramina. In Spongilla (Stratospongilla) clementis from the Philippines, the structure of which closely resembles that of Nudospongilla generally, and especially that of the type-species NV. coggini, the gemmules are few in number d bear remarkably attenuated microscleres ; while imper- fect development of the pneumatic coat is a common feature of the species of Stratospongilla, a Ithough in one species (N. bombayensis) it is less degenerate in a variety or local race (pneumatica) than it is in the typical form. The disappear- ance of the gemmule is therefore not a character of so funda- oe a nature as might appear at first sight to to be the case e find some species in which it has lost the elaboration diacterate of the Spongiltidas as a family, and others in which it has apparently been suppressed altogethe r. The evidence that the latter statement is true lies, so far as the sponges of the Lake of Tiberias are concerned, in the 74 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. {January, 1913. the case in much warmer weather if the water were deeper. The water-level of the Lake of Tiberias is lower in October stones that are partly or completely dry. I made a very careful study of those that had become desiccated or partially desiccated in this way, and I found that whereas Ephydatia had produced gemmules, NV. mappa had not done so. Changes in environment, as I have pointed out elsewhere,! do not necessarily have the same effect on di bable that WN. mappa, mules, would do so whe steady desiccation. Evidence, moreover, is accumulating that the adoption of a limnic as distinct from a fluviatile mode of life is liable to (vars. abortiva and or less degenerate. ‘|! Faun. Brit. Ind., Freshwater Sponges, etc., p. 5 (1911). Journ. As. Soc. Bengal, 1912, p. 50. 2 Proce. Roy. Irish Acad., xxxi, pt. 60, p. 64 (1912). 5 Proc, Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia, 1887, pp. 191, 192, # < ine Sire cata rN EE aie te ep oe ee ee SUE Peet ene Tae ae ee eS ee ON A wa ee eee ee ee = ee ae Po ee RG ne A TT a ge eee ae) a ee Vol. IX, No. 1.] Sponges of the Lake of Tiberias. 75. [N.S.] It is easy to see that a sponge living in a warm climate in a lake in which a considerable depth of water is maintained throughout the il has not the same need for the production gemmules as one from a small pond or stream that is liable to be dried up or oi solid. Marshall has advanced the view that an important function of the gemmule-spicules is that of weighting the gemmules, in order that they may not float away too readily. If so, it is not — that in species in which the gemmules are adherent their microscleres should disappear, and as the main See of the pneumatic coat is that of oes the gemmules to float, this coi might also be expected, on d@ priori grounds, to be eliminated in the same circumstances, just as the eyes of cavernicolous animals are eliminated in the dark. mbryos were found in all species of Galilean sponges examined in October, proving that sexual solace as well as vegetative growth is vigorous at that time of y As Cortispongilla barroisi is the most aoe ‘specialized species oa the sponge-fauna described in this paper, it will be iscuss the a ee of its peculiarities. itl for the production of a skeletal cortex and for the possession of a well-defined and almost symmetrical central cavity. (It would be misleading to call the latter a gastral cavity, for there is no evidence that it is homologous with the gastral sponges that live in still water. It is almost obliterated in speci- mens attached to bushes the supra-aquatic parts of which are agitated by the wind, its place being taken in this case by super- ficial branching channels, and also in races from south-western India and eastern Europe as to the biology of which we are igno- rant. The only freshwater sponge in which a cavity is found comparable to that of C. barroisi in regularity is Pachydictyum osum from Celebes,” in which the relative size and the actual ene of the cavity are greater than in the Galilean species. ig was found attached to the shells of living Gastro- pods in a ake in Celebes. The production of a cavity of the kind, which is one with the presence of a large circular osculum, is apparently a provision to assist in the elimination of mud or sand pre into the system through the pores, the exhalent channels being strong enough to keep the osculum I have noticed that if Spongilla proliferens is kept alive in an aquarium, the number of oscula (and consequently tl oP . As. Soc. Bengal, 1906, pl. i : Wallac itera Arch. f. eho ty a, ok vi, fig. 3 (1901). 76 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (January, 1913. total oscular area) is invariably increased owing to the appear- ance of oscula on areas from which they were previously absent. This is apparently due to the fact that the sponge experi- ences difficulty, in unnatural surroundings, in getting rid of waste or extraneous matter. Barrois’s heavily parasitized that Nudospongilla aster, which inhabits the same environment as C. barroisi, is a peculiarly compact sponge without any trace of a central cavity is noteworthy: but it is not unusual for two species that live together to adopt diametrically opposite means to attain the same end, and if the particularly well-developed exhalent system implied in the production of a central cavity opening by a large osculum, is advantageous in getting rid of silt that has entered the sponge, a compact structure may be equally efficient im preventing the silt from entering at all. e other main peculiarity of Cortispongilla, viz. the skele- tal cortex, renders the sponge harder and less friable than it would otherwise be, but I have no suggestion to offer as to the precise reason why its development should be particularly acvantageous to this genus. An interesting point is its analogy to the skeletal cortex of the freshwater species of the genus Veluspa in Lake Baikal. Possibly the cortex performs a similar function in the two genera. In Veluspa, as has already been noted, it is produced by a splaying out of the extremities of the vertical skeleton-fibres, whereas in Cortispongilla it is due to an agglomeration of fibres a short distance within the sponge. In the species of Veluspa chosen for illustration (pl. iv, fig. 5) the difference is, however, more clearly seen than it is in some beca well developed and the vertical fibres are very distinct one from another even at their distal extremities. as yet of the lower invertebrates of fresh water of other parts of Western Asia or of North Africa. The sponges of te ake = iT a a etal he OS ea ee a : j } 1 3 ; j q J Vol. IX, No. 1.] Sponges of the Lake of Tiberias. 77 N.S.) differ considerably from those of European, tropical African or tropical Asiatic fresh waters. The one endemic genus (Corti- spongilla) appears to be related to Pachydictyum, which is en- demic in a lake inCelebes; but the relationship may not be very close. The genus Nudospongilla, if it is to be accepted as a natural group, is probably of wide distribution in the hotter parts of the Old World, but none of the species found in the ake of Tiberias exhibit a clear connection with any species from elsewhere. It is possible, moreover, that N. mappa has some actual affinity with Grimm’s genus Metschnikowia, which is only known from the Caspian Sea. The fact that the race of Ephydatia fluviatilis found in the lake is distinct from the typical European form of the species is in itself evidence of but has produced comparatively few local races. such relationship as exists is with Syria only, for the race is not known to occur any further afield. 3. CLASSIFICATION OF THE POTAMOLEPIDINAE AND OF SOME OBSCURE GENERA OF SPONGILLINAE. | In dealing with the sponges of the Lake of Tiberias I have found it necessary to examine a large amount of material from different parts of the world. As the collection of freshwater sponges in the Indian Museum is probably the largest an most nearly complete in existence, all known genera being represented, I take this opportunity to discuss certain genera f obscure status. The genera are Corvospongilla, Annandale ; Uruguaya, Carter; Potamolepis, Marshall; and Pachydictyum, Weltner. A consideration of their essential features will render it possible to indicate more precisely the relationship of Cortispongilla and Nudospongilla, and of the Potamolepidinae tion is Veluspa, Miclucho-Maclay, from which I find it family circle. In a short pa P ve pointed out, in agreement ‘with Korotneff * and Svartzevski,’ that some of the species assigned to Lubomirskia by Dybowski * actually conform to that author’s diagnosis of Veluspa, an have further advanced the view that the sponges of Lake Baikal probably present a complete transition between the two ! Ann. Mus. Zool. Ac. Sci. St. Pétersbourg, 1913 (ined.). 2 Biol. Centralbl., xxi, p. 306 (1901). 8 Zapiski Kiev. Obshch., xvii (2) (1901). 4+ Mem. Ac. Sci. St. Petersburg (7) xxvii, No. 6, p. 11 (1880). 78 Journal of the Asiatic Sociely of Bengal. [January, 1913. supposed genera as defined by Dybowski; Miclucho-Maclay’s ! original description of Veluspa being of too general a nature to carry much weight. The courtesy of the authorities of the St. Petersburg has recently enabled me to examine a large collection from Lake Baikal in which four of the species assigned provisionally to Veluspa are well represented. These are V. batcalensis (Pallas), V.bacillifera (Dybowski), V. abietina, Svartzevski, and V. intermedia (Dybowski). They may be taken ing with the biology of Cortispongilla (antea, p- 76), the most obvious generic character of Veluspa (Lubomirskia) is the fact urning from the peculiar Baikal sponges to species that must be assigned definitely to the Spongillidae, I propose first to consider two genera (Corvospongilla and U ruguaya) that un- doubtedly belong to the Spongillinae. Fam. SPONGILLIDAE. Subfam. SPONGILLINAE. Genus CORVOSPONGILLA, Annandale. (Plate iv, fig. 1.) "Ree. Lad, Moses nay ee g detail. My only reason for introducing it here is to point out its & type-genus of the Potamolepidinae. The skeleton-spicules, as 1 Ibid. (7) xv, No. 3, p. 2 (1872). Vol. IX, No. 1. ] Sponges of the Lake of Tiberias. 79 [V.8.] in Potamolepis, are often stout, smooth amphistrongyles mixed with a much smaller number of relatively slender amphioxi, but the skeleton is remarkable for the fact that the spicule fibres are usually, despite its compactness, of a somewhat ill- defined nature, thus differing from those of Potamolepis. which are often of two kinds, any specimen of Corvospongilla can as a rule be readily distinguished from any specimen of Potamolepis by the fact that minute birotulate spicules can be found lying free in the parenchyma of the former. In some, if not in all, species, however, the number of these spicules present is variable; sometimes it is so small that they can only be dis- covered with difficulty. Genus URUGUAYA, Carter. (Plate v, fig. 4.) ae Ann. gs Nat. Hist. (5), vii, p. 100 (1881); Pina wbid., (6), ii ae Pha Wiegm. Arch. f. Nat gesch., Ixi (i). p. 130 (1 Sponge of stony ee forming crusts or nee growths with more or less cylindrical vertical branc The external surface is covered by a thick, chitinous membrane in spaces occur, having the appearance of granules. The sub- dermal efferent grooves take the form of ramifying channels of - small calibre, but it is impossible to say, after examining dri ed specimens only, whether there is a true afferent subdermal vity. Skeleton forming a dense net-work of vertical and trans- verse fibres firmly welded together. The individual fibres are very stout and contain a large amount of chitinous material, but the sheath it forms is never so regular: as in Veluspa. The vertical fibres are not distinguished in any way from the horizontal fibres and do not project upwards on the surface of the pI pi -—In all known species the skeleton spicules are stout amphietrumarion, but free amphioxous macroscleres also some. There are no free microscleres. The micros- clere of the gemmule consists of a short, comparatively stout shaft bearing an undivided rotule at either end. The rotules are equal and have the form of concave saucers, the sigh being in the same direction in the two belonging to each spicule. Gemmules.—The gemmules, which are small, adhere to the base of the sponge, and are poorly provided with or altogether lacking in pneumatic coating. Apparently they have no foramina. 80 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (January, 1913. Type-species.—Spongilla corallioides, Bowerbank. Distribution.—Tropical and subtropical South America on the Atlantic side of the Andes. ollowing, species belong to the genus :—Uruguaya corallioides (Bowerbank), U. repens, Hinde, U. macandrewi, Hinde, U. pygmaea, Hinde, and U. amazonica, Weltner. U. amazonica is represented in the collection of the Indian Museum In describing the genus Potamolepis Marshall confessed that the only consideration which prevented him from uniting it with Uruguaya was a geographical one, and, so far as the origi- nal descriptions of the two genera go, there is no reason for considering them to be distinct, except that one group is found in Africa, the other in South America. This reason, as all students of the Spongillidae would probably now agree, is a very poor one. inde, however, since Carter and Marshall published their appearance is concerned, in his figures. I refer to the thickened, race (reticulata) of Spongilla lacustris and in S. crassissima ; S. moorei; but I know of no freshwater sponge except the species of Uruguaya in which it has the minutely and apparently granular (really pneumatic) structure characteristic of that genus. Subfam. POTAMOLEPIDINAE. Genus POTAMOLEPIS, Marshall. (Plate iv, fig. 2.) ! Quart. Journ. Mier. Sei., xli (new series), p. 476 (i899). Vol. IX, No. 1.] Sponges of the Lake of Tiberias. 81 [NV .S.] one species (P. chartaria) the amphioxous macroscleres are species of Corvospongilla. T'ype-species.—Potamolepis leubnitziw, Marshall. Distribution.—Tropical Africa. The species that certainly belong to Potamolepis are P. chartaria, Marshall, P. leubnitziw, Marshall, and P. pechueli, Marshall. P. weltneri, Moore,! is a doubtful species, possibly composite and possibly in part at least to be assigned to spongil e only specimen in the Indian Museum appears to represent P. pechueli.* Genus PACHYDICTYUM, Weltner. (Plate iv, fig. 3.) Wiegm. Arch. f. Naturgesch., Ixvii (1), p. 188, pl. vi, figs. 1-4 and 6-26 (1901). ! Moore, *‘ The Tanganyika Problem,’’ p. 323 (1903). : ? It is from the Upper Luarula River, the Anarene being Isan- gila, a place on the Congo about 150 miles up stream from the sea. 82 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [January, 1913. The foregoing discussion of the genera other than Corti- spongilla and Nudospongilla that belong to the new subfamily Potamolepidinae, and of the Spongilline genera liable to be con- fused therewith, has cleared the way for a consideration of the precise taxonomic position of the sponges of the Lake of Tiberias. ‘he new genus (Nudospongilla) is proposed, and placed in the Potamolepidinae largely as a matter of convenience, in order to facilitate the classification of those freshwater sponges in which there is some evidence either that gemmules are never produced or, being produced, are devoid of microscleres and other characteristic features. In other words, there is evi- absolutely free of microscleres and could only be assigned to it because their skeletal structure was identical with that of stand the test of research and criticism, I think its recogni- tion convenient as an aid to future investigations. Even i Spongilla lacustris or any other typical species of any recog- nized gemmule-bearing genus could be proved by actual Vol. IX, No. 1.] Sponges of the Lake of Ttberias.. 83 [V.8.] experiment to lose its power of producing gemmules in peculiar circumstances, the fact would not provide a valid argument against the retention of a separate genus of which the chief generic character was the invariable absence or degenerac of the gemmules. In any case, it seems to me more satisfac- tory to call species of a certain facies in which no microscleres have been found, by some such name as Nudospongilla, rather than to refer to them vaguely as ‘‘ Spongilla (*) sp.’’; for it has been recognized that the specific characters of many such species are well marked, and specific names have been conferred on fend although their genus has been queried. ortispongilla stands on a somewhat different footing, for it possesses positive structural characters that separate it from all other freshwater sponges. It is perhaps actually related to wae eset its resemblance to Veluspa (Lubomirskia) being apparently superficial and due to convergence rather than genetic a nship. ecognition of the subfamily Potamolepidinae as here dagnade Renna to some extent on the fact that no gemmules have been found in any species that can be definitely assigned to the genus Potamolepis. This genus is known from but a few specimens, although it is apparently far from uncommon in certain parts of the Congo basin. None of these few speci- gotten that many encrusting Spongillidae (notably some species f Corvospongilla) produce gemmules that adhere firmly to Specimen is removed for preservation. There is, therefore, a considerable chance of their being overlooked when it is exam- ined in a museum. We know that some Nudospongillae do produce gemniules, but that these gemmules, which are not always present, are less highly organized than those of the Spongillinae and entirely lack microscleres. Possibly those of Potamolepis are of a similar nature, if they are ever produced : those of Veluspa are not very dissimilar. If so, no difficulty pewnandtrantiog I am inclined to think that this stadt may ultimately prove necessary. Perhaps, however, the genera ictyum and Cortispongilla will be f found, a the minute anatomy of the Moxaxonida is better known, to be widely different in organization from all eae bedsiwites genera and 84 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [January, 1913. recognized as component parts of a family distinct from the Spongillidae. For the present it seems convenient to make the presence or absence of microscleres a test for the separation of the freshwater sponges other than those confined to Lake Baikal into two subfamilies, the Spongillinae with microscleres and the Potamolepidinae without them. Most of the sponges of the Lake of Tiberias belong to the latter subfamily. SUMMARY. 1. It is convenient to divide the Spongillidae into two subfamilies, the Spongillinae, in which microscleres are pre- sent, and the Potamolepidinae, in which they are apparently not produced. belongs to the Spongillinae. This race (syriaca, Topsent) has and from the R. Barada near Damascus. . The four species of Potamolepidinae fall into two genera, both of which are described as new, viz. Cortispongilla and Nudospongilla. 4, former genus is monotypic and the one species : n ur in. China and probably in Central Africa and Celebes. Possibly Nudospongilla is related to M etschnikowia, Grimm, a genus e certain sponges of the genus Veluspa (Lubomirskia) from Lake Baikal are 1 relationship, Vol. IX, No. 1.] Sponges of the Lake of Tiberias. 85 [N.8.] ach of the species of Nudospongilla that occurs in the lake exhibits very marked structural peculiarities probably of an adaptive nature, but the genus itself is distinguished from the Spongillinae, more especially from Stratospongilla (a sub- genus of the type genus Spongilla) by negative rather than positive characters. i the sponges of the Lake of Tiberias are in a state strong vegetative and reproductive vigour in October (i.e., wards the end of the hot dry season), unless they are actually undergoing desioation at the margin of the lake. ars to be possible to separate the sponge-fauna of the lake ato two localized groups, one ie which (consisting of Soran fluviatilis syriaca, Nudospongilia mappa the lake. BIBLIOGRAPHY. Annandale, N. . Some animals found associated with pp. 55-58 (1906). a ‘» ‘* Notes on some Sponges from Lake Baikal in the collection of the - Petersburg,’’ Ann. Mus. Zool. Ac. Sci St. Pétersbourg, 1913 (ined.). Carter, H. J. .. ‘* History and coca otis 2 of the known Oiaeine pongilla,’’? Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist, ae vii, pp. 75, 107 ; (188 Dybowski, W. .. “Studien uber die gprs gona des Russi- schen Reiches besonderer Berucksichtigung "dee Spongien- Fauna des Bai ees,” Mem Ac. Sci. St. Petérsbourg, xxvii (7), No. 6, pp. 1—-71 (1880). 86 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [January, 1913. Evans, R. .. ‘* A description of two new species of Spongilla from Lake Tanganyika.’’ Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., xli (n.s.), pp. 471-88 (1899). Hinde, G. J. .. ‘On some new species of Uruguaya, Carter, with remarks on the Genus,’’ Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (6), ii, pp. 1-12 (1888). emp, S. W., and Annandale, N. .. ‘‘ Observations on the Invertebrate Fauna of the Kumaon Lakes, with special reference to the Sponges and Polyzoa,’’ Rec. Ind. Mus., vii, pp. 120-45 (1912). Kirkpatrick, R. ‘* Zoological results of the Third Tang- Sa ne es on species from the Nile and Zambesi,” Proc. Zool. Soc., 1906 (i), 218-27 Korotoneff, A. .. **Faunistische Studien am Baikal See,” Biol. Centralbl., xxi, pp. 305-11 (1901). Marshall, W. -- ‘On some new Siliceous Sponges col- lected by M. Pechuél-Lésche in the Congo.’’ Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (5) ; xii, pp. 395-412 (1883). ‘ Miclucho-Maclay, N... ‘‘Uber einige schwimme des Nord- : lichen Stillen Oceans und des Eis- meeres,’” Mem. Ac. Sci. St. Péters- Potts, E... Sponges with descriptions of those named by other authors and from all parts of the World,’’ Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia, 1887. ‘Clare Island Survey, Freshwater Porifera,’’ Proc. Roy. Irish. Acad., xxi, pt. 60, pp. 1-18 (1912). - ‘Materialen zur Spongien-Fauna des | Baical-Sees,”” Zapiski Kiev. Obshch., Xvii, (2) (1901). (In Russian). Topsent, E. — - -. ‘Sur une Eponge du Lac de Tibériade (Potamolepis barroisi, n. sp.),’’? Rev- biol. du Nord de la France, v, No. 3 Stephens, Miss J. Svartzevski, B. (1892), ‘ +» “Sur une Ephydatia (£, fluviatilis Vol. 1X, No. 1.] Sponges of the Lake of Tibervas. 87 [N.S.] auct.) du Lac de aaron eters ord de Rev. biol. du ance, V, No. 8, p. 1 (18 Topsent, E, ts “ Description Hie variete nouvelle d’Eponge d’eau douce (Ephydatia fluviatilis, auct., var. syriaca, Top- sent),’’ Bull. Soc. eae des Sciences de Rouen, 1909, p. Weltner, W. iy ed Spongillidenstudien, “OT. Katalog und Verbreitung der bekannten Suss- wassersoh War me,’ iegm. Arch. f. Naturgesch., 1xi (1), pp. 114-144 1895 ~ a ‘« Susswasserspo ongien von Celebes (Spongillidenstudien, IV),’’ Wiegm. Arc f. Naturgesch, Ixvii (1), pp. 185-294 (1901). EXPLANATION OF PLATES. Puate II. Photographs of Sponges from the Lake of Tiberias. (nat. size.) Fig. 1.—Large specimen of Cortispongilla barroiss (Topsent) attached to a small stone. The dark depressed mark close to the single large osculum shown in the photograph prob- ably represents a young sponge of Nudospongilla aster. Fig. la.—Vertical section through the osculum of a rather smaller sponge possessing one one oscular system: to show the branched central cavity. Fig. 2.—Part of the type-specimen of Nudospongilla reversa, showing the deep oscular grooves. Fig. 3.—Type-specimen of Nudospongilla aster (on a flint nodule). Fig. 4.—Type-specimen of Nudospongilla mappa. Puate IIT. Skeletons and pisces of Sponges from the Lake Tiberias. Fig. 1. ee a fava syriaca, Topsent. A. Skeleton- spicules, x Gemmule-spicules, x 1 Fig. 2. Skeltonapicules of Nudospongilla reversa (A. 20: B. Fig. 2a.—Vertical section of part of pe i feat oF ‘skeleton, x 20. 88 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [January, 1913.] Fig. 3.—Skeleton-spicules of Nudospongilla mappa (A. x 120: B. x 40). Fig. 3a.—Vertical section of part of skeleton from the external surface to the base of the sponge, x 20. Fig. 4.—Skeleton-spicules of Nudospongilla aster (A. x 120: B. x 40). Fig 4a.—Vertical section of part of external region of skeleton, x 20. Fig. 5.—Skeleton-spicules of Cortispongilla barroisi (Topsent), x 40. N.B.—In all the figures of vertical sections of the skeleton the upper profile represents the external surface. PuaTte IV. Vertical Sections of the External Region of the Skeleton in Five Genera of Freshwater Sponges: all x 16. Fig. 1.—Corvospongilla burmanica bombayensis, Annand. (from Idar State, Bombay Presidency). Fig. 2.—Potamolepis pechueli, Marsh. (from the Liapulu RB., Central Africa). Fig. 3.—Pachydictyum globosum, Weltner (schizotype). Fig. 4.—Cortispongilla barroisi, (Topsent) (topoty pe). Pig. 5.—Veluspa abietina, Schki. (from Lake Baikal). PLATE V. Dermal Pores, etc., in the Spongillidae. Fig. 1.—Spongilla proliferens, Annand.: a dermal pore-cell, x ta (fixed in absolute alcohol and stained with haematoxy- in Fig. 2.—Nudospongilla mappa: photograph of a part of the external surface of the type-specimen (dried), x 7; to show the circular pore-areas. Fig. 2a.—A single pore-area with the supporting skeleton as seen from the external surface (fixed with picroformol-acetic solution and stained with borax carmine), x 50. Fig. 2b.—Part of the same prepara- ‘ion, x 200. Fig. 3.—Nudospongilla reversa: photograph of a part of the external surface of the type-specimen (dried), x 7; to show the scattered pore-areas. Fig. 4.—Uruguaya amazonica, Weltner : vertical section through an osculum, x 40; to show the thickened pneumatic exter- te nal membrane and the skeleton-spicules lying parallel to it. Note.—In figure 2b. the nuclei of the pore-cells are not clearly differentiated from chance accumulations of granules as was the case in the original drawing pie ses els Seas aes oi Sar ees rae PLATE I. Journ. As. Soc. Beng., Vol. 1X, 1913, ‘sviuasdilL 3O 3xNV1 BSHL 3O SHdVYDOLOHd y Plate I. Jour. As. Soc. Beng. Vol IX, 1913. Bemrose, Collo, Derby. Photo by-AC.Chowdhary, SPONGES FROM THE LAKE OF TIBERIAS. Jour. As. Soc. Beng. Vol IX, 1918. [ \ A | / \ | ale os Avene Z Wy pL 4y / J? fi & We fA La BSNS ie ANT eg aN =a TAZ N= S LSS — > a = S\G Z es Ze 4) ' aS \ ee \ NE fe a i Shy ee ff \ AV AG = sh ti Se MY N A= = Ses a | ~ : ° Sen \ ms Lae eo if ~ f = Aa SSS y y 4 Z. \ Py Lay 4 may f h WY Yo —\ JAS es Yl \= — SF | Ww ») SS = ria = WV = | S —t— hy D.N. Bagchi, del. SPONGES OF THE LAKE OF TIBERIAS. Bemrose, Collo., Derby. Plate fil Jour. As. Soc. Beng. Vol IX, 1913. Plate IV. We dal YA I, ZG iy xy Ys _~ Hil a\\ KK ———4 — ES ae Bagchi, del. Bemrose, Colle. Derby. SKELETON OF FRESHWATER SPONGES. Jour. As. Soc. Beng. Vol IX, 1918. Plate V. Bemrose. Collo., Derby. S.C. Mondul, del. DERMAL PORE-CELLS, Etc., OF SPONGILLIDAE. 9. The Marriage Ceremony and Marriage Customs : of the Gehara Kanjars. By W. KrrKpatrRIck. The *‘ bride price’ among these people is ‘‘ nine twentys,”’ ! or one hundred and eighty rupees for a virgin, and in the case of a widow ‘‘six twentys,’’ or one hundred and twenty rupees. The father of the bridegroom is liable for this pay- ment to the bride’s family, or if the bridegroom is adult he has RZ. to pay the ‘bride price’’ himse e ‘‘divorce price,’’ which th Scibernor: is also liable for, is similarly ‘‘ nine twentys © os or ae pies keep an account of all the expenses incurred from the day of betrothal and the sum total of these have also to be paid for by the new husband to the divorcée. e pour parlers connected with the betrothal are intricate. When it is more or less decided who is an eligible bride, and the bride’s party are agreeable to receive the advances of the bridegroom’s party, the latter open negotiations by sending & messenger to the bride’s party or sept or family with Re. 1-4. (twenty annas), and a formal request for an interview or meet- 3 he message is received and considered by the bride’s party with much ceremony and the merits and demerits of the bridegroom and his ‘side’ or party or sept are freely dis- cussed, If the request or ‘‘ offer ’’ is accepted, as it usually is, the preceding negotiations being part of the formality, a meet- or Rs. 10 being distributed i in daru eins spirit) and bdtasds and sweetmeats. The Panchayat offer the first glass or cup of a aving quaffed the wine and possessed himself of the rupee the bride’s guardian stands up and announces, “ I have given away the girl.’’ The whole party, or it may be 0 the imn and bridegroo now form a procession and walk round in a circle seven times. This is on the first of the seven days during which the 1 marriage & o By 5 4 3 z r= & ae 28 oe Ee nm 5 Re a8 = a’ r Ps] 1 See J.A.S8.B., Vol. VII, No. 6. 90 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. |February, 1913. reeds and khas khas'; in the middle of this grass a Jota full of water was placed. In the case of a widow marrying I was told that instead of a plain bamboo a gaidala or bamboo with a rough iron spear head was used. This gaidala is the implement used by Kanjars and allied tribes of the ‘‘ hunting state’’ for digging for khas khas roots and killing wild animals. To return to the first day’s ceremonies ; after this Mundha has been set up, oil is distributed to everybody taking part or inter- ested in the ceremony. In the next five days the marriage bridegroom walking once round the Mundha. On the seventh day all the really important events take place and the details are remarkably interesting. No doubt in various camps, as Hindu influence increases and as time goes on, the ceremonial is varied according to the inclinations and tastes of individual Chowdhris (Headmen) and their Panch or counsel, but for all that there is strong evidence of the survival of many primitive customs. On the seventh day the bridegroom and his attendants proceed to the hut or encampment of the bride carrying with them two chattis or gharrds of earthenware—filled with water— and after an immense amount of discussion and issuing of instructions by every one who has ever been at a wedding efore, and wrangling and shouting as a sort of preliminary to emphasize the importance of what is about to take place, the first part of the ceremony begins with what is called Cowri Khélna—playing with cowri shells. First one ghara of water is placed in front of the bridegroom and the other before the bride—they are said to be ‘‘ given to them.’’ The water from the bride’s ghara is then mixed with the water in the bride- groom’s ghara and vice versa. The eldest ‘‘ son-in-law ’’ of the goth or sept of the bridegroom then places seven cowrt shells in each ghard. It should be noted that these people are 1 The following note is from ‘‘ Hobson-Jobson,” Yule and Burnell, p. 219: ‘Pers. H. Khaskhas. Proper Hindi names are usir and lala, The ‘roots of a grass which abounds in the drier parts of India, V4 " . ous@.-+- ‘* These roots are well known in France by the name Vetyver, which 18 ‘‘ the Tamil name Vetliveru (ver = root).” : gging for khaskhas roots and making tatties therefrom is to this day one of the principal of the ‘+ peaceful” avocations of those people in Delhi—and I fervently hope that whoever has the ordezing of the CUORERD SIE, Ete ine Ca aaa en Vol. IX, No. 2.j Marriage Customs of the Gehara Kanjars. 91 [V.S.] divided up into exogamous septs so that the ‘‘ son-in-law ”’ of > . ) Kanjars, J. & P. A.S.B, vol. VII, No. 10. The bride and bride- groom are now seated with their respective gharas in front of them and at a signal they simultaneously make a grab for the cowries in the water. If the bride ‘ grabs’ more cowries out. of her ghara than the bridegroom does out of his she is declared to have jitgid—or won, and the winner is greeted with applause and much laughter. The suggestion of course is obvious and the idea simple—that if the bride for instance ‘ wins’ she will usually are that the marriage will be a happy one. The couple are now taken apart by their respective relations and are bathed in the water from their gharas—and are then dressed in clean clothes. And now comes the second item of the cere- and a mock combat takes place. The bride and bridegroom are each armed with an imitation Khanda or large knife made of sirkhi! (Saccharum sara Roxb.) in one hand and a chunni or chaj, a sort of sieve made also of sirkhi, in the other. This chaj represents a shield. A few grains of rice are thrown into each chaj and in the air. The Khanda is, I am told, a weapon the tribes’ forefathers used for decapitating cattle. After a few nd th applied to an nited Provinces. 92 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [February, 1913.] hog or the Rs. 10 is distributed as follows :— 4 of the hog or Rs. 5 goes to the bride’s party, 1 of the hog or Rs. 2-8 goes to Panchayat. and 4 of the hog or Rs. 2-8 goes to the bridegroom’s party. These are recognized fees and are called Khhari Tekha. When the accounts have finally been ‘‘ found,”’ the total is recorded as being the price the husband shall recover from the co- respondent in the event of a divorce. There is one little detail of the ceremony which is inter- esting to record. On to the bamboo pole or Mundha very often a wooden representation of a parrot is tied. Now a parrot is one of the general totems of the tribe and is with the dog about the only live creature which they may not and do not kill or eat. 10. A Comparative Vocabulary of the Language of European Gypsies or Romnichal, and Colloquial Hindustani. By W. KIRKPATRICK. According to the Shah Nameh of Firdausi it was during the fourth or fifth century a.p. that Behram Gour (A.D. 420) received into Persia from India some ten or twelve thousand musicians of both sexes who were known as Liris. It had been reported to him that the indigent classes of his kingdom q ; assigned an appropriate residence, just as to-day we are attempting to settle the Doms near Gorakhpur or the Haburas near Aligarh. . ‘taking their asses they should load them with their chattels “and support themselves by means of their songs and the ‘‘ strumming of their silken bows.’? The Liris agreeably to this mandate ‘‘ now wander about the world seeking employ- “ment, associating with dogs and wolves, and thieving on. the “road by day and by night.’’ Thus wrote Firdausi nine hundred years ago! 2 ‘bei e Gypsies in Persia to this day are called Liiris . Another Arabian historian, Hamza of Ispahan, we have it on the authority of De Goeje confirms this fifth-century Liri migration. Hamza appears to have written some fifty years earlier than Firdausi, and this author relates that Behram Gour caused 10,000 musicians called Zott to be sent from India ! See ‘‘ Contribution to the History of the Gypsies’’ by M. J. De Goeje—in MacRitchie’s ‘‘ Gypsies of India. : 94 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (February, 1913. Zotts or Jats in Turkey who are also known as Tchinjane we may take to be the same as the Zingani, Zingari or Zigeuner and are identical with the Persian Liris who in Palestine are called Zatts or Nawari or Nauri or Nuri. From here the gypsiologist will trace the migration to Western Asia and South- ast Europe, and we finally have definite proof of the location of Gypsies in Europe for the first time in Hungary in 1417." From this date we hear authoritatively of the Zigeuner or Zingaro or Gypsy race spreading all over Europe into Rou- mania, Wallachia, Roumelia, Bulgaria and Transylvania and all speaking a veritable Gypsy language. ‘‘ They are all so alike,’’ says Borrow, speaking of various European Gypsy dialects, ‘‘ that he who speaks one of them can make himself very well understood by those who speak any of the rest.”’ : Although I do not accept the linguistic test as by any means an infallible test of pedigree, it is no mere assumption to ascribe the obviously Oriental, if not actually Indian, origin of European Romnichal to the Liri migration mentioned by Firdausi. Ido not pretend that the comparative list of words I have here collated is any more than a revision of similar vocabu- laries which are familiar to anyone interested in Gypsy lore, but Ihave, I believe, identified a certain number of words which common to Romnichal and the Argot of the Kanjars alone and to no other languages or dialect that I know. Romnichal. Kanjar. Malla, Myla, an ass. Mail, a horse. Jookal, Jukel. a dog. Shukal, a dog. Lubni or Loobni or Luvni, Loobhar or Lubhar, a woman. a wench, ! See ‘‘Contribution to the History of the Gypsies’ by M. J. De Goeje—in MacRitchie’s ‘‘ Gpysies of India.’’ . Vol. IX, Me 0.2.] Vocabulary of Language of European Gypsies. 95 [W.8.] Note.—There is a striking similarity of purpose in the Romnichal use of the affix mengro (or engro when the wo ord to which it is xed ends in a consonant) and the colloquial use of the affix ok or wallah in ce cana Mengro and engro are used in fact by European Gypsies just as wala would be used by Europeans in the gt whieh serves for Hindustani in Calcutta. This word (engro), s Borrow, ‘‘ affixed to a noun or verb turns it into sornetah figurative, by which they designate, seldom very appropriately. some object for which they have no positive name ’’; remarks which apply equally to the use of wala in colloquial Hividiaetaik rrow himself gives as example ‘ kawn engro,’’ which sig- aa ear-fellow—a hare; in Hindustani patois one would say 0 kan wala janwar : that ear-fellow animal ! In Romnichal o represents the masculine and ¢ or ni the feminine, for example rom a man or bridegroom, romni woman or bride ; or boro rei a great gentleman and bori rani a great lady. In Hindusta ani we have jat, jatni; dom, domni ; barra raja, or bara rais ; barri rani, and so on Though I dare say it is of no ee interest I would draw attention to what has struck me as an apparent simi- larity in the pronunciation of some Hindustani words by Ben- galis and by Romani Ryes. >> The Romnichal In Heed it is unce For instance.— Bara, big, great . boro Borr % Nanga@, bald, naked .. nongo ee longo. es Sikha, dry . shuko Shuka. “a Disra, second duite ae Bs Kal or Kalko, to-morrow Me s Do, two ° doo Dooi. and so on. My Romanes vocabulary I have taken almost entirely from Smart and Crofton, a few words from Borrow and also from Colonel Harriot’s paper.!. Smart and Crofton have relied for the identification of many words in their vocabulary on Paspati in his ‘‘ Etudes sur les [chinghianes ’’ and on Dr. Liebick in his ‘*‘ Die Zigeuner,’’ etc The strongest argument: which can be used in support of Romnichal being Indian in origin is supplied by the etymology of the words of this vocabulary, in that some ‘of the words are searly Sanskrit while others are of Persian — i ‘ See Bibliography g given in Pasi Boli of Kanjars, J.A.S B., vol. vii, oO. 96 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. Acquaintance .. Alive ir All Ancient, old Ant re Barefoot Beak i February, 1913. | Gypsy. C 1 See J.A.S.B., vol. vil, . | Jongar . Doomo Bes one ae i o Peero Chines nok es | Monto, Moa. i. sok ats . | Bauro, boro heriklo | } . Dander, dan Kaulo Coppur s | Beeno, beano . | Dooi | Raklo | Tootchi, cuci Baulesko, bal Bauro . | Ka No 7, pp. 368 et seg. Hindustani. . Upar. Dukh. Burha ooo purt amr, - pura . Chin aA . | Jsta, pone (dialectic). | “ee bayar (badal a Fea. Sara. . Purana . |Compare kird, an insect. | Pichh. . Sota. .. Mailisahorsein Kanjar Nanga, naked. | Nanga, Hora | Nanga ; | Chiria ir tio would be a bird’s nose. ry | Dant marna, to bite. Kala. A Bengali iar pronounce kala kaulo. apra. | Biyai—given birth to. Donon PB | Lapka. .. | Chachi. .. | Bal is Hind. for hair. | Bara sa, chowra sa a would : be very broad. a Vol. IX, No. 2.] (V.9.] - Vocabulary of Language of European Gypsies. 97 English. Gypsy. Hindustani. Brandy i | Tatto paani .. Hind. tatta is hot and pani water. Bride . Romni Compare Dom and Dom- Bridegroom Rom ny a Dom ‘yr is very comm ech verible with ‘* “d, i ni is a common Hind. feminine termination. Candle Mumbli Mum, wax. Chill Bauroshil — il, very damp. Chamber Kamora Jlergyman Rashi Rishi. a saint or sage. Coal (fire) Wongar, wangar.. Angar, embers. old hil : il. Comb, n Sena congli .. Kanght, kanghia. Comb, v Kon .. Kanghi, kav Coat ha ss Srink an overcoat. Come . | Av, Avel a. Copper _Hauro a Hari green. orn | Chiv rehun. Count Ghinya, gin | Gin*na ow vni aeet Create ow Kaulo chiriklo Kali chiryd, black bird. Crown (5s.) ansh kol anch, five. ross | Trihool Tirsil. Cry | Rov Rona, to cry Do, to | Kair ar. Dance . Kel .. | Khel, to play. Dark .. Kaulo .. | Kala sa. ie | Mer Mar. Did, | Kerdo Kar diya. Distance Lt pe | Dir. Distant | | og . | Jookel . | # decir is Kanjar Argot | fo i Pi and pind, to drink. bes as Sukha. By a Bengali, the Hind. word would — be pronounced very | like she Drunk .. Motto, mato Matwa l the TARR. vol. vit, No.7 98 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [February, 1913. English. Gypsy. | Hindustani. Chik .. Kichar, muddy; chhi! chhi! an exclamation, al dirty. Dirt, earth Ear “ | Kan, kaun Ka Eight . | Oitoo ae 4th. Eye is | Yok, yak -. | Ankh. Hiqual, alike .. Simen .. Saman. Face -. | Moa -- Munh. Famine .. Bauro bukaloben.. Bari bhuk, great hunger. Far Door ees) Dur Fasten .. Pander .. Bandhna Father .. Dad, ba .. | Abba, ba, athens dada, grandfat Feather .. | Pur, Por <7) Par Finger : | aoe e% | Angusht. Fire «| Yog . | Ag. First . | Yekto Be BL. on Fish | Matcho, matchi .. Machhi. machhia or | machhli Five ; | Pansh, pansch .. Panch. Flea -s | Pisham, pishen .. Pissit. Flour ! | Atos .+ Ala Foot ae a piro ‘Pair, paon, feet. Gentleman iiet Re is Jide : | Rakli ee a a form of trans- position common inall Indian dialects. Give .. | Del, De .. Dé (dena). Go Jova, jaw 6) ee 'In a grammar and vo cabulary of the ‘“‘Nawar or Zutts the Nomad Smiths of | alestine,’’ Journal of the rote — bier ia iii, No. 4, by R. A. Stewart pee ea M.A,, F.S.A given as examples of ords nominative nailer wh “any pei in consonants we see a caewksble similarity to modern colloquial Hindu- stani. English. Zuth, Hind. Tongue A g's. be 90. Fire . Ag Ag Flour .. Atos eee Grandmother .. Dad Tinder .. Cokmak ; : eek Sister ce BOK - Bahi ke Sa San Night . Arat Rat Vol. es . Y i 2.] Vocabulary of Language of European Gypsies, 99 English. Goat Gold ood * Grandmother .. Happiness glad) e Hark ! Harlot Head Hawker Hay Heart Heat & 3 < mon Hindustani. | | . Lavines bokro. | | Lavines is a com- Gypsy or | _ Romnichal piel — bakrs. i Soonakei | Kooshko | Bauri-dei, dade Bauro >of oe | | K capa ws | Shoonia ~— Lubni _ Shéro.. _ Bikomengro Kas, cas - | Zee ‘ | Tattoben Son ; “Kish happiness. | Dadi, grandmother ; dayya, cae ara. Bal. | In Kanjar Argot lubhar (see J.A.S.B. No. 7, _ vol. vii). Sir. Bikri-wala. | Kas, rushes, reeds. Ji, life, soul, spirit, mind. /Taita, very hot (col- Si ial). Sun Sing .. | Garna, to bury. | Bhik. ure Janna or chinna, to dis- tinguish. pie a wife. Lamar, lang, limp | Bar Palla. 100 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [February, 1913. English. Leather Lice , louse ong Vere long way.. Look Night Old . | Cham ss -- | St, Spode iateed .. | Shoon : i a Dooveri—doovori.. - Gairo, manoosh .. Hindustani. | Chamra. Jin, j002. Sun! dt - | Dur, far. «© Dur dit ae _ Dekh. , jovr. ‘Kam, love, desire. . | . | L . Pari ‘ume, full age. | Manus, colloquial Hind. wu. 2. Kona : | | Khaini. Mas _, | Mas, Mans. _Charvo, chara ; | Chherna : -Tood .. | Didh. | Chein . Chand. Dei _ | Dai, a foster-mother ; daya, oh mother. Rov .. Ro, Rona. Mooi et Mun. Booti . | Bahut. | bee Hind. kechar, pee | also chhi! = Chik pression pets Pit \ | | jabi chikar. ++ Meiro .. | Mert or mera. di Non .. Nanga >| Nav . | Nam. - | Sooy, su .. | Sus | Neye .. Naya | Raati, arat _. | Rat es, rar Be | Rais, revs. ok | Nak. Pooro | Purana, piri ‘wmr, full _age. Opré U par. | Yek | Ek. M | Mera | Dooka | Dukh Vol. IX, No. 2.] Vocabulary of Language of European Gypsies. 101 [V.8.] English. Gypsy. | Hindustani. Play -. | Kel .- | Khel: Plank .. | Kasht .. «| Math. Plunder .. | Loor » tthAbhe Pray .. Mong .. Mang, ask, beg, p Prostitute oo Lubni, Luoni .. | The Bacar dialodt ies | Lubhar, a wife. Cf. Sanskrit Lubha, to in- flame with lust, from which the English word ote is derived. Queen .. Rani et Rabbit .. Shoshi is ‘Sassi (Sanskrit sasak). | Gin ‘ Brishindo, brishen | Barish, barsat. Sans. | brish. Mod. Greek | | Bpegu:ov. Red .. Lolio, lullo de Red herring . Loli matcho e | tal machhi, red fish. Religious, con-. verted shel \sSherenfe vel | Hind. noble, eminent = | sharif Riband | Dor Y . Dori. Rich ‘| Bary Bara, great. Ring id Vong vongushi Angtth River 6 eee Darya Roast sie Pek .. Paka Rob ok .. | Ltt. Room .. _ Kamora | Kamra Sack, see bag . | Gono, gunno_..._- Of. gunny-bag.! Sans : _ gont. Mahratti, goni- | | gon, a sack, sackin ng. Saddle 2 We Ze Zen Lin. ! 1785, Tippoo’s Letters, 171. ‘‘ We saci two menrelg dir ect- ing them Tinpoo' despatch 1 000 goonies of grain to that person of mi - degree.’’ ate a article, Journal Gypsy Lore Society, p. 217, No. 3, vol. iv, by Augustus John, he gives a vocabulary from among which I have ick. eycies hehe Romani. English. Hindustani. Cuci Breast .. Chichi. Darana Fear - Dar. _ Kanglt Comb Kanghi. Pani, pai .. Water .. Pani. — Surt .. Knife .- Chhuri. Saddle Zin. Zen 102 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (February, 1913. gesy ) 3 7 English. | Gypsy. Hindustani. Salt se: | Lon Non, nin, lan, lon. Scent _ Soongimus ~ : stinks, ake Sunghna@, to smell, active mell smell. Scissors ee Cate hes a4 homes wa ee | Darya (the sea, a river): | barra pani, lana pani. Second | Duito | Diisra. See | Dik De kh. Sell . | Bikin, bik pele. bik gya, sold. Serpent | Sap ew _Siv oe sila, sewing. Sans. siv. Sheep-stealing . . | Bokra chorines .. | Bakri churana. Sheep .. Bokro, Bokra _ Bakri, a goat. Silver fie | oop | | CE. roopee, rupya. Sing .. | Ghit ghiv | Git, song. Single .. Yekind Rc | Aki la. Sister .. | Pén, bén .. Bahin it | Besh Bengali, bosho. Slay a _ Mar eep | Sov ooter .. So, sona. Smell (see scent) | Soon, soongomis. . aed Soul | Zee zs the heart, mind. Son-in-law! .,. _Jamuiro \ Sele Vist English. fae, Hindustani. Father oe Ce Abba, bap. Rain :» Brisindo -- Barish. See (sight) -. Dik .- Dikhai dék Dog Jukel .. Jookal is en ual Asie dog 0 the language of t S Kenjers of Up rem .. Jamuiro -. Jamai. To-morrow -. Kaliko .. Kal, kalko. To do, make .. Ker -. Kar, karna. Nos .. Nak . Nak. Thou Reged ky cpm Ka Vol. IX, No. 2.] Vocabulary of Language of European Gypsies. 103 [N.S.] English. Gypsy. Snake : | Sap Spirits . Tattoo pan Stomach oo Per Steal .« | Chor Stranger -- Perdas tra a | Poos, pus String -+ | Dori Sword ; | Bauro choort Tailor : | Sunengro Take Lel, lé Take care of Rak eeth 4 Danyaw oe Telescope Door-dikomengro. . There Odoi Thief Chor, choromengro looremengro in ero Throat .. | Karlo, curlo hou .- | Too, tootr y .. | Teero, tookt ot ; aes declare, an- swer, spea o-morrow noha te ongue too Town (see vil- lage) he Trout True Turkey Twenty Cok ma Pander, pand Pukker Koliko, collico Callico Chib, chiv jib Dan ge; = town or vil- Reies SLs at hi (the gentle folks” fish ) Tatcho .e Kaui rani (iit. black queen or lady) “ San Tate pani, lit. hot water. | Ohors, chor, a thief. | Pardesi | | eee | Hind. bars churt j is liter- Khabar dari sé rakh. Dan Dir pub. see ata dis- Chak mak. Band, bandhna, Pukarna, to call. kalko. Gaon, a village. Reis or rais ki machchhi, (the fish for gentlefolk). Sachcha. Pert, kali rani in Hind. ns black queen. 104 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [February. 1915. English. Gypsy. Hindustani. Two .. | Door heap #7) Uncle .. | Koko .- | Chacha (colloquial ka ka). Up, upon .. | Opre, apre re Upar. rine j | Mut. Urinate ) Muter, mutra | Mitna Js .. | Men -. Main. Very ‘. as boots -- Bahut. Village ‘ Gaon. Walk es | J al also peer, piriv Pair, foot or phirna and chal chalna, to walk. Warm ae | Tatto -» | Tatta (colloquial) or | Thhatta. Water cs, | We pant | ani. We ae | me Ps Weep “ ae «| RO, Whale es | Bauro matcho .. Bard pane te = big fish. Wheat sige | hiv Gehiin. Where io | wean oe tero ker = is your titmase) -» Kahan, kahan tera ghar: | | where is your house ? Who K .. | Kaon Wife . .. Romi, romni se Goiipais dom, domni: | see bride. Without >. |e (prep.) - | Bé. 00 -. Poo, -- Pashm, pashmina. Wood (plank) . eal | Rath. Wor pe « iN -» | Lafz. Worm ~-. | Re | Kira Year or Besh, ” Bereh Baras to-morrow) .. Koliko -- Kal, kal ka. Y onder -. | Odoi, adoi - Udhar. 1 Too, toot Pu. Your, yours Teer . | Tera. Numerals One -<| Fek ~. | BE. Two -. | Dooi E : Three Trin -- | Ten. Four | Stor «» | Char. ; 1 Compare Lavengro or Lavolil, the Word Book of Romany. Vol. oe No. 2.] Vocabulary of Language of European Gypsies. 105 [V.8.] English. — | Gypsy. Hindustani. | Five Pansh | Panch ix . Sho | e Seven ! . | Ajta .. | Sat Eight . | Oit | Nine .. Enneah (or desh sore- _ but ek). |v Ten .. | Desh -- | Das. Eleven .. | Desh ta yek .. Das aur ek. Twelve cet) spy oy ORE ‘ oie aD, Thirteen ; gy eile rs Fourteen jyangy MOOR yy 08Gr Fifteen >> 4 pands 5.9» panch Sixteen id. ae gp One ohhe Seventeen ste ~*~ Li gi ie ea: Eighteen 5 Si hy RA: Nineteen jp ae oe sorebut yek ,, das kam ék. Twenty | Bho, dos deshenc 2 Bae, oo Ba ace at that few of the English bypass are i og with this word—consequently when they w ish to ex press the mber seven without belie understood by outaiders, they say duo trins ta yeck, which in Hindustani would be do tin aur 2k. ee =f i “es j oh oe ee 11. Account of an Expedition among the Abors in 1853. By Rev. Fr. Kricx (of the Foreign Missions of Paris and Superior of the South Tibetan Mission). Translated by the Rev. A. Ginte, S.J. [Fr. Nicholas Michael Krick, born at Lixheim (France) in 1819, came out to India in 1850. From Gauhati, where he made a short stay, this plucky missionary set out alone, with his cross, his flute, his sextant and his médicine-box, on his tory of the Mishmis, he succeeded in passing the Tibetan fron- tier and settled in the village of ‘‘Sommeu”’ or Samey. But as short-lived: after three weeks the Yong forced missionaries were ruthlessly massacred by Kaissa, a Mishmi getting scarce; moreover will impart additional inte and customs. The following is the title-page of the book : en 1852/et d’ un voyage M. l’abbé Krick/De la Latry./ Paris/A la li é d’ Auguste Vaton/50 Rue du Bac/1854./ Fr. Krick’s relation on the Abors goes from p. 169 to G p. 201. —A.-G.] p- 170. p- 171. 108 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [February, 1913 CuaPpTer I, Journey among the Abors.—Difficulties to know their country. —Vain aitempts of the English to penetrate into it.—Ceremonies attending my reception.—General assembly at my arrival.—Super- and missionary from Europe.—Description of a fire.—Supersti- tious practices to extinguish it and drive away the fire-spirit.— Other accidents happening in the village attributed to my presence.— My expulsion decided. —Departure.—The village of Mimbo. Deak Sir, ! I sent to Mr. Foucaud* the journal of my expedition to Thibet ; to-day I send you the account of a shorter and less dangerous journey among the Abors or Padams. As n ropean has ever gained admittance into this country, it is difficult to have an idea of its geographical features. en, as you know, it would require long an familiar intercourse with a people, to give anything like an accurate description of its customs. Nothing short of master- ing its language and living its home-life would qualify one for suc ; This remark is never so true as when a traveller is called upon to describe a savage tribe such as the Padams; they are “unfamiliar with the first rudiments of the* most ordinary knowledge, they possess no written language, and profess the strictest abstention from all intercourse with strangers. I am therefore hardly qualified to speak of the Abors with authority, though I am the only foreigner who has stayed among them for some considerable time Since the English first occupied Assam 29 years ago, several agents of the East India Company have tried to gain access into this country, with a view, if possible, to enter into commercial relation with Thibet, and to ascertain whether the Siang, known to the English by the name of Dihong, is really the famous Zang-po, which crosses Thibet from East to West, and which has been such a puzzle to the geographers of the last centuries. But the Padams knew the ‘‘Timeo Danaos et dona ferentes.’’ ‘If we allow,’’ so they said, ‘‘ any English- In their Opinion, any white skin, any nose somewhat rotruding is of English make. This will make you understand the trouble I had in getting their consent to receive me. My ' This account was sent to Dr. Bousquet, surgeon at th Necker Hospital, Paris, under whom Fr. Krick had taken some lessons in medi- cine. . 2 Professor of Tibetan. Vol. IX, No. 2.] | Fr. Krick among the Abors (1853). 109 [N.8.] cross so similar to theirs and my reputation of a French priest were my only passport. My reception was accompanied with ceremonies peculiar enough to find place in this letter Eighteen young men met me at the foot of the mountain. No sooner did I move on, than the two youngest of the band proceeded to cover my body with leaves, whilst singing words utterly unintelligible to me. They meant of course to purify ted with all sorts of devilries and monsters pierced with arrows, and in striking attitudes that baffle description. This piece of architecture was fearful to behold, as well it might be, for it through the first barricades; the most vicious devils would retreat before such a terrific uproar. The spirits being thus settled to everybody’s satisfaction, I had now to lend myself to the curiosity of the crowd. In an instant, I was surrounded by a circle of eager men and women, studying every detail of my figure. I was re eated- low, and his flabby ears, admiration. The crowd kept watch the whole night ; fleas were o less anxious to get to my. skin; with so many guests, sleep of course could not be very long. ext any. general ‘abet which the whole village was convoked. The six chiefs sat down in a circle, right in the The president of this uncouth senate sit at his right, and without previous ad with a reed helmet of monstrous size, s hair, and another of bear’s fur, two bear’s tusks crossing eac n mM} This was the signal that opened the meeting. After p. 175. p- 176. 110 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (February, 1913. was to accompany me, I demanded permission to wait for him. «Yes, yes,” they all replied with one voice, ‘‘ and if you cure our sick, we shall keep you for ever, and we shall build you a house,’’ and in evidence of their sincerity, the chiefs put the guard-house at my disposal. No sooner was I settled down in my new home, than I rit the appearance of a hospital of incurables: here is a young woman whose arm is covered with a horrible ulcer. ‘‘ When evil spirit got hold of me, and he has done his work.’’ Another patient has his stomach swollen to awful dimensions. I see cures, they would not believe me- y power was in the touch of my hand. And so they went on repeating: “‘ You are the most powerful Dondai (priest) ; 2° “‘spirit can resist you ; y this the practical consequ Vol. No. 2.] Fr. Krick among the Abors (1853). 11) [N.8.} thing with my hand, even the most disgusting wounds. I was not given a minute’s rest. At every moment some one came rushing to me: ‘‘ Father, some medicine! Come quick !’’ At early dawn I went out to see my patients only to return at midday thoroughly fagged. ‘from the common house. The next morning, the presid came to inform me of what had happened. ‘‘ Migom,’’ he ‘‘ Migom, we have at last made those cowards understand the ‘folly of their behaviour, and that, instead of expelling you, “we ought to keep you to look after our sick. Besides, are ** you not our father ? Did you not, at an early period, bring p. 178. “us the blessing of the cross? And now, after having been ‘‘round the world, you have been restored to us. When you ‘‘ will have mastered our tongue, who knows what new benefits **you will have to bestow on us? Therefore stay, it is the ‘‘ wish of the whole village.’’ ls But the devil, who has no worse enemy than the mission- ary, was not to be so easily beaten. Two days later, woeet t prevented the accident. p. 189, p. 181. 112 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (February, 1913. The next thing to do was to imprison the spirit of fire on the scene of the disaste~. The burnt houses were hedged in and surrounded with devil-scaring emblems. In spite of these precautions, it was feared that the devil might escape and take refuge into some odd corner of the village, so the very next day all the men, armed to the teeth, with beating of drums, and fearful howls, set out in pursuit of the devil, far into the jungle. The two families whose dwellings had been burnt down, were banished for one year, for if any of their members were to set foot in a house within those twelve months, the building would not escape from the flames. ; Useless to add that my presence was made responsible for all those accidents. The loss of two mitous (wild cows) sus- tained by my next neighbours increased the public distrust. Great, however, was the embarrassment of those poor people ; on the one hand, they had found in me a friend, ready to do anything to bring relief to their bodily as well as to their spiri- tual ills; on the other hand, fright chilled their attachment to The diplomats of the village could not bear to see me settling so close to Assam ; as for me, I delayed my departure s much as I could, as I was anxious to give to my confrére, Mr. Bourry, sufficient time to join me. Eventually, on Good Friday, whilst all the huntsmen were gathered at my house for a hunting-meet, Lendemk, the great chief, said to me :—‘* I order you to leave the village to- ‘“ morrow.’’—** All right,’’ Isaid. ‘‘I had come to give you “my affection, and to offer you my services, but as you refuse ‘“my benefits, I will carry them elsewhere.’’——‘‘ Oh! I don’t ‘* the reason that induces me to go,’ I answered. ‘‘ The very rst accident that happens in the village, you will attribute it to m 3? 20’ (Greenwich). _ Then I cast a long parting glance towards the village of Mimbo which I was so sorry to leave. | Vol. ie bg 2.| Fr. Krick among the Abors (1853). 113 S.] The village was situated at a height of 600 ft. above the foot of the mountain. Towards the South, the eye rests on the smooth plains of Assam, where the famous Siong or Dihong P. 182. of the Assamese shoots up, reflecting the rays of the sun across the sky Now a few words on the race to which the Padams be- long and on the marvellous signs which I have discovered among them. CHAPTER II. To what race do the Padams belong ?—T heir origin as told by p. 183. themselves.—The four kinds of crosses worn by this people.—T heir opinion on the meaning and origin of this symbol.—Conjectures on the subject.—Costumes.—Ornaments.— W eapons.— Government. nners. Hospitality —Religion.—Their extreme superstitiousness.— Pen- ances to appease the demons.—Character of the Padam.—Some words of his language. The Padams stand midway between the Mongolian and the Caucasian races. They are beardless; hair and eyes ar black ; the skin is brown; the eyes stand at right angles with the nose. The forehead is flat, the face broad, the nose short, the cheek-bones somewhat prominent, and stature moderate. This 1s how they account for their origin: °’ When the ‘ earth was but a mass of mud, God came down from Heaven ; ‘‘ with a handful of mud he made two brothers and two sisters. p. 184. ‘‘ The Padams descend from the elder, and the Miris from the Hence the Padams are a privileged race, ble on the battle-field.’ en; the pattern ristian origin.! The majority 1 We venture to suggest that in this e or 1 marks Fr. Krick was unduly influenced by his zea as a missionary. here is, we , no reason to atte from Christian sources, as the cross —one of th est designs imagin- rm or another in all sava, ornamentation. on Abor men or women are iar ck’s observation would lead one to detailed in Sir George Dunbar’s ose, and ail will be found full h cua tet af the Abors and Galongs.— sup forthcoming memoir on the anthropology of J. Coggin-Brown and S. W. Kemp. p. 185. 114 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (February, 1913. > colour §{{; others wear the ordinary cross + with the vertical beam running along the nose, and the cross-bar above the eyes. Others wear the Lorraine-cross +. with the upper cross-beam on the forehead, and the lower lying across the bridge = mh nose. hers again wear the Maltese cross on their ca : ; The women have the Maltese cross tattooed on the upper lip, ? and on their legs the Lorraine-cross with two St. Andrew’s crosses drawn on either side, as shown in figure XX#XX have as a rule their chin tattooed with — vertical and parallel lines; the women have five or seven ~ them, as the case may be, on the chin, and four on the al ip, two on either side of a cross, and the whole set is bracketed. Srepcee) “* once received into heaven.’? ««B "a “1 diaowi ‘‘ sign?’ T asked; ‘ Where is he to go ?’’—-** God will dis ‘him and cast him off,’? ! a letter, dated Saikwock, Ist December, 1851, Fr. Krick thus describes his first interview with the Abors :— 5 shies September I landed at Saikwock, situated along Captain Smith, commander of the ly. he v » Captain Wath, who was organising an ae pedition for the protection of the Dihong gold-washers. invited me d see me safe to Tibet. ‘‘ We can hd ; **he would come to grief,—and we are respon for our guests.’? a struck me most during this conference was, ae their Savage dress, the typically European Physiognomy of those peopte._ But I soon noticed, at a closer examination, most yovdoetacr 30 @ cross neatly designed and painted in blue on t re ©m wore it on the forehead, others on the are: i had a double horizontal beam, the vertical line runn tattoo-marks: it faces. Most of th of these crosses Bch in Ree Vol. ee No. 2.] Fr. Krick among the Abors (1853). 115 [N.S. I may be allowed to hazard here a suggestion with regard to the origin of these signs. It is my opinion, and all those who have come in contact with the Padams agree with me that the pattern, as 1 have described it, is the Christian cross. These are briefly my reasons : lst. No other marks are tattooed on their bodies./ 2nd. Their crosses are altogether similar in shape to p: 186. our four crosses : the ordinary cross, the Maltese, the St. Andrew’s and the Lorraine crosses. 3rd. The spiritual meaning attached to them by the natives strongly confirms my conjecture. What then would be the meaning of the vertical lines, always numbering 3, 5 or 7, with which they tattoo their chins ? Might not the number 3 be a reminiscence of the Blessed Fr. Athanasius Kircher in his in-folio bearing the title ‘‘ La Chine illustrée’’ mentions several missions established in Thibet, China and Tartary from the time of the Apostle St. Thomas. This book was printed at Amsterdam in 1665. Healso published a map, roughly drawn, but giving accurately enough the chief towns and districts ; on it he traced the route followed by Frs. Francis! Dorville and John Grabére* from Peking to Goa,’ throvgh China,/Tartary, Thibet and Bengal. P- 187. These Fathers travelled from Lassa to the North of the Padam country, whilst according to their information Fr. Andrada went as far as the Thibetan town Radoc. Now we are told that in this country they discovered evident traces of the Christian religion, proving to a certainty that the Gospel had been preazhed to those tribes. They speak of three men who bore the names of Dominic, Francis and Anthony.* from the forehead down to the tip of the nose; others had only one single cross-beam running either across the nose or above the eves. h : I made them understand I was a priest, a teacher of prayer, and that I had come to explain to them the mysterious power of the cross i i i in turn Cf. Annales dé la Propag. de la Foi, 1852 (1853 2). ! His istian name was Albert. 2 To be spelt: Griiber or Grueber. 8 Not Goa, but Agra. 4 Neither Father A. de Andrade nor Fathers Dorville and Grueber had anything to do with the Abors. Their journey lay hundreds of miles 116 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (February, 1913. In 1826 Colonel R. Wilcox, on discovering the use of the since the twelfth century there existed a mission in the South of Thibet among a tribe called Shokhaptra.! d by Grueber in a@y from A The three native Christians mentio one Kircher’s China illustrata (Amsterdam, 1667, not 1665) must have been they Our Chris ee in pad ak 8 te the wears 1661- 63, when a aga wren of Portuguese, English, Dutch and Armenian urers helpe Jumla in his conquest ‘of A episode is related very spiritedly in Relation du see d’un Vaisseau landois, Nommé Hollan ’ mé Ter Schelling fay copy is a fragment of a collec ae PP. vi+131-276), pp. 250 sqq. The treasures end i pee a tombs of t gs of Assam were prodigious. Mir Jumla himself ca ; way are illio he Po a (half-castes) settled at Rangamati, a yg mati. 0 C i neighbourhood before 1695, the Chr isti d number of similar instances, ranging over countries very far apart, — the explanation of which is extremely c ] As suggested by Mes J. Coggin- rown an: : gi emp, the use of crosses as tattoo-marks 4 t have not the slightest Miiinaxion with Christianity; on the other hand, hould is no imipeaeibie that the Ab have borrowed the sign fro pe Tibetans. it bee d more recognized that the sigh © he cross—not stitka—found among the aad she etans is due to the influence of Nestorianism, an influence all too little arya edged heretofore. 1 refer the reader to the Lodges Sinologigues ae ? - GaILnarD, §.J., Croi « et Swastika en Chine, Edn., Changhai, ni primerie de la Mi ission Catholique, fois pp. 154-155, where Fr. Krick observations are mention Hi. 1[E to very tel a ely gone tianity in India would like know whence Father Krick sae ok t this informati ist ? Is anything kno +? about the date and authorship of that t map or again about any of Wilco Vol. IX, No. 2.] Fr. Krick among the Abors (1853). 117 [N.S.] Now, I have entered Thibet by the South-Eastern frontier, without coming across any traces of our holy religion: several other travellers entered it by the South-West with no greater success. So, it is quite possible that the Shokhaptras be a tribe occupying the South of Thibet, in the vicinity of the adam country. As a matter of fact, I have often been told by the Padams that there existed towards the North, before reaching Thibet, a tribe which shunned all intercourse with the Padams, and from which they pretended to have received the p- 188. cross. The Padams, being their next neighbours, must have been struck by the importance those people attached to the cross, and may have adopted it for their own use without tattoo themselves with the cross ; or anticipating, perhaps, that the missionary’s death would leave them without a pastor, the natives may have wished in this manner to preserve a precious deposit of their faith. I once met a Thibetan who was marked with the same sign; on my asking where he had learned to wear it, he pointed towards the Padam country, adding that he had received it from the savage mountaineers. ress, government and customs will not be devoid of interest for a Frenchman; so a few details on that subject will, I expect, be welcome. I have very little to say about their mode of dressing, as their clothing is reduced to a minimum somewhat too primitive; however, the full dress sometimes p. 189. worn by men deserves a short notice. It is composed of eleven pieces : Ist, a loin cloth ; 2nd, a in front, and sprinkled all over with ; 3rd, a cuirass camel hair; it covers the chest and t assing through a hole in the centre, and is ate cad ae Fi ni t the thrust of the lance ; are imported from Thibe resemblance to the hatch sword; 7th, a small basket ; iis be identified? Fr. A. Desgodins, the Tit Se ee a@ Cia who had travelled all over speaking i < «6 i lower part of the Tsangpo as f ee ee See tage (inhabitants of the South) ts of the South).’’ From the lama’s godins did not hesitate to con were the Abors. Proc. A.S.B., 18: p- 1 Possibly the Nepalese kukri.—[A. p 190. p.19. ft, p. 192, 118 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. {February, 1913. into an umbrella when it rains; 9th, bow and arrows ; 10th, a long knife; llth, a pouch containing tobacco, a pipe, @ tlint- stone and similar articles. Neither women nor men are fond of long hair; they do not allow it to grow beyond 2 or 3 inches in length. The women wear heavy yellow necklaces, iron or wi a bracelets ; but the most peculiar article of their ornamenta apparel is their ear-rings ;—these are long spirals of wire shee two inches thick, sufficiently heavy to tear the ears, an stretch them out of shape, so that the ornaments dangle on the shoulders. The men wear but one kind of necklace; it 18 adams are not a nomadic people, but possess large and fine villages. Their system i Women have no share in the government ; they cannot even set foot in the council-room. ivery male, reaching member of any assembly. six chiefs elected for life b y the people, sanctioned by the council, and promulgated by the president. Every decision is suppos to come from the people ; the chiefs have no right but to ap- prove and enforce it. Hence, the people proposes, the council sanctions, and the president promulgates. - Every ing, all the men gather in the spacious council- room to discuss the topics of the day, which means: (1) t0 inform one another of what has been seen or heard ; (2) 1 discuss the political questions put forth by one of the chiefs; (3) to settle what the village will do on the next day, for ye is understood that no one is free to dispose of his time as he ee ee eee l } 3: ibes 4 similar ornament eee ree aes eas eet of Manipur, p. 32, describe re often inserted (into the pierced lobes) and the yo advantage of an empty cartridge case as a pers will make Fr. Krick’s meaning more intelligible.—[ A. G.] Vol. IX, No. 2.) Fr. Kriek among the Abors (1853). 119 [NV.S.] thinks fit; his daily work is cut out, discussed and officially decreed by the majority of the council. Hence, every evening, between 10 and 11 o’clock, boys are sent about the village shouting at the top of their voices : ‘‘ To-morrow, tiger hunt ! ‘To-morrow fishing! To-morrow, field Jabour! To-morrow, ‘““genna, t.e. obligatory holiday !”’ These injunctions are obeyed to the letter, for this people p. 193. is as law-abiding and respectful to the powers that be, as it is proud of its liberty. To call a Padam a slave is an insult that would make this proud mountaineer gnash his teeth and grasp at his bow. The council-house is also used for extraordinary gatherings convoked to deal with a sudden emergency, such as was my men above 17 or 18. All of them, except the married men, sleep at the barracks. : The Padams are hunters by taste, and farmers by neces- sity; yet, they are excellent cultivators. The roads are planted on both sides with fruit-trees. The only farming-tools they know are their arms and their hands, and their backs are their only means of transport. Yet their granaries are well stored with rice, gums, maize, bobossa and several other products. | The bow is their favourite weapon, and they use it with great dexterity. It is their vade-mecum, the first toy of the p. 194 child, who shoots from morning till night. m el one But if their dwellings are roughly built, their athena Our admiration. Their construction is solid ; the floor 18 3 Fe network of rattan palm twigs, and so elastic that it yields to the pressure of the foot and rises like a spring. « ommerce is insignificant. The following are the pagent ak animals: Ist, the mitou or wild cow, SO ee a pete es sively reared for the slaughterhouse ; 2nd, small ros at much appreciated by the Padams; 3rd, fowls; 4th, dogs, s and lean, but excellent hunters. Rice and herbs form their staple food; they aM me without either salt or butter. Meat and fish are p. 196. p. 197 120 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (February, 1913. popular dishes. The ordinary drink is fermented rice beer or bobossa water ; pure water is never used at meals. The Padams are naturally hospitable; the guest is first expected to give a present to make friends with his host, but it is the meal that sanctions and seals friendship for ever; as soon as you have touched food, ‘‘ you are friends till the sun falls,’’ as these savages are wont to say. ect for old age is pushed to its extreme limits, a calamity is dreaded as much as the curse of an old man. One day, as I called on the chief Leudouck, I saw an old man whom the chief had called in to the sick-bed of his child. 1 asked him whether he wasa priest. ‘‘ No,’’ said the chief, ‘* but the words of an old man are a powerful blessing ; God endows it with a divine efficacy.’’ Old age is, as you see, a mos desirable condition among the Padams ; all honours are due a stone rolls from the mountain, if a leaf drops from a tree, it must be a spirit on a stroll; if the wind blows through the forest, the gods are indulging some healthy exercise; if the wind shakes the trees and howls through the valley, the deos or spirits are quarrelling. : The priest makes it his constant business to appease the wrath of the good spirits and to fight it out with the bad ones. The soul survives the body and is in its future life re- warded for its virtues and punished for its crimes. Priests and t wonders a man works, the events he predicts, are so many signs of his vocation to the priesthood. he priest expels the spirits and forces them to restore the soul to the dying man. This is how this extraordinary feat is performed :— - t a crowd of singing and howling attendants all standing around the patient, the officiating priest, armed with a Vol. 1X, No. 2.] Fr. Krick among the Abors (1853). 121 [N.S.] long sword, performs a wild dance. Without ceasing to whirl sapidly round, he throws in the air a handful of rice, the grains p. 198. of which go in search of the soul of the patient. As the grains drop on the blade of his sword, this skilful performer catches the soul in its flight, proudly shows it to the onlookers, fast- ened on the point of his sword in the shape of an unfledge bird, and runs to tie it on the top of the patient’s head. If the soul returns to the body, the patient will not die; but he would be hopelessly lost, should the bird succeed in freeing itself and fly away on its miraculously acquired wings and feathers My in nformants were sorely disappointed at my incredu- lity, and swore that every sine word of theirs was the truth ure and simple. ‘‘ We have often witnessed the facts as we “« describe awed so they asia, ‘* and we can’t understand how, ‘* priest’s power. The first time a man will fall sick in the ‘* village, we shall take you to him, and you will see the “< truth for yourself.’’ What appears more certain and more tangible are 404 penances and privations these ag are ready to undergo propitiate or appease the spirits. They unhesitatingly ce: p. 199. y mortification and trial, except that of visiting the sick; for to see a sick man, or to have wen tose 3 to do with hi would be running into the j jaws of a bad spiri » When I was staying at Mimbo, the silken went out cutting rattan twigs for the construction of a bridge ; iit of acy. The bridge was erie sale the protection of a ae spirit who received sacrifices to his heart’s content. To ave proof of still greater generosity, the whole village made genna,! t.c., took a three days’ h holiday in honour of the spirits. odour of sanctity with the deos. At the birth ‘of a child, the whole family is impure for a number of days varying accord- ding to oe sex of the child. ts do not marry before the age of 18, though it cord p- 200. happen ant a younger bride be received into the bridegroo family and treated as a daughter of the house. For the first five or six years of her marriage life, the wife continues to es The N Tribes of Manipur, p. 164), : srteasehe ig Heh vat ine aa s ‘anything forbidden or orohibi ibi eee Tt is is likely pin among apr Abors, genna is but a taboo upon p- 201. 122 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [February, 1913.] stay with her parents, unless she begets children in the mean- - time and is thus entitled to set up a separate household. Should the parents disapprove of the alliance, the girl may leave them and marry lawfully without their consent. e Padam is very active, jolly, a lover of freedom and independence, generous, noble-hearted, plain-spoken, more honest than the average Oriental, not over-moderate in ne and drinking, at least as far as quantity is concerned. I hav not lived long enough among them to be able to speak of their morality. I confess I have never been able to discover what they understand by modesty; they seem to possess much of the child’s simplicity, and Mimbo is undoubtedly less cor- rupt ere Paris. Dancing is the bodily exercise these people love m I nerbwith join a short glossary as a specimen of their language. Man -. Ammie. I (nominative case) .. Gno. Woman imeu. Me (genitive case) .. Gnok. ale .. Milbong. ,»» (accusative case) .. Gnom. Female .. Neng-eu You (sing., nom. case).. No Youngman.. Jame , (genitive case) ok i mS immoo me __,, (accusative case) .. Nom Old man .. Midjing. He (nomin. case Bu. Old Woman.. Eudjo. ,»» (genitive case) Buk Friend .. Sangue. »> (accusat. case) . B Wood .. Isching .. Gnoloa Water ri Si. You . Noloo Boiled rice.. Amu. They Booloo Fire : eu Sun ee .. Domie. House .- Eukoumeu. Moon “3 « which are contained in texts such as We can attack the important question of the Jatakas, which we know to be no of commentators, truly represents the ich have to be presupposed In especially lucky cases the tradition iti rates with thern traditions, and by Merle: ith the southern and nor beautifully done in the case of the JA th six tusks. It is true that we ee ee See Vol. IX, No. 3.] A Note on Buddhism. 129 [N.S] Jataka texts in their entirety were not a separate possession of the southern literature, but a general possession of Buddhism as a whole. Is there any hope of our being put in possession of a Northern Jataka corpus also? Brian Houghton Hodgson mentions among the manuscripts which are said to exist in Nepal a Jatakamala of about 560 sections. This number approximately agrees with the number of the Pali Jatakas, ut is somewhat higher. May we consider this as pointing to the existence of a northern recension of the entire Corpus of Jatakas ? Is there any hope of the manuscript to which Hodgson’s note refers being actually found? The hope, I am afraid, is only a faint one. An enquirer who himself had the most ample opportunities to experience good and bad fortune in his search for MSS. in Nepal, M. Sylvain Levi, writes to me : ‘*Qne can no more direct one’s search for MSS. in Nepal towards some particular work, than the fisherman can choose his particular fish.’’ He may be right. But should we on that we some day succeed in getting hold of a northern book that —truly my imagination is not sufficiently powerful to form an adequate idea of the splendour of the triumph which that would mean ! B must break off. I have attempted shortly to indicate the direction which the finds and researches of recent times have as it seems to me assigned to the treatment of some of the fundamental problems of Buddhistic research. Work done in India or in Asia generally, and work done in Europe—both are jointly contributing towards our advance. And if to-day I have the great good fortune of standing at the place which forms the centre of all the work that is done in that has ad el and is being done, by this Society. Ladies and Gentlemen, be pleased to receive my sincerest thanks for the kindness with which you made it possible for me to meet you in this place and have afforded me an opportunity co giving utterance before you to what necessarily engrosses the thought of a European Indologist coming amongst you—what engrosses his thought and what moves his heart. - eg ct aye eat nie Sa 13. Action of Stannic Chloride on Phenylhydrazine. By Jir—EnDRa Natu RaksHIT. The preparation of phenylhydrazine by the reduction of diazonium chloride with the simultaneous oxidation of stannous chloride to stannic chloride in aqueous solution (Meyer, Lecco, Ber, 1883, 16, 2976) is a proof that the reducing property of phenylhydrazine as salt is less than that of stannous chloride in solution. This investigation was undertaken with a view to ascertain whether the reaction is reversible under different conditions, with the base in the free state and stannic chloride Both phenylhydrazine and stannic chloride being liquids, no solvent is necessary to bring about the reaction; on the contrary, when they are brought into contact the reaction commences with such vigour and so much heat is evolved, that if any compound like diazonium chloride were formed it would not exist at that temperature; necessarily, the formation of such compounds can only be inferred by isolating their pro- ducts of decomposition. Diazonium chloride decomposes ac- cording to the equation :— C,H,N : NCl=C,H,Cl + Nz. ack to diazonium salt the Now if phenylhydrazine comes b ming that following equation will represent the reaction, assu stannic chloride becomes stannous chloride, giving off two atoms of chlorine,— C,H,HN.N H, + 2Cl,-—> C,H,N: NCl+3HCl te OFLC + Ns. Even if there be formed a compound analogous to C,H, N,Cl, Cu, Cl, (Erdmann, Annalen, 1893, 272, 144) that would not be likely to decompose, yielding chlorobenzene, at tha igh temperature :— C,H,;N Cl, SnCl, =C,H,Cl + N, + SnCl,. The fact that chlorobenzene is not a product of the reac- tion is however no proof that diazonium chloride is not an 132 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [March, 1913. intermediate product. Chlorine in combination with phos- orus, arsenic, or boron does not decompose the base but forms definite compounds (Michaelis, Oster, Annalen, 1892, 270, 123), whereas stannic chloride causes complete rupture of it. Again, the decomposition of the diazonium salt in the presence of a hydroxyl group is much influenced by the radical with which it is combined. Phenol and nitrogen are forme by its decomposition in aqueous solution :— C,H,N,Cl + H,O=C,H,OH + N, + HCl. n alcoholic solution the products are not quite similar, the alcohol causing partial reduction of benzene diazonium — salt, being itself oxidized to aldehyde (Griess, Annalen, 1866, 137,69; 18:3, 217, 189: Ber... 1876, 9, 899). (1) C,H,N: NCl+C,H,OH =C,H,OH + N, + C,H,Cl. (2) C,H.N: NCl + CH,CH,OH=C,H, +N, + HCl + CH,.CHO. The formation of benzene may be increased by reducing the diazotate with alkaline stannite (Friedlander, Ber, 1889, 22, 587). . Under conditions such as will be described, pure benzene is formed by the action of stannic chloride on phenylhydrazine ; this can be explained either with the assumption of the inter- mediate formation of diazonium chloride or without it. The following equation will represent the reaction if diazonium chloride is formed :— ; RHN.NH, + 2Cl,=RN: NCl+3HCI. Now since autoreduction is possible in the case of phenyl- hydrazine (Chattaway, Trans. Chem. Soc., 1911, 99, 404), the diazonium salt may next take up hydrogen from another .molecule of phenylhydrazine :— . R % NeW ee a eee nN: No! Hi Nise oP roel H | The intermediate formation of diazonium salt is probable, considering the explosive violence with which the reaction takes place. : The other equation that may represent the reaction is— C,H. J, De es N. N | a eae, fe ae but such behaviour of chlorine of stannic chloride is not ex- pected from the existence and properties of the molecular compounds of ammonia and stannic chloride, Sn Cl, (NH), = O,H,+N,+2HCl. Vol. IX, No. 3.] Action of Stannic Chloride. 133 (NV .S.] (Persoz, Ann, Chem. Phy. 1830, (2) 44, 322) and Sn Cl, (NH), (Rose, Annalen, Ph. Chem., Pogg. 1832, 24, 163). It is very interesting that ammonia forms a stable com- pound with stannic chloride, whereas hydrazine, so similar to it, undergoes complete rupture. thing, however, can be inferred from the liberation of hydrochloric acid; according to the first method two mole- diazonium salt or not cannot be quite concluded and remains to be settled by further experiments. EXPERIMENTAL. In a litre distilling flask, 20 c.c of phenylhydrazine is poured; it is then fitted with a condenser and kep im- mersed in a large quantity of water. 15 c.c of redistilled being filled with dense white fumes. After the fumes have subsided the cold water is replaced by boiling water. It is so arranged that the whole of the flask is heated with steam. . a all of which distilled at 80° C. The gas evolved was found to be nitrogen. If the flask is not carefully cooled during the reaction, so much heat is disengaged that part of the phenyl- bydrazine undergoes decomposition according to Chattaway's (loc. cit.) equation,— 2RHN.NH,=R.NH, +N, +NH;+RH. For the quantitative estimation # the evolved nitrogen the apparatus figured below has been designed. 0-2 c.c of phenylhydrazine was placed in the flask mga hed of stannic cloride in the tap funnel. The temperature a e water bath surrounding the flask was 23° C, that of air being 23°C. After adjusting the level, the reading of the burette contraction of the gas 134 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [March, 1913. practicable. Next the temperature of the bath was regulated to 23° C and the gas generated was found to be 25 c.c at 23°C. lated percentage for C,H,N_H., HC1 is 19°37. aa ees the substance is pure phenylhydrazine hydro- privet wee different experiments, Adding Seiad of pepe of shen thea, been performed, and the ratio of the molecules and nes = wk phenylhydrazine hydrochloride, benzene the li Ae n has been found to be 2: 1: 1:1 varying within taad es Wee cy, error. Blank experiments have ) determine whether stannic chloride decomposes Sar ylhydrazine hydrochloride or not, and it has been ound at it has no action under ordinary conditions. The vadou “ase ea ak. cs saa RiP ies pOrinidiian' pressure of the benzene liberated by the reaction has a ae eotien Ptagrove in the calculation and the figures for nitro- yielded similar peaaile: eee Nigh, Reversl: otter, deter Vol. eae 3.] Action of Stannic Chloride. 135. After the decomposition of one molec : ule of phenylhydra- zine two molecules of hydrochloric acid are seed: ene C,H,H.N.NH, + SnCl, = C,H;.H + N, + 2HCl + SnCl, and if these two molcules of hyd ic aci i ydrochloric acid require two vem of free phenylhydrazine for their patuminlics the nal reaction would be represented by the equation— 3C,H,H.N, + SnCl,=C,H, + N, + 2C,H;H;N,HCl + SnCl, but what really happens, as can be deduced from the data obtained, is represented by the equation— 2C,H,H,N, + SnCl,=C,H, + N, + SnCl, + C,H,H;:N,, 2HCl. chloric acid ; consequently the formation of some double salt with the chlorides of tin was suspected. Thorough search was cadmium, cobalt, zinc, mang e, ao a by Moitessier (Centralblatt 1897, 2, 297), but none as ] i have been combined with two molecules of hydrochloric acid, and this conclusion is further supported by the existence of two salts of the base with hydrofluoric acid, — C,H,H,N;,HF and C,H;H,N,,2HF (Thieme, Annalen, 1893, 272, 209). The acid salt with hydro- chloric acid decomposes in aqueous solution, neutral salt and free acid being formed. have much pleasure in expressing cher P. C. Ray for the interest he has ta ions. my best thanks to ken in my investiga- CHEMICAL LABORATORY, Presidency College, Calcutta. 14. ‘* The A-ch’ang (Maingtha) Tribe of Hohsa-Lahsa, iinnan.’’ ! : By J. Coeain Brown, M.Sc., F.G.S., Geological Survey of India. [With Plate IX.] The A-ch’angs are one of the smaller groups of the lesser known tribes of the Burma-China frontier, whose exact position a matter of controversy. In view of the growing tendency of some Indo-Chinese anthropologists to include them with one or other of the various branches of the Tai family, it appears to me to be desirable to collect the scattered references we have regarding this interesting group of people, and to reconsider the question of their origin in the light of later knowledge gained during a short residence in their headquarters, the twin States of Hohsa and Lahsa. These twin States are situated about Lat. 24° 27’, Long. 97° 56’; ata height of some 4,500 feet above the level of the sea. They lie across the Burma border and are governed by semi- independent chieftains who own allegiance to the Chinese Re- public, being in the days of the late Manchu dynasty under the direct jurisdiction of the T’ing of Téng-yiieh, whose immediate superior was the prefect, or Fu of Yiing-ch’ang Fu. This pre- fecture formed part of the ‘‘ J-hsi-dao’’ or western division of the province of Yiinnan. Both States are in the valley of the Nam-hsa, a tributary of the Ta-ping which breaks through the Kachin frontier hills in a narrow gorge, and enters the Irra- ever, include tracts of country in the surrounding hills, though the true A-ch’ang population is confined to the plain. High bounding ranges rising to 6,000 and 7, feet, separate the States on the north from the Chinese-Shan State of Kanai (Méng-na), and on the south from Mong-wan. It would be forest-clad slopes of the almost uninhabited frontier ranges further west. ‘ The whole of the plain is devoted to rice cultiva- 1 Published by the permission of the Director, Geological Survey o India. . 138 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (March, 1913. tion which is carried on to an intense degree, the villages being removed to the lower slopes of the bounding ridges that none of the available paddy land may be lost. Seen from the sum- mits of the hills around, this well-watered valley seems rich enough, but as a matter of fact the appearance is deceptive, for the soil is poor and the crops suffer accordingly. The rice grown is not sufficient for the needs of the population, and as a consequence large numbers of the inhabitants emigrate year by year to neighbouring States, and across the frontier into the towns and the villages of Upper Burma and the Northern Shan States, where they are well known as the blacksmiths and car- penters who travel over the country in the cold weather seek- ing for employment. Such conditions are also aggravated by Chinese immigration, for the State has a high altitude and a mild and healthy climate, so that the ubiquitous Ytmnnanese highlander can live and prosper therein. As a general rule the elevation of the Shan States in Yiinnan is low enough, and the climate bad enough, to prevent wholesale Chinese settling, and the Shans are left mainly to themselves for the greater part of the year. The A-ch’angs have been referred to as gipsies, nomads, born wanderers, and great travellers; it is hoped that the explanation given here will end these fallacious descriptions, for such peoples never leave the boundaries of their own special territories ‘‘en masse,’’ except under the unalterable influence of some very strong external pressure. The Chinese element of the population is powerful and is tending to become more so every day. Chinese-Shans are also found in the valley, whilst the hills around are peopled by Chingpaw and a few Lisu and Palaungs. From the days of the eatly writers on the tribes of Burma until the present time, the origin and relationships of the A-ch ang have puzzled the scientific observer. John Anderson in 1871 gave the first connected account of the tribe, but he was so uncertain about its affinities that he hesitated to speak with any degree of confidence.! A smiliar spirit of uncertainty pervades all literature, thus Morgan Webb has this year stated that it is ‘‘highly questionable,” and a “matter of much hesitation,’’ to classify the A-ch’angs with the Marus, Lashis nie i who are of undoubted and identical Tibeto-Burman An A-ch’ang when questioned at first calls himself a Shan. This is due to the fervour of the proselyte, and also to the natural desire on the part of the smaller tribal clans in the law- less frontier regions, to ally themselves with some more powe!- ful faction for safety’s sake. The Shan himself does not hesi- A ee of Ree bo P- 100. (Numerals in brackets refer to works quoted at end ? (2), pp. 201 and 263. Journ., As. Soc. Beng., Vol. 1X, 1913. PLATE IX ‘ ye 1" Nan oS ng air ie ward VW \e9 whe Se iS ln eae 4 ortie, 2 ‘. ~ awrraglihio re my eA is , x ig A0t7 Erg fic & Zi ieee ie yuig cea distribution Map of the Burma-China Frontier, Bhamo-Myitkyina area, real of the principal tribes, and the ore of the A-ch’ang c (Some of the smaller groups ar ded on the authority o ty ae sss From sheet 92. India and varegie pode Scale about 1,000,0 Vol. IX, No. 3.] The A-ch’ang (Maingtha) Tribe. 139 [N.S] Burmese they are known as Maingtha, which is a corruption of Mong Hsa. On close questioning the A-ch’ang admits readily enough that he is not a Shan, a view which was also expressed to me by the Sawbwa of Lahsa. I have never succeeded in persuading any individual to own his kinship with the despised *“yeren,’’ the wild men of the hills, a term applied by the Chinese to Chingpaw, Lisu, Maru and all such peoples. Hohsa and Lahsa are governed by sawbwas or chiefs who trace their ancestry to Chinese military commanders, sent from Ssu-ch’uan some 40U years ago to quell rebellions on the Yunnan border. For their successful services these leaders were given not only the present A-ch’ang States, but the Chinese-Shan States of Kanai and Nantien as well, which their descendants now rule. The families have intermarried to a great extent with the indigenous peoples, and have lost the typical Chinese cast of feature, though they invariably assert their Chinese ancestry. When I visited the A-ch’ang country in 1910 the Hohsa Sawbwa was a youth about 16 years of age, who was engaged to marry one of the daughters of the Kanai chief. The Lahsa Sawbwa was an elderly man. with the dress and habits of a pure Chinese. I flatter faces, and more prominent cheekbones than the typi- cal Shan. Anderson remarked, ‘‘The breadth between their eyes is considerable, their mouths are generally heavy, and the lips more or less protruding.’’* To the practical anthropo- metrist these differences are very apparent, and venturing a suggestion in the absence of detailed measurements, the average A-ch’ang appears to me to bear a closer relation to the Chingpaw type of the Tibeto- Burman family, than to the Shan, as far as features and outward appearances go. 1 (3), p. 258. % (1), p-: 101. lav Journal of the Aswutic Socrety of Bengal. (March, 1913. The dress of the male A-ch ang is much the same as that of the Chinese Shan, but the woman’s dress has many distine- tive features. i : excellent descriptions, which appear to have been overlooked by other writers. therefore propose to rescue them from the unmerited oblivion of an ancient report and to reproduce them here:— . ‘‘The costume of the male peasantry is a double- breasted loose jacket reaching to the loins, and buttoned down the right side. The buttons are frequently jade, am- ber orsilver. Their turbans are thick blue cotton cloth, with a long fringe at the free end, which is usually wound up with the pigtail, and brought round the outside. In rainy and sunny weather a very broad straw hat, covered with oiled silk, is worn over the turban. Their trousers are very loose, and reach only a short way below the knee. The shins are bound round with long strips of blue cloth to protect them against injury, a fashion that seems to prevail not only among the Shans and Kakhyens, but also among the Chinese peasantry generally. Their shoe uppers are made of thick blue, almost felt cloth, embroidered with narrow braid, and with thick leather soles.’’ ! With regard to the women’s dress Anderson writes :— ‘«They wear the Shan jacket, and loose trousers like the men, but with the ends unhemmed. The back half of the jacket is prolonged downwards to below the knees like a the apron is about six inches broad, and dilates behind into ing feature in their attire, and consists of a hoop about six inches in diameter, made of cloth wound round a rat- tan, and placed on the crown of the head, with the hair in front transversely divided and gathered up, with that of the back, into the centre of the hoop, and plaited into the ends of a flat chignon of the dimensions of the internal diameter of the hoop. The latter is kept in position by about 25 to 30 silver pins fastened into the chignon and mass of hair, with their heads resting on and completely : hiding the hoop. The pin heads are large, thin, flat plates 1 (1), p. 102. Vol. rks 3.) The A-ch’ang (Maingtha) Tribe. 141 [V.S.] of silver, placed longitudinally to the length of the hair, and either embossed or engraved with figures of leaves or of flowers. The result of this arrangement is that the crown of the head is encircled with a silver wreath of the pins, four much larger, usually richly-enamelled, ones are worn at the front, back, and sides of the circle. ........ Full dress chignons and their pins are a foot in diameter. The head of a pin of this kind is eight inches in length, by two in breadth, and of the most intricate construction. The simplest is made of silver wire, and flat pieces of the same metal cut into fantastic figures and representations of trailing plants, in full flower, the colours being given by various enamels, of which green, blue, purple, and yellow are the chief. In some the leaves are worked out in the finest filigree, and in one specimen I purchased, there is a figure resembling a swan resting on its outstretched wings among a bed of flowers.’” ! For the sake of comparison I give here Anderson’s descrip- tion of the dress of the ordinary Chinese-Shan woman of Kanai or Nan-tien, the neighbours of the A-ch’angs on the north, and with whom the latter are constantly confused :— ‘‘Their ordinary garb is very sombre, but their peculiar head-dress, like an inverted pyramid, gives them outré appearance in the eyes of a stranger. It consists of a tened at the neck, and down the centre, by a number of thin, square, enam- elled plates of silver; and in full dress, the shoulders and a line down the back, and another in front, are covered 1 (1), p. 104 142 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Benga!. {March, 1913, with large hemispherical silver buttons, richly embossed with figures of birds and flowers, enamelled in various colours. The sleeves are rather loose from the elbow, and usually folded back, showing a massive silver torque-like bracelet. A tight, thick cotton skirt, frequently ornament- ed round the lower third with squares of coloured silk and satin or embroidered work, with a pair of close-fitting leg- gings made of the same material, and handsomely embroi- dered shoes, with slightly turned-up toes, complete their external attire. On particular occasions, a richly embroid- ered clcth is worn over the skirt.’’ ! omen wear ear-rings, finger rings, neck hoops and bracelets which exhibit great variety of decoration and effect- iveness. A common form of ear-ring, a specimen of which I have in my collection, consists of a flat open ring of silver wire, massively enriched with smaller silver strands, and carrying two engraved silver bosses near the opening in the circumference. From it is suspended a bell-shaped structure, Their use of silver wire, filigree, and delicate decoration in enamel is unsurpassed by any of the surrounding tribes. hy The A-ch’angs are a quiet, inoffensive people. fervent Bud- dhists and exceedingly shy. In most of the Chinese-Shan States, the religion of Gautama is not followed with the zeal which manner. In Hohsa and Lahsa, however, the priests are more orthodox, and their example is followed by the common people, so that the religion has retained its pristine simplicity, and is © free from the laxity which blemishes Shan Buddhism, and which is doubtless due to th- superstitions largely borrowed from surrounding Animistic tribes. The Hohsa Valley is shut in a its se thing extremity by a low range of foot hills ich is crowne a group of p é , nl met with in Heiss Ca on ee ‘chang houses are usually built of bricks on the ground, 1 (1), p. 102. * Vol. IX, No. 3.] The A-ch’ang (Maingtha) Tribe. 143 [N 8.] and not Kaien like those of the Shans and Burmese. Each hedge, and stands sheltered in its own grove of bamboos or other trees. The residences of the chiefs are built after the fashion of an ordinary inese ‘‘ yamen,’’ and the walls are decorated with drawings of dragons, which is also a Chinese custom It e A-ch’angs speak Shan, and many of them know some Chinese as well It is owing to these facts and to their conversion to Buddhism that their true Tibeto-Burman origin has been lost sight of. ey most certainly use their own tongue to a very considerable extent amongst themselves, and it was by the study of this dialect, influenced and added to by Shan as it is, that Major Davies was able to point out its canned association with the speeches of the Zi, Lashi an aru ,—the curious stranded eee of people left ‘by the Buimeat in the highlands of the N’mai Hka valley during their immigration from the north into the plains of the Irrawaddy basin.! Davies’ evidence was sufficient to bring so high an Lipiatseaged as Sir G. A. Grierson to regard the A-ch’ang speech as more or less closely connected with Burmese, and to place the ail of the Zi, Lashi, Maru, Hpon, and A-ch’ang in a grou Kachin and Burmese hybrids. This distinguished author, how- ever, is careful to point out that it is possible that pay lan- guages are not hybrids but independent forms of spee A full and careful examination of these~ Selene is very urgently called for, the tribes themselves are being merged into | more powerful neighbours with an amazing rapidity, and the oppo tunity cannot last very much longer in the case of some of them. As it is, the material which is now available, and ‘which will go far to solve the foundations of the problems con- nected with Burmese civilization and culture, is vanishing without being recorded. propose to summarise mrs the views of the principal oe on the A-ch’ang peo the first volume of the ‘‘ fn on the Census of Burma of 1891, * Mr. H. L. Eales with the assistance of Mr. B. Hough- ton, and the late Dr. Cushing, placed the pani pee dialect with those of the Chinese Shans, *Ahoms, Hkamptis and Burmese- Shans in the Northern subdivision, of the Taic Shan group, of the Pol “ey family.* In th ft a of Upper Burma and the Shan States ’ Eat nein in 1900, Sir George Scott taking the researches of Captain (now Major) Davies as a basis, estimates that about : she f ” A-ch’ang dialect appear to be connect- ie . ph ieee a with Bhan: These age are passin Sse 1 (4). 2 (6), p- 382. Ai 144 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (March, 1913. as names for things of which they knew nothing until they met the Shans and were converted to Buddhism. The A-ch’ang language is thus shown to be very closely connected with Maru, and Lashi is still more remarkable, while with the dialect of the Hpon of the upper defile of the Irrawaddy, it has many pointsincommon Unfortunately Sir George Scott while considering the A-ch’ang a distinct race groups them with the Tarens, Tarengs or Turengs, who are said to be found on the western border of the Chinese-Shan State of Santa, and in Hkamti Long.! In a later work Sir George Scott has abandoned this defi- nite position and taken up an agnostic one. He now writes (1906), that the Maingthas should rather be called dragoman Shans than Burmese, ‘‘and that their speech should be called his industry suggests the Chinaman; and his features suggest intermarriage with the Chingpaw. He will probably come to e called a worthy mongrel.’’? We are not concerned here with what the Maingtha may, or may not, eventually become, but with what he originally was, believing that in spite of admixture of blood and general racial disintegration, ed Chinese or Chinese-Shan affinity eir home is said to lie for the most part near Hkamti-Long. Attempts have been made at different times to prove that the Tarengs ngs or . i 3 OF Shans), into Tairong, and finally into Turung. He relates that they are generally regarded as Shans in the neighbourhood of the Hkampti country, and this in spite of the fact that the ae i has fallen into the old, but unfortunately still prevalent, mis- take,—the classification of a partially absorbed Tibeto-Burman clan with a Tai race, owing to the consequent masking of their 1 (7), 2 (8), p. 95. 3 (9), i‘ 78. ia % (10). Vol. IX, No. 3.] The A-ch’ang (Maingtha) Tribe. 145 [N.S.] tendency however is to regard Mr. Errol Grey’s Tarengs, Turengs or Turungs as Chingpaw pure and simple.! While I am unable to admit the identity of the Tarengs or Tarens with the A-ch’ang, it is interesting to note that the western borders of the Chinese-Shan State of Santa in Yiinnan, are peopled for the greater part by Zis, a very closely allied people. In a more recent work (1910), Mr. C. C. Lowis reiterates his previous opinion, that the Maingtha are probably merely Chinese-Shans, and that there is a far fainter Tibeto-Burman element in their language than was at one time supposed. He therefore no longer regards them as having a place in the same dubious category as the Hpons, who are now proved to be a Tibeto-Burman race which is in the last stages of absorption by the surrounding Shans.’ In the last Burma Census Report (1911), Mr. Morgan Webb, I.C.S., only places the A-ch’ang speech in the same compartment as that of the Zi, Lashi and Maru, as a tentative easure, and remarks that the ‘‘ Maingthas have adopted the admits that it is probable that their ancestry is a complex of h administered and enumerated areas in Burma, over which the poorer stragglers from the headquarters of the race have to er, owing to circumstances beyond their own control. This surplus population in any case is less likely to approximate closer to the original ancestors of the race, than the settled members, living in their own country, and bound together by all the ties of communal interest. Beyond a doubt the race is fast disappearing, its manners and customs well nigh absorbed in those of the Shans, and its language rapidly becom- ing extinct, owing to the supremacy of the tongues of numer- i i The process however has not suppose ,— otherwise a nearly vanished. 1 (12). In this connection see also (12), pp- 16, 17, where the views of re mentioned. This valuable work was not avail- able until this paper was in the press. 2 (11). 3 3 146 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengai. (March, 1913. The clue to the mystery was obtained by Davies, and it is certain that further knowledge will go to strengthen the con- nection between the A-ch’angs on the one hand, and the Maru, Lashi, Zi, and Hpon tribes on the other. Far from being the waifs and strays which recent literature might well lead the reader to imagine, these dying races have preserved for us the records of the immigration of the Burmese themselves into the regions which they now occupy. The unusual resemblances of tlhe Maru, A-ch’ang, Zi, Lashi and Hpon speeches with Burmese, is not the family likeness of the other Tibeto-Burman tongues with that language, but ‘‘is sufficiently close to warrant the belief that at some not very distant period these races spoke one tongue.”’ ! The N‘mai Hka valley is still the home of the Marus, who ards across the frontier a short way into the province of on the west about the confines of the Bhamo and Myitkyina districts the greater number of Lashisarefound. ‘hese tribes, with the Hpons, were the last stragglers of the Burmese immi- gration, or perhaps settlers in the hills, who preferred to remain where they found themselves than to travel further down the great river with the main body. I do not think there is any evidence for supposing that the Lashis and Zis are side bran- ches from the Maru, the probability being rather that they are of common stock and origin, and that their present distinctions are later growths, consequent on the varying external influen- ces to which they have been subjected. Each of the five groups has suffered by absorption into more powerful neigh- bours, and owing to intermarriage, warfare, and the practice of slavery there is now little left by which they can be distin- guished. The Marus, Lashis and Zis are surrounded by Ching- ‘paw, and ‘‘there is now very little outward difference between 2 Ay : + e they belong to the Lepai clan of the Chingpaw, and although not recognized by the latter as such, the process of absorption civilizing action of Buddhism,—a factor of greater importance 1 (4), p. 363. 2 (11), p. 33. Vol. IX, No. 3.) The A-ch’ ang (Maingtha) Tribe. 147 [N.S.] than is often supposed when dealing with hybrid Indo-Chinese races. The introduction of the principles of Gautama, the influence of a literature, the growth of a priesthood, and the development of education would quickly tend to spread the speech and manners of the stronger tribe. In this respect the sacred book of the priest, and the trade route of the merchant, are every whit as potent as the conquest of the soldier, or the raid of the slaver. Before concluding this paper, I would again draw atten- tion to the necessity for a thorough and sympathetic study of the languages and customs of this interesting group of tribes, before they are finally submerged. In the words of Sir George Grierson, most of the dialects belonging to the Burmese group are all but unknown, and the same could be asserted with respect to the general ethnology of many of the tribes. n this paper I have attempted to show briefly :— (1) that, the language, appearance and dress of the A-ch’ang or Maingtha is sufficient to indicate their near relationship to the Maru, Zi, Lashi and Hpon tribes which form the Burmese section of the Tibeto-Burman group of languages ; (2) that, originally they had no connection with any branch out. Their absorption into the Shan race has been largely brought about by their conversion to Buddhism, as a result of the accident of geographical position ; (3) that, the Maru, Zi, Lashi, A-ch’ang and Hpon tribes, as they are now known, are stragglers or settlers from the main Burmese immigration down the N’mai Hka into the Irra- waddy plains. The first three tribes were headed off and eventually separated from the main stock by Chingpaw clans, by whom they have been largely assimilated. The latter two coming into contact with Shans suffered the same process, complicated in the case of the A-ch’ang by extensive Chinese immigration ; (4) that, in view of the rapid decay of the customs and language of these people, by their absorption into stronger races, and also of their great importance in settling the origin d early movements of the Burmese, further research is urgently called for at once. This should not only be linguis- tical, but anthropometrical and ethnological as well. BIBLIOGRAPHY. (1) Anderson, J. ‘‘ A Report on the Expedition to Yunnan via Bhamo.’’ Calcutta, 1871. (2) Morgan Webb, C. ‘‘ Census of India,’’ 1911, Vol. IX, Burma, Part [. : (3) Rose, A., and Brown, J. Coggin. ‘“ Lisu (Yawyin) Tribes 148 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [March, 1913.] of the Burma-China Frontier.’’ Mems., Asiat. Soc. Bengal, Vol. III, No. 4, 1910. (4) Davies, H. R. “ Yiinnan, the Link between India and the e Yangtze ”’ 1909. (5) Grierson, Sir G. A. ‘‘ Linguistic Survey of India, Vol. III, Tibeto- Burman Family, Part t It, Specimens of the Kuki-Chin and Burma Groups.’’ 1904. (6) Eales, H. L. ‘‘ Report on the Census of Burma.”’ 189] (7) Scott, Sir George. ‘‘ Gazetteer of Upper Burma and the Shan States.”’ 1901 (8) Scott, Sir George. ‘‘ Bur ma, A Handbook of practical, commercial and political information.’’ 1906. (9) Lowis, C. C. ‘‘ Census of India, 1901, Vol. XII, Burma.’ (10) Gurdon, P.R. ‘On the Khamtis.”? Jour. Royal Asiat. Soc., 1895, pp. 157-164. (11) Lowis, C.C. ‘‘ The Tribes of Buima.’’ Ethnographical Survey of India, Burma, No. 4, 1910. (12) Wehrli, eis | as Beitrag zur Ethnologie der Chingpaw (Kachin) von Ober-Burma.’’ Leiden 1904. 15. Earliest Jesuit Printing in Indi From the Spanish of the Rev. Cecilio Gomez Redetea; S.J. Translated by the Rev. L. Carpon, S.J., and edited by the Rev. H. Hosten, S. The present article is a translation from the Spanish of part of Imprentas / de los Antiguos Jesuitas / en las / Misiones de Levante / durante los siglos XVI al XVIII / Datos Aig jocoued por el P. Cecilio Gomez Rodeles / de la Compania de Jesiis,'/ pp. 4-17. The complete reprint of Fr. C. Gomez Rodeles’ articles comprises pp. 56; for he retraces the origin and development of Jesuit printing, not only in India, but in Macao, Japan, China and Indo-China. To us here the chapter on Jesuit printing in ths commends itself as the most interesting. lock-printing, a Chinese invention, was known and at 16, however, a well acknowledged fact that the Jesuits were the pioneers in India of the European process of printing with movable type; but, whereas it was generally supposed that Jesuit printing began i in 1577 under Bro. John keg guese. This early introduction of printing into India reflects more backward. The printing-press of the Danish Missionaries of Tranquebar was the first after those of the Jesuits (1712). Rachol, Cochin, Ambalacata, Angamale and Cranganore. certain number of the books printed were in Portuguese. Fr. nt ( Articulos viblinalldl en la Secogtel = y Fe) + algo! Edicién. | Madrid / Establecimento tip. ‘‘ Sucesores de Rit pre din »? | Impresores de la — Casa | Paseo de —— eiapee non: 80: / 1912. |] Cc RA Sen, Hist. of Bengal lang. and literat., Caloutta, 1911, p. 849. f. East ani West, March 1902, p. 550, quoting Dr. Busteed’s Echoes — res ‘alcutta oO presses esses must have been the same as that of Vaipicota, which was piceenan: shifted. 150 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [April, 1913. C. Gomez Rodeles limits his inquiry to the work done by Jesuit writers for the Indian vernaculars: Konkani, Kanarese, Mara- thi, Malayalam, and Tamil. Some works were also printed in Ethiopic, and a large number of translations into Syriac was prepared for the use of the St. Thomas Christians. To-day, when most of the Indian vernaculars have been thoroughly studied and classified, it is not easy for us to realize the hesitations felt by our predecessors in discriminat- ing and denominating some of our allied dialects. Our early missionaries applied the term ‘‘ Malabar’’ to both Malayalam and Tamil; Kanarese was long a misnomer for Konkani; the ‘*Bracmana’’ tongue did not necessarily mean Samskrt; at Goa it meant rather Konkani or Marathi; Badaga was Telugu, while Hindostani applied even to Marathi. These points, if not unknown to Fr. C. Gomez Rodeles, have not been touched upon. Though the Catholic Missionaries of the West Coast must 5 Ale S.J. (Oriente conquistado, Lisboa, 1710, vol. I, conq. Manoel, whom the University of Salamanca had honoured with the title of Doctor utriusque juris, robbed a Brahman Pandit of his MSS., of 18 volumes of the ‘‘Gita Veaco’’ and other authors ancient and modern.'! He brought them to Goa and translated the substance of them into Portuguese. Fathers (Mogor) , Beschi (Madura), Calmette, Coourdoux, Pons (Carnatic), Mosac (Chandernagor), Bischopinck, Hanxleden, Pimentel, Hau- segger (Malabar), Tieffentaller (Mogor). It is chiefly through the letters of some of these that the attention of European i e not appear to have busied themselves with the study of Samskrt. The term ‘‘Bracmana” as used by them is to be __1 The story is given at full length bi ie A. de Quadros, S.J. (Dec. 1559) in ‘oe Indice. De Stvpendis Rebvs .. in India.. , Lovanii, 1566, pp. (292-2 9. “* Veacus ’’ is there supposed be some ancient author In libris nescio cuius i, que qua principem - ~ . . 7 t . coriphet estimant ; uiq; 18. Cémentariori volumina in patrias leges, aliasq ; cdstitutiones variorti doctorti suo tépore reliquit.’” sha appe under the form ‘‘ Risinus,’’ p. 298. In another letter from Goa (1560) Guita’’ is taken for a person (p 376). * Cf. the chapter on Sarnskrt in Fr. J. Dan~tMANN, 8.J., Die Sprach- kunde und die Missionen, Freiburg, 1891. Vol. IX, No. 4.] Earliest Jesuit Printing in India. 151 [NV.S.] explained by such other terms as we see them use, viz., ‘* Bracmana-Marasta,’’ ‘‘ Bracmana-Canarim,’’ and ‘‘ Bracmana vulgar,’’ under which we recognize Marathi and Konkani Sir H. Yule (Hobson-Jobson, s.v. Canara) shows how the term Canarijs is applied by the old Portuguese authors to the Konkani people and language of Goa. _ The Jesuit Missions in Konkani. The large admixture of Marathi, which they con- tain, has made some look upon them as written in Marathi rather than in Konkani. The efforts made by Bro. John Goncalves (ante 1579) to cast ‘* Canarim”’ types must, probably, be understood of Konkani to be printed in Kanarese type, for recording Konkani.! Eventually, the Kanarese alphabe was made use of, we are told. (CE. Dr. G. A Grierson, Lin- guistic Survey of India, Vol. VII, p. 167.) Our impression, however, is that as Portuguese ioe a printed Konkani in Rom e.g., Fr. Thomas Steph (Cf. Fr. J. Dauimann, Die Syibnohbutda und dies inencme arta 1891, -22.) A similar confusion obtained between Malayalam and Tamil. Yule (Hobson-Jobson, s.v. Mal abar) i is correct, we believe, when he Aree out that the « u ‘Malabar?’ np wee in which Fr. ui a ‘*Grammaire pour apprendre Ja Nada Tamoul plguirement appelée le Malabar... Faite a Pontichéry et achevée le 18° Novembre 1728 par un Mi se tae de la Compagnie de Jésus de la Mission du Carnate.’’?* The Catholic Missionaries of ‘sass still pone: of their Tamil Christians as ‘‘ nos Mala- There can be no doubt that Badaga meant Telugu (cf. Yule’s Hobson-Jobson, s.v. Badega). Fr. de la Lane was the author of a Telugu Dictionary and a Telugu Grammar. A copy of the Jatter in the Bibl. Ristionale of Paris is inscribed ndre la langue Telenga dite vul- I r un rr Cf. Imper. Gazett. of Sages h x Sac 007. No. Le a yn R 2 The author was Fr Cf. Junien Vinson, Rev. de oe ‘a on ee comparée, Paris, Maisonneuve, 1899. Vol. XXXII, is 3 C Ch ibid, re 152 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [April, 1913. It must be understood that, though we have pone Fr. G6mez Rodeles’ spon for the names of some of ou vernaculars, we have left others in the form ener by the early missionaries, in order to avoid worse confusi ny words or passages within [ ] are ours. H. Hosren, S8.J.]. GOA. _—When St. Francis Xavier landed at Goa on May 6, 1542, he may be said to have taken possession of that town. Here, in course of time, and under the visible protection of God, the number of the Jesuits and the sphere of their civiliz- ing action went on increasin Goa was to become » VIGO. : oo. Xavier, p. I, cap. 1X; a ae Op. cit., p. I, cona. I, ‘div. n. 23; Monumenta Xaveriana, t. Ip. 154 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (April, 1913. for the Society, and are received with applause and gratitude by all lovers of history.' famous Prester John had asked from Europe, clever typographers and artisans of every kind.? This happened probably in 1514 or shortly before. Among the things which the Emperor asked from King D. Manuel Cony ° > 5 2 oS Qu eo ° % oO 5 N ° Qu @ cS ° s 7) fa?) 5 oe be a a oF io) jor ~ os = Lous [a ta] ie] 2 4 ie) ob abours of Fathers Ignatius Bruno, Robert de Nobili and Man Martins. His Vocabulario was furthe arranged by Fr. Balthasar da Cos The printer was a native Lata Aichamoni. Though the types engraved by Aichamoni were elegant, they got worn out by constant use and owing to the softness of their material, wood, as we have said.é Many are the writers who speak of the extraordinary merits of Fr. Robert de Nobili, whom we have just mentioned. his zeal and austerity making him adopt an extraordinary mode of life. had a great command of the teas languages most Pa in the country, Tamil, Badaga alabar. He wrote and published many books in them, chiefly during the last five years of his life, which he spent in retirement at Jaffna and Meliapur, dying at the latter place on January 16, We find that one of his works, the Candam or Christian Doctrine, in four volumes, was printed at T'ragambar [Tranque- bar].* 3 Oriente conquistado, hs aL, es ~~ nal if, 2 Fr. Franoo, S.J., . da vt piper '@ Evora, p- 661; Ib., Ann. glor., p. 738; Fr. grt ola Me enologio ig a 10; Fr. Gor- HERMY M e.— Assist. de Portug., t. I, Déc. 27; SoMMERVOGEL, Biblioth., = ae col. 1241. conquistado a Jesu Christo, pt. II, cong. I. div. It, n. "69; ny ‘PavLINUS a 8. Bartuot., Ind. Or. Christ., p. 182 ; , Examen hist.-critic Codicum ees dicor. ver Prop. Pade, Rome, 1792, p- 65; fomiustooni, , Biblioth-, cols. 1 + SOMMERVOGEL, "Biblioth., i: v, , eile "17705 1780; 1 pennies pp. 724; 725; Fr. Pauxuinus a 8. BARTHOL. »P 166 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [April, 1913. COCHIN.—‘‘ ManaBar’’ Printinc.—A small book on the Christian Doctrine composed in Portuguese at Fr. Marcos Jorge ! and translated into ‘‘ Malabar ’’ by Fr. Henry Anriquez Pegraneel, was printed at Cochin in the College of the Mother f God on November 14, 1579. Fr. Manoel Martins had it peiiied in Tamil, but we do not know where? We do not know either how long that press was activ r. Sommervogel gives in Latin from Sotwel the different works peter by Fr. Anriquez or Henriquez in Tamil,? or in the ‘‘Malabar’’ tongue spoken along Cape Comorin. Fr. Anriquez was born at Villa-Viciosa about 1520 and died at Punicael on February 6, 1600. MALE AND CRANGANOR.—CuaLpEAN PRINT- Inc.—Fr. Francis Roz was the father and protector of the Malabar Mission. Born at Geronain 1557 and received into the Society of Jesus in 1575, he embarked for India in 1584 and, after zealously labouring as a Missionary in vitheiog was ap- pointed Bishop of Angamale on January 25, This loving Prelate devoted all his cares his beloved ooks. By order of Clement VIII, Fr. Albert Laerzio brought from Europe Chaldean types in ‘order to supply eae clergy at once and plentifully with the necessary books. most important was the Roman Ritual, translated from ‘is a Pope , Paul V. The zealous prelate ended his days at Parur on Pohiuaey 16, 1624.4 We shall close this complicated subject of the Indian printing-presses by making an honourable mention of an. eminent Missionary, a great linguist and prolific writer : = Joseph Constantius Beschi, born at Castiglione (Venice) 0 November 8, 1680, and admitted into the Order of St. Tgnatins on October 21, 1698. ee epee ee ee ge ae 1 SOMMERVOGEL, Biblioth:, t. IV, se 821; 822. it og , t. IV, col. 822; t. V, ol. 3 Ibid., t. IV, cols. 276; 277. 4 JouvANcY,. Hist. Soc. Jesu, parte V, t. II, lib. XVIII, § 5; SOTWEL, p. 249; Sommervocen, Biblioth., t VII, ‘cols. 263; 264; DE Sousa, Oriente conquistado. pt. II, conq, I, div. Hn 93: PAavLINUS A BartHot., India Orient. Christ., pp. 63; 64, Vol. IX, No. 4.] Harliest Jesuit Printing in India. 167 [N.S.] He studied in Rome with extraordinary success Hebrew, Greek, Latin and Portuguese, ree Italian, hoping all along to be selected for the Indian Mission ile in Madura, he applied himself with advantage to ot Telenga [Telugu], and especially Tamil. After five years he had thoroughly us ere pare a. and poetry. He pant the next twenty eadin e chief books in that language. The =e of Tritchirapalli rTvichinopoli made him his Prime Minister.! This remarkable po olyglot died at Manapad about 1746, leaving after him, edited or in manu- script, a great number of works in prose or in verse. esides Fathers Busten [Stephens] <3 Beschi, there were in India other European Missionaries who clothed the sublimity of their religious and moral teaching in aie: attractive garb of poetry and the grace of sonorous rhythmical cadence, thus stir- ring up not only the intellect, but the will and the imagination of their neophytes. The Life of Our Lady composed in Tamil verse by Fr. eed de Nobili was sung in many places by all classes of the peo We shall not even try to mention the many countries of India won over to the Catholic Church by the ean during the XVIIth and XVIIIth centuries, with which we a chiefly concerned, nor the excellent fruits of holiness which Christian India produced, thanks to the colby of the Gospel, assisted by the printing-presses created by The eloquent testimony which w fie in oe first History of the Jesuit Missions in India, Bthiopia and Japan, written in Portuguese, apparently by Fr. Manoel Teixeira, is worth many others. In the second part. chapter VIII, this eye-witness of the events says: ‘* The Father Patriarch, Joio Nufiez, Fr. Francisco y guese and the [native] Christians were by its means “pt Conscience by Beker stores om that time to this very day it is in everybody’s bests in Tadia: to the great advantage of the faithful and of confessors. As a rule, all know how to make a good confession. 1 [This is generally recognized as merely a native legend. Cf. BerrranD, 8.J., La Mission du Maduré d’aprés des documents ie EN VINSON, Philol. comparée, Paris, Vol. XX XIX, pp. 123-146; Vol. XL, pp. 1 1-45. Prof. Vinson throws doubts on Beschi’s knowledge of Te lugu.] i68 Journal of the Asiatic — of Bengal. |[April, 1913.] This Prayer-book; in fact, brought about a great change among the people.’ 1 [The present paper, excellent in itself, raises several sivapibeblnt i and difficult questions which I shall discuss at length in a separate article.—- H. Hosten, S.J.) ON NNR Ss i 16. Two Portuguese Inscriptions in the Kapalesvara Temple of Mailapur (Madras). By Rev. H. Hosrtey, 8.J. Dr. J. P. Vogel sent me from Lahore on April 12, 1912, estampages of two inscriptions from the Kapalesvara Temple at Mailapur. They had been sent him by the Archeological Dutch inscriptions; but it did not require much study on Dr. Vogel’s part to convince him that they were Portuguese. Inscription No. 1 was found on the floor of the front The first line is to be read thus: {fale—] CEV - NA- ERA. (=died in the year). The second line is more puzzling. The following combina- tions suggest themselves :— 1. Since the last figure is a 3 followed by a full stop, it might seem that the date is [1] 463. It was a common practice among the Portuguese to omit in their dates the figure for the date 1463 is, however, unlikely on more grounds than one. 1 am told by a distinguished archeologist in Europe, who wishes his name to remain unknown, that Portuguese inscriptions of the 170 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [April, 1913. XVth century are in Gothic, not in Roman characters. Even should an exception to this rule have been made, there would remain the astonishing fact that a Portuguese inscription of Mailapur would antedate by 38 years the arrival of Vasco da Gama off Calicut (May 20, 1498). In the light of history, this would not be entirely repugnant. We have on record the visit to Mailapur of Marco Polo (1293); of Giovannida Montecorvino (1292-93), one of whose companions, Niccolo da Pistoia, a Dominican, died there; of Giovanni de Marignolli (1349). and Niccolo de’ Conti (1425-30). In fact ,intercourse between Europe and India was not so rare in the XIIIth and XIVth centuries as is commonly supposed, and we must not imagine that the Venetians and the Genoese were the only Europeans who traded with India or visited it in the XVth century.'! Anyhow, a Portuguese inscription at Mailapur at such a date is in itself highly improbable. What might mean, besides, the two first letters in the second line? Dfe] G[raca]=of grace, would be epigraphically unusual, and so would D{e] C{bristo}. More- over, the second letter (2nd line) cannot be a C, since we have a C of the usual type in CEV (lst line). Hence, if any simpler explanation can be devised, it ought to be preferred. Could the second line mean D [e] [1] 6 & 63? This would not be unusual in Portuguese epigraphy; but the central l friend in Europe. The second line must be d [ ] 646°, leaving out the figure 3. The date was originally [1] 643, but was corrected later. As the 3 is fainter than the other figures, there must have been an attempt at obliterating it, and the second 6 seems from its cramped appearance to have been squeezed in between 4 and 3. The full stop after this interpolated 6 is significant. It would seem then that the inscription was made considerably later than the date of burial, since the date first recorded was three years too early is explanation, it is hoped, will be found satisfactory. It places the inscription in modern times, while the political 1 About 1893 two tombs of Franciscan Missionaries of the XIVth : y- Ct. Compte-rendu des séances de la Soc. de Géogr- e Parts. Janv. et Fevr. 1893. Art. of M. Romanet du Caillaud. Vol. IX, No. 4.] Two Portuguese Inscriptions. 171 [N.S.] troubles so frequent in the a pais ea of Mailapur would account for its removal to a Hindu temple. the Museum of Diu (cf. pee Portug., viii, 183) there is an epitaph with the words...NA ERA A.D. 1667, where the word A[nno] is redundant after ERA. In the Mailapur inscription there was no room for A [nno}], as is plain from the se outlines of the stone shown on our plate. Hence D = D[e Inscription No. 2 was found on the floor of the Kalyana mandapam of the op iaet as Temple. It is in Portuguese, too, and runs thus :— E-DE SEVS.- HE RDEIROS (=And of his heirs). The shape and the seeie of the letters go to show that pe era does not belong to No.1. Moreover the breadth th stones differs ee ewny It is from 60 to 61 inte in ms 2; 74 inches in No l. Since fragments of Christian funeral inscriptions have been worked into the floor of this Hindu temple, it is not impossible that there be — fragments with their faces turned down- ards. We hope that the Archeological Department of Madras will do the needful to examine into the matter. NS 17. Two Letters of Major James Rennell. By Rev. W. K. Firmincer, B.D., F.R.G.S. Mr. T, D, la Touche prints as an appendix to his Journals of Major James Rennell (Memoirs of the Asiatic Society of APO Vol. III, No. 3 pp. 95—248) a letter of Rennell’s hich I came acrossin 1910 when inspecting the proofs of baa printed and unpublished records of the Comptrolling Council of Revenue at Murshidabad. Last year, while studying the Consultations of that Council preserved at the Record i sr of the vee hon e, I came across the two following s ’teens, who has made a mess of Rennell’s arene and even given **Thos’’ instead of ‘‘ Jas’’ as part of the signature. In the Major’s map of Bengal, reproduced in Mr. D. la Touche’s Memoir, the spelling of the following places mentioned in the letter is as follows :— In the letters— In the map— Beleuchy. Radshy Raujeshy. Pucharyah Pookareeah, ‘*Mustan Ghurr’’ is, I take it, Mustangur marked on the map as on the road between Seebgunge and Seerpore rat r in Bogra District). Mustanghur may be identified with Mahas- than, the ancient capital of the Pods. This identification suggests points of great historical interest. Comptrolling Council Revenue, Murshidabad. Consultation, 14th Feb. 1771. To SamMvurEL MippierTon, Esq., | Chief of the Comptrolling Council of Revenues. BELUCHY. 10th Feb., 1771. Str, I think it is my duty to inform Mie that there is now in this part of the country a large b of fakirs who are laying all the principal towns. under Sostabatsba. They were yester- 174 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [April, 1913. day at Lutchinpore, 4 coss from this place; and, after receiv- ing two hundred rupees from the Gunge Darogha, marched southwards into the Pucharyah districts. By the accounts I have from an intelligent person, whom I sent to watch their motions, they are about a thousand in number and tolerably well armed. They came from the western provinces about a month ago, and traversed the Dinagepore and Goragaut districts in their way. As there is no force in this part of the country, I imagine they will continue in it till they have plundered all the princi- pal places. I have met several of their detached parties, which are indeed scattered over the whole provinces of Radshy and Goragaut. I have enclosed a route to this place and a sketch of the country, in case you may think proper to send any force after these miscreants. The country hereabouts is so entirely intersected by rivers and nullas that there is scarce any possi- bility of travelling with guns. I am, etc., Jas. RENNELL. Consultation’s Do., 7th March, 1771. The Chief lays before the Board the following letter from Capt. Rennell :— To SamMuEL MrippteTon, Esga., Chief of the Comptroliing Council of Revenues. SEERGUNGE. Ist March, 1771. their camp and baggag Sheik Mun Jenoo, fled on horseback to Mustan Ghurr (a dirgah), are dispersed in such a manner that two of them cannot be found together, so that it is impossible to pursue them with the sepoys. They all throw away their arms in their retreat, and the villagers falling on them killed great numbers. I marched to Mustan in hopes of taking the Chief prisoner, but on my arrival found the place empty, and was informe’ that he went off with a few followers on the road towards Vol. IX, No. 4.| T'wo Letters of Major James Rennell. 175 [W.S.] Purnea. Upon this I sent a Jimautdar’s party after him with orders to follow his route four or five days’ journey ; and I am in hopes that the Jimautdar will be successful, as Mun Jenoo is diseased and cannot travel fast. e picked up provisions in our march which, together with that taken by Lieut. Feltham, shall be sent to Moorshedabad. s it is probable that some of the fakirs dispersed over these districts may unite again and commit depredations, I have directed Lieut. Taylor to remain at this place with 45 sepoys, h e the City, as soon as they have refreshed themselves, for which I have allowed them four days. wrote to the Supervisors of Dinagepore and Purneah to inform them of the event, that they may take measures for intercepting any parties that may retreat through their provin- c Jenoo is an inhabitant of Morampoor, I suppose he will area i to retreat to that country. As Mr. Grose has occasion for the sepoys under ene Feltham, I have directed that officer to return to Rungpo must be eg leave to mention to you the behaviour of Lisi. Feltham, whose bravery and vigilance have contributed so much to the success of the expedition. As the service on which I was sent is now finished, I have left the command to Lieut. Taylor, and shall return to the business which I was before employed on Having examined the hill and dirgah of Mustan Ghurr, I think it my duty to inform you that its natural strength, e with thick woods. The dirgah there @ affords a pretence to the they are furnished with arms of all kinds, and commonly sally _ forth from thence 2000 strong. This in particular has been the case last vear I am, etc., Jas. RENNELL. The service in question having been successfully accom- plished, the Chief acquaints the Board that he has recalled Lieut. Taylor’s party, and i leave to recommend, in conse- quence of the account Capt. Rennell gives of ohne gah of Mastangur, that a small Rie of sepoys be now and Beot co continually stationed there in order to sascurame the future rendezvous of these banditti. 18. Sarcocolla. By Davip Hoorer (With Plate VI.) Sarcocolla is the name of an eastern drug remarkable for its supposed virtues in agglutinating wounds, hence the name by which it is known to Europeans is derived from two Greek words signifying ‘‘ flesh glue.’’ In Persian itis called Kun-judah or Gunjidah, and in Arabic Anzarut or Unjeroot. Guzar is the common name of the drug in the Bombay market. y writers recognize the origin of the drug to bea spiny shrub growl ng in Persia and Arabia. Mir Muhammad Husain (1771) in Makhzan-ul-Adwiya informs us that. Unzeroot is the gum of a thorny tree called ‘‘Shayakeh’’ which is about six feet high ; ; it has leaves like those of the frankincense (pinnate), and is a native of Persia and Turkistan. Dr. J. E. T. Aitchi- Kein, Birjand and Yezd, and also not far teem Turbat. Haidri in Persia. In 1908 » Major (now Sir) P. Z. Cox, H.M. Consul at oo friend of his, who had been trained as a doctor. The and in October dry white pods are found. The trees are not allowed to grow to a great size because the branches are cut off and taken away as fuel. The gum forms on the twigs and mass of gum which psoas dries and consolidates. It is said that the more frequently it is removed the whiter the gum ecomes. The plants collected for Sir P. Z. Cox were forwarded to Kew, and identified as Astragalus fasiculifolius, Boissier, Flora Orientalis, No. 484. Natura! order, ears 1 Pharm. Journ., Dec. 11, 1886, 468. 178 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [April, 1913. This ae is described as a tall shrub with long white hoary tomentose spines. The flowers are shortly pedicelled. Calyx adpressed, ‘tabulate: opening with five lanceolate, subulate teeth. Vexillum oblong. Pod as large as a grain of rice in the husk, covered with a tomentum of white, cotton-like down, con- sisting of long simple hairs matted together; some of the pods are abortive and full of gum. Seed vetch-like, diameter } in. ; when soaked in water it swells and bursts and a mass of gum protrudes. Dymock gthetes the plant in 1891 in ‘ th Indica ’’ as A. ocolla. Aitchison in 1892 considered it pre- mature to ns it as a new species as in all probability , he said, it would be found to be a species described by Bunge or Boissier. This supposition has been confirmed. It is remarkable that some ee have attributed the source of sarcocolla to species of Penaea as P. mucronata, P. sarcocolla and P. squamosa, plant from ‘Ethio ia and Cape of Good Hope. The source of this peculiar error is indicated in Dr. Ainslie’s Materia Indica, who refers to an account of the (Penaea) plant in so ‘* excellent Edinburgh Dispensatory ”’ by r. Dunean, Juni Dr. Aitchison refers to Microrhynchus spinosus, Benth.., another Persian plant, of the composite order, as the origin of false recat a substance having a most nauseous and offen- sive odou The Fe rug consists < spongy light yellow gummy or resinous grains, from the size of a pea to a sandy powder. It has the appearance of Scathied resin, bread crumbs or a form of brown sugar, but more irregular. The tears are whitish, 1 A sample of the gum from the Lahore bazar was attacked by insects. These were identified as Lastoderma testaceum, Redt. and Tre- lobivm erie) Fabr. 2 imp.J. i, ¢. & Ca, anon Med lib. i, ack ii, ve Vol. IX, No. 4.] Sarcocolla. 179 [N.S.] emplastri imposita.’’ The Arabian physicians gave sarcocolla to the extent of two drams, Schroder not more than one dram. In Ulfaz Udwiyeh sarcocolla is classed as *‘ caustica’’ with blue vitriol, verdigris and burnt wood. and ‘ cicatrizantia with red lead and native gubhates) To sum up its medical Sarcocolla is a Moghul medicine and is used specially by Yunani physicians throughout India. Tavernier! (1665) men- tions it as one of the drugs obtainable in Surat, a large e porium in the seventeenth century. Dr. Ainslie ( 1826) Saiene it as a Madras drug. Dr. R. H. Irvine omar it in a cata- logue of drugs of Ajmeer” in 1841, and of Patna® in 1848. Dr. Honigberger* states in 1852 that it was officinal in Lahore, where also Baden Powell collected and described it in 1868. The Indian Museum possesses specimens from Bombay, Delhi, Amritsar and Lahore. In Europe, according to Pomet,* it was known in 1694 as a medicine from Persia; and Guibourt® describes it, probably as a Museum specimen, in 1849. The ting opium, for securing the corks of large glass flagons in which rose-water is exported, and it is eaten by ladies of the harem to improve their appearance and to give the skin a gloss. There is no secret regarding the admixture of opium with this gum, in fact it appears to be a recognized ingredient. Opium mi os cent. of other ingredients with ‘‘ Schire’’ opium boiled arédiante used are sarcocolla, or an extract rom as Teriak-i-lub ; this preparation sells at 250 m. per seven nds. Professor Joseph Feil of Ohio, reported’? in sie the presence of sarcocolla as an adulterant of ie eee th, edi cinal gum obtained from other species of Astragalus, we grow- ing in Persia. Professor Feil experimenting with a sample of powdered tragacanth, quoted at a low rate, found it to be oo soluble in alcohol, and to have the odour and taste of 1 Travels, Vol. II, p. 20. £ Densohaphy of ‘aaa 5 Materia Medica of Patna. 4 Thirty-five years in the East. 5 Histoire Generale des drogues, Paris 5 Histoire naturelle des drogues simp!. 7 Bulletin of Amer. Pharm. Ass., 1908, 379. 180 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [April, 1913. liquorice. In short it had the characteristics of sarcocolla which had been accidentally or fraudulently mixed with the imported tragacanth. Daniel Hanbury on the 27th October, 1870, made a note to the effect that sarcocolla was offered for sale as mastic in the London market. Gum sarcocolla is imported into Bombay from the Persian Port of Bushire in bags which contain two hundredweights. Dr. Dymock observed that from twelve to twenty bags could be seen in a single warehouse. The total quantity imported must be considerable, and as the foreign export is trifling, the consumption of the gum in the country must be very large. . The chemistry of sarcocolla is of great interest. It was examined by Pelletier of Paris! seventy-seven years ago, who separated, by means of alcohol, a substance called sarcocollin. Sarcocollin is described as a brownish, semitransparent, amor- phous mass with a sweetish and afterwards bitter taste. It is soluble in cold water and alcohol, but not in ether. If softens when heated, and finally burns away with the odour of caramel, without leaving any residue. The body resembles glycyrrhizin, and it was composed of 57:13 per cent of carbon, 8°34 per cent of hydrogen and 34°31 per cent of oxygen. According to John- ston* sarcocollin is a mixture of various resins which may be separated as lead salts. A sample of Ganjideh from Bushire had the following com- position :— Moisture zy te eee ot Sol. in spirit 90% a .. 740 ol.in water .. ot ie oe Insoluble fibre 8:4 Ash oes 23 100°0 Nitrogen “4 The alcoholic extract was pinkish in colour, brittle and transparent, soluble in water, but insoluble in ether and chloro- form. The aqueous solution was neutral in reaction, sweetish in taste and frothed when shaken. With sulphuric acid the dried extract gave an orange solution passin purple; with nitric acid it turned yellow. It contained no nitro- 1 Ann. Ch. Pharm., VI, 1836, 32. 2 Watt’s Dictionary of Chemistry, V; 196. Journ., As. Soc. Beng. Vol. 1X, 1913. PLATE Ah gtesucehyes Astragalus fasiculifolius Bois (The Sarcocolla Plant.) Vol. IX, No. 4.] Sarcocolla. 181 (N.S.] Carbon 4 ee Paee fies Hydrogen... aie Soe oe o yee an 19. Indian Dermaptera collected by Dr. A, D. Imms. By Matcotm Burr, D.So., F.E.S. I am indebted to Dr. A. D. Imms, Forest Zoologist to the Government of India, for the opportunity of examining & num- ber of earwigs from various parts of India, the list of which is well worth publishing. A large proportion of the specimens were collected by him while touring, and are in the collections of the Forest Research Institute, Dehra Dun. Family PYGIDICRANIDAR. 1. Diplatys falcatus, Burr. Shamkhet near Bhowali (Kumaon). 1¢. Hitherto recorded from Simla and from the Dawna Hills in Lower Burma. Also several immature, and therefore not accurately deter- minable specimens of the same genus, from Sat Tal, Airadeo, and Dehra Dun. 2. Kalocrama picta, Guer. Calcutta. 19. 3. Cranopygia cumingi, Dohrn. N. Coimbatore hills, 5th Aug., 1902. 2. (No. 1076). Also a male (No. 1074) in poor condition, which resembles this species, but the locality being Tharrawady, in Assam, it is probably distinct, as C. cumtngi is a South Indian and Sin- halese species. 4. Echinosoma sumatranum, Haan. Denra Don: Jhajra, 2nd Febr., 1912. In dead al wood. ¢ 2, and larvae. a Karwapani, 7th Nov., 1910. ¢. Kueri Forsst Division: Bankatti, 28th Febr., 12. Under bark of Sal (Shorea robusta). Burma: Tenasserim, Salween River, 15th March, 1905. 1 5 Tharrawady, 22nd Oct., 1905. Nymph. Himatayas, Kumaon: Bhowali (5,700ft.) 9°. Dharmoti (5,000 ft.) 9. 33 93 184 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [May, 1913. Family LABIDURIDAE. 5. Anisolabis annulipes, Luc. D un: Underground. 23 ¢. 6. Psalis dohrni, Kirby. HimMatayas, Kumaon: Takula. 2¢ 9. > ifs Dharmoti. 7. Pealis femoralis, Dohr n. Deura Don: At light, 12th July, 1910. 3#, 1 mph. Also several Psalid larvae, probably of the three species above, but not accurately determinable from various localities. 8. Labidura bengalensis, Dohrn. Drnra Dun: 15th April, 1912. Underground. 18th an., : . Garhi, 3rd-12th April, 1912. Many specimens, : ALLAHABAD : 20th Oct., 1908. 2a 4. 9. Labidura riparia, Pall. Kuripi Javnsar: 17th Dec., 1910. 3. Denra Dun: 23rd March, 1912. 2¢¢. Both stunted specimens, and several larvae. 10. Nala nepalensis, Burr. Himatayas, Kumaon: Bhowali. ¢°. 09 " meswar. 9... Under stones at the edge of a stream. ll. Nala lividipes, Duf. 3 DrHra Dun: 29th Oct., 1910. 2Ist Nov., 1911. Himanayas, Kumaon : Bhowali. 9°. 12. Forcipula pugnaz, Kirby. Hiatayas, Kumaon: Bhowali. 8¢ ¢ Mf ee 13. Forcipula trispinosa, Dohrn. Denea Dun: 25th Oct., 1910. 14. Pseudisolabis immsi, sp. n. Small: slender: black : segments rather short: head shining black, depressed, broad, > : on dull black, the sides yellow : legs slender, femora blackish, en dull amc an Vol. IX, ee 5.] Indian Dermaptera. 185 [N.S.] 2 strongly narrowed: penultimate ventral segment 3 broad, gently rounded: Forceps with branches ¢ remote, very slender and cylindrical, long and regularly arcuate almost in a semi- circle; in the 9 simple, short, straight, contiguous, 3 ge Length of body 95 mm. 8°5 mm. = ,, forceps 3°5 1 N. Soke: Base of Himalayas at Kuridi in Jaunsar, 9000 ft. 17th Dec., 1910. ¢@ and 9? ea —. Peeudisolabis immsi, sp.n. Forceps of male, x 6. This wp roma little species, which is dedicated to Dr. A, D. Imms, is close to P. burri, Bor., from Kashmir, but the sides of the 5-7th abdominal segments in that species are more or less acute and rugulose : the forceps are much stouter and shorter than in P. immsi, and bowed apically instead of entirely and eeularly arcuate. Family LABIDAE. 15. Chaetospania thoracica, Dohrn Deura Don: 15th ‘April, 1912. 16. Labia curvicauda, Motsch. Tuano, 9th Febr., 1912, under bark of dead Sal tree (Shorea robusta). Dexura Down: Jhajra, in dead Sal wood, 2nd Febr., 1912 Kuert Forsst Division: Bankatti, 27th Febr., 1912. Under bark in rotten wood of standing Sal roe Denra Dun: Karwapani, 7th Nov., 1910. / ¥ 7th Nov., 1910. 9?. 17. Labia mucronata, Stal. Burma: Tomeetn Salween River. 8th March, 1905. 18. Labia lutea, Bor Urrer Teac: Katha, 21st Febr., 1905. 9. 186 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [May, 1913. 19. Spongovostox semiflavus, Borm. DeHRA Dun: Lachiwala, 16th Febr., 1912. Under bark of Sal (Shorea robusta). Family FORFICULIDAE. 20. Allodahlia macropyga, Westw. HiMaLayas, Kumaon: Dharmoti. 39 2. em 3 near Bhowali. o¢ and 5 larvae. 21. Homotages jeae, Borm. Himatayas, Kumaon: Dharmoti. 2 ¢ 2. = es Bhowali,2¢ 97,19. = Jaunsar: Kuridi, 17th Dec., 1910. $5,699. = Mussoorie: Oct. 1907. ¢ and 2. 22 Elaunon bipariitus, Kirby. IMALAYAS, Kumaon: Dinapani. ¢@. 2 re) mora, 2. Denra Dun: 8th July, 1910. o. Himatayas: Naini Tal, Baldoti Plantation, 8th June, 1908. 29 9. 23. Forficula beelzebub, Burr. Hrmatayas, Jaunsar: Kuridi, 17th Dec., 1910. = iat Mussoorie, Oct. 1907. 2? (reddish form). Dera Don: Sept. 1901. Himatayas, Kumaon: Almora (5200 ft.), 21st June, 1912,239 9,499. Nu- merous larvae. Himalayas: Binsar (8000 ft.) 2¢¢. e Bhowali. 492 9 _ Dharmoti. 4¢¢. fe Shamkhet, near Bhowali. 5¢ ¢, eo. ae Sat Tal (4000 ft.) $s Simla. June 1909. A larva on a Deodar trunk. After examining the ample material quoted above, I feel convinced that F. aceris and F. beelzebub are one species: t colour ranges from a bright blackish red to deep black; the armature of the dilated portion of the forceps varies, as the sculpture, with the size and development of the individuals. t is possible to arrange a long series, the extremes of which are totally different, but it is impossible to say where F. aceris ends and F’. beelzebub begins. _ Vol, IX, No. 5.] Indian Dermaptera. 187 [N.8.] 24, Hypurgus humeralis, Kirby. Drura Don: Sept. andl Oct., 1910. @. Approach- ing the sanded for 25. Hudohrnia metallica, Dohrn. Himatayas, Kumaon: Bhowali, ? tntatnat ee ee 20. The Pitt Diamond and the Eyes of Jagannath, Puri. By Rev. H. Hostey, S.J. In a previous paper under this title (J.A.8.B., 1912, pp. 133-144) we showed that there was no evidence to prove that the Pitt Diamond was stolen from Jagannath’s statue at Puri. We found that the theft was attributed to a variety of persons: to an Englishman, to a Frenchman, to a Portuguese, or to a jeweller belonging to no particular nationality. We were disappointed at the time in meeting with no variant of the Dutch burglar. The Dutch, however, were not above suspicion. We have w come across a text in which a Dutchman is charged with the theft. It would seem that the caiiead of the temple knew how to modify their story, so as to suit the national antipathies of their European inquirers. In this case, they told the story to a Frenchman, Anquetil du Perron, who was at Puri on June 6, 1757. Shortly, before, he had been at Chander- had plucked out a precious stone from one of the eyes of the ne while the Chandernagorians boasted in 1711 that a French- n had done it, the precious stone being then a ruby. For 08 reasons, Anquetil du Perron discredits the story alto- gether. ‘**T entered Jagrenat,’’ he writes, ‘‘ by the street leading Brahmans to let me in: [ had to be satisfied with examining the outside of the precincts . ‘*The theft of the ruby, ‘which formed one of the eyes of the statue of Jagrenat, was confirmed to me: but I was told that the culprit was the Chief of a small Dutch Factory. The other eye, it is said, consists of a big carbuncle. I should think, however, that those phage stones and the immense treasures said to be contained in the Temple of Jagrenat are of the nature of the Pagoda [idol] ee massive gold and forty-two feet high, which l’Abbé de Choisy saw at Siam (Voyage de Siam, p. 28 eu The Rajahs and Brahmans of Fupenis are too greedy to set in wood or stone precious ornaments which they could easily replace, oe the sake of the people, by mere gilt, or bits of glass, or false rubies placed in the proper light.’’ 1 Cf. AnquEeri, pu PERRON, Zend-Avesta, Tome I, Pt I, Paris, 1771, p. lxxxii, at,--On Variations in the Flowers of Limnanthemum indicum, Thwaites. By H. M. Curpeur, M.A. Acting Professor of Botany, Gujarat College, Ahmedabad. The observations recorded in this note on the flowers of Limnanthemum indicum were made on the 19th hee od 1912, on the specimens collected by me from a Fae sein in Thana District of the Presidency of Bomb The plants have a floating aquatic habit. The stem and roots are submerged. The orbicular leaves are floating, and the flowers are slightly raised above the water. It was not practi- cable from the trailing habit of the stem _— water to recog- nize and isolate the individuals. Hence the enumerations made refer to several individuals taken aogaa ly. mnanthemum belongs to one of the gamopetalous orders, viz. Gentianacee. The majority of plants of this order are of the herbaceous erect or procumbent type occurring in more or less wet places. The genus Limnan ee is an exception to the type as it grows in waters several feet Dimorphism within the order in ese ollie than Limnan- themum has been observed in Canscora diffussa (Prof. W. Sioa unpublished notes) in which pra have been noted to in two different lengths on the same plant. Dimorphism in thee genus under consideration has been noted in all system- atic works. A short description of the flowers of Limnanthe- mum indicum may be given at this point. The flowers arise in clusters from anode. The node also roduces a bunch of roots, a single branch, and a single floating —- pg ogi leaf, whose petiole is in a line with the wer buds are a erat tcabegie im are under sere The Bad ds come up one by every evening to open. The flower remains open eee the night aah early part of the pes day. The pedicel again bends downwards to mature the fruit under water. The following technical descrip- tion is et e om Cooke’s Flora of Bombay fl graced rt Pedicels 2’-5” long; bracts ovate, acute sae til Calyx 3i a one deeply aac tig sata ie - long, “oblong, * subacute. Crary one celled ; st entas 2, eateral: : poh ion or ees stigma two lobed; Capsule subglobose, in diameter. numerous (30 or more), not muricate, nae, yellow.’ 192 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [May, 1913.] The flowers collected and examined by me revealed a great deal of variation which is recorded at the end of this paper ina tabular form. It will be noticed that altogether 457 flowers were examined. Thenumber of stamens always agreed with that of the petals in the same flower. The sepals agreed in number in 80% of the total with the petals and stamens, showed a deficiency in 5%, and an excess in 15% of the flowers examined. The variation in the number of parts in all the three whorls lay between 5 and 8. Fifty-one per cent of the flowers showed six parts in the petals and stamens (but not in the calyx at the same time) and 38% presented six parts in all the three outer whorls in the same flower. The pistil was trimorphie while the stamens were only dimorphic. Of every hundred flowers 51 had long stamens and 49 short ones. Regarding the pistil, differences but also the trimorphism of the pistil, we get altogether fifty-five different forms of the flower. I am not aware of this record exceeded anywhere. VARIATIONS IN THE FLOWERS OF Limnanthemum indicum. (K=Calyz; C=Corolla; A=Stamens; G=Pistil.) Cs Ag Cs Ag Cy Ay Cs As Torars S ee K; C5 As|Kg Cg Ag) Ky 0, A, (Kg Cg Ag E wigs) . (e) = Sree eo ce 2| 3 lox Ge | Gz | Go | Gg | Go| Gz| Gy} Gy Got > | Bibs . Be ed iE FIRS RE! Con dD Se OO Ee Style short s| 2|6¢/19| 60/14! 01 6 | 5 Style long 6} O4584 6 ST) -81 81-82-38 Style and stig. long .. 2-0 | 26 | 4 2) SY ON | 4 G,| 16 147 | 9 Par a 138! 108 50| 294 | Be 88 | Separate Totals < G; 2 | 29 | 26 | | 12] 40} 18] 11) 69 \ | } SSB Ef uae ae |e Nena Oe Gy | | | | 1 S| 2 2 Combined Total 18 | 176 | 147, | 24s :'178| 126, 61 F (80%) | Bs Ce As ee Tact abs | Kr Os As eee | Gg | Gz | Ge Gs | | Ge G3 | | G2 | Gs | Style short 4 3 | 1 1 1 | 1 | | Style long l 2. 310. 0 ea | | Style and stig. long .. Ba ee Ua. ee 0 | | | | G| 6 | 6 | 1 | | | 5} 3) 8} Separate Totals ; | — —— , Gs | 0 Pet 5 a ee ae Combined Total ae 2 pice i! 5 2 18 Ky C5 As GR Kg C Ay Se Ge | Gs | Ge | Gs | Gal Gy | | Style short of imal SiS | | | Style long ci ee a Toh ae oe fee ee ee | Style and stig. long . 1 | $1 © | | Ge} 1] 30 7 | | 19 11] 8 38 Separate Totals . | G. | 0 9 3 | 8 1 3 12 Combined Total 1 po | 271 14 9 50 { INg Cg Ag Kg vi Aq i ee | { | ; Ga | Gs | Ga | Gs | | | pig short oe | 2| 1 | 10 2 | | tyle long te cad Bi Ol Mire 4 | Sts and stig. long . oe 0 | 0 | 112 Gi 5 | | 13 | 12} Bl 1 18 Separate Totals G3} | Ra oa | a, | j ; | Combined Total | ee | is 668 24 E 23 ) Er geaeraaas ae & ri 125 61) 363 or] 79°37 xr) / . Gs 2 42 /35| | | 13] 64 24) 14] 920} 20% se Gy | (244 | a} | Sor 15% be ' i j 5 Total! 25 230 tb ws 231 151 75 457 8 I I j gi Percmege 9% | IS 9% 5% [51% 38% )18% Oe ee. ee er . eG nS es 22, History of Kasmir. By Panpir Ananp Koon. A BRIEF accouNT oF Hasan, THE HISTORIAN OF KASMiR. Moulvi Hasan Sah was born at a village ae vimgmie a mile to the south east of Bandipur in KaSmir, in A.H. (1832 a.D.) and died at the same village in 1316 4.u. (1898 A.D.) at the age of 66 years. He came of a family of Pirs or Muhammadan priests, distinguished in Persian and Arabic learn- other teachers which he practised until the closing years of his age. In 1875-78 a.p. occurred a terrible famine in Kasmir whose ravages assumed appalling proportions. Hasan wrote out a pamphlet in Persian verse in which he described the true char- acter of the calamity and made certain sensible suggestions for the improvement of the situation. He sent this pamphlet to Diwén Anant Ram, the then Prime Ministe r, to be Shes to His Highness the late Maharaja Ranbir Singh who was at that time at Jammu. The Mahdrdja conferred a Khilat of sind upon Hasan as a mark of recognition of “his literary meri Alter this, Hasan wrote three books in Persian and Kaé- miri mixed, which are greatly admired by the public. Their names are —Gulistdn-i-’ Ikhlaq, Kharita Asrar, and ’ Ajdz-t-Gari- He once went to R4walpindi and there came to know that, there was a Persian History of Kasmir written by Mula Ahmad possession of a man named Mulah Muhmid. This History is a very rare book. It is said to be the translation of an ancient book called Ratndkar Purana containing the accounts of thirty- five kings who ruled in Kasmir five thousand years ago, and also of seven kings who ruled in Kaémir from the end of second to the beginning of sixth century of Christian era, which accounts were lost to history. Ratnakar Pur4na had been discovered in 196 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [{May, 1913. the time of Zain-ul-Abdin who reigned in Kasmir from 1422 to 1474 a.D., and under his orders Mulah Ahmad, the poet laureate of his court, translated it into Persian. Ratndkar Purana is now again untraceable, and on this account the above-men- tioned translation is of immense importance. Hasan went to Pindori and took a copy of this History. Bape to Kasmir he wrote a History of Kasmir of his own, which he embodied the important facts he had found in Mulah Ahmad’s History of Kasmir. This copy of Mulah Ahmad’s History was subsequently lost by him in a flood in which his boat capsized, he being thrown into water together with the book and rescued but alas! without the book. In 1902 a.p. the Kasmir Durbar tried to secure a copy of Mulah Ahmad’s History, but Mulah Mahméd, from whom Hasan had got his copy, had since died and his family had removed to Kabul at the invitation of His Majesty the late Amir Abdul Rahman Khan Hasan gave a subtle touch of humour mingled with her mother-in-law was often quarrelling with her, and asked for a charm so that the quarrels might cease. Hasan gave her a charm, enjoining upon her that whenever her mother- in-law would be egin to utter harsh words to her she should at once put the charm under her own teeth and press it hard. e Pir’s instructions were faithfully followed. The daughter in law having the charm pressed under her teeth could not open her mouth to remonstrate with her mother-in- law for her abitaeations and the latter’s-fury would fas quently at once abate. The result was that there was soo peace between them. The simple woman ascribed this ohinaga not to her own silence, but to the efficacy of the charm, for which she came to the Pir and thanked him. Another time a woman told him that whenever she sat down to spin, it would happen that she had to go away to do some other more urgent work and she, therefore, requested to be given a charm in order went to spin, taking care that the thread would not break. ‘The result was that she thought of nothing but the thread which the Pir had said must not break, and the consequence was thing else while spinning. The ignorant woman ascribed this to the wonderful efficacy of the charm and had firmer faith in the Pir. _ Sir W. R. Lawrence, when Settlement Commissioner of the Kasmir State, was supplied by Hasan with much historical Vol. mae No. 5.} History of Kaémir. 197 [NV.S.] infonnHOR and was also taught the Kasmiri language by him. In page 454 of his Valley of Ets fabliad Sir Walter thus expresses his gratefulness to the man ** What else (Kaémiri hbziat I have learnt, I owe Pir Hasan Sah, a lear ned KaSmiri, whose work has settle been sie 8 the villagers.’’ in KaSmir asking Hasan to come to Simla to be presented to His Excellency, but the pies came too late, as Hasan had died just a few days befor asan had only one son, named Gul4m Muhammad Ali, who died in 1311 a.n. (1893 a A.D.) in his 35th year of age, leav- Sa’id, behind. These are now at their native village engaged in their hereditary occupation of priesthood of a large number of uhammadans, and are also doing agriculture. In Part II, Chapter I of my paper on the History of Kasmir published in this Journal for April 1910, I stated that Kalhana had written in his Rajatarangini that the reign of king Randditya extended over 300 years. Itis needless to remark that attributing such a longevity to a human being is simply extravagant. It was evidently intended to cover a great break of which no record of the succession of kings was forthcoming in the time of Kalhana. Even an orthodox Hindu will shake his head on hearing it, remembering that in this Kaliyuga age the span of man’s life is only 120 years, beyond which even the incarnation of Visnu, i.e. Krisna, could not live. Hasan, the author of the Persian History of Kasmir, how- ever, says that Ranaditya reigned for only 60 years and 3 months, which of course seems probable, and seven kings ruled, six preceding and one following him, whose accounts have been omitted in the Rajatarangint. According to this author this period extended over not 300 years but 329 years and 5 months. He has given the names as well as the accounts of the rule of these seven kings, one of whom is Vain inya- ditya, who, though not mentioned in the Rajatarangini, is well remembered even to the present day by every household in Kas to have been an extremely good an _— ruler. ‘His. name has descended down from generation generation and his fame in ae. has equalled, if not ae that of Vikramaditya of There occurs in the Raja- tarangini (Book V. 97-100) a Saipk by the name of Vainy4a- svamin about whose founder no mention is made therein any- where, but it proves that there was a king of the name of \ 198 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [May, 1913. Zain-ul-abdin, who reigned in Kagmir from 1422 to 1474 4 ee had got prepared from Mulah Ahmad, the poet-laureate of his court. I have already attempted to discuss the reliability of asan’s History in the above-mentioned paper and it is So this is the second gap in the Réjatarangini. The first is for a period for which Kalhana stated that he could not get the accounts of thirty-five kings who had ruled during it, which ry in the above-mentioned paper. Need I say how important it is to the historians to find this second gap also filled up? kings who ruled during the above period, of which, as I have stated above, 300 years are incorrectly ascribed to only one king (Randditya) by Kalhana. Tunjina—191-234 a.n, Tufijina was the second son of Yudhisthira and after the death of his brother, Narendraditya, proclaimed himself King of Kasmir. Narendraditya had a son named Sradwal whom Tufijina appointed as his minister. In course of time they fell out with each other and the result was that Sradwal was murdered. Sradwal left a son named Sarabsena, seven years old, and this poor helpless boy, out of fear of Tufjina, escaped with his mother to Nagarkot. to have him, and he subsequently gave him his own daughter in marriage. When he attained majority, he collected some Sarabsena —234.82 a.p. After Tufijina, Sarabsena ascended the throne. He estab- He went to India twice and invaded and conquered many countries. His queen was the daughter of the King of Kanauj. e built a temple of Bhutesvara at Vicirnag (the northern suburb of Srinagar arabsena died after reigning for 48 years. Gandharbsena—282-319 a.p. Gandharbsena, son of Sarabsena, now sat on the throne. His reign was marked with slothfulness diversified with cruelty. . | . . Vol. IX, No. 5.] History of Kasmir. 199 [N.S.] Taking advantage of his weak rule, the Chiefs in India, who were considering themselves under the suzerainty of the King of Kagmir, shook off his control. It is said he had brought a dancing girl from India, and was passing day and night in her company. Consequently the government fell into disorder. Lachman, grandson of Tufijina, was then a Jagir-holder at Dachinpor. He took the opportunity, and coming with some troops laid siege to the palace. For seven days the struggle continued. The king’s troops, who had become disgusted with his conduct, went over to the intruder then the king had to surrender. Lachman captivated him and took possession of the kingdom Gandharbsena ruled for 37 years. Lachman—319-52 A.D. Lachman ascended the throne in 319 a.D. and ruled well, checking the tide of extortion and misgovernment. The Chief- tains of the distant parts of Kasmir, who had revolted in the time of his predecessor, were brought again to submission by : e arrived in the Panjdb,»a mishap occurred. He was sleeping under a tree with a red handkerchief spread over his face. An eagle taking it to be a piece of flesh pounced upon him. Its sharp talons pricked down through the handkerchief right into the king’s eyes and pulled them out. The king had a very severe pain and in three days died. He reigned for 32 years and 6 months. Strak --352-403 a.p. Lachman’s brother, named Sitrak, succeeded him. He completed the expedition successfully which his predecessor commenced. Sukaram Pal, Chief of Multan, retired into a fort and held out for one month, but ultimately made peace, . agreeing to pay a tribute to Stirak. After this the victorious king returned to Kasmir. Later on, a chief, Dardu by name, rebelled and coming into the Kamraj plundered the villages. Sitirak with his troops went out to oppose him and Dardu together with his men retreated and fled away into the hills, but Stirak pursued them. He went too far without circumspection until Dardu’s men entrapped him and his force between two hills and cut off their supplies. They also rolled down stones from the hills upon them and killed all the troops. The king was taken prisoner and detained in a fort at Pattan. i Vajraditya was the son of king Lachman. He went with a force to get his uncle released. He first marched over the 200 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [May, 1913. country of Dardu, sacked it and massacred its inhabitants and then came to Pattin and took the fort by storm but too late, as just at his approach the enemy cut off the head of Strak and threw it down over the walls of the fort. Stirak’s reign extended over 51 years. Vajraditya—403-14 a.p. Vajraditya ascended the throne in the year 403 a.p. He had, however, to contend with the son of Sarak named Jayendra. They fought in the Maraj Division for one year without either of them getting vanquished. At last Vajraditya accomplished his purpose in a particularly cruel and treacherous manner. He negotiated and made peace with his foe and when the latter came over to his camp, he basely murdered him. Jayendra’s troops got frantic and indignant at this treachery and fought with Vajraditya until 10,000 troops were lost on both sides. Vajraditya, however, won the field and returned to his capital. He was a good ruler. He built many temples and repaired Vijajeshvare temple. In his time the grains were very cheap, husked rice selling at 8 pice a Kharvdr (96 seers). He reigned for 10 years and 8 months. # Ranaditya —414-74 a.p. Ranaditya succeeded his father in 414 a.p. He was a glorious king,—powerful, just, generous and good. His head was formed li shell. He had a beautiful queen named Rana-rambha. There is a legend that he was in his former birth a gambler. Having lost all his property in gambling and Bhramara-vasini and could not be a wife to a mortal. But he insisted that he would ask for no other boon, and if she Vol. IX, No. 5.] History of Kasmir. 201 [NV.8.] was to keep her word she should accede to his request. She then told him that it would be so in another birth. After this he committed suicide by throwing himself down from a tree at Prayaga (the junction of the Sindh river with the Jhelum near Sadipur) in the hope of taking a fresh birth in union with the goddess. He was born as Ranaditya and she as Rana-rambha. The latter was found floating in the ocean by the king of the Cholas (Tanjore) named Ratisena, who picked her up and nourished her. When she was grown up, several kings asked for her hand but Ratisena would not consent. Randaditya also sent his minister for this girl and Ratisena was about to give his refusal when Rana-rambha declared to him that this king should be her husband. She then related to him the whole story of her origin and thereupon Ratisena sent her to the residence of one of his friends, the king of Kuluta (Kulu) where the nuptials were to be celebrated. Ranaditya went to Kulu and married her, As she could not touch a mortal, she never touched him. She used to deceive the king by keeping in bed a phantom woman resembling herself and would herself go out at night in the form of a bee. as it represented Sakti alone without Siva. Siva then put together into a lump. all the jewels brought as marriage hands Ravana who used to worship them at Lanka (Ceylon) and after his being killed by Rama were carried away by the monkeys to the Himalayas. These beasts after satisfy- ing their curiosity dropped them into the Uttara-manasa (Gangabal) lake.’’ The queen further said—‘‘ | have already ext morning the king’s happiness knew no bounds to see them come just in time, and he began first to consecrate the Ranesvara Siva-linga when the image of Ranasvamin, through 202 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. {May, 1913. the power of Rana-rambha, seated itself miraculously on the pitha. The queen offered her property to the latter image, and several villages were presented to it by other worshippers. It is said there was a water-carrier, named Brahma, who in by the people, he moved through the air pr consecrating the Ran-eivara Linga and consecrated the Ranasvamin secretly. The queen erected a grand hall in honour of this Siddha which she called Brahma-mandapa. Ranaditya and his —_ also built the ee i of Rana- rambha-svamin and Rana-rambha-deva and a Matha for men- dicants on the Hari Parbat hill, probably on its southern side, which gave Rainavari (eastern suburb of Srinagar) its name. The king also established a hospital for the sick and suffering poor, in order to ward off a danger threatening his another queen, Sena-mukhi. He erected a temple of Martanda (Sun) at the village of Simha-rotsika which ia called Ranapura- svamin. The modern name of Simha-rotsika is Sumra-bug village near Pantachuk (5 miles from Srinagar on the Anant- nag road) on the left bank of the Vitasta. At Pantachuk is the ey 2 © 5 > S) = 4 E: Q = ct = fa) ra ° 1S ed on at SS Es re) Lar} -_ all oO a aman and then went to Nandi-sila (Nund-kol lake). After- wards he entered the cave of Namu chi ene near the 3rd The ty hi Island), probably the small island called Rupalank or Silver Island in the Dal lake. Ranaditya’s rule lasted 60 years and 3 months. Vainyaditya—474-521 a.p. Cr a sat on the throne of his father, Ranaditya, in He went, when yet a boy eleven eed old, to visit different oc une? in India in company with his nele, Mangaladitya. — visiting various places of tants be: went to the Sivalik untains where he saw a recluse, named Ganapat, who h bias living in a cave since 100 years. Vainyaditya remained with him, and, under his guidance, practised penances for ee ee een ee ee Vol. IX, No. 5.]. History of Kaémir. 203° LW.S.] twelve years, taking no food except a cup of milk each day. He became a perfect ascetic and after twenty years returned to Kaésmir at the bidding of his spiritual guide. Here he stayed for one — in the Ji8teSvara temple on the top of the Takht-i- Suleman When ‘Randditya retired into the cave of Namcibal, the courtiers approached Vainyaditya and requested him to sit on Gagribal built an abode for himself near which two vaults were constructed. In one of these vaults the revenue of the Maraj Division and in the other that of the Kamraj Division was to be deposited. He then issued an edict to the effect that sources was collected by day was distributed among the poor in the evening, nothing being left for the morrow. For his own subsistence he used to cultivate himself a piece of land and out of it the value of the tenth part was, like other cultivators, given to the treasury as government share. Till the end of his reign every cultivator used to pay his dues himself, and anyone failing to do so somehow came to grief. Anyon e taking what did not legitimately belong to him suffered in some way or other ; and anybody attempting to steal got his hand withered. Under these halcyon state of affairs none had an trouble. Being an ascetic himself, whatever he would utter at the riverside, would happen » once. Any person commit- ting an offence got punishment by his curse. All his life through he wore a quilt like a aula: and never tasted flesh meat. He built the temple of at Messy at Trigam at the confluence of Sindh with the Vitas This noblest and purest of Kaka kings died after 47 years’ peaceful and happy rule. eS Se aa te autos : > Peace Pcie tok aq fe : St Prat — we 4 ae areer uae ; se bape if Ae = ae te + 2 i a3 Ff see £5 7 ; E 9 . i ‘ . jt 4 t neal +> De hubey : : ei tMiee a Seg Huet tA i Bere pao pee peti ri Sones Yee ol - ae, St Bn, hee ka ots oe hy ge ee eS ee ee ee ee ee Oe ee ee et ee ee eee 23. The Double Mercuri-periodides of Substituted Ammo- nium Bases. Tetrapropylammonium Mercuri-periodide. By Rasix Lat Datra and Haripas MUKHERJEA. In a paper to the Chemical Society (Trans. Chem. Soc., 1913, 103, 426), it has been pointed out by one of us that when platinic chloride or cupric chloride is added to substituted the case of double platinic eh the platinic iodide itself is stable and no special care has to be taken for preparing the double salts, but in the case of oy salts with cupric iodide, the cupric iodide is unstable, decomposing into cuprous iodide and ee as been pointed out before that the heavily substituted eae bases form with remarkable facility the double tig’ iodides, since they contribute materially to their forma. tion by reason of the affinity of those bases for iodine. It is for this reason that no double salt of cupric iodide has been ress with the iodides of alkali metals and lightly substi- ted ammonium bases, while the platinic iodides form double iodides with them with great ease. There is, then, a strong affinity of the substituted ammo- This strong affinity of the bases for iodine suggested to us the area “of formation of double salts in which there are uigher valencies in existence as regards iodine and accordingly the pe gbgces of double Born gal ax oe was undertaken. n this case the method of preparation has been varied a little froin the usual method of double serge gaies a in as much as the hexavalent mercury atom has not been realized in the case of any salt of mercury. In the case of cloubie salts with cupric iodide, we had a parallel valency in cupric chloride and hence the method of double decomposition was feasible. The following direct method has been used successfully for the dissolved in a solution of potassium iodide. The resulting solution contains presumably Hgl, in a very loose "added of 206 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [June, 1913.] the iodine and mercuri-periodide comes out as a precipitate in double combination. TETRAPROPYLAMMONIUM MERCURI-PERIODIDE. 5N (C;H,), I, HgI,. The solution of mercuric iodide and iodine was prepared by dissolving weighed quantities in potassium iodide and the mo- nium iodide. The precipitate thus obtained was triturated in a mortar with the mother liquor, filtered and washed with a small quantity of water, since on the addition of a large quan- tity the salt decomposes with the liberation of iodine, as ob- served in the case of double cupric iodides. The precipitate was dried in a desiccator over sulphuric acid and had a brown colour. The salt on analysis gave the following results :— 0°3631g gave 0:0308 HgS; Hg=7'48 0°1190g gave 0°1195 Agl; I1=54-29 Calc. for 6N (C,H,),I, HgIl,; Hg=7°91; 1=55°28. mercuric iodide, having a formula 2N(C,H,),I, HglI,. The decomposition that takes place might be represented thus :— 5N(C;H,),1, HgI, = 2N (C3H,),, HgI, + 3N(C;H,),I + 21, We are at present engaged in preparing a series of double mercuri-periodides with various substituted ammonium bases and also other persalts by similar methods. e take this opportunity to express our best thanks to Professor P. C. Ray for his kind encouragement. POLONIA GER PL RPT OG 24. The Action of Nitrosy] Chloride on Secondary Amines, Methylbenzylnitrosamine and EthylbenzylInitrosamine. By Rastx Lat Datta. The action of nitrosyl ee on ee amines was studied for the first time by Solonina (J. Rus 0C., 1898, 30, 43). For this purpose, ae added an sitet solution of nitrosyl chloride to a solution of the amine in ether. The and nitrosoisobutylene were formed. Ethylamine gave nitro- isobutylamine, seine el hee aby and nitrosopiperidine from the corresponding secondary To study the general -applinabllity of the method and also the action of this reagent on tertiary cyclic bases, this abr apenok tion was undertaken. In this communication, the results are described of the action of nitrosyl chloride on two neoondary giv 1912, 28, ). Nitrosyl chloride was prepared according to the method of Tilden (Journ. Chem. Soc., 1860, 13, 630). For this purpose a mixture of nitric acid (Sp. Gr. 1-42) and hydrochloric acid (Sp. Gr. 1-16) was heated and the dried vapours passed into a solu- acid forming nitrosylsulphuric acid, while antl latter esca The nitrosylsulphuric acid thus obtained was h anhydrous sodium chloride, when a stream of Finan chloride was obtained. nstead of using an ethereal solution of nitrosy] chloride as did Solent, the gas was directly passed into an ethereal solu- tion of the amine, when secondary nitrosamine and amine 208 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (June, 1913.] hydrochloride are produced, the former remaining in solution and the latter precipitating out. METHYLBENZYLNITROSAMINE. The amine used was obtained from Kahlbaum. Nitrosyl Lieb analysis indicated that it was methylbenzylnitrosamine. 0°1722 gave 29 c.c. N, at 31° and 760 m.m.; N=18°30 0°2089 gave 4832 CO, and 1276 H,O; C=63:09, H=6°77 Cale. for C,H-CH.N (NO); C=64:00; H=6°66; N=18°66. t is a yellowish oil, insolubie in water and soluble in alcohol and ether. It possesses a peculiar smell by which means it can be readily detected. Its boiling point could not be determined as the quantity prepared was too small. This and other constants will be described in a future paper. ETHYLBENZYLNITROSAMINE. Ethylbenzylnitrosamine was prepared similarly to methyl benzylnitrosamine by passing nitrosyl chloride through an ethereal solution of the amine, filtering off ethylbenzylamine tion in air Ethylbenzyl- lysed : 0'1422 gave 21 c.c. N, at 28° and 760 mm.; N=16-43. Cale. for C,H,.C,H,N NO; N=17-07. is a yellowish oil, insoluble in water but soluble in alcohol and ether, possessing a peculiar our. he action of nitrosyl chloride on cyclic and tertiary bases- is under investigation. erm A REPORT ON THE BIOLOGY OF THE LAKE OF TIBERIAS. SECOND SERIES. List of Subjects dealt with in Second Series, Pi Leeches (Hirudinea) .. N. Annandale, D.Sc., F.A.S.B. .. yi 1 Collembola (Cyphoderus) .. Prof.G.N. Carpenter, B.Sc., M.R.I.A. 215 Dragonflies (Odonata) -. F. F. Laidlaw, F.Z.8., F.E.S., F.L.8. 219 Larva of the Sponge Nudo- spongilla a. ae N. Annandale, D.Sc., F.A.8.B. ., 221 Polyzoa rials sy -+ 223 Rotifers (Rotatoria) = G F. ESS F. R. M.S 1+ 2e0 Crustacea Entomostraca .. Robert Gurney ~- 231 Anatomy of the Prawn ei phlocaris ie Ekendranath Ghosh, B.Sc. s« 283 Crustacea Decapoda { “G W ea kis Ms res soe Fies Be The first series of papers in this Report was published in Vol. IX, No, I, of this Journal, pp. 17-88 (1913). | : F | ; ee eT ee ee et ih ct a te i a rah Se, Tt Te: eee Se ee Le ee WIE reo eke NS as ee ee ee ae 25.. The Leeches of the Lake of Tiberias. By N. Annanpae, D.Sc., F.A.S.B. (Published by permission of the Trustees of the Indian Museum.) The Hirudinean fauna of the Lake of Tiberias is a poo one and may now be regarded as well known, for three Seperate collections from the district have agreed with one another. These three collections are (i) that made by Dr. Th. Barrois in 1890; (ii) that made by Dr. Festa in 1893; and (iii) that made y myself in 1912. The two former were described by Prof. own collection includes specimens of three et one of which was not taken in the immediate vicinity of the lake, although doubtless it occurs there. I have found it ache to recognize the local form of one common species as a distinct race or subspecies. The species are— Placobdella catenigera (Moq.-Tand.). I found a large specimen under a stone in the stream that runs through the Wad-es-Semakh. It was full of blood and had probably just left a tortoise, for the species is parasitic on aquatic Chelonia. A very young leech possibly of this species was found under a stone at the edge of the lake near Mejdal. < catenigera is widely distributed in Eastern Europe and Western Asia. aemopsis sanguisuga (Linn.). Several specimens were obtained from ha village fountain at Kefr Kenna between Tiberias and Nazareth. The species is common in such situations in Palestine nite probably shares with Limnatis nilotica' the habit of entering the throats of animals and persons who drink incautiously at springs, causing thereby great discomfort and even dan . Herpobdella (Dina) lineata (O. F. Miiller). : This is the only leech at all common in the lake. It is discussed in the following note — eS (Dina) lineata i F. Miiller). blasei, Blanchard, Att. Soc Sci. Nat. Geog. III, No. 4 (1892). Rév. Biol. Nord France Mi p. 45 (1804) + “Boll. Mus. Torino VIII, No. 161, p. 3 (1893 1 CF. Mabberinisn , Parastioloyy Y: p- - 282 (1908). 212 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [June, 1913. Nephelis gallica, id., Bull. Soc. zool. France XVII, p. 172 (1892). Dina latina, id., Att. Soc. lig. Sci. Nat. Geog. III, No. 4 (1892). Dina quadristriata, id., Boll. Mus. Torino 1X, No. 192, p. 60 (1894). Herpobdella lineata, Johansson, Zool. Anz. XXXVI, p. 379 (1910). Herpobdella lineata, Rousseau, Ann. Biol. lacustre V, p. 79 1913). This species has, especially in the last few years, been subjected to many change s of name:! there seems little doubt that it is the one called Hirudo lineata by F. O. Miiller and that lineata is therefore the correct specific designation. The generic name, however, has also been called in question. In 1893 Blanchard made it the type of his new genus Dina, because it differed from other Herpobdellidae in that the third ring of the somite was enlarged and divided longitudinally by a superficial furrow. This feature, which is shared with at least one other European species (Dina absoloni, Johansson), * is evidently constant, although often difficult to detect, and sand be regarded, as Johansson (1913) suggests, as of subgeneric valu The typical form of the species is widely distributed in Europe, North and Central America and occurs also in Madeira and the Azores. Varieties or local races have been described (in Russian *) from Siberia and Mongolia aerpeaahs (1894) describes the colouration of “< Dina quad- ristriata’’ as follows :-~‘* Venter pallidus. Dorsum cinereum aut subviride, adele taeniis nigris ornalum, maculis albidis aut subfiavis praesertim supra primum an nulum somiti notatum. But, although the living individuals I saw in Palestine and Syria varied | somewhat in the exact shade of the dorsal surface, they agreed in being absolutely devoid of all trace of definite markings. : lal seed therefore, to regard the race as distinct under the n Subsf. concolor, nov. This race is Sees from the typical form of the species by the absence of all trace of the longitudinai stripes which are usually a conspicuous feature of the colouration. The ventral surface is devoid of superficial colour, while the back is uniformly suffused with black pigment, to a different : See J rieaprastgal s paper ‘‘ Zur Kenntnisder oes gon cae ands,’ Zool. Anz. XXXVI, p. 379 (1910), and Rous ee Hiradinges d’eau pen d’Europe,’’ Ann. a Pe ames ¥, p. » 286 (1913). ool. Anz, XLII, nr. 2, p. bd ge 8 Plotnikow, Ann. Mus, Zoo 2, Bob. Bt St. oe X, p. 153 (1905). Pa Bei ERRATA. In Journal, Vol. IX, No. 6, 1913, page 212— Line’ 22, from top, for ‘divided longitudinally’? read ‘* divided transversely.’’ From Hexen line 1, for ‘‘St. Pétersbe’’ read ‘St. erbs. From ml line 7, for ‘*Subsf.” read ‘‘ Subsp.” Vol. IX, No. 6.] The Leeches of the Lake of Tiberias. 213 [NV.8.] depth of tint in different individuals. As a rule small indivi- have seen large ones ied were quite pale. The blood is red and gives the living animal a pinkish tinge, the depth of which soot ha Sencadé ss on nthe degree of pigmentation of the integum My eee specimens, killed in “y oo condition, are 35 mm. long by 3 mm. broad and 2 m. deep. In life they were flatter and, viet at a distinctly broader. Distribution.—Lake of Tiberias and neighbourhood; R. Barada. There are eit of this race in my collection from near Damascus and from several of the springs round the lake as well from the Lake itself, in which it is one of the commonest animals. Johansson and Rousseau both mention cases in which the stripes are faint or obsolete, but in Europe these are apparently aberrations. Dina absoloni of the former author entirely lacks pigment and is distinguished by the fact that the oe pores. are separated by three instead of five complete rings. Blanchard says (1893) that ‘‘ D. quadristriata’’ is ‘* littér- alement banale en Syrie.’’ This I can confirm from my own observations both at Tiberias and at Damascus. In = gen I took most of my specimens on the lower surface of s the edge, on one occasion finding no less than 23 individnale adhering to a single stone of not more than 15-0 sq. cm. in - area. In this position the food consisted mainly of small Oligo- chaeta, which were swallowed whole. A large but very pale individual was dredged from between 6 and 8 metres in the Jordan channel in the lake near Sema No other species of leech is actually known to inhabit the Lake of Tiberias, but Blanchard in recording the occurrence of ‘Placobdella carinata (Diesg.) in one of the tributaries of the R. Orontes states that Barrois took a large number of speci- The list of Hirudinea known from the lake must, therefore, stand for the present as follows :— Fam. Glossiphonidae. 1. Placobdella catenigera Peet et a eg 2. ? Placobdella carinata (Diesing). Fam. Herpobdellidae. 3. Herpobdella (Dina) lineata (O. F. Miller). though one of these species occurs in North Africa and even in localities outside the Palaearctic Region, they may all 214 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (June, 1913.] be hides tig as sie proaiged representative of the European fauna. No one of them can be stated to be either Oriental or Ethiopian in ane and they afford no evidence, except in the peculiar colouration of the race of H. lineata found in the Lake of Tiberias but also in the R. Barada, of long-continued isolation. The species are lacustrine and not related to marine forms. ae Sioa SP ieee Ne oe Ra Sa 26. A New Springtail from Galilee. By Proressor George H. Carpenter, B.So., M.B.I. As, Royal College of Science, Dublin Communicated by Dr. N. ANNANDALE. (Plate VIII.) . N. Annandale’s ep is researches in and around the Lake of Galilee in October, 1912, have resulted in the dis- covery of a single species of ia Co liewibolé or “‘ Springtails ’’ which proves to be of considerable interest, and I am oo grateful to him for having kindly entrusted his specimens to for study and description. He found the frail white rset: referable to a new species of the genus Cyphoderus, beneat stones at the edge of a brackish spring on pes oe of the lake, about two miles north of the town of Tiber Order COLLEMBOLA. Family ENnTroOMOBRYIDAE. Genus CypHoperus, Nicolet. f oO termites, and in correspondence with their dark dweltiogipleses: are white and blin d. Cyphoderus genneserae, sp. nov. Length 15mm. Feelers twice as long as head. Foot with apical hair tapering, not clubbed, claw with a large and a small basal tooth. Spring with dens and mucro together as long as diinapabieiaens: dens two and a half times as long as mucro ; mucro with three teeth (one apical and two dorsal). Colour white. ity. In salt spring on ape eg near Tiberias. Types in tndkati Museum, Calcutt 216 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [June, 1913. The above short diagnosis serves | believe to define this species from others of Cyphoderus. As usual in this genus there is no trace of eyes. The four segments of the feeler (fig. 1) have approximately the proportional lengths, 1:3:2:5. I one specimen, one of the feelers has only three segments, the second of these being three-quarters as long as the terminal (fig. 2). The foot is remarkable for the replacement of the usual clubbed tenent hair by a slender tapering bristle. In connec- tion with the base of the foot-claw there is a small anterior — tooth-like outgrowth (fig. 3, 4, 5) in addition to the prominent inder one, which characterises this genus generally (fig. 3, 4, a). The lamella of the claw has no teeth. The empodial appendage or ‘‘inferior claw’’ has the three characteristic lamellae very distinct, the inwardly and forwardly directed one (fig. 3, 4, c) being pointed and leaf-like. The fourth abdomi- nal segment is four and a half times as long as the third. The dens of the spring (figs. 1, 5) has six pairs of rather narrow scales (fig. 5d), arranged along the two sides of its dorsal or hinder edge, and a large broad scale (fig. 5e) inserted close to the base of the mucro. The latter structure (fig. 5m) has three prominent teeth, one terminal, which is slightly hooked, and two dorsal. the presence of three teeth on the mucro, C. genneserae differs from the European species C’. albinus, Nic., and from the B C. simulans, Imms (1, pp. 115-6, pl. xii, figs. 90, 91), dition to the three teet dorsal tooth. In both these Sudanese species, however, the lamella of the foot-claw is conspicuously toothed, and the large scales on the many well-known corres pondences between the flora and fauna of the Jordan valley and those of tropical Africa. LITERATURE. (1) A. D. Imms. On some Collembola from India, Burma, Bas Pee Proc. Zool. Soc Lond., 1912, pp. 80-125, pls. —_ i i : x (2) EB. Wahlgren. Sudan. Results of th and the White Nile, | Apterygoten aus Aegypten und dem e Swedish Zoological Expedition to Egypt 901, no. 15, Uppsala, 1906. Journ., As. Soc., Beng., Vol. EX. 1913, PLATE VIII. Cyphoderus genneserae, sp. nov. Vol. IX, No. 6.] A New Springtail from Galilee. 217 [N.S.] Puate VIII. Fie. 1. Cyphoderus genneserae. Side view. ~* 50. Abnormal feeler. x 50. aS Tip of fore-foot: side view showing claw with its two tooth-like basal lamellae (4 and 6) and em- podial appendage with leaf-like lamella (c). x ca. 466. er pO ,, 4. Tip of middle foot, outer view; lettering as in fig. 3. x ca. 46 ,» 5. End of dens, with paired (d) and terminal (¢) scales, and mucro (m). x ca. 466. or 27. Note on the Dragonflies of Syria and the Jordan Valley. By F. F. Latpiaw, F.ZS., F.E.S., F.LS. Communicated by Dr. N. ANNANDALE. t them in abundance round its shores in open country, but among the dense vegetation that surrounds many of the pools and streams in the vicinity several species of Agrionidae are to be found in fairly large numbers.—N. Annandale.] The Odonata of Syria and of the Jordan Valley are still imperfectly known. lements at least enter into the composition of the sentatives recorded from Syria, as well as the species of the genus Sympetrum occurring in the area under discussion. Secondly there occur a number of species belonging to the tropical old world fauna, and more especially to the were collected by Mr. Annandale, viz. Trithemis annulata (Palisot de Beauvois) and Brachythemis leucosticta, Burm. are Anax immaculifrons, Burm. described from Tonkin and Indo-China; and Psilocnemis kervillei, Martin, a new species belonging to a characteristic Indo-Malayan genus, which is, Owever, represented in Madagascar, and is exceedingly closely related to the Mediterranean Platycnemis. Ris has recently published an analysis of the known 220 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (June, 1913.] dragonfly fauna of the Egyptian Soudan. He groups the species as follows :— 1. Palaearctic; 2. Palaearctic-Mediterranean ; 3. Aethiopi- an, with Northern extension ; 4. Typica | Aethiopian ; 5. Aethio- pian with _ Eastern extension ; 6. Oriental (reaching only to ez); 7. kaiserl. Akad. open ges Wien ; mathem.-naturw. Klasse: Bd. cxxi, Abt. 1; April, 1912). Probably all of these except 4 will be found to be repre- sented in — pies Valley and Syria ; possibly even group 4 may be ih Mr. Pils? s two species on this classification fall most naturally into group 5. ge ig ti gti, ln ctl gt ty, iy oS Tes 28, Note on bi Sponge-Larva from the Lake of Tiberias. By N. ANNANDALE, D.Sc., F.A.S.B. (Published by permission of the Trustees of the Indian Museum.) (Plate VII, fig. 3.) In a small aquarium which I kept at Tiberias I found on October 22nd certain little organisms which I took at the time for the larvae of Phylactolaematous polyzoa. As they differed proved them to be sponge-larvae, and as Nudospongilla ma was the only sponge living in the aquarium and as sponges of the species were actually full of embryos at the time in the lake, there can be no doubt that the larvae belonged to that species. The larvae were in life of a milky white colour, with a more opaque patch (representing the solid part of the organ- ism) clearly visible with the aid of a hand lens at one end. A though they did not gyrate on their longer axis as the larvae of Phylactolaemata usually do, Their form was very broadly ovoid, approaching the spherical. The broader end was direc- Single org ut course the polyzoon is much more highly organized than the sponge at the time each is set free e N al ppa is, in the case of pre- served specimens, about 0-44 mm. long by : little more than half of the bladder-like body is hollow, the re- mainder being filled with the primitive dermal cells. Amongst these latter certain cells have already taken on the function of 222 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [June, 1913.] scleroblasts, and, indeed, spicules are already well developed and have begun to be arranged in fascicles or fibres. n the specimen figured a certain distortion of the narrower end has been brought about by shrinkage in the preservatives used (picro-formol-acetic solution followed by 90% alcohol) and it is probable that the projection of one fascicle of spicules through the ciliated membrane is not natural. is no means certain that all the possibly heterogeneous species which I have assigned provisionally to the genus have acommon origin ; the skeleton of N. mappa in particular is 1s;1t may be claimed with confidence that N. mappa at any rate is a true Spongillid, for its larva hardly differs from that of Spongilla except in being more nearly spherical. Advanced Plate VII, fig. 3. Fig. 3. Larva of Nudospongilla mappa Annand., x 100. The specimen had been stained with picro-carmine and mounted, after clearing, in Canada balsam. Sit = tai lig giligs epee pe ee 29. The Polyzoa of the Lake of Tiberias. By N. AnnanpDae, D.Sc., F.A.S.B. (Published by permission of the Trustees of the Indian Museum.) (Plate VII, figs. 1, 2.) Although a careful search for Polyzoa was made and a large number of specimens obtained, only two species are repre- sented in my collection from the Lake of Tiberias. I have called them Fredericella sultana blasted subsp. nov., and Plumat tella auricomis, one eS character from any other species hitherto criti- cally examin Fredericella sultana jordanica, subsp. nov. This race differs from the a Fredericella sultana (Blumenbach) in the neaat tty characters :— 1. Even when wing pate the _—, — not form free Ep raunhes of more than two zooec 2. The ectocyst is usually quite colourless, bat in old colonies the covering of some zooecia situated in the oldest part is often thick and dar 3. The zooecia are never circular in cross-section but always possess a ie | dorsal keel containing a longitudinal furrow These characters are not, in my opinion, oa specific value, but as they are constant in a large of specimens examined both in the a the sees ahr: they may be arule they are distinctly flattened on the lower surfac keel and furrow are particularly well marked on © old oes, . 224 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (June, 1913. but even on young branches can as a rule be detected. They become clearer in disintegrating zooecia the polypide of which as died. : : The polypide resembles that of the typical race, except that the tentacles, about 20 in number, are perhaps longer. The velum at their base is very narrow but distinctly festooned. The statoblasts are smooth on both surfaces and in other respects resemble those of European colonies; but they are perhaps as a rule more elongate and less frequently kidney- shaped. They are more numerous in some colonies than is usual in the European race. ae : e type of Fredericella sultana jordanica is preserved in spirit in the Indian Museum, its number in our registers being aving now had the opportunity of examining a consider- they can be distinguished at present : Forma typica, Indica. Jordanica. Duplessisi. Colony, when luxuri- Colony recum-| Colony _recum- | Colony free in ant, with long free} kent, adherent. bent, adherent.| mud. br es, erent ati Zooecia a st cylin- | Zooecia with ‘ drical, with aslight | dorsal keel and| gal keel andfur-, most cylin- dorsal keel onolder | furrow more or row well devel- | drical. | less distinct. oped. Statoblast with| Statoblast with | Statoblast un- one surface; both surfaces| known. sculptured. smooth. Zooecia with dor- | Zooecia al zooecia. Statoblast with _both surfaces smooth | Faun. Brit. Ind., Freshwater Snon es, pg i . 245 (1911), and Rec. Ind. Mus. VIL, pp. 136, 140 (1913). . ne 2 Proc. Zool. Soc. London, 1907 (2), p. 254, Vol. IX, No. 6.] The Polyzoa of the Lake of Tiberias. 225 [V.S.] F. sultana (typical) is found all over Europe, in the West- ern Himalayas, in North America, and probably in North Africa ; possibly also in Natal. F. australiensis! from New dard, but the chief characters on which he bases his diagnosis Fredericella from Australia. F. sultana jordanica has only been found in the Lake of Tiberias and in the R. Jordan at its exit therefrom. F, sultana indica, although scarce, is apparently of general distribution in the Indian Peninsular area. F, sultana duplessisi was obtained from considerable depths in the Lake of Geneva. It is doubtful whether it is more than a phase of the typical form that lives free in mud. The only specimen I have seen supports Loppens’s contention? that it only differs from the typical form in that it is not fixed to any solid object; but this specimen, which was shown me r. C. Rousselet in London, was imperfect, and no stato- blasts have as yet been discovered. n October, 1912, I found F. sultana jordanica abundant on the lower surface of stones round the edge of the Lake? of Tiberias. I also noticed many dead colonies in a similar rar id not obtain specimens below 8 metres. I could find none free in mud; but some of the stones on which old but apparently vigorous colonies grew were half buried in the dense silt that covers the bottom of the lake where it is not shallows of the lake, as soon as it was exposed by a stone being turned over. : ree-swimming larvae of Fredericella were obtained among weeds at the edge of the lake on several occasions in October, and others were produced by colonies living in a small aqua- rium. They were about 0-9 mm. long and of a milky white ! Proc. Linn. Soc. N. S. Wales XXXIV, p. 489 (1909). io 2 Fide Zschokke, Die Tiefseefauna der Seen Mitteleuropas, p. (1911). : ; 3 Cf. Barrois, Rev. biol. Nord du France vi, p. 289 (1894). 226 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [June, 1913. colour. In progression the broader (morphologically posterior} end was directed forwards. Their movements were compara- tively slow and they did not gyrate on their long axis so fre- quently as the larvae of Pectinatella burmanica,'! which they resembled closely in appearance. In structure they agree with normal larvae of the typical race as described by Braem,* but the apical mass of nerve cells at the ‘‘ posterior’ extremity appears to be larger than his figures* would suggest and the cavity within the external membrane is decidedly greater. Thelarvae refused to settle on the walls of the aquarium or on the stones and weedsit contained, probably on account of the high tempera- ture of the room. While some colonies from the lake, more particularly those from stones, contained statoblasts in October, others had none, or only a few in an early stage of development. The thickening buds of the Paludicellidae, if not an actual homolo and becomes also to some exte thick and dark. All statoblasts, even in this race of F. suliana, are not produced in zooecia with thickened walls ; but it seems 1 Annandale, Faun. Brit. Ind., Freshwater Sponges, etc., p. 237. 1908). directly into resting buds. th i tat not absolutely complete, | pred ip ie ae 3 ud. Vol. IX, No. 6.} The Polyzoa of the Lake of Tiberias. 227 [NV.8.j generally to be the case that if the walls of a zooecium contain- ing statoblasts persist after the polypide has degenerated, they tend to become specialized in this way. Plumatella auricomis, sp. nov. Colony smail, recumbent, with short horizontal branches closely pressed together. Zooecia short, stout, L-shaped, cylindrical, with no trace of a dorsal keel or r furrow; ectocyst greatly thickened, colourless, hyaline, stiff and neither contractile nor seca of being thrown into furrows by the retraction of the pol Polypide slender, deeply pigmented, the ited katy canal being of a deep o range-brown, darker on the stomach than tentacles pale golden yellow, long, slender, comparatively few in number ; velum at their base very narrow. Statoblasts. No free statoblasts were observed. One colony contained a single fixed statoblast, which is narrowly oval, its t Habitat.—Lake of Tiberias, Palestin Type.—Z. KE. V. No. +, Ind. ae Unfortunately the material at my disposal is so scanty and so imperfect that I am unable to give a fuller description or an adequate figure. Only two colonies were found, and one of them was not observed until it had been plunged i in spirit. The other was carefully narcotized and fixed, but I find on re- examining it after some months se it is not in much better condition than the other. The species, however, is distin- guished from all others that have ae described by two im- portant characters, the thick, hyaline, stiff ectocyst without a dorsal keel furrow and the yellow colour of the lophophore. The latter is a feature, so fanaa I am aware, unique in the Polyz zoa. The ectocyst is much thicker than in Plumatella javanica and differs from that of P. punctata in not being soft and contractile. It shrivels greatly in spirit. My description is based mainly on field notes. Both colonies were dredged in between 6 and 8 metres of water in the channel of the R. Jordan as it flows through the south cal of the lake between the village of Semakh and its exit, and both were attached to shells of Unio terminalis. e, the larger of the two, was growing at one end of one shell of a living mollusc, just outside the siphonal aperture; the other, which contained the only statoblast seen, was fixed to 228 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [June, 1913] that can be trusted, and I cannot be sure of specific identity in this case. } I have to thank Dr. J. H. Ashworth for seeing the plate that illustrates this paper, as well as other plates in the series, through thé press. The figures have been drawn by Babu A. C. Chowdary with his usual skill. Prate VII, figs. 1 and 2. Fig. 2.—Plumatella auricomis: fixed statoblast, x 75. Jour. As. Soc. Beng, Vol IX, 1913. AC-Chowdhary, del POLYZOA AND SPONGE—LARVA FROM GALILEE. Plate VII. Bemrose, Colla, Derby 30. A Note on Rotifers from Galilee. By C. F. Rovussgrer, F.R.MS. Communicated by Dr. N. ANNANDALE. [During my visit to Galilee, in October, 1912, I made no special attempt to collect Rotifera, but specimens of several Species have been found by Mr. Rousselet in a tow-netting from the surface of the Lake of Tiberias, and two others have appeared in large numbers in a bowl of water containing mud from the bed of the little pool known as Birket Meskana and situated half way between Tiberias and Nazareth. As the num- ber of rotifers known from Syria and Palestine is small, a list of these species is here published.—N. Annandale.]. A. SPECIES TAKEN NEAR THE SURFACE OF THE LAKE TIBERIAS. 1. Brachionus militaris, Ehrenberg. [Abundant on the surface of the lake both by day and night throughout the greater part of October, 1912.—N. A. 2. Asplanchna brightwellii, Gosse. A few specimens. . Anuraea valga Ehrenberg. One specimen in the stomach of Asplanchna. onochilus dossuarius, Hudson. Two specimens. Brachionus militaris does not occur in England, but is not uncommon in Germany, China, Ceylon, 8. Africa, N. America, S. America, and Canada. Asplanchna brightwellii is common in England. : A few Bdelloid Rotifers, fully contracted and not identi- fiable, were also found in the tow-netting. B. Sprcrrs REARED IN CALCUTTA FROM DRIED MUD. [A handful of dried mud from the bed of the Birket Mes- kana, then completely dry, was taken on October 10th es brought to Calcutta, where, on November 27th, it was placed in alarge glass bowl of filtered water. After an interval of ee weeks a considerable number of small Entomostraca appeare 230 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (June, 1913.] Rotifera disappeared after a few weeks and neither has since (in se Ses re-appeared. Mr. Rousselet has sent the following note on them A.] Oecistes socialis, Weber. This species was first discovered by Dr. Weber in the neighbourhood of Geneva and described by him in his paper ‘*Rotateurs des Environs de Genéve,’’ Arch. de Biologie 1888, and afterwards he | a better and fuller account in his greater work, ‘‘ Les Rotateurs du Bassin du Léman,’’ Revue Suisse de Zoologie V, 1898. e animals secrete gelatinous tubes which become agglo- merated into a rounded gelatinous ball as much as 5 mm. in diameter and containing thousands of individuals. In recent years the species has also been found by Dr. de Beauchamp in the neighbourhood of Paris (in 1901), and John Shephard found it in Victoria, Australia, and gave it the name of Lacinularia elongata (1896). In England I have obtained it once from Dundee. The species is however a rare one, not often seen. Limnias ceratophyili, Schrank. This is a well-known and fairly common Rhizote or fixed, tube-dwelling Rotifer, found in many parts of the world. When very abundant and under favourable food conditions, the young frequently attach themselves and fix their tubes to the parents in a very irregular fashion. All particulars as to their anatomy will be found in Hudson and Gosse’s monograph. It is a quite cosmopolitan species. NS PF ONS UR 31. Entomostraca from the Lake of Tiberias. By Ropert Gurney. Communicated by Dr. N. ANNANDALE. The collections of Entomostraca submitted to me by Dr. Annandale were chiefly plankton samples from Lake Tiberias itself, but included also three bottles containing specimens from small pools near the Lake. In addition to these collections I have had the opportunity of examining specimens hatched either in Calcutta or here in England from mud taken by Dr. Annandale from other similar pools. The plankton of Lake Tiberias seems to be very uniform and to consist of the following species :— CLADOCERA. Diaphanosoma brachyurum, Liévin, Ceriodaphnia reticulata, Jurine, :; rigaudi, Richard, Bosmina longirostris var. cornuta, Jurine. CopEPopDa. Cyclops leuckarti, Claus. All the collections, whether taken by night or by day, con- tained an abundance of Copepods, nearly all of them immature. The few mature specimens found were all of the one species, C. leuckarti. The Cladocera seem to show some diurnal migration, since they are far more numerous in the night collections than in those taken during the day. The latter consist almost entirely of immature Copepods. The plankton taken by Dr. Annandale in October scarcely differs from that described by Dr. Barrois, who visited the La e in May.!_ He found precisely the same species, with the addi- tion of Daphnia lumholtzi, which he notes is confined to the deeper waters and was only once found at the surface. He also found the majority of the Cyclops of the plankton to be immature. The other collections made by Dr. Annandale were as follows :— (1) Ain-et-Tineh. Townetting in a small pool full of Ranunculaceous water-weeds. 7-x-12. Cyclops serrulatus, Fischer. A few ostracod shells. _ Se 1 Barrois, Rev. biol Nord France, VI, 1894, p. 284. 232 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. {June, 1913.] (2) ),Wad-es-Semakh. Small dirty a oe the shore of the Lake ; no Phanerogamic vegetation. Macrothrix laticornis, Jurine. Cyclops macrurus (3) Townetting in the Octagonal Pool at et-Tabghah. 7-x-12. Bosmina longirostris. A few dried, shrunken specimens. The following species were hatched from mud taken from a dried pool called Birket Meskana in the hills between Tiberias and Nazareth PHYLLOPODA. Estheria gihoni, Baird. CLADOOERA. Daphnia similis, Baird. CoPEPopA. Diaptomus similis, Baird. OstRacoDA. Cyprinotus dentatomarginatus, Baird. ina, Brady. Eucypris virens, Jurine. Cypris pubera, Miiller. var. Ilyocypris gibba, Ramdohr. ite all the specimens hatched from this mud and sub- a 32. On the Internal Anatomy of the Blind Prawn of Galilee (Typhilocaris galilea Calman). By EKENDRANATH GHOsH. (Plates XV—XVI.) Specimens were fixed in picro-formol-acetic solution and pre- served in 90% alcohol. In one aslit had been made at the base of the two ocular peduncles to allow the fixative to penetrate. They were in excellent condition for histological investigation. e anatomy of the present animal resembles that of the type-genus (Palaemon) of the same family in most of its salient features. Consequently, it has been considered best to compare the anatomy of these two genera, taking to represent the latter the common freshwater prawn (P. carcinus) available in Calcutta. Digest differs from that of Palaemon in a few minor points only. corresponds to a tongue-shaped flap of integument in the cavity of the cardiac chamber (anterior division) overlying the Pala 234 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (June, 1913. | Typhlocaris. — Palaemon. | | } cast NSS ear ee eer sian lease . The liver is elongated, and ‘The liver is less elongated, extends from behind the and does not extend beyond oesophagus beneath the the cephalothorax. endosternite to the first abdominal segment. . There is around hump-like The hump is less prominent. prominence on the dorsa aspect situated above the attachments of the second — and third peraeopods. —_ bo 3. Behind the hump, the liver The liver slopes backwards and extends to the first abdo- =a _ little downwards behind minalsegment inthe form — the hump and terminates In of a prominent beak-like a blunt end with a median process, being separated § groove on the postero-ven- | tral aspect. dle-shaped concavity on the dorsal aspect. In both genera the intestine presents a bulbous swelling just before it ends in the anus. Vascular system, The pericardiumis triangular in shape, being a little narrower than that of Palaemon. It occupies 4 little less than the posterior half of the cephalothorax, while in Palaemon it extends over a little more than the posterior third of the length. The heart occupies the middle of the pericardial chamber. The dorsal surface presents a ridge in the middle line. The the sides. There seem to be two pairs of ostea, both placed on the dorsal surface of the heart. These correspond to the the lateral wall of the pericardi Vol. IX, No. 6.] The Blind Prawn of Galilee. 235 [NV.8.] the antennary artery and passing outwards and a little for- wards to be attached to the pericardial wall on its ventro- lateral aspect. he origin and distribution of the main arteries in 7'yphlo- carts agree closely with that in Palaemon, with the following exceptions :— Typhlocaris. | Palaemon. | 1. Ophthalmic Well doves Very poorly deve- artery. traced quite easily to loped; scarcely to be the base of the ocular traced beyond the | peduncles where it is stomach even in in- seen to divide into jected specimens. two branches. 2. Antennary © Same in both. artery. 3. Hepatic .. Arise from the lat- | Arise from the ex- arteries. eral aspect of the ven- treme anterior end o | tral surface at its the ventral surface ‘posterior border. just behind the apex and closer to the mid- | : die line 4. Dorsal... | Same in both. abdominal — artery. | e muscular strand, described as the gastro-cardiac muscle in Palaemon (3), is also present in T'yphlocaris, eproductive system. Male. The testis is quite differ- ent in shape from that of Palaemon. The two testis lie close to each other so as to form a single pentagonal mass lying on the dorsal surface of the liver and projecting forwards from beneath the heart. Anteriorly the mass seems to be connected with the dorsal renal sac (2) lying over the stomach. The vas emale. The ovaries, like the testes, are different in shape from those of Palaemon. They are placed close to each other 80 as to form a flattened elongated triangular mass lying over the dorsal surface of the liver. The base of th y he front and is connected to a thin triangular membrane whic 236 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [June, 1913. seems to be continuous with the dorsal renal sac. The mass is bent on itself antero-posteriorly so to form a bow-shaped body with the concave surface upward. The dorsal surface of the organs is connected with the floor of the pericardium, the heart lying in the concavity of the organs. e oviduct arises from the outer side of each ovary on the dorsal aspect at the junction of the anterior one-third and posterior two-thirds of its length. It passes outwards and downwards over the surface of the liver to the genital aperture placed at the base of the third peraeopod. The difference between the genital organs of the two genera may be tabulated as follows :— Typhlocaris. Palaemon. 1. Testes ..| A single compact! ‘Two narrow elonga- a little in front of the ing from behind the er. tomach to the first | abdominal segment. 2. Vas deferens The coils placed) The coils less close just behind the testes | and placed on the forming a compact outer side of the testes “mass. quite separate from it. 3. Ovaries ., | The ovaries form a The ovaries are | Compact triangular elongated _ fusiform ‘mass with the base bodies placed close to forwards. | each other. _ Nervous system. The nervous system of I'yphlocaris agrees closely with that of Palaemon except in a few details corresponding to the degenerate condition of the eyes. The differences may be noted in the following table :-— Vol. IX, No. 6.] The Blind Prawn of Galilee. 237 [N.8.] Typhlocaris. : Palaemon., Cerebral ganglia. | Oval in habe Relatively smaller placed close to each | and placed outside the other justinside the ocular peduncles in- side a hollow semi- of. ture place e- Nerves from the) cerebral gang. ia— | (1) Optic nerve | A fine nerve. | A stout nerve. (2) Thenerveto Astout nerve. — Finer than (1). the first | | ntenna : (3) Thenerveto. Intermediate in| Of the same size as the second! thickness between | (2). antenna | (1) and (2). | Structure of the ocular peduncle.—There is no trace exter- nally of visual structure in the ocular peduncles. Minute structure.—The ocular peduncle consists of the following layers, from without inwards :— (1) A thick layer of cuticle, the outer portion of which is mogeneous, and chitinous in structure, while the inner portion is finely laminated. The cuticle is thicker at the sides than towards the tip. (2) The core of the peduncle consists of a mass of cells hi more compact in arrangement than those placed towards the centre. The cells are separated from one another in many places by small irregu is seen in the sections. F. H. Pike (4) has a. a similar condition in the degenerate eyes of 238 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [June, 1918. monetes eigenmanni, Hay. In this species, however, he found a trace of nerve fibres which have not been found in the present animal. LITERATURE. Fic. i. 2 3. 4 Calman, W. T., Trans. Linn. Soc., Zool. (2) XI, p. 98, 1909. Calman, W. T., ‘‘ Crustacea,’ in Lankester’s Text-book of Zoo ogy. panes = E., Introduction to Biology for Indian Stu- den Pike, Pr. H. , Degenerated eyes of ‘‘ Palaemonetes eiyen- manni,’? Hay. Mar. Biol. Lab. Bull., Woods Holl, Mass. il, 1906 (pp. 267-276). EXPLANATION OF PLATES XV-XVI. Typhlocaris galilea, Calman. 1.—Dorsal view of the cephalothorax, showing the heart, x 4; a, ophthalmic artery; 5, heart; ¢, one of the anterior pair of ostea; d@, one of the posterior pair of ostea; ¢, attachment of mandi- bular mu oe view of heart x 4; a, origin & = hepatic ery; 0, origin of the ‘abdominal a 3. Doma view of the cephalothorax, ate peiovel of the heart,x 4; a, stomach; 6, mandibular mus- cle; c, position of the dorsal renal sac; d,g, liver; iu 5.—Side view of the ovary, x 4, 6.—-Sid . view of Gauatotiane: x4; a, liver; 8, sto- {Mile e genital organ, x 4; a, testes ; b, vas deferens. 8.—Liver (6) and stomach (a), x 9. 2 Fongieadina section of the untetior portion of the iver,x 5; a, stomach; b, intestine; c, livers 4; pyloric chamber of the stomach. 10.—Side eat of the oo” x 6; a, pyloric chamber ; e ardiac chamber ; , 0680} hagus. —View of a floor of the ete chamber from above, a, guiding ridge. Pee guiding odes separated, x 6; a, hastate plate; ; guiding ridge Plate XV. Journ. As.Soc. Beng., Vol.IX,1913. EN Ghosh, del. A. Chowdhary, lith. ANATOMY OF TYPHLOCARIS. Journ.As.Soc .Beng.,Vol. IX,1913. meaecrimaer yee OF TYPHLOCARI Plate XVI. —— ae 13. A. Chowdhary, lith. 3S. Vol. IX, No. 6.] The Blind Prawn of Galilee, 239 [V 8.] . 13.—Transverse section = the pyloric chamber, x 8; a, infra-pyloric pla 14,—A portion of the ee x 4; a, the posterior end. 15.—Nervous system (anterior portion) x 4; a, endoster- nite; —— hagus; ¢, renal gland; d, ocular 8; e, thoracic ganglionic m 16.—Anterior por of the nervous syste c, optic nerve; d, nerve to the second antenna; €, post-oesophageal loop; /, circum-oesophageal ommissure 17. Bestitth of the ocular peduncle, x 150; a, cuticle; b, optic ganglion. 33. The Crustacea Decapoda of the Lake of Tiberias.’ By N. Annanpatez, D.So., F.A.S.B., and Srantey Kemp, B.A., F.A.S.B. (Plates XII—XIV.) Only three species of Crustacea Decapoda have been found in the Lake of Tiberias and its immediate vicinity, and it is most improbable that any addition will be made to this number. Two of the three species, namely Atyaephyra desmaresti and Potamon potamios, have already been discussed by Barrois * in his ‘‘ Liste des Décapodes fluviatiles recueillis en Syrie,’’ while the third (T'yphlocaris galilea), by far the most interest- ing of the three, was described by Dr. Calman as recently as 1909. Atyaephyra desmaresti has a wide circum-Mediterranean distribution and also occurs in some a jacent countries not actually on this sea-board; the range of Potamon potamios is apparently restricted to the Jordan Valley, lower Egypt and the Island of Cyprus, while Typhlocaris galilea is endemic in one small pool near the shores of the lake, into which there is no evidence that it ever penetrates. The last species is of peculiar interest both from a taxo- nomic and from a biological point of view, for not only is it isolated by its structural characters from all other freshwater or marine decapods, but it is apparently modified for a sub- terranean existence. The fact that the animal is found living in an open and well-lighted pool is, therefore, very strange. We may hazard the suggestion that the seismic movements which Some change in its mode of life, and that it has been forced thereby to abandon the environment by which its special modifications were originally induce The light cast by the Decapoda on the origin of the fauna of the Lake of Tiberias is not a strong one. The onl prawn actually found in the lake is essentially a ‘‘ Mediterra- 1 Published by permission of the Trustees of the Indian Museum. ® Barrois, Rév. biol. Nord France, V, p. 125 (1892). 242 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [June, 1918. species, whereas the crab has a more restricted dis- einen and would seem to indicate an Egyptian, thoug not an Ethiopian, affinity. It is noteworthy, however, that, for some reason very difficult to explain, it seems to be a gene- ral rule that the distribution of freshwater crabs is more restricted than that of freshwater prawns; T'yphlocaris is of course an exception to this rule, as it also is to others Family ATYIDAE, Atyaephyra desmaresti (Millet). 1832. Hippolyte desmaresiii, Millet, Ann. Sci. nat., XXV, p. t= o 1837. ere desmarestii, H. Milne-Edwards, Hist. nat. Crust., II, p. 376. 1843, Carina desmaresi Joly, Ann. Sci. nat., Zool., (2), XIX, Pp. 1849. “Caridina Jemisninie Lucas, Hist. nat. Anim. Explor. Igérie, Zool., I, p. 40, pl. iv, fig. 1863. = Oaetaban desmarestii. Heller, See siidlich. Europ., p- 238, pl. viii, ‘ 1366. Atyaephyra rosiana, Co Desc. esp. nov. rust. Arachn , Lisboa, p. 6, pl. 1 1868. Caridina iE rbenlc v. Martens, ah, f. Naturgesch., 50. > p- 1879. Atyaephyra rosiana, Kingsley, Proc. Acad. Sci. Philadel- . 415. 1880, Donia desmaresti, Bose. Stiid. over Decap. Slaegtsk., p. 60, pl. i, fig. 26; pl. ii, fig. 47; iii, figs. 82, 106; pl. v, Ss. 151, 163. 1880. Caridina desmarestii, Stossich, Boll. Soc. Adriat. Sci. nat., Trieste, p. 211. 1888, Caridina desmarestii, Pelseneer, Bull. Mus. Belg., IV, 1390" S Hakicntiding desmarestii, Ortmann, Zool. Jahrb., Syst., > Pp. 1891. Hemicaridina desmarestii, Thallwitz, Abbandl. Ber. Zool. resden, No. 3, p. 27. 1892. maces desmarestit, Barrois, Rév. biol. Nord rance, V, p. 126, figs. 1-3, . 1895. Atyaephyra hasty Ortmann, Proc. Acad. Sci. Philadelphia for 1894, p. 401 1896. Atyaephyra desmaresti , Picquenard, Bull. Soc. Sci. et Medic. de l’Quest, Rennes, p. 45. 1903. Aigaephara desmaresti, Bouvier, Bull. Soc. Ent. France, p. 2 1905. dig we hae Bouvier, Bull. Sci. France et Belg., XXXIX, p Vol. os And 6.] Crustacea Decapoda of the L. of Tiberias, 243 LW.S.] 1905. Atyaephyra desmarestii, Brézek, Sitz-ber. Bohm. Ges. iss., Prag, No. i, p. 1. 1905. Atyaephyra desmarestii, Chaignon, Bull. Soc. Autun, XVII, p. 80. This little prawn is represented in the collection before us by numerous specimens, which do not, so far as one is able to judge from published descriptions, differ in any constant . Mo in length; the largest ovigerous female is only 19 mm. long and some are considerably smaller. The formula of the rostral teeth varies considerably, the extremes being represented by the following figures us. To some extent, however, varia- tion in this respect is due to size and therefore, probably, to age, for very small individuals always have a small number of teeth both above and below. Of the dorsal teeth, from 1 to 4 are situated on the carapace behind the orbital notch; asa rule, only 2 or 3 occur in this position, the number being rather lower than that usually found. . The size of the eggs is another variable character. In one female eyed eggs were 627 » long by 443 ;. in greatest trans- verse diameter; in another in which they were in a somewhat mo vanced stage of development, the corresponding measurements were 596 » and 394 »; in all cases they had a very regular oval contour. : iving individuals were sometimes hyaline and practically colourless, having only a few scattered pigment-cells on the ody and appendages; others were so deeply pigmented as to be almost black, while yet others had their pigment distributed in regular transverse stripes of a blackish colour on the thorax, abdomen and limbs. A few were noticed in which the muscles of the body had a distinct yellow tinge and were much transparent than usual. Although no very small individuals were seen which were deeply pigmented, some ovigerous a t rm Barrois’s statement as to the sexual differences that exist in the third and fourth legs of this species. His figures agree well with our own observations. : sith - Egg-bearing females were not common in October soically rendered probable that the breeding season was then praciica®’ 4 over by the fact that most of the eggs observed were in @ 244 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [June, 1913. advanced state of development and that most of the females had apparently hatched their brood. The larva of Atyaephyra was described by Joly in 1843 (loc. cit.) and we have little to add to his observations, which are fully illustrated by good figures. Indeed, larvae from the neighbourhood of Tiberias agree with these in every respect, except that their tails are more distinctly bilobed and that their rostra are more delicate and less prominent. He gives an excellent description of the appendages, which closely resemble those of the larvae of Caridina wyckii (=nilotica) as described by Von Daday ! and of Xiphocaridina compressa as described by Ishikawa.? The Tanganyika Atyid larvae described by G. 0. Sars* and attributed by him with a query to the genera Limnocaridina and Atyella are apparently hatched at a some- what earlier stage. Atyaephyra desmaresti occurs all round the Mediterranean, in N. Africa as well as in Europe. It has been recorded from ‘Portugal and appears to be widely distributed in France, but is not included by Keilhack + among the German freshwater Malacostraca. In the Lake of Tiberias it is scarce. Barrois®, however, obtained a few specimens from a depth of 5 to 8 metres at the south end, probably in the channel of the River Jordan in which there are submerged beds of Vallisneria. In the immediate vicinity of the lake it is, as Barrois states, ex- the banks, while in the others it was only noticed among water- weeds, especially, but not exclusively, Ranunculus aquatilis. ently one or other of the mouth-parts has the power of , won Daday, Zool. Jahrb. Anat., XXIV, p. 239 (1907). 1885) Chiyomatsu Ishikawa, Quart. Journ. Mier. Sci., XXV, p. 391 8 Sars, Proc. Zool. Soc., London, I, p. 426, pls. vii, lviii (1912). * Keilhack, in Brauer’s Wisswanerfatind Deutachiands, XI, Malacos- traca, ete. (1909). i * Rév. biol Nord France, VI, pp. 280, 281 (1894). Vol. a 0. 6.] Crustacea Decapoda of the L. of Tiberias. 245 YS] Family PALAEMONIDAE, Subfamily TYPHLOCARIDINAR. Typhlocaris galilea, Calman. (Plates XII, XIII.) 1909. T'yphlocaris galilea, Calman, Trans. Linn. Soc., Zool (2), XI 93, pl. xix. ? e are in entire agreement. The differential characters of the Typhlocaridinae may be briefly stated as follows :— The small and feebly developed rostrum. The palpless mandible. - The rudimentary condition of the additional ramus of the outer antennuJar flagellum. The undivided distal endite of the maxilla. The presence of a pair of longitudinal suture lines on the carapace, recalling those found in certain Reptantia and Penaeidae. In the first of these characters, the subfamily agrees with some Pontoniinae and Pa'aemoninae; in the second with all members of that subfamily and with some Palaemoninae; in the third with the Palaemoninae more than any other subfamily. In the fourth and fifth characters T'yphlocaris differs, so far as is known, from all other Palaemonidae. As CO DS es we are inclined to regard the resemblance between them as convergent rather than of genetic origin. : It is difficult to say in all cases what are the functions of the common characteristics, but it is noteworthy that those genera of Pontoniinae (Pontonia, Conchodytes and Typton), in which the rostrum is reduced, are, at any rate in most cases, of semi-parasitic or symbiotic habits and live in enclosed spaces. Nothing is known of the mode of life of the two species Euryrhynchus yet described, except that they have been found m wells, into which it is probable that they have made their way from some subterranean reservoir. T'yphlocaris galilea, as 246 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [June, 1913. is shown below, moves about freely in an open but well-like pool fed by a subterranean spring and not in direct communi- cation with any large mass of water above ground. It is prob- able therefore that Huryrhynchus resembles it in bionomics. Dr. Calman’s excellent account of the species leaves little to be said as regards its external characters, while Mr. Ekendra- nath Ghosh has, in the preceding paper of this series, described its internal anatomy in detail. e specimens before us indicate that the second peraeo- pod of the male mentioned by Calman, in which tbe immovable tinger is shorter than the dactylus, is, as he suggests, abnormal; but our specimens also show that there is normally a very ae ay dissimilarity between the two large chelae of the male g. A). In the female the two are similar in form, though not always equal (fig. B) and agree with Calman’s fig. 11, except that they are a little more slender and longer. In the leg of this though strikingl and not much more than half as long as the palm. The palm is distinctly flattened and its breadth is to its thickness as 10} to 7. The a th. The immobile finger is a little shorter than the dac- tylus and it i is obsolete. Dr, Ca. male specimen recently seen by him in which the same Vol. IX, No. 6.] Crustacea Decapoda of the L. of Tiberias. 247 [N.S.] secondary sexual character is apparent. We have ourselves amined four males and three females. The colour in life is of a uniform dead white, neither opaque nor transparent but rather translucent, resembling that of paraffin wax or, more accurately, that of the opalescent glass of which lamp-shades are often made. There is no trace of external pigmentation ; the partial opacity is inherent in the muscles, the integument being perfectly transparent. The stomach and the liver can be detected externally as dark irregular masses. dead matter to aid in concealing the animal, which is a most conspicuous object in its natural surroundings. So far as it is possible to ascertain from the most careful enquiries on the spot, 7'yphlocaris is only found in the octagonal pool at et-Tabghah called Birket ‘Ali-ed-Dhaher, in which it has long been known to the Bedouins of the district as ,4¥ Y yi! or ‘‘ white scorpion.’? The pool (pl. XIII) has recently been described in this Journal and the water analysed!; all that we need say here is that it is a small artificial pool contain- ing from six to ten feet of brackish and sulphurous water and about 58 metres in circumference; that it now has no direct communication with the Lake of Tiberias, close to the shore of which it is situated, but that a connection of a sort, perhaps bd artificial, existed in historic times. It must be fed by a subter- was rooted at the edge, but sent out long floating stems. NO other phanerogamic water-plants occurred and the fauna, one species of fish (Discognathus lamia rufus, Heckel) =a two of Mollusca? (Bithinella spp. nov.) were seen and no examples fe Atyaephyra could be discovered, notwithstanding a very care examination of the floating grass. n its movements T'yphlocaris closely resembles phe gets but is rather more sluggish than any Indian species 0 of genus with which we are acquainted. Asa rule it gehen on the bottom, partly by means of its walking legs ee a hie by the use of its swimmerets, the abdomen being rais - oe but their ' Christie, Journ. As. Soc. Bengal, 1913, p , p. 25. 2 For this determination we are indebted to Mr. H. B. Preston. 248 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. {June, 1913. chief functions are to clean the other appendages, including the swimmerets, and to convey food to the mouth. Occasionally the animal moves forwards through the water by means of the swimmerets alone, the fore parts then being raised higher than the abdomen. It was not, however, observed to approach the species of Palaemon. The manceuvre is executed in the usual manner, that is to say by suddenly bending the telson towards the base of the thorax. So long as the prawn is moving either backwards or forwards, the claws are held with the basal segments projecting out from the body almost at right angles, but with the carpus and chela directed forwards. They have the appearance of protecting the anterior part of the body and tosome extent feeling the way. The chief part in testing the surface in forward progression is, however, played by the outer maxillipeds (pl. XII, fig. 2), with which Typhlocaris constantly taps the ground, as does Palaemon. The antenna is, as a rule, held directed outwards and often con- siderably upwards, while the rami of the antennules are spread out so as to cover as large an area as possible. At periods, when the animal is at rest, they are held still, but, as a rule, they are infrequent motion. It was observed that a movement in the water near the prawn sometimes, but not always, caused it to dart away. Typhlocaris is evidently timid in disposition and, unless en- Potamon or Discognathus attacks it. Several of the specimens obtained, however, have lost and were regenerating various 3. Y Means: of ite first peraeopods and devour them; but tected No observations were made whi i 2 : ch cast any light on the — of the sutures in the carapace ; but Btn note that t Pere saepets fits tightly round the bases of the legs and thus probably assists in respiration by keeping mud from entering Vol. hes 6.] Crustacea Decapoda of the L. of Tiberias. 249 [V.S. the gill-chamber. As Dr. Calman has pointed out, the margins of the carapace are membranous; this feature, combined with the horizontal hinge, may well be useful in the direction indicated. No direct evidence could be obtained that T'yphlocaris is subterranean in habits: it is certainly not exclusively nocturnal. As nothing is known of the structure of the pool in which the animal lives, it is impossible to say whether it can retire under- ground; it may do so periodically to breed or for other pur- poses, and one of the monks who live at et-Tabghah on one occasion searched for specimens for some months without. being able to obtain them. No details, however, are available as to the methods he adopted. No specimens were seen by Annan- ale on a visit paid to the pool early in the morning, although the bottom or forming part of the walls. They frequently wandered under other stones and sometimes emerged again the fairly strong tight that reached and shone through the clear water practically without obstruction. An individual living in under natural conditions or in captivity, positively so. None of the specimens obtained were actually breeding at the time they were killed, but the condition of their gonads would suggest that the breeding season was approaching. he photographs reproduced on plate XII were taken at Tiberias by the Rev. J. Cohen of that town under the supervi- sion of one of us. We have to thank him for his courteous assistance in the matter. Family POTAMONIDAE. Potamon (Potamon) potamios (Olivier), Rathbun. (Plate XIV, fig. 1). £1804. Cancer potamios, Olivier (partim), Voy. Empir. Oth., IV, p. 240, atlas, pt. 2, pl. xxx, fig. 2. 250 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [June, 1913. 1893. Telphusa fluviatilis, Barrois, Rév. biol. Nord France, V, 125 1904. Potumon potamios, Rathbun, Mem. Mus. Hist. Nat. (Paris), (4), VI, p. 257. the crab accepted by Miss Rathbun as Potamon potamios prob- 5 is often used some- : e have no reason to think that the species, as defined by Miss Rathbun, has been found within the limits of Syria proper, for Djerach, the only ‘Syrian ’ locality from which P. potamios is definitely recorded, lies near the R. Jabbok in Eastern Palestine considerably south of the Lake of Tiberias. Both Miss Rathbun (loc. cit.) and Col. opportunity to discuss it in some detail, having good series of specimens of most of the forms before us. group, as we conceive it, consists of only two species, otamon potamios (Olivier), Rathbun, and P. fluviatile (or edule) (Latreille), the latter being divided into five local races: fluviatile (s.8.); setiger, Rathbun; ibericum, Marschall de Bieber- stein; gedrosianum, Aleock, and monticola, Wood-Mason. The only one of these forms of which we have not seen specimens is monticola from the followinc key, but have figured one of the pd som also the only specimen from the Khasi Hills in plate a. gs. 6 and 5, respectively. It will be noticed.in these ‘ eee that the eyes are considerably larger and _ stouter than jn P. potamios or in any of the western races of P.fluviatile. 1 Ree. Ind. Mus., V, p. 258 (1910). ‘ Vol. IX, No. 6.] Crustacea Decapoda of the L. of Tiberias. 251 [N.S.] KEY TO THE CRABS OF THE Poltamon potamios GROUP. I. Epigastric crests only a little in advance of post- orbitals and parallel to them; post-orbitals pted or angulate at anterior end of cervical groove P. potamios. II. Epigastric crests usually well in advance of post- s tals sinuous, convex forwards or slanti dis- tinetly interr i aa ane get at anterior end of cervical groo .. P. fluviatile, s.l. Races of P. fluviatile. A. Length of carapace nearly seven-eighths its a nt oben of last leg less than twice bro fluviatile. B. Genii of ¢ crea usually less = five-sixths th bre adth; p propodus od reg usually at t twice as ne as bro L_ Carapne setos ; A .. setiger. 2. Carapace not ai se a. Middle portion of cervical groove on — obsolete, anterior part not v astric crests less in advance of peoe Sehteal ate .. gedrosianum. So far as we are aye to judge from the descriptions given by Miss Rathbun ‘and Dr. Pesta *, we are doubtful whether P. mens in the collection of the Indian Museum and oe them in an appendix. They may be summarised as follows:~ 1 Mem, Mus. Hist. Nat., Pars (4), VI, p. 258. ae 3, pl. ix, fig. 2. ; o~ Ann. k. k. naturhist. Hof mus., Vienna, XXVII, p. 27. text-fig.12. 8 Cat. Ind. Decap., Crust. I, fase. 2, Potamonidae, pp. 21-23, figs. 1, 37. 1910, 252 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [June, 1913. CARAPACE, PROPODUS oF 5TH | LENGTH + BREADTH, LEG, BREADTH + | - x 100. LENGTH x 100. ef - i © 5 Sey See aE ARERR . | g . g 3 5 PSE & 3 e pore ete q eB ia | ied head a fr S * : ont Oo | 3s om oO S ° a | ee ee eee ee Potamon potamios | 794 80-1 | 821) 441 | 51°68 | 55-0] 7 | | >, fluviatile fluviatile.. 36-0 87-0 | 88-1 | 43-2) 46-1 | 49:2] 6 | | | | » sy Dericum ..) 78-2) 81-7 | 860 | 48:8 53-4 | 59-0 | 18 | | » 5, gedrostanum | 754 819) 843] 465 | 53:5 | 58-4 16 = PEERS EST | ; From this table it would seem that in their proportions, Egypt and of the valleys of the Jordan and its tributaries; it possibly the Eastern Himalayas and the Khasi Hills in Assam. In Northern Africa it is found in i Race fluviatile, Italy, Greece, Morocco, Algiers, Tunis, the Sahara. Race ibericum, The Crimea. the Caspian Sea, Asia Minor, Northern Syria, Persia, Afghanistan and the Jhelum Valley in N. W- India. Race setiger, Northern Syria, Mesopotamia. Vol. IX, No. 6.] Crustacea Decapoda of the L. of Tiberias. 253 [N.S.] Race gedrosianum, Seistan, Baluchistan, Peshawar and the Punjab Salt Range. Race (?) monticola, Eastern Himalayas and (?) the Khasi Hills, Assam. Potamon potamios is extremely common round the edge of the Lake of Tiberias and the neighbouring springs, inhabiting burrows just above the water-line and thence wandering both into the water and on to dry land in search of food. A as the first rains of the winter season fall (in 1912 this was on October 16th), its landward expeditions are greatly extended. ear Tiberias, after rain had fallen, it was noticed in consi- passing animals. The food is evidently of a very varied nature. Large individuals were observed eating dead fish in the lake; others were attracted to (and captured by) a piece of tomato attached to a string; a chicken-bone thrown into the spring at Ain-et-Tineh was seized and carried away bodily by a crab that appeared to issue from under a rock before the bone had touched the water ; half-grown individuals were watched runni after, seizing in their claws and devouring, large black ants! in the highway. ee At least three years must elapse before the full size is a mm. across the carapace, while the great majority of speci- mens measure from 30 to 40 mm. Large individuals are com- paratively scarce; the largest in the collection of the Indian seum measures 61 mm. in breadth, but some that were seen in the lake were probably larger. The breeding season 1s almost uniform olive green, only the tips of the claws and feet 1 The large workers of Camponotus maculatus thoracicus, Fabr., v: fellah, Bisery: We have to ate Prof. W. M, Wheeler for identifying Speci : 254 Journal oj the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [June, 1913. out a trace of violet. Purple individuals seemed to be more numerous at the end of October than at the beginning of the month, and both of the pair found together belonged to this type. It is possible that the purple colouration, which is confined to fully mature individuals of both sexes, is periodical. only being adopted at the approach of the breeding season. Norge on THE Poon INHABITED RY T'yphlocaris. One of us has recently received the following note from the Rev. S. H. Semple of Tiberias. It is dated July 12th, 1913. ‘* The doubt as to the source of the abundant water-supply Vol. way, 6.| Crustacea Decapoda of the L. of Tiberias. 255 APPENDIX. Measurement of crabs of the Potamon potamios group. Proponvus oF 5TH CARAPACE. R. POD. ‘ bes pee) 2 s ae a | S bo ‘ ye 13 oes 5 3 ro as wo - 8 oom isd PJ sa = | a Bey) Ss | i) oy x c) & Qf | _ Sa & = OQ le , A | | | a P. potamios— 42-1 | 53°0 | 79°4 | 13°25| 66 498 L. of Tiberias, sta 35°3 | 44-2 | 799 | 11-6 | 5°75 49°6 332 75 195 101 5°55 55-0 | | iy ! | 284 | 35-3 | 805 9°25 4°95 53° | fof $ $ ¢ | 307 | 38:2 | 800 9°65 53 of $ reg 270 | 340 794 87 Bytia, =<". a | oot | 61-4 | se1 | 16:55 7-3 | 441 | Sve ents P. fluviatile fluviatile— a (OP les Florence, se ..| o | 46-4 | 582 872 | 149 68 456 | gt | 45-2 | 52:1 = 146 63 43-2 | 7 | 435 | 50-1 | 868 | 132 65 492 gy | 428 | 486 | 98-1 | 137 625 45°6 lo | 425 494 | 860 | 13-4 63 | 470 9 “309 | 408 es | | - P. fluviatile ibericum— | ae eet act Teheran, 4178 | ¢ 426 510 835 | 128 | 66 | 51°6 | g | 38°6 oie 79°2 | 125 | 61 a | @ | 31-7 | 393 | 80-7 | 98 | 515) 52°6 (g | 816 | 383 | 825 96 | 52 642 Shiraz, 40% | 445 | oho | 24 | 124 | 65 | ox -g } 399 | 501 | 796 | 115 | 62 | 539 —¢ i 44-6 | Fete 5°45 | 51-9 256 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [June, 1913. dah Be - | Pnoropus oF 5TH POD. cee See | 2) 2 ie) 2) 2 eee | § eo eax 8 2. hae ee ee ee ee P. fluviatile ibericum— | | | | | Syria, 1S $ (3675 433 349 105 | 57 543 @ | 325 | 381 853 99 | 4:95 | 50-0 ea | 31-6 | 36°75 86-0 | 95 | 49 | 516 Afghanistan, “* one oe $ | 28:5 | 345 82-6 | 82 | 50 _ 609 ees aa joo} — | 2. | o | g. | 27-6 | 33-2 831 | 75 | 4:3 57°3 2 | 26-7 | 32:2 82-9 | 78 | 46 59:0 Afghanistan, sis 2 | 309 | 376 | 82-2 | ke ee ae oy ae | oa-66 428 avo | 10-03) 55 re 2 | 256 32°75, 78:2 | 76 | 43 es Transcaspia, 2 te aie bw | 48-0 "80-6 | 1225 6-3 | 514 P. fluviatile gedrosianum— | | Seistan, 70> eeu. | 56-9 | 830 .157 | 8:15) 51-9 | $ | 39°75] 48-1 | g9°6 11s | 6 2| 52°5 | of | 38-9 | 47°3 | 82-2 13:05| 6-85) 52° : 5554 os Seistan, 0 --| 2 | 43:8 | 55:3 | 79-2 1285| 7-5 | 584 | aa © | : | Quetta, 4655-8 | gt | 48°9 | 58-4 83°7 | 15°65 8 05) 51°9 10 # | 25 | 519 | s1-9 | |e Peshin Valley, Balu. $ 320 28:55) 83:0 9:25). 5:26| 568 chistan, 0.) a* 52-8 | 64-25| 822 15-7 | 8 | 516 | 2* 45-5 er 83°2 13:15| 7:1 | 540 ae yar 44°6 | 83-7 9-2 | 50 | 543 344 | 40-8 | 843 1025 5°75| 56-1 ah ’ * Types of the race, Vol. 1X, No. 6.] » Crustacea Decapoda of the L. of Tiberias. 257 [NV.S.] _Proropus OF 5TH of | 29:15) 35:1 | 83:0 | 8-8 50 | 56:7 CARAPACE. | PERAEOPOD : e teed ay ae <| 3 g3s| 418 BPs on 3 |&oam| bw 3 |e8s & 2 |8Bx| § 2 |e +x . | fe 6d Ff 4 | a | P. fluviatile gedrosianum— | Peshin Valley, eae 3 5550 are chistan, 5 ae o | 31°6 | 37°75| 83-7 | 9-3 | 5:25) 56-5 Salt -Range, Punjab, | | | sie a ..| 9 | 350 | 462/758! 83 | 43 | 518 | Peshawur, - | ¢ | 38-4 | 483 | 82-9 11-7 | 5-9 | 50-4 | 6996 , : Sa ae : : Hallur Hahar, “" .. | @ | 25:85] 343 | 75-4 | 925) 42 | 46:5 nt Se P. fluviatile monticola— Darjiling, es .. | &*} 18°65] 24-05 75 | 685) 3°35) 48-9 2*| 17-0 | 20-9 | 813 | 55 | 28 bo | $4] 16:85| 21-4 | 78-7 63 | 2-9 | 44-4 Khasi Hills, a! g¢ | 206 | 27°35] 7535 — | _ | - * Types of the race. 258 - Journal of the Asiatic Society ‘of Bengal. [June, 1913.] EXPLANATION OF PLATES. Pirate XII. Adult female of T'yphlocaris galilea (Regd. no. *35*) photo- graphed from life. Slightly enlarged. Puate XIII. he pool, Birket ’Ali-ed-Dhaber, in which Typhlocaris galilea is foun Fie. 1—The vitae of the pool overgrown with gra -The same, from a slightly different Sat ‘of view, aiter being clea 3.—The ar diatlet “of the pool and the steps leading the platform that juts out into the water. A=the ace water-level of the pool at present; B= the ancient outflow. + de Puate XIV. The carapaces of Potamon (Potamon) potamios and its allies. Fic. 1.—Potamon potamios Sanen'l ecseans from Tiberias, Palestine (Regd. no. *431). Nat. size. », 2.—Potamon fluviatile hasiniits (hotell from Florence, Italy (Regd. no. *93*). t. size 3.—Potamon fluviatile ea Marsch Bieb.) from near Shiraz, Persia (Regd. no. *°2*), Slightly reduced. 4.—Potamon fluviatile gedrosianum, Alcock, from the Peshin Valley, Baluchistan (¢ type, Regd. no. *10")- Slightly reduced. 5.—Potamon fluviatile monticola Agito sae t from the Khasi Hills, Assam (Regd. no. +937). larged. 6.—Potamon fluviatile montools fa hates aso from Dar- jiling (¢ type, regd. no. +237). Enlarged ’ ia w v “ “ ’ id Note.—All the specimens figured are adult or apparently adult males. 11. Plate » VC ? a Soc. beng Jour. As. Aquaq ‘0105 ‘asouuag (NVWIV9 ‘VaqNnvo9 sl YVIOTHdAL)- aatinvys JO NMVUd ANINa AHL 030uUg “4aYyo) c A@u “NYNWTVO ‘VAaTINVS SIN VIOTHdGAL JO 1LIVLIGVH AHL ‘fqJaq '0| 0) ‘asouwag YSHVHO-G3-llv, Layyig 030Ud WN Plate X11. Vol. IX, 1918. , Jour. As. Soc. Beng. Plate XIV. Jour. As. Soc. Beng., Vol IX, 19138. *fqsog °0109 ‘esosweg dnouyus SOINVYLOd NOWWLOd AHL SO SEVHD 34. The Plays of Bhasa, and King Darsaka of Magadha. By KaAsui-Prasip JayaswaL, B.A. (Oxon). Dr. Geiger in the Introduction to his translation of the Mahavaméa! (p. xlv) rejects Dargaka of the Puranic list as dhist literature.2 The hero of the play is the faithful Yaugan- 1 Pali Text Society, 1912. is 2 i.e. the period pha beer to the Puranas by the alleged rei of Ajatagatru, Dargaka and Uday. Oe For sorely here in Bhasa it is not to know the secret of the charm for capturing elephants that Udayana 1s pion ie asked to teach it to his a from spr: avids, Buddhist India, p. 5). Here as a prisone . teach the Princess Vesa nglnees music of which Udayana was consi 260 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (July, 1913. dharayana, one of the ministers of Udayana, king of the Vat- bi. Another of the published plays of the same author is (No. XV, 1912) the Svapna-Vasaradatia,' the chief work of Bhasa as is evidenced by numerous notices of it in the Sahitya litera- ture. This forms a sequel to the Pratijfia-Yaugandharayana. ‘ To secure the prosperity of Kausambi ’, the ministers, with a half-willing permission and co-operation of the Queen, circu- ated a false rumour to the effect that the Queen Vasavadatta was destroyed by the pe which burnt down the camp at Lava- naka. The ministers succeeded thereby in bringing about their mani 8: second marriage with the Princess Padmavati of Magad That this Udayana was a contemporary of the Buddha we gather: from the Jatakas.? His father was Parantapa and son Bodhi* according to the Jatakas. In the Vishnupurana Uday- ana’s father is called ‘‘ Satanika ’’, which is apparently a title. His real name ‘Parkosips appears in the Vay u-Purana in its corrupt reading ‘‘ Paripluta’’. His son, of whose succession we Medhavi as Udayana’s immediate successor in the Purana.’ The Puranas, therefore, tally here with the Buddhist accounts. Before discussing the historical data in Bhasa, I may The intr neice to the fair pupil is not barred by any peer pee things rset = ee had intended them to deve- . There is no occasio r the master to call his pupil ‘‘ you hunchback ’’, as Sbabribed ra ae commentator of the Dhammapada, and ge to — a denna lady. 1 We ca be sure whether the title was omnia to be the peer vadatta, Resune Vaseosios or Svapna-Vasavadattam. There are conflict ing ee of bebe on the fag sperially: with epi to the lator — ° wo ide the Sva. Vasva. (No. : 77 n., for evidence of t manuscript in t Yavou of the Vasavadatta ; iajadekhara’s pea cs ze) savadattasya’’ in favour of the title adopted by the learned editor of ols plays (ibid., P. xxi); and in ur of - Vasa alta,’’ the evidence of manuscript at p. xxi. The author of the Amarakoss tka Sarvasva (a. 1159 a.c.) noe it as Svapna-Vasava- dattam, while the ritic Bhimaha (9th century 4.C.) calls the work 'Svapra-Vaea vad ia (i bid. , Pp. xxii 2 Rhys Davids, Buddhist India, p. $; Fausbdll, J. 3. 157. ; Rhys Davids, pp. eee b * The Vayu, 37. 270. e Vishnu introduces five names after Med- avi and duplicates Udayana along with his father and four later genera tions, Agai nst this we have in the i — three magn ames wo versio: 2) WwW upo introduced both, ae se list Sb nigét It aa er: worthy that the lin eae comes to an end four generations later, Udayana, was defeated and killed, and his kingdom incot- agadhan empire, by Maha-Padma Nanda. ayana is misspelt in theVayu as Su unaya, Vol. IX, No. 7.] The Plays of Bhasa. 261 [N.S.] permitted to discuss here his age, which is necessary to form an idea about the antiquity of those data The Age of Bhasa. (1) Bhasa, who is placed at the head of old (purana) dra- matist by Kalidasa, must be considerably earlier than the fifth century of the Padi era, the age of Kalidasa now accepted by the Sanskritist Il) There is a differance of opinion as to the date of the Mriichchhakatika. But whatever may be its date, Bhasa must have lived before its author, for Bhasa’s Charudatia, or Daridra- Charudatta, is the basis of the Mriichchhakatika, as is clearly seen from numerous parallels given by Mr. G. Sastri in his sae introduction to the Svapna-Vasavada attam. IIT) Aezording to ere the prologue in drama was an entice of Bhasa.! And t rologue, which is much devel- oped in the Mriichehhaleatike » as well as in the plays of ser tcit has generally the crudeness of the primary stage in Bhasa’ works.’ The Nandi, an invariable feature of all other Sanskrit dramas, is outside the scope of the dramatist in Bhasa. There it -yet belongs to the domain of histrionics. His play begins with Nandyante tatah as stitra-dharah (‘Enter Manager at the close of the Nandi’ “ The Bharatavakaya is in its primitive stage, as I shall show elow. A change in location is effected by a new act, no direction as to locality is ever given, except as to the Nepathya. Y avan- tka is mentioned (Sva. Vasav., p. 75), not to denote a curtain but a veil. (IV) Bhasa’s language is absolutely free from the kavya artificiality which we find as far back as the time of the Rud- radaman inscription (second century A.c.). There is not the iphtest effort oe alliteration ; the very thing seems to be almost unknown to the author. He never uses long Samasas. Also his conceits are diese r far-fetched Further, he discloses gushes cal archaisms? which would appear as sada or almos erroneous to one familiar with the classical kav : Similarly there are several more or less schais expressions, which Ee us a clue as to the age of the author. The se ees eae a 1 Gecabark ketkasanibhide natakaih Lhaekanieel | mnpiitieate yaso lebhe Bhaso devakulairiva || Harshacharita I. 15. instance, in the Vasavadatta the Sfitra-Dhara alone oe ope an — stage and introduces to the audience the theme of gf oapealiy ra oe another play, t a eine BE there does not Sanae any Svetion at all (S. Vasava., p. x . Vasava., pp. alii, Pili. 262 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [{July, 1913. ‘* Mahabrahmana’’ is used in good sense,! as we have it in the ancient literature,? and not in the bad sense, that of the ‘funeral priest’ as we find it used in the Maha-Bharata. Like- wise we get Aryaputra’ and Ayyaputto in the sense of Kum- ara, ‘Prince,’ as in the Siddapur inscription of Asoka. Again, in describing the proud family of Udayana, the house of the Bharatas, Bhasa identifies it ni the Bharatas of the Veda,’ an identification forgotten when the Puranas were written and oe ee to light and emphasized by ‘European scholars of tr days. Yakshini occurs as a female evil spirit as in the easly Buddhist literature.’ In telling a story the sentence commences with ‘‘There was King Brahmadatta® of Kdm- ptlya’’ "in the familiar style of the J fa taka. (V) Out of the twelve plays of Bhasa yet discovered, nine pieces dramatise epic stories like those which were staged when the Mahi-Bhashya was written. His Pavicha-Ratra (‘‘ the Five Nights’ 5% has for its theme the exile of the Pandavas at the Virata capital, the war between them and the Kauravas in the Virata territory, and Duryodhana’s promise, made before that war to Drona, to give half the kingdom to the Pandavas, if Drona discovered them i _ five nights —a version unknown to our present Maha-Bharata above considerations force upon us the conclusion that the works of Bhasa are ancient in the classical Sanskrit literature and that as dramas idea are the oldest yet discov- | §. Vasava., P, 42. : Cf. Brit déhad-Aranyaka Ap, u, t ba 3 §. Vasava., pp. 69. he’s mbassador of Pradyota addresses the son-in-law of hi is master Udayana as caryRe + Veda Bkahaneemmardyerpro shto P blew Varokak Prati.-Y aug., 6 es 6 sak caleale aii based on the date of the Puranas shows that Brahmadatts Sey Bonk 250 years before the Buddha. asava., p -55. Me 8 There is pe pce hiatee which we do not find in the Maha-Bharata. Arjuna s son Abhimanyu fights on the side of Duryo t sone r. ker res on the Maha-Bharata are: the Diita- — based n some incident after the death of eiuhiacninad (2) the Madhyama- ree which seems to have Bhima-sena as its hero Fre: Hidimva ; e Kar a n : Thigh ” (of Duryo-dhana), S. Vasava, ; ok iii (The information perry Pare from the introduction to the Regma V devoaitale a by Mr. Gan Vhen we cee be in pos on of another version of =e story a the Vol. 1X, No. 7.) The Plays of Bhasa. 263 [V.S.] ered in this country. They appear to be older than the edition of the Maha-Bharata which we have to-day and which can be safely placed about the third century a.c.' The lowest limit of the age of Bhasa would be thus cir. 250 a.c. In considering the earlier limit we are guided by these 3 i— (I) Buddhism is so familiarly known to the author that one of the chief characters—the minister Rumanvat—disguises himself as a Sramana.? This familiarity is an indication of the post-Asokan period. (II) The works depict a society which had just adopted Buddhist institutions in the orthodox system, i.e. the society of the first orthodox revival (second and first centuries B.C.). Ve have the Queen-Dowager of Magadha living the life of an orthodox nun. (IfIl) At the same time there is an anti-Buddhistic tendency noticeable. The Sramana is hated by the Brahmin.* 1e Budddhist layman seems to receive a hit in the address * O mad- upasaka’®; and the Sramana is on the whole ridiculed as being no better than a conjurer.6 The Sramana is hated and ridi- culed, but at the same time he is tolerated. This I take to point out the closing period of the anti-Buddhistic Brahmin Empire of the Sungas and Kanvas. (IV) At the end of his plays Bhasa gives a benedictory verse which is substantively one and the same. It mostly reads as follows :— : Imam sagar-paryantam himvadvindhya-kundatam, Mahim = ekata patrankam raja-simhah prasastuna re [ sai aracuai fenaferqeas | aviaaraiag usfde: VagT |) “ Let our Raja-Simha rule with sole sovereignity (lit. * ried one umbrella’) over this land up to the ocean — between the Himalayas and the Vindhyas.”’ 1 Amongst other things, the tribe of Kanishka (Tusharas) are mentioned in the Santi-Parva (LXV, 13-15) amongst foreigners living under Hindu Kings. The Hinas are not in that list, and their mention elsewhere does not prove their presence within India when the M Bharata was cast in its present form. It is not unlikely that they were known to the Hindus in the first and the second centuries a.c, Commu- Hications with Tartary and China were very frequent in the early cen- Prati-Yaug., pp. 43-44. 3 §. Vasava., p. 4. * “Shame oe 48 Brahmin-hood that I shall be ee aan a abhaya-dina) by a Sramanaka, a wealth-seeker.’’ Prati a 5 ** Unmattopasaka.’’ Prati.-Yaug., P- 43; also see p. 64. 5 Ibid., pp. 45-46 264 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [July, 1913. Now, before the time of Kalidasa and before the present Maha-Bharata, the fact of having a ‘one-umbrella empire’ ex- tending from the Himalayas to the Vindhyas and up to the Ocean, could only refer to a period which cannot go back farther than the days of Chandragupta Maurya and could not be of 325 B.c. has to be brought down to a time after Asoka, in view of (a) what has been said in paras. (II) and (III) and (0 written under the reign of Pushyamitra (cir. 160 B.c). AS Bhasa knows the Manava-Dharma Sastra,2 we might pre sume that about 100 years would have elapsed between the composition of the Manava-Dharma-Sastra and the dramas of (V) The benedictory verse refers to the reigning (‘our’) sovereign. It is pronounced by any character who happens to be the last spokesman on the stage, e.g. by Drona in the Pajicha- ratra, by Yaugandharayana in the Paratijna- Yaugandhara- yana, by King Udayana in the Svapna-Vasavadatta.*® Raja- imha was not therefore Udayana’s or Drona’s but Bhasa’s ‘sovereign-lion ’. _, +f one case we get another word, Upendra, in the place of Raja-Simha.* In the Madhyama- V yayoga, the bharata-vakya, or, to be more accurate, the last verse (for the expression bharata-vakya is not to be found there) runs thus :— ‘* As the Samudra is the lord (prabhavah sic) of rivers, as fire is the lord of offerings, as even mind is the lord ! The legal journal, the-Calcutta Weekly Notes, 1911, Nos. 41 and 42. Of. Kohler, Archiv fiir Reschts-und Wirtschafts philosophi: (1912) V. 4- * S. Vasava., p. xxix. It also knows the work ‘ Ram tyana.’ his i observed above, another instance of undeveloped stage of the technique of Hindu darma in Bhasa. Sometimes there is no bharata-vakya given at all, e.g. in the Charudatta (S. Vasava., p- Vili), in the Ghatotkacha (ibid., p. ix), in the Uru-bhaga (ibid., p. XVii). We notice a very important practice here —the practice of alluding under artistic, kavya obscurity. Th Miidra-Rakh has ‘‘ Srima Bandhu-bhriityah Chandra-gupt 4 ., rhe Miidra-Rakhasa _-..’ Only ‘‘our king’’, nah raja, is mentioned in the Pratima (S. Vasava., p. xix). Vol. IX, No. 7.] The Plays of Bhasa. 265 S.] of the organs of BOnaCs so our lord (lit. master) is the majestic Upendra This Upendra seems to ree alluded to quite in the opening line in the Nataka which is not named in the manuscript of Mr. Ganapati Sastri.2 A more pointed slesha may be found in the first verse of the Avimaraka where Upendra is replaced by Narayana: ** May the majestic hoes rule for you this earth under ‘lofty one umbrella Upendra and Narayana are ees terms; which of a two is the proper name of the ‘master’ of Bhasa’? What again, the connection between Upendra or Narayana and Raja. Simha’* And who were they? Either they mean one person, there is one name to hinge to or coincide with either Upendra or Narayana—the Kanvayana Narayana. 1 am in- clined to identify the Kanva Narayana with Bhisa’s Upendra and Narayana (about 53-41 8.c.). Upendra= Narayana is not called ‘ the sovereign’ but ‘ master’. It is possible ee our i n [‘ the master ’], the sovereign-minister Narayana, the Kanva.° e date thus found is quite in agreement with other lines of evidence noticed shee. It is also noteworthy that histri- onics seems to have enjoyed a special popularity in the Sunga period, as is evidenced by the references in the Maha.Bhashya, the theatre at the Jogimara cave, and the recorded notorious devotion to the stage of Sumitra, son of Agnimitra. tha-ahutinam prabhav dro, ya ath&é nadinaém peg va he pi tatha prabhur aad hutaSah iy athendriyanaém pra ape Be esc e ah || S. Vasava., ad-Upend 2 S. Vas a., P. XV. , S. a te be : ix. Cf. the first word in wir Diata-Ghatotkacha = Nerayanastribhuvanaike ” etc. S. Vasava., p. Vil d by the present The passage of the Vayu has hee *Giseusse i conclusion a in his paper on ‘the Brahmin Empire’ , fears at the number of the Sune come to is that there were tw ungas who sat on the thron f Bhasa with Nar iss oa ide i of the Naray etn bs Mr. P. Ghana's 5 ar ‘ writin tho ahove in the Dita-vakya Sc h has the ot published sted for enjoying ratha.’’ ao is Sect There is no Prijhadratha in the ee a whose country was taken away by Kriih It is a clear Se A unfortunate Briihadratha Maurya, with probably a remo ised a ater ae Janor-Sandha who was a Briihadratha. The pieces pu oe leave no room to doubt that the name of Bhasa’s master was 266 Journal of the Asiatie Society of Bengal. |July, 1913. Probably the Vasavadatta and the Pratijia Yaugandhara- yana of Bhasa were based on the famous akhyana-work, the Vasavadatta, noticed in the Maha-Bhashya. And allowing even fifty years for the earlier career of the Vasavadatta of the Maha-Bhashya, the traditions upon which Bhasa most likely has drawn, would be only 250 years removed from the reign of Darsaka.! If we confine ourselves to the date of Bhasa, on the evidence of Kalidasa alone, the data in Bhaisa must be placed earlier than the Mahavaméa by a century. If we take other pieces of evidence into account, cient are apparently alae by five centuries The Historical Data in Bhasa. Now let us take the historical data in Bhasa. These data re ‘— (II) That he contacted a political marriage® with Pad- mavati, Princess of “ees and sister to the sovereign of 1 a — Resse scat a period (=before Pataiijal ye Nanda period. Mahapadma seals 28 years Wee. 37. 322, ashtavimgati varahani; it is not 88 in the Vayu, as supposed b y Teanga an Rafat and his son, 12 years (Vayu, 37, 329), 118 =, Udayin, adivendbeos and Mahanandi. 295 —50 » for earlier career of the akhyana. 245 2 Prati. Yaug., p. 3 The Ka athe sani oeata confou two and makes Udayana ee nds the res i atseanenceues The Lalitavistara designates Udayana’s father alani, f ee ae Vatsa-rajah. Prati. Yaug., p. 31. > P- * Prati. Yaug. and 8. Vasava. , aon _On M ema see S. Vas ahi . i a Yaugandharayana Devyapanaye ka kriita te bud- a ug.—Kauéambi-matram paripalayamiti. King— gus. ing— Yaugandharayana, why this thy ‘psychology to harm the Ya ug.—For I wanted to serve the whole of (the state of) Kausambi.] Vol. IX, No. 7.] The Plays of Bhasa. 267 N.S. Magadha—the Emperor Daréaka,' ruling at the time at Raja- griiha.* (IV) That this ‘‘ Vatsa territory’’, which was separated from the frontier of Magadha by the Ganges,*® was apparently a separate unit under Udayana, whose original kingdom was Kausambi with its neighbourhood. The Vatsas as distinct from Kausgambi revolted under one Aruni or Arani soon after the Magadhan marriage of Udayana while the King was still at Rajagriiha, and were put down by the combined forces of - Kausambi and Magadha.* On the authority of the Jatakas, Pradyota was a contem- porary of Ajatasatru, and Udayana survived the Buddha.’ After the Buddha’s death Ajatasatru ruled for 27, according to the Buddhist documents, and 27 or 17 years according to years. Thus in view of these considerations, we can draw the conclusion that Drasaka, who did flourish as an emperor of Magadha, immediately succeeded Ajatasatru. _ The above considerations would exclude an hypothetical insertion, between Ajatasatru and Darsaka, of Udayin who is 1. ee a es & was, a generation or two later, abandoned by hoo & in favour of Pataliputra. The latter capital is never me Ag asa, : | ‘His references to the house of Kasi (Prati. Yaug., D- 29) eared disappeared a generation even before Ajatasatru 1s another rem of ancient history. - Vasava., pp. 1 ntioned 1, 60. ty 1p. 5: Viisava.,p. 60. Cf. also the patriotic reply of Sangeet For —— to serve the whole of Kauéambi’’, as against the ys Davids, pp. 8, 13. 6 goes : Taking him te 3 30 at the death of the Buddha, if Ajatasatru ruled for 25 years, : sere ea 7 In view of the second marriage (in the reign of rng after the death of the Buddha), we would be sceptic about t . pag okies! Lalita-Vistara that Udayana was born on the same day a. 268 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (July, 1913. placed immediately after Ajatasatru in the Pali chronicles. If , = place Udayin between Ajatasgatru and Daréaka. Udayin, ac- cording to the Vayu, in his fourth year, made Kusumpura (Pataliputra), on the southern bank of the Ganges, his capital, while, according to Bhasa, in the days of the Darsaka, the capital was still at Rajagriiha. The reason of the Magadhan marriage of Udayana becomes intelligible and also some light is thrown on the above question of chronology, if we take into account the political rela- tions between the different states of the time. The state Avanti. The King of Avanti is called the Mehasana, ‘‘ He of the large army "’, in Bhasa, and Chanda, ‘‘the Terrible’’, in Buddhist works.! In the latter again we are told that must secure the good-will or subjugation of the sovereign of the Vatsa® territory. To gain this object he seems to have | Rhys Davids, p. 28. 2 Ibid., p. 13. In respect of this theory of the dominating position of Avanti, I may refer to the order in which the Pradyotas have been placed in the Vayu and the subsequent Puranas. These Pradyotas are not Magadhan obviously include some of the Magadha the Pradyotas seem to have succum " e revolt of the Vatsas under Aruni related by Bhasa might ave been connected with these political marriages. It is almost con- temporaneous with the Magadha alliance. Probably it was fostered by the * terrible’ Pradyota or, more likely, by his suecessor. Vol. IX, No. 7.] The Plays of Bhasa. ; 269 [N.S.] naturally have been a lukewarm ally of Pradyota. Being a buffer between Magadha and Avanti he would have welcomed the new alliance which Yaugandharayana describes as brought about ‘‘for the welfare of the whole of Kaugambi.’’ The second marriage followed the first. It however took place when Ajatasatru had passed away, and Daréaka was on the throne at Rajagriiha. In the light of our data from Bhasa the record in the Dvipa-Vaméa and the Maha-VaméSa in respect of the succession of Udayi or Udayibhadda must be, I think, admitted as in- accurate. I propose here an explanation of the error in the Pali documents. The name next to Udayibhadda has been trans- posed, and hence all the confusion. I read Nagadasaka which is placed after Udayibhadda, as Ndga-Daréaka and identify the latter with Dargaka; and the Naga I take to be a member of the epithet the Saisu-naga.! The reign-period of Darsaka (25) is the same as that of Naga Dasaka (24), the difference of a year being accountable on the basis of the well-known differ- ence of one year which often arises owing to the two different reckonings of Hindu chronologists. To sum up, there cannot now remain any reasonable doubt as to thas historical existence of Dargaka, nor about the spelling of his name. Nor could it be said now of him that nothing is known of him.?_ Also the fact is clear that we cannot accept the Pali authority on the point. Be ee The view advanced here on the political significance of these mar- = i d clear opinion of the Katha- iages is supported by the emphatic and ¢ p acne anlage Aj&tasatru and Bimbisara. 2 V. Smith, Early History of India, 1908, p. 44.‘ Daréaka or Har Saka, nothing known.”’ Baad oleic ek, ire a alg ace NS eM 35. Laksmanasena. By R. D. Banerui, M.A., Indian Museum, Calcutta. The present discussion is based on four stone inscriptions discovered in the Gaya District :— n inscription, which is at present stuck in the walls of a small shrine of Sirya near the Visnupada at Gaya dated the year 1813 of the Nirvana era.—According to this inscrip- tion a king of the Kama (Kumaon) country, named Purusot- tamasimha, seeing that the religion of Buddha was in a declining state, sought the help of two neighbouring kings, King Asokacalla of the Sapadalaksa (Savalakh) mountains and the king of the Chindas, and restored the religion to its pure state. The main object of the inscription was to record the erection of a temple (Gandhakuti) for the spiritual benefit of Manikyasimha, the son of Ratnasri, the daughter of Pur- rusottamasimha. The construction of the building was carried on under the supervision of the monk Dharmmaraksita, the Spiritual adviser of Purusottamasimha..! Seat & with some other sculptures and inscriptions which are now in the Indian Museum.? The last two lines of this inscription run as follows :— (12) Srimal= Lakh y ° = atita-rajya-sam 51. (13) bhadradine 29. 5, i ipti dis- Ty in the Sapadalaksa mountains.—The inscription was covered by Mr. V. Hathorne at Bodh-Gaya. Prinsep ip his version of the text with an eye-copy 1m an early volume 341. 1 A.S.R., Vol. III, p. 126, pl. XXXV. Ind. Ant., Vol X, p. 2 J.B.B.R.AS., vor. XVI, p. 359; Cunningham’s Mahabodhi, p. 78, pl. XXVII A. 8 Or Laksvana. 272 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [July, 1913, of the Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal.! Rajendra Lala Mitra® and Bhagwan Lal Indraji* could not trace it at Bodh-Gaya. I saw the inscription on the walls of a modern building to the north of the sculpture shed at Bodh-Gaya. Its present position was already known to the late Dr. Th. Bloch of the Archzological Survey. Recently Dr. Fleet has stated that either Asokacalla or Dasaratha of this inscription was Jaina,* because Bhagwan Lal read the word Jinendra in the first line. But this reading is not correct. Besides, the word Jinendra is « well-known epithet of Buddha. The first line reads as follows :— _ Namo Buddhaya Deyadharmmoyam pravara-mahayanaya- yinah paramopasakasya Hevajra-caran = dravinda-makaranda- madhukara-phalakara nrpati ve- The word Hevajra is distinct even in Mr. Hathorne’s eye- copy. It is also a well-known epithet of the Bodhisattva.’ The last two lines run as follows :— Srimal = Lak : deva padanam atita rajya-sam 72 Vaisakha vadi 12 Gurau. of Asokacalla-deva.—This record, unfortunately, is not dated. 1, 8, and Dharmaraksita, the spiritual adviser of the king of the Kama country, who is already known to us from inscrip- tion no. I, in ll. 9-10, _ _The elders of the Ceylon Congregation (Simnghala-sthati- ranam) are mentioned in ll. 15-16, and tw adha- nika Brahmacata and the Mandalika Sahajapala. These two officers are mentioned in inscription no. III. Catabrahma is Tn a recent number of the Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society Dr. Fleet has expressed a doubt about the identity of the Asokacallas mentioned in the four inscriptions quoted Vol. IX, No. 7.] Laksmanasena. 273 [N.S.] above. Their identity, however, may be established in the following way :— Asokacalla is associated with the bhiksu Dharmmarak- Sita in inscriptions nos. land IV. In both inscriptions Dharm- maraksita is styled Kama-raja-guru and consequently it must be admitted that the Asokacallas mentioned in these two in- scriptions are one and the same personage. Again, the officers of the king mentioned in inscription no. III are also men- tioned in inscription no. [V; consequently it must be admit- ted that the Asokacallas mentioned in inscriptions no. I, III and IV are one and the same person. Inscription no. II does not give any detail about the king, but he is most pro- bably the same as the one mentioned in the remaining inscrip- tions. The correct reading of the name of the king seems to Th Aégokacalla in inscriptions nos. I and III and Aéokavalla in nos. II and IV. The former have been neatly and carefully full of spelling mistakes. Consequently the spelling in the neater inscriptions should be followed. There is practically very little difference between va and ca in inscriptions nos. If and IV. - The most important point in these inscriptions are the dates in no. Il and IIf. The use of the word attta in express- ing the date is peculiar, and various scholars have translated it in various ways. Some twenty years ago Dr. Kielhorn Laksmanasena.? He proved beyond doubt that the initial year of the Laksmanasena era was equivalent to Saka 1041 and not Saka 1028. The modern almanacs of Tirhut, on which the former theories were based, are not reliable and the grant of Sivasimha which has been published by Dr. Grierson ‘* During the reign of Laksmanasena the years of bis reign would be described as Srimal=Laks ee 1 Ind. Ant., Vol. X, p. 342. = feat 3 Madoneats $8. r 3 Ind. Ant., Vol. XIX, p. I. + Proc. A.S B. 1895, p. 144, pl. IIL. 6 Ep. Ind., Vol. V., App. No. 166. 274 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (July, 1918. from the commencement of the reign of Laksmanasena, that reign itself was a thing of the pas t.’! Dr. Kielhorn’s trans- lation of the Jast sentence of ins cst No. III possesses the advantage of being clearer than those of his predecessors in the same field. It leaves no doubt about the fact that the use of the word atita is a clear indication of the cessation of Laksmanasena’ sreign. Further on he says :— en we are told that, at the conquest of Bengal by Muhammad Bukhtiyar, which by Mr. Blochmann is placed about a.D. 1198-99, the last Hindu King Lakhmaniya had been reigning for 80 years, does not this really mean that the conquent took place in the year 80 of Laksmanasena-era,— 02’ Timal WOL ADL sa From his ‘synchronistic list for “Northern India® (A.D. 700-1400) published ay: it appears that Dr. Kielhorn had then abandone eo In 1896 Babu ia. Nath Vasu in his article ‘*Chronology of the Sena. Kings of Bengal’’* quoted some verses from Danasagara, a work said to be composed by Ballala- sena, according to which Ballalasena was alive in 1169 a.D. Within a very short time Dr. R. G. Bhandarkar published his sixth report on the Search for Sanskrit Manuscripts in According to pose verses the pane against Dr. Kielhorn’s theory may by summed up as follo Two esciariits of Dinasigara, by Ballalasena, King of Bengal, contain the following passage N ikhila- cakra-tilaka-srimad- Rallihdiemons purne Sasi-navadasamite gakavarse Danasagaro racitah. One of these MSS. is in the India Office collection® and in this the date is given in numerical figures also. The other is in the possession of Babu Nagendra Natha Vasu.’ This manuscript contains two more verses elucidating the date :-- Ravibhaganah sarasista ye bhuta danasagarsy = asya Kramaso’ tra samparidanudadya vatsara paiica T'ad-evam eka-navaty- RUDE DATS AREAL nvite sake Samvatsarah patanti Visvapadarabhya ca (2) A a of apenas another work by 1 toa Ant. , Vol. XI sora X, p. 2, note 3. 8 Ind. Ant., ‘vol. Vv i and J.AS.B. 1896 » pt. a eport on the Search for sae kri i MSS. in the Bombay Presi- Penh ducing the years 1887-88, = 89, 1889-90 and 1890-91. 6 Eggeling’s India Office Cat., t. ILI, p. 545 ' Sastri’s Notices of poet MSS, 2nd series, Vol. I, p. 170. 8 J.A.8.B, 1896, pt. I Vol. LX, No. 7.] Laksmanasena. 275 [N.S.] Ballalasena, now in the sonapte of the Bombay Government, contains the following ve Kha-nava-kh = ait =abde arebhe adbhiitasigaram Gaudendra Kuijaralana-stambha-vahur = mahipateh.! The agreement of the date from two different works seems to prove beyond doubt that Ballalasena was alive in 8. 1090-91, ie. 1168-9 a.p. Consequently it had to be admit- ted that Laksmanasena came to the throne after 1169 a.p. Bat Dr. Kielhorn had already proved that the initial year of the era of Laksmanasena is equivalent to 1119-20 a.p. In order to reconcile these sedan fcc sie Nagendra Nath Vasu Se - following theo news pleased him so much that in his newly conquered king- =e pS inaugurated a new era, which he named the Laksmana P Sis far as is known at present, nobody has looked into the genuineness of the evidence brought against Dr. Kielhorn’s theo ory. The manuscript of Danasagara in the eee collec- ) years The copy in the India Office collection is said to be written in modern Bengali handwriting’ and consequently it cannot be much older than Nagendra Babu’s MS. There is a copy of the same work in the collection of the Asiatic Society of Bengal.+ Thisis also written in modern Bengali characters, and is very nearly v from mistakes. In this copy none o the three verses quoted above can be traced, ipa ot the verses ee the genealogy of the Sena Kings are give ese verses are also absent in a copy of shass same work in the library of the Maharaja of Pathuriaghata.° This have four an was copied i in Saka 1728, i.e., 1806 a.p. Thus we ! Report on the Search of Sanskrit MSS. in “ Bombay Presi- dency, 1887. 83, 1888-89, 1889-90 and 1890-91, p. Ixxx * J.A.S.B. 1896, pt. I, p. 2 . : Heine s India Office fax Pt III, p. 545. I, A., 78. Vol. I, oo Lala Mitra’s Notices of Sanskrit MSS., Ist series, 0. 276 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. {July, 1913. was added at first and we find it in two manuscripts. The other two verses were added later on and consequently they are not to be found in any other copy. The verses quoted by Dr. R. G. Bhandarkar are also to be found in one manuscript only. There are several other manu- scripts of Adbhutasagara by Ballalasena in various parts of India ut these verses do not seem to occur in any one of them ;— (1) A manuscript in the Raghunatha temple at Kashmir. (2) A manuscript in the collection of the Asiatic Society of Bengal.! (3) An incomplete manuscript in the Bombay Government collection.” 4) A manuscript in private possession noticed by Maha- mahopadhyaya Hara Prasad Sastri.? 5) To these may be added a manuscript in the India Office collection.* Th 1 Government No. 1193. : * Report on the Search for Sanskrit MSS. in the Bombay Presi- dency, 1883.84. 5 Sastri Notices of Sanskrit MSS., Vol. IT. # India Office Cat. 7 5 Memoirs A. 8. B., Vol. Il, Ramacarita of Sandhyakara Nandi by Mahamahopadhyaya Hara Prasada Sastri, Proc. A.S.B., 1900, 6 Proc. A.S.B., 1899, p. 39. Vol. IX, No. 7.] Laksmanasena. 277 [NV.S.] earlier in date. These two works, Danasagara and Adbhutasa- carelessness and igre of the scribes are well known. Dr. B r says, ‘‘ Some of them — are unintelligible ae to the ein hs of the text.’ er factor that contributes to unreliability of modern cords. Their paleography proves beyond doubt whether they are forgeries or not. vidence based on such records cannot be set aside in favour of ere culled from modern copies of mss. said to be ancient. I cannot understand what led Dr. Kielhorn to abandon his fone views when he had such sure ground to stand upon. The extracts quoted above from Dr. Kielhorn’s article on the Laksmanasena era clearly indicate that the author was o on that Laksmanasena had ceased to reign in La-sam 51, theory ‘put forward by Babu Nagendra Nath Vasu is directly opposed to the epigraphic evidence. Laksmanasena- deva who ceased to reign before 1170-71 a.D. could not have come to the throne after 1168-69 a.p. as two at least of his copper-plate grants were issued in his third year. The initial discussion recently. He ante that the era was Sémantasena and on the accession of Laksmanasena it ‘‘ was has cited several dated inscriptions in Sup pORt of his theory. But he has not considered two very serious objections. (1) None of the inscriptions quoted by him contain the word atita or any of its equivalents. (2) None of the Indian eras, now known, seem to have hee started by one king and adopte ted and fai by any ne of his successors. At least there is no direct evidence in Riort of such a view. The other theory put forward by Babu Nagendra Nath Vasu is based on a rumour (prava ada). Moveover, the establish- en of an era by a father in the name of his newly- born son unheard of, and the evidence produced in its support is not me all trustworthy. Before we proceed to examine the statements of the ' Report on the Search of Sanskrit MSS. in the houbey Presidency, ~palaiae p. lxxxii. 2 Proc. and J.A.S.B., Vol. I, p. 45. 278 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [July, 1913. Muhammadan historians on this point, we should examine Vikrama Samvat 1232. This inscription of Govindapaladeva also contains the word gate. It is evident from the analogy of the inscriptions already quoted that his reign must have been a thing of the past at Gaya in 1175 a.p. But he was not dead at that time, because a manuscript written in the 37th year of his reign has been discovered by modern scholars. The following references to the reign of Govindapala have been discovered as yet. (1 he Visnupada temple inscription, Vikrama year 1232, regnal year 14. ‘ Srimad-Govindapaladevanam gata-rajye Caturdasa samvat- sare.”’ (2) A manuscript of the Astasahasrika-Prajfiaparamita, at present preserved in the library of the Royal Asiatic Society of London, in which the final colophon runs as follows : ~ Paramesvara- Paramabhattaraka- Paramasaugata- Maharaja- dhiraja-Srimad Gi ind | Al 4, ayy en maat 4. OU ft CLAY A manuscript of the well-known lexicon Amarakosa preserved in the Library of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, in which the final colophon runs as follows :— — bhaitaraketyadi-rajavali- pur vvavat-Sri-Govindapaliya, samvat 24 Caitra sudi 8 subhamastu-sarvva-jagatam- iti. _ (4) The last leaf of a manuscript of Astasahasrika Pra- naparamita preserved at the same place, in which the last two. lines contain the following historical reference :— 4. Srimad-Govindapala-devusy-atita 5. Samvat 18 Karttika-dine 15. (5) A manuscript of the Guhyavali-vivrti by Ghanadeva preserved in the University Library, Cambridge, in which the final colophon runs as follows :-— Govindapiladevinim sata 37 sramanadine 11 likhitamidam, (6) A Manuscript of the Pajicikara belonging to the same collection as above possesses this unique colophon :— ae Paramésvaretyadi-rajavali-pirvvavat-éimad- 6. Govindapala-devanam vinasta-rajye Astatriméat-samvatsare. 7 —s— 1 AS.R., Vol. III, pl. xxxviii, No. 18. Kielhorn’s No. 166. Vol. IX, No. 7.] Laksmanasena. 279 [V.8.] _ (8) A manuscript of the Yogaratnamala preserved in the University Library, Cambridge, in which the final colophon runs thus :— 1.4. Paramésvaretyadi-rajavali-pirvvavat Srima. 1.5. -d=Govindapiladevanim sam 39 bhadra-dine 14. . . Only one among these records speaks of King Govinda- pala’s reign as vijayarajya-samvatsare, *‘ the year in the vic- torious reign.’? Three records state that the king had ceased © reign because the word gate in no. 1, atita in no. 4 and no. and vinasta in no. 6 cannot be interpreted otherwise. In three records the scribe refuses to give the titles of the king in full, e.g. no. 3, no. 6 and no. 8, and begins with the Phrase :-— Paramesvaretyadi or Paramabhaitaraketyadi. __ In one record, only no. 5, the historical reference is given without any qualifying adjective. : must be admitted on the evidence of no. 2 that the King Govindapala was alive and reigning in the 4th year from his succession (1165 A D.) and that Nalanda was included in his dominions as shown by the manuscript copied at that Place. We have two records of the 14th year of the king, One of which comes from Gaya. In the case of no. 1 the mention of the word gata indicates that the reign of Govinda- pala had ceased in Gaya, and in the case of no, 3 the omis- $10n of the full Imperial titles denotes that the place where the manuscript was copied had ceased to be a part of Govin- qapale’s dominions. Of such cases two things may be af- rmed :— (1) that King Govindapala had ceased to reign owing to death or abdication, or (2) that the area of the dominion os that prince was gradually becoming circumscri The latter explanation is to be preferred as one ms. of his 37th year does not refer to his reign as expired. This is con- firmed by a ms. of the 38th year copied by the same scribe 280 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (July, 1913. of v.s. 1232 on the other hand shows that once the country belonged to Govindapala, but it had ceased to do soin the 14th Bihar) in the 38th year of his reign. Z The Bodh-Gaya inscription of La-sarn 74 proves that Gaya and the country around it continued in the possession of the Sena kings of Bengal. Nothing is definitely known about the dissolution of the empire of the Palas. The last king of the Pala dynasty, whose name has come down to us, was Madanapaladeva. According to the Ramacarita of Sandhyakara Nandi, this adanapala was a contemporary of Candra-Deva of Mahdaya (Kanauj)! :— imhisuta _vikranten-arjjunadhamna bhuvah pradipena Kamalavikasa bhesajabhisaja Candrena bandhunopetam (-tam) Candicarana-saroja-prasada-sampanna-vigrahasrikatn : akhalu Madanam sangesamisam-agad jagad-vijaya-laksmih. Consequently, it must be admitted that Mr. Venis’s assignment of the date of the Kamauli grant of Vaidyadeva is not correct. The true date must lie somewhere between 1026 a.p. and 1090 a.p. The first date is that of the Sarnath 1 Ramacarita of Sandhyakara Nandi, Memoirs A.S.B., Vol. IL 2 Epi. Ind.. Vol. IT, p- 256. Vol. IX, No. 7.] Laksmanasena. : 281 [W.8.] ' inscription of Mahipala!' and the second that of the Candravats plate of Candra-Deva.? Nothing is known about ala kings during the first sixty years of the twelfth century. Govindapaladeva ascended the throne in 1161 a.p. It is generally supposed that he belonged to the Pala dynasty but there is no direct evidence in support of this statement. But two things are in favour of the above statements. His name ends with the word Pala and he was a Buddhist. Even after his destruction Buddhist scribes have continued to use his name in the colophons of manuscripts for several years. The extent of his kingdom is uncertain. But as has been already observed, he ruled over a portion of Magadha or South Bihar and was gradually losing ground before the Senas. He had a long reign of thirty-seven years. If the Tabagat-i-Nasiri is to be trusted then the modern city of Bihar was his last strong- hold. He was crushed by the Mussulmans in the 38th year of his reign (1199 a.p.). Christian era remnants of the Pala empire seem ave become the prey of the sect kings. ithe rarnacleah ens of Kanauj invaded Mag n 1146 a.p. and advan as far as Mudgagiri or Mungir. ate ording to one of his bsp blaté grants discovered in the village of Lar in the Gorakhpur dis- trict, Govindacandra, when in residence in Mudgagiri, bestowed Ee vebiy indicates that Gisudacthdra overran Magadha 1146 a.p. Twenty-five oe afterwards, we find that “Gaya is is bkobably nee wero not on Mes terms. It is even hinted in one of the Bengali works on the Dharma cult discovered by Mahamahopadhyaya Hara Prasad Sastri that the Buddhists | anual Report of this Ave, fadevey. ee Lidia; 3 1903-04, p- 229 pl. isin, ‘No. oe > Epi. I ; Vol. IX, p. 302. s Bondall’s ‘Cat. of Sans. MSS in the Univ. Liby., Cambridge, Bud- —— Sans. MS Haverty - a of the Tabagat-i-Nasirt, Bib. Ind. Epi. Ind., III, p. 98. § Mahamah opal ay Hara Prasad Sastri’s ‘‘ Discovery of living Buddhism in Bengal,’’ 282 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal [July, 1913. Bihar or Magadha was the prey of the neighbouring monarchs immediately before the Muhammadan conquest. Gahadavalas, Senas and Palas were trying one after another to secure it for to defend himself and the Sena king too much occupied with internal affairs or family quarrels to properly fortify his marches. In Bengal proper, we find that two sons of Laksmanasena, Visvaripasena and KeSavasena, succeeded him on the throne. Both of them are known from copper-plate grants. Keéava- sena has also been mentioned in the Ain-i-Akbari. In Colonel KeSavasena and the same name occupies the place allotted to the donor, cf. 40—43.4 he proper reading of the plate is:— Srimal-Laksmar levapadanudhyata samasta-suprasasty” upetasva pati-gajapati-narapati-raja trayadhipati Somakula-vikasa- bhaskara Somavamésapradipa-pratipanna Karna Satyavrata Gangeya saranagata-vajrapanjara maharajadhiraja ari raja- oo Gaudesvara Strimat-K eésavasenadevapila-vijay- -inah. Similarly we have— Srimal-Laksmana-sena-devah kuégali. in the Tarpandighi and Anulia grants of Laksmanasenadeva and Sri-Visvari leva-padavijayinal in the Madanapada grant of Visvaripasena. If the Beker er i me to sion Mle: he corrected the following verses of the Edilpur grant :— : , /! Jarrett’s Ain-i Akbari (Bib. Ind.), Vol. IL. p. 146 2 J.ASB., Vol. VIL pt L ie ae $ Ibid., Vol. LXV, pt.I, p. 8. + ‘Ibid., Vol. VIL, pt. I, pl. IV: Vol. 1X, No. 7.] Laksmanasena. 283 S.] 17... . Htiasmat kathamanyatha ripu badha vaidhavya vaddhavrato vikhyata ksitipala maulir-abhavat Sri-Visvavandyo into Btasmit kathamanyatha ripubadhi...... Sri- Visvaripo ny 3 the ground of this correction Babu Nagendra Nath has stated that the Elilpur grant also was issued by Visva- adjunct. But if Viévaripo is taken to be a proper name, we Shall have to admit that the verses following this refer to Visvariipasena and not to Laksmanasena. Consequently Tada- devi must be acknowledged to be the queen of Visvarupasena and not Laksmanasena. Finally we shall have to acknowledge that sie was the son of king Visvarupa by the queen Tada-dev In reality the Edilpur grant was issued by Kesavasena, a os Gaudesvara. Thus the existence of two sons of Laksmanasena is proved by their inscriptions. It has already been stated above that the Edilpur grant of wie mioe contains all the verses of the Madaanphds grant and some more in addition. The immediate pet from this is. that Visvartpasena was KeSavasena’s predecess The Edilpur oak ee mentions KeSavasena, and in name Visva ian occurs tavice sad in ‘each case it is eile that the engraver was very much in want of space. Thee was that the four letters are smaller than the other fare in the same line. Most probably a name pape’ of three syl- lables was erased and the name Visvaripa consisting of four syllables engraved in its place. The ae Abad mentions a king named Madhi Sen after Lakhan Sen. This name wrongly sce ta chats is evidently Madhava Sena, and, if Atkinson ' is correct, we possess a record of this king also which however has still ye be deciphered. If we assume that in the Madana- pada grant the name of Madhava was erased and Visvarupa engraved in its stead, we have the following genealogy of the Sena kings of Bengal 1 E. Atkinson’s ees p. 516; see J.A.S.B., 1896, pt. 1, p. 28, note 1. 284 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [July, 1913. Virasena. Samantasena Hemantasena Vijayasena Vallalasena Laksmanasena Pee S] Madhava Sena (?) Visvaripasena. KeSavasena. The genealogical tables of Kulacaryas of Bengal also state that KeSavasena was the king who quitted Gauda.' These genealogical works are not generally noted for accuracy, but in this case the corroboration at least might be of some value. Thus in Bengal two or three sons of Laksmanasena actually succeeded him at Gauda. The last of them, KeSavasena, was Garhwal? Evidently, there was a civil war among the Sena princes and the vanquished prince escaped to the far North. It may be that he had become intimate with Asokacalladeva or Dasaratha, his brother, when they were at Bodh-Gaya on 1 J.A.8.B., Vol. LXV, 1896, pt. 1, p. 24. _? The only known exceptions are the grants of Jayacandra of Ka- nauj to the Kgatriya Rajyadharavarman. Ind. Ant., Vol. XVIII, pp. 13443. Vol. IX, No. 7.] Laksmanasena. 285 [V.8.] pilgrimage. This disturbance must have taken place before the fall of Kanauj, as the whole of Northern India was in a very disturbed state during the last decade of the twelfth followed each other on the throne of Bengal. Consequently when Muhammad-i-Bakhtiyar began his raids in Bihar, the Buddhist king was too weak and insignificant to repel him and the Hindu king too much occupied with his own troubles to attend to the peace of his Western border. His governors most probably were not strong enough to check these depreda- tions. Emboldened by his success, Muhammad-i-Bakhtiyar advanced up to Manér, near the junction of the Sone with the Ganges. Even the Sone was crossed and in one of his expedi- tions he stormed the monastery of Bihar. It was hardly a glorious exploit for the invader. What he imagined to be a fort was merely a strongly built monastery on a scalable hill- top which to a foreigner looked like a fort from a distance. The postern was carried by an assault, as the garrison must consisted of simple rustics hastily gathered together to author visited Bengal forty-two years after the conquest,® and his account of the invasion of Bengal seems to be based on the Narratives of old soldiers. Later Muhammadan historians | J.A.S.B., 1876, pt. I, pp. 331-32. 2 Ibid. 1875, pt. I, p. 276. On this point compare Babu Monmohon Chuckerbutty, J. & P. A.S.B., Vol. V. p. 51. oe 8 Raverty’s Translation of the Tabaqat-i-Nasiri, p. 663. + Ibid., p. 552. 286 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [July, 1913. have copied the account of the invasion of Bengal from Minhaj’s book and consequently are not worth much more. They gloat over the invasion and treat it as a mighty perform. ance and exaggerate the importance of the conqueror beyond all measure. Raverty has done full justice to them in his translation. ! From this point the Tabagat-i-Nasiri, instead of helping us, leads only to confusion. The first important blunder is the mention of Laksmanasena as the then king of Bengal and the description of his flight. Ihave already proved that at that time Kesavasena was on the throne of Bengal and clearly understood or Minhaj was not paying sufficient atten- tion to the narrative. Minhaj’s account of the conquest of Bengal consists of the following words :— ‘The following year after that, Muhammad-i- Bukhtyar caused a force to be prepared, pressed on from Bihar, and suddenly appeared before the city of Nudiah, in such wise that ,no more than eighteen horsemen could keep up with m. The statement in itself looks very simple and nobody seems to have examined it carefully. Three different roads may be followed to reach Nudiah from Bihar :— (1) From Bihar to Bhagalpur or Mungir, then across the Ganges to Gaur and finally to Nudiah, after crossing the Gan- of Chota-Nagpur and Birbhum almost parallel to the modern (3) Through \ Ibid., p. 558. 2 Tabaqat-i-Nasiri (Raverty’s Translation), p. 557. the pass at Sahibganj along the southern Vol. 1X, No. 7.] Laksmanasena. 287 [NV .S.j bank of the Ganges and the western bank of the Bhagirathi, crossing the Bhagirathi at Nudiah. Minhaj has given no description of the route followed by the invaders, and it is evident that his store of information was very scanty. Out of the three routes mentioned above the third and the last one is the most practicable one, and it is suited for cavalry manceuvres. The first one involves the crossing of the Ganges twice, which seven hundred years ago generally followed by the invaders of Bengal and most probab- y the first Muhammadan invader of Bengal also followed it. The story of the great haste of the leader and his conquest of Nudiah with the aid of seventeen horsemen needs no explana- ion. The whole narrative is the result of hasty arrangement of ill-digested materials. First of all we have no authority to of the Sena Kingdom in Laksmanasena’s time was Vijayapura the flight of Laksmanasena is one of the grossest misrepresen- tations ever found in modern historiography. The reigning king KeSavasena was most probably put to flight. Bengal was tract between Bihar and Gaur (Gauda or Lakhnauti) in his life- time. The southernmost limit was Lakhanor or Lakhnor, was not conquered till the time of Mughisuddin Boe el of that territory (Rae Lakhmaniah’s), he left the city of Nudiah in desolation, and the place which is (now) Lakha- ! Proc, A.S.B. 1898, p. 192. 2 Proc. & J.A.S.B., Vol. I, p- 45. 288 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [July, 1913. nawati he made the seat of Government.’’ Muhammad i-Bakh- tiyar must have turned back from Nudiah and then occupied Lakhnauti or Gaur. The King of Jajnagar (Orissa) inva- ded Bengal in 1243-44 a.p., and at that time Lakhnor was the southernmost stronghold of Muhammadans. Finally we have a silver coin of Mughisudbin Yuzbak struck to com- memorate the final conquest of Nudiah in 653 a.4. = 1255 a.p.! There is hardly any other way of explaining the legend on this coin, the proper reading of the margin of which seems to be:— Geds « ixiin war, GS Logs worys gly wy i's eye! 402 a Kleine wawe® 9 Bengal commemorating the invasion of Assam.+ The Qanauj coin of Altamsh is a more perfect parallel, as the wording candra was still a reigning monarch. This discovery lends an additional support to the theory that the final conquest of Qanauj took place at least ten years after the death of Jaya- candra. Consequently it has to be admitted that the final conquest of Nudiah took place in 1253 a.p. The next step was taken 43 years later when the descendants of Balban were reigning independently in Bengal. Saptagrama, the part of thern Bengal, was reduced in 1298 a.p. by Muhammad Zafar Khan, who became its first Governor.§ The actual territory conquered by Muhammad-i-Bakhtiyar was very small in area, extending only to Deva-Kota or Deo- 1 Cat. of Coins in the Indian Museum, Vel. II, pt. IL, p. 146, No. 6 2 J.A.8.B. 1881, pt. I, p. 61. 4 um, Vol. IT, pt. II, p. * Cat. of Coins in the Indian Museum, Vol. II, pt. I, p. 2le The correct reading is aos and not. ate 4 Ibid. Vol. II, pt. II, p. 152, No. 38 6 Annual Report of the Archl. S ) i . 20—21. ‘P.&TARR Vol ¥. c urv., N. Circle, for 1908, pp Vol. 1X, No. 7.] Laksmanasena. 289 [NV.S.] account of the Muhammadan conquest of Bengal! would have een the siege and reduction of Gauda or Gaur, but this point was passed over in silence. The conqueror Muhammad-i-Bakh- tiyar Khilji is generally taken by the later Muhammadan on to be the General of Qutbuddin Aibak. Thus we ave :— ‘*The Sultan was overwhelmed with astonishment to see this and nominated and appointed him ruler of the whole country of Lakhnauti in Bengala and sent him away.’’ * II. ‘*And the Kingdom of Bengal as an adjunct of the Empire of Delhi was left in the hands of Qutbuddin. Sultan Qutbuddin entrusted to Malik Ikhtiyaruddin Muhammad-i- Bakhtiyar Khiliji the Viceroyalty of the Provinces of Bihar 228 ‘ booter. He had no connection either with the kings of Ghur or his Viceroy in India. In April 1911 aninscription of the time of Laksmanasena- deva was discovered on the base of an image of the goddess Candi at Dalbazar in the town of Dacca. There is an old ghat i, which is built entirely of a small modern brickbuilt shrine containing a linga and two images of stone, one of Candi and the other of Visnu. It 1 Tabagat i-Nasiri (Raverty’s Trans ), pp. 572-73. ; Vl 2 Muntakhabu-t-Tawarikh (Trans. by Ranking in the Bib. Ind.), ol. I, pp. 82-83. ; - 8 Riyazu-s-Salatin (Trans. by Maulavi Abdus Salam in the Bib. Ind.), p 59. 290 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [July, 1913. whisk. The main figure stands under a sort of porch or niche robably intended to represent a temple. On the pedestal is the inscription in two lines on a plain band in front and a recessed corner on each side. Below this is a lion couchant in front with three devotees kneeling on three recessed corners on each side. On the top of the niche or shrine are two elephants, one on each side with vases in their upraised trunks as if they are pouring water over the head of the goddess. The inscription runs as follows :— ‘ie ' (1) Sri-mal = Laksmana- (2) sena-devasya sam 3 B (1) Maladei suta adhikrta Damodre | (2) -na Sri-Candidevi samaravdha tabhradakana C (1) Sri-Narayanena. tt) Pratisthit = etih. ‘‘{In] the year 3 of [the reign of] the illustrious Laksmana- senadeva [this image of] the goddess Candi was begun by the Judge Damodra (Damodara). .. . 5 <0 p06 5.6 ss «Oe ..+. [and] was dedicated by the illustrious Narayana.” The importance of this in cription is three-fold :— (1) It is the only stone inscription of the time of Laksmana- sena, which has been discovered up to date. The wording of the inscription, or more definitely the absence of such phrases qualifying phrases, such as pravarddhamana-vijaya-rijye or This is a well-known fact and examples are hardly necessary- This inscription when compared with those of Asokacalla an Daésaratha, of the 51st and 74th years of Laksmanasena res- (2) It is the oldest stone inscription in Eastern Bengal © according to state of our knowledge at present. It proves that though Ramapala was not the Ramavati of Ramapaladeva, it was a place of very great importance. But of this we shall have to say something more in another paper. PLATE XXiil. Journ, As. Soc. Beng., Vol. IX, 1913. IMAGE OF CANDI AT DACCA, DEDICATED IN THE 3RD YEAR OF LAKSMANASENE. Journ., As. Soc. Beng., Vol. IX, 1913. PLATE XXIV RMA DAT: OS AGB oui DACCA INSCRIPTION OF LAKSMANASENA, THE YEAR 3, 36. On Two-Shouldered Stone Implements from Assam. By Hem Cuanpra Das-Goupta. In the collection of prehistoric antiquities of the Indian Museum, there are two stone implements which attracted my notice on account of their peculiar shape. It is proposed to describe them in this short note. Both these implements were obtained in Assam. One of during his viceroyalty in India. These implements were pre- sented to Lord Curzon by Mr. Penny, a tea-planter of Bishnath, and were all obtained in course of digging a ditch on his estate at Bishnath (Tezpur).. The second specimen (No. 6114) was obtained from Konarpara in Cachar. Both the adzes, as the accompanying plate shows, are of the shouldered type and of small size. The chisel-end of one (6114) is very marked and though one of the shoulders is prac- tically gone, the other is fairly preserved and gives an idea of the peculiarity of the type. An examination of the specimen also shows that only one surface has been ground down to produce the cutting edge. The other (6103) also appears to be crudely fashioned like a chisel and the shoulder is not so specimens obtained from Assam. After the publication of Theobald’s paper the late Mr. Ball described two adzes of the Burmese type, * found in Dhalbhum (Singbhum),—the similarity of which was very striking. Ball was uncertain of the origin of the implements, 1Le., whe her they were indigenous or imported, —though there was nothing in the petrology of the rocks used in their manufacture to dissuade one from believing in their being of local make. | : In an interesting communication to the Asiatic Society 0 1 Mem. Geol. Surv. Ind., Vol. X, pt. 2, pp. 167-171. ® Proc. As. Soc. Bengal, 1875, pp. 118-122. 292 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (July, 1913. Bengal dealing with the history of Pegu,! Major-General Sir Arthur Phayre pointed out that there was a remarkable simi- larity between the language of the Mun (otherwise known as Mon or Talaing) of Pegu and that of the Munda of Chutia Nag- pur,” and almost immediately after the publication of Mr. Ball’s paper Sir Arthur Phayre pointed out that his (Mr. Ball’s) nd only corroborated the argument derived from linguistic sonuerat Otis. As remarked before, the specimen (No. 6114) is of arena- ceous clay while the specimen “ante 6103 is of slate. Implement No. 6114 was found in Cachar. A very short account of tne Geology of the North Gabba: hills has been published by Mr. LaTouc the,* and considering that Konarpara, the fin d-spot of specimen No. 6114, is situated at the foot of the Tertiary hills, al 1 Jour. As. Soc. Béiiadi Vol. XLII, pt. 1, pp. 23-57 me pp. ie - Op. Cit 35. , s Proc. As. Soc. Bengal, 1876 » P There appears to be a little con- foskad in Sir Arthur Phayre’s use of gon word Ko : Hoe uses the terms Munda and a as Synonymous, but the word Kol is used to include the Munda nd Oraon tribes, and thou gh th Mane and the Ho are a 1 sete Pa each ihe the Oraons are nite distinct from both of them, + Records, Geol. Surv. Ind., Vol. XVI, pt. 4, pp. 202-203. Vol. IX, No. 7.] On Two-Shouldered Stone Implements. 293 [N.8.] we can reasonably suppose that the implement was of local manufacture. pecimen No. 6103 has been obtained from Bishnath situated on the alluvium of the Brahmaputra. The Mikir hills as also from the Khasia and the Sylhet trap. It is worthy of note, in this connection, that highly decomposed trap was also found in the part of the Mikir hills examined, and according to Mr. Smith, is nearly related to that discovered by Mr. Medlicott in Sylhet.? It has been noted before that the discovery of the peculiar Burmese type of implements in Singhbhum led to the formation of the Archaeological Department, through whose courtesy I had an access to these specimens, and also Mr. J. Coggin Brown for some useful suggestions while drawing up this note. 1 Mem. Geol. Surv. Ind., Vol. XXVIII, pp. 71-95. 2 Op. Cit., p. 80. 37. The Life and Works of Muhibb Allah of Bihar. By Mawuavi M. Hipayar Husain, Lecturer, Presidency College, Calcutta. It is a fact known to almost all students of Arabic litera- ture that the Persians have played a great part in enrich- ing that literature. Almost every standard work on various branches of learning is the outcome of their labour. The Indians too have tried their best to write books in the Arabic language, and some of them wrote such learned al-Shukir al-Kadi al-Bihari. He was born in Karah, a village in Bihar, India. He sat at the feet of Mawlina Kutb al-Din al-Shamsabadi (d. a.H. 1121, a.p. 1709), and became one of the most eminent Ulama of his time. He paid a visit to the pleased with him and he had to resign the service. However, through the recommendation of some of the nobles of ‘Alamgir’s capital of Afghanistan. On the death of the Emperor ‘Alamgir, Muhammad Mu‘azzam became the sovereign of India under the title of Shah ‘Alam I (a.m. 1119-1124, a.p. 1707-1712), and i i ” an made him Kadi al-Kudat (chief justice) of the entire Moghul Empire; but he did not live long to enjoy this title, and the great post, as he died a few months after in aH. 1119, A.D. 1707. He is the author of the following works :— (1) al Jawhar al-Fard.—A treatise on indivisible atom 296 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [July, 1913. ia Mahal Library, Lucknow, f. 23; Loth, Ind. Off., No. 581 I 2) Musallam al-Subtt.—A_ treatise an the principles of Muhammadan jurisprudence according to the Hanafi school, Rampur Library, p. 278; Ferangi Mahal Lanes. Lucknow, f. 118; Bankipur Library, p. 716; Asiatic Society of Bengal (List of Arabic Boo oks), p. 23; Nizam’s Library, Hyderabad (Fann-i Usil Fikh), p. 4. Brinted in Aligarh a.n. 1297 (1879), and in Dehli a.n. 1311 (18 Several se em are in existence on this work :— I. By Mulla Nizam al-Din B. Kutb al-Din al-Saha- lawi (d. a.H. 1161, A.D. 1748), Rampur Library, p. 174; ae Mahal Library, f. 117; Loth, Ind. Off. II. By Mule Mabin B: Mulla Muhibb Allah al-Lucknawi (d. a.H. 1225, a.p. 1810), Rampur Library, p. 274. III. By Bahr al-‘Ulim ‘Abd al-‘Ali Muhammad B. Nizam al-din al-Sahalawi (d. a.H. 1125, a.D. 1713) entitled Fawa@ ith al-Rahmiit ; Ferangi Mahal Library, f. 117; Nizam’s Library (Fann-i-Usil ikh), p. 6; lithographed, Lucknow, a.p. 1878. IV. By Mulla Hasan B. al-Kadi Ghulam Mustafa, Ne ae Library, p. 275; pee s Library, Hy- abad (Fann-i-Usiil Fikh), p p. 4. ¥. Mawlana ‘Abd al-Hak B. Mawlina Fadl Hak al- Khairabadi (d. a.H. 1317, ap. 1899), Rampur Library, p. 275; lithographed, Cawnpore. VI. By Muhasiinad Bashir al-Din, entitled Kashf al- mee lithographed, Cawnpore, A.H. 1287 (A.D. 1870). (3) Sullam al-‘Ulim.—A treatise on logic, Rampur Library, p. 451; Ferangi Mahal Library, Lucknow, f. 24; Bankipur Li- rete p. ee bgt Ind. Off. , 563; - Hekopraphed: Lucknow, a.H. 5 (A.D As the WE forms part of a course in Arabic at the Indian Universities, many commentaries and supercommentaries and glosses have been written on the boo ome of the commentaries are here quoted :— By Hamd Allah B. Shukr Allah (d. 4.H. 1160, 4 1747), Rampur Library, p. 454; Ferangi Mahal Library, f. 23; lithographed, Lucknow, a.H. 1264; Cawnpur, a.H. 1264 and a.n. 1278. Supercommentaries on the above :-— (a) By Sharif Khan B. Muhammad Akmal Khan (d. a.H. 1231, a.p. 1815), Rauper Library, p. 439 Vol. Tae 7.] Life and Works of Muhibb Allah of Bihar. 297 ] (b) By | ene Sa‘d Allah al-Muradabadi (d. a.H. 1294, a.p. 77), Per eg Library, p. (c) Darah Ali B. Shuja‘at ‘Ali al-Lucknawi (d. a.H. 1281, 1864 4), Rampur Library, p. 439; Ferangi Mahal Libra ary, f. 23. (d) Asad Allah Panjabi, Rampur Library, p. 440; Banki- pur Library, p. 418. (e) Ghulam Yahya B. Najm al-Din (d. a.n. 1128, 1715), Rampur Library, p. 439; Ferangi Mahal Li rary, (f) Imad akDin al-Usmant, Rampur Library, p. 440. (g) Muhammad ‘Alam , Ferangi Mahal Library, f. 23. (h) Barkat Allah, Ferangi Mahal Library, f. 23. (7) al-Saiyid Muhammad or Maa al-Shi‘l, Ferangi Ma- hal Library, Lucknow, f. 2 (j) and ee B. Fadl Hak i Kaira (d. a.H. 1317, 1899), printed, La (k) Nahi Bakbsh aL-Paidabadt, eee ted: Cawnpur, (/) Mufti. ‘Abd ‘Allah Taunki, lithographed, Lahore, a.. A.D (m) ‘Abd al-Halim B. Amin Allah al-Lucknawi (d. 4.5. 1285, a.p. 1868) under the title of Kashf al- Ishtibah, Rampur Library, p. 461; lithographed , ucknow, A.H. 1284. II. By Mulla Hasan B. Kadi Ghulam Mustafa, Ram- pur Library, p. 453 - Ferangi Mahal Library, f. 22; Hosted: Lucknow, 1870. Supercommentaries :— (a) Tirab ‘Ali B. Shuja‘at ‘Ali (d. a.n. 1281, a.p. 1864), Ferangi Mahal Library, f. 2 (6) Muhammad ‘Abd al-Hakim B. Amin Allah al-Lucknawi d. a.H. 1285, a.p. 1868), Ferangi Mahal Library, f, 23; lithographed, Lucknow, 1870. III. By Kadi Mubarak B. Muhammad Da’im Gipama’i al-Faraki (d. a.H. 1162, a.p. 1748), Rampur Library, p. 455; Ferangi Mahal Library, f. 22 ; Loth, Ind. Off., 567; lithographed, Lucknow, 4.4. 1265 (A. D. 1848). Supercommentaries :— (a) By Mawlanai Fadl Hak B. Mawlana Fadl Imam al- Khairabadi id, cam. 1274, A.D. 1857 cae Bempar Library, p. 440; Ferangi Mahal Library, f. 22; Ba pur Beno p. 181; lithographed, Dehli, 4.n. 1317 (A.D. 1899). 298 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [July, 1913.] (b) aoe Muhammad Ahsan B. Muhammad Sadik, known Ha fiz Daraz Pishawari (d. a.H. 263, A.D. 1846), set ie Library, p. 400; Ferangi Mahal Li- brary, f. 22. (c) mace “Abd al-Hakim B. ‘Abd al-Rabb (d. 4.8. 1288, D. 1871), Rampur Library, p. 441 (d) By Nar al-Islam, Rampur Library, p. 441. (e) By Mufti Muhammad Yusuf, B- Muhammad Asghar H. 1286, a.D. 1869), Ferangi Mahal Library, f. 22. (f) By Sa‘d Allah al-Kandhari, shed al-Hawashi al- Kashifa, lithographed, Dehli, a.w. 1300 (a.p. 1883). IV. By Muhammad Mubin B. Wasa Allah al-Lucknawi (d. a.H. 1225, a.p. 1810), entitled Mir‘at al- Shurith, Rampur Library, p. 456; Ferangi Mahal Library, f. 23; ; lithographed, Lu cknow, A.H. 1266 By Muhammad ‘Ali al-Mubaraki al- Jawnpiari, en- titled Mi‘raj al-Fuhum, Rampur Library, p. 456. Vi. By “ane ‘Ali B. Fath Allah al-Husaini al-Sandili oe i - 1200, a.p. 1785), Rampur Library, p. = VII. By Muhammad Wali B. Ghulam Mustafa al-Saha- lawi, agri a.H. 1155, a.p. 1742; Rampur Library, p. 456. VIII. By ‘Abd Allah Muhammad al- Saharanpuri, Ram- pur Library, p. 456. IX. By gry Sharf al-Din Rampiri, Rampur Library, p. 4 X. Bahr al-‘Ulum ‘Abd al-‘Ali B. Nizam al-Din al- Sahalawi (d. a.n. 1225, a.p. 1713), Bankipur Library, p. 396; Ferangi Mahal Library, f. 23; lithographed, Dehli, 1891 XI. By Sone aa Firaz B. Muhabbat, Rampur Li- . p. 456: Bankipur Library, p. 419. XII. By Mulla Ashraf, \ eiooeintg as A.H. 1150, A.D. p. XIV. By Co ‘Azim Pishawart (d. a.H. 1275, A.D. 1859), Loth, Ind. Off., 571. XV. me Muhammad “Ali Jawnpart, Loth, Ind. Off., ‘ stig fe :—Azad al-Bilgirami, Subhat al-Marjan, p. 76; Siddik Hasan, reat al-Nubala, p. 905; Fakir Muhammad al- Lihari, Hada’ ik al-Hanafiya, p. 431: Brockelmann, Gescht. d. Arab: Litter IT, p. 420, and The Encyclopaedia of Islam, Vol. I —_~S Sp Perey git oy? tt aC poate et 38. Psychology of Indian Music, By AtrreD WestHarpP (Mus. Doc.). What does the European know of Oriental music ? What does the Englishman, who enjoys the hospitality of musical amateur but al those Europeans who treat of Oriental music in writing) all hold Oriental, and especially Indian, music to be a kind of noise produced sometimes by harsh voices and sometimes by a still harsher flute, accompanied by the low brumming sound of the native drum. uropeans from lack of opportunity have little or no ich i y often sacred in character and confined to temples, from which not only Euro- peans but all unbelievers are rigidly excluded, they have got the impression that all Oriental music is a confused medley of the subject dared pro- Is it not a most remarkable country in probing problems of this description, has not et, so to speak, entered the antechamber o soul of the East. f Europe. hristianity, the most negative religion of the world, the aspirations come product of the Hebrew race, whose negative — world—Europe. It goes without saying that the positive spirit of Europe became over-excited t 300 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [July, 1913. tradiction ; the desire of conquest, perverted according to the peaceful character of Christianity, became commercialism. If once war killed the bodies of men, now commercialism does its best to kill their souls; in this sense an English Bishop has himself proclaimed, ‘‘ If feudalism was bad, plutocracy is infin- itely worse because of its powers of corruption.’’ There is no abandonment to things and objective laws. Did not Christ him- self pronounce the Divine sentence : ‘‘ What shall it profit a man if he gain the whole world and lose his own soul?’’ Th true realism.”’ The present state of music in Europe and in the East, this state which is the cause of the beforementioned lack of musical understanding between East and West, is the following: Europe, which, in its whole moral life, subordinates, as we have seen, her soul to external duties, subordinates her music to the laws of sounds, sounds, as sounds, being as exterior to the musi- cal soul, as all that surrounds us is exterior to what 7s (or what ought to be) in us. What does that mean? The music of Europe follows the laws of sounds, of physics and acoustics and of physiology, and is not psychological. The basis itself of the actual European music, the equal temperament which regulates i 8 ’s will. Here you have the musical I See for further details the “« Psychology of Sounds,’” of the Ger- man Professor Carl Stumpf. SEN OL ere See Vol. cope 7.| Psychology of Indian Music. 301 [V.S.] order to please his ear. The Oriental plays or sings in order to. express emotions for which there are no words and no gestures, no designs and no colours. The ear and sonorousness, in regret in their arrogant and ignorant reports; therefore the Educational Council yt la Devi and Pandit Kishn mbar are alre work, and ich musically has found sympathetic audience even in London, thanks to Ratan Devi, rs. and human duties from an Oriental rather than from the average European point of view. Now we have to proceed from Indian musical folklore to Indian artistic music. We shall again employ European art- istic music which we know, as a means of understanding Indian artistic music which we know less. We have spoken of the laws of acoustics, to which every sound of the present days’ European music, in so far (and that is very far) as it employs the piano, is subjected. These acoustic laws are termed laws of ‘*eoncord ’’ ; that is, every sound of European artistic music is intentionally abandoned to laws which have nothing whatever 302 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [July, 1913. to do with the artist’s will. It is true the greatness of a com- poser consists also in Europe in that he finds new combina- tions of sound; but every great composer, who does so, acts naturally could not refrain from expressing his own will, has been called by the musical authorities of his time a musical ‘**pig.’’ And the more a composer dares to evade the laws of acoustics, the more do the musical authorities endeavour to resist him. I need not remind you of the musical history of Europe: it will suffice to mention, for instance, the works of Monteverdi, or Gluck, or Debussy. here is nothing of all that acoustic unmusicality in India. The Indian theory of sound relation is the before-mentioned theory of ‘‘ Ragas.’’ The ragas are melodies which have no harmonic obligation whatever. They are melodies expressing feeling freely and frankly. It is true that the composers of India are in a certain sense officially bound to keep to the tradi- tional ragas as European composers are bound to keep to con- even been taken into consideration in European music, and which now, so to speak, exists no longer in Europe, that free- dom, called improvisation, is the foundation of Indian artistic musical theory. Will new Europe—that Euorpe which tries to get rid as well of Christianity as of commercialism—will that sionally also upon the third part of the European bar. This accent of the bar is actually disappearing, and European music of to-day has, so to speak, no | The accent of the barred measure was its last remnant. In- stead of pointing out the predominance of certain sounds of the sures the time which has nothing to do with the sounds them- Vol. IX, No. 7.] Psychology of Indian Music. 303 [V.S8.] selves, which is as exterior to the sound as acoustics, instead of measuring the intensive value of these sounds. This is the second psychological sin European musical theory nowadays commits. he Indian theory of tala emphasises just this intensive value of sounds, which the Europe of to-day ne- glects officially more than it ever did before. And what is the psychic meaning of intensity in music? Not only in music, but in all psychic life, it is changing intensity which produces a changing quality of sensations. Consult on the subject of this general psychological law the works of scientists of first rank, such as Exner, Sigwart and others; in exact science Europe is ahead of the rest of the world and it is this exact European science which provided me with the means of proving the high, the incomparable inner value of Eastern music. Musically speaking, it is the intensity of each sound which is the ‘‘raison d’etre’’, the mother (so to speak) of each sound. And changing intensity is the reason of chang- ing pitch of sounds. There is psychologically no feeling in = comes to the same thing.”’ Here you have the psychological reason of the ‘‘tala.’’ Tala is a means of causing each sound, which is, as we have seen, originated by the free will of the musician, to satisfy by changing degrees of intensity all the demands of his musical soul and to enter the musical soul of the listener. It is true that the Indian tala is in so far related to European barred measure, as the series of rhythms which the “ tala’’ produce themselves; and this is a point which will have to be revised by new India. In any case, even in its present condi- tion the tala is much more expressive than the accents of the European barred measure, which so to speak have ceased to exist in European artistic music and consequently do not contribute much to the inner life of the sounds. The tala is much longer and much richer in shadings x most advanced Europeans agree upon the artistic superiority r of Tar your memory, and a certain lishman, named Jones (Sir William Jones), the founder of the spre of Bengal, himself said in a speech before this Society : 304 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [July, 1913.] ‘*Hindoo system of music has, I believe, been formed on ‘* truer principles than our own; and all the skill of the native ‘‘composers is directed to the great subject of their art, the ‘‘natural expression of strong passions, to which melody ea ‘*the European sense) indeed is often sacrificed. Why should the England of to-day not follow the steps of Sir William Jones and undertake the study of Indian music ? English national music would undeniably profit by this study, as [ explained already in my study ‘‘ The Musical Soul that England’s future in India depends very much on Eng- land’s understanding of Indian psychology. PRERIN ARNO a ate ce 39. Nor’westers and Monsoon Prediction. By EK. Diesy. INTRODUCTION, These few remarks are set out to suggest a correlation be- tween the leading characteristics of the nor’ westers occurrin during the hot weather transition periods and the following monsoon, together with a discussion of the probable formation of these interesting minor storms. The paper is intended to be suggestive only since the author has unfortunately collected insufficient data to establish the theory or frame anything more than tentative rules of forecasting. The latter would probably need the experience of some fifteen or twenty years before anything of value could be deduced. istory of monsoon prediction in India has been a chronicle of the continual widening of the area of enquiry and observation. Deductions obtained from the preceding winter’s is a balancing of conclusions drawn from Abyssinia, South America, Australia and the remoter Indian Ocean. A forecast based upon so many, often conflicting, variables cannot hope to be completely satisfactory, though the Meteorological De- partment may congratulate itself upon the near approach to success with which the annual problem is attacked. One of the main difficulties of the situation is the lack of well-marked air disturbances of any great duration during the Six months before the rains. In Bengal the date of the re- versal of the lower air-currents from north to south and the commencement of the hot weather is about the only well- marked phenomenon from which deductions can be drawn. There are no large cyclonic storms and the investigation of the upper air-currents has up to now, for lack of sufficient money and trained observers, been insufficiently extensive to prove of In order to obtain well-marked phenomena metecrologi- cal research has had to travel extensively round the southern hemisphere. There is, however, one series of events in India itself which has been overlooked by investigators in search of ope 306 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. { Aug.-Sept., 1913. observations Seti in his papers on anemographical records published in 1910, seem to represent the entire literature on the subject. An sirtatoatang project to investigate them more thoroughly appears to have been discussed several years ago, but it fell through upon, I believe, the death of the scientist who made the proposal. Sir John Eliot’s papers contain a wealth of statistical detail with respect to accompanying baro- metric and wind changes. But there is practically no discus- certain specified conditions of the barometric gradient, at the intersection of the wind streams down the Ganges and Brahma- putra valleys. And there the matter has been left To the observer, however, who is interested in watching these brief storms, two features ‘will gradually attract attention. The first is that a storm on one night will very often be followed in the two succeeding evenings by similar but much teebler dis- turbances, showing that the large displacements of air and the shifting of temperatures have not altogether obliterated cer- tain fundamental conditions which gave the storm its particular while those of the following year will exhibit a similar family resemblance to one another in the same year but not to those in the preceding year. One year will produce a series of the typically complete nor’ wester with its double line of clouds and the lightning occurring after the heavy rain cloud has arrived, while another year—such as the present—will me heavy lightning for some time before the wind-storm has arriv rom this annual grouping of storm types there peo at once the probability that careful investigation may show a direct relation between the nor’wester type and the character » of the following monsoon. It is obvious that the cloud form in a nor’ wester is due to two main sets of influences—the alterations in pressure gra- dients in surrounding territory and the nature of the upper air-currents into which it penetrates. Its form can be seen: Vol. IX, Nos. 8-9.] Nor’ westers and Monsoon Prediction. 307 [N.S.] smallness of area of the nor’wester is an advantage from this point of view. In larger storms the cloud changes are slower and more widely diffused. Here they are rapid and concen- trated. One observer can therefore do the work that would otherwise require a dozen scattered over a prolonged storm ea. The proving or disproving of the theory tentatively sug- gested here is therefore a matter requiring small expense and little organization. It requires a single interested observer who registers what he sees and is sufficiently aaeniy to extend his observation over an adequate number of yea Sir J. Eviot’s RESEARCHES. As regards the barometric and wind changes, Sir John Eliot in his paper of 1876 shows that the conditions under which nor’ westers occur are an increase in the relative pres- sure oe the middle of the Bay, with its consequent of a dif- fused shallow low pressure over the Delta. This he conceives fo) oisture current of considerable depth from the south-west across the Bay towards the Arracan - his current c the flow of the upper northerly rent across Bengal, and before the moist current can be de- flected into the depression in Bengal a down-rush of cold air t m increase in pressure in the Bay is probably due to the south- west current and not vice versa, this may be accepted provi- sionally. He then goes on to show from meteorological statis- tics that the distinguishing feature of these storms is an actua rise in the barometer as they approach. Then, coincident with the greatest rise of the phenieer the temperature suddenly t nba rapidly and the wind reverses its direction from the south- t to the north-west. Afterwards there follows rain which may be small or large in amount. He ascribes these changes to the sudden displacement vertically downwards of a large body of air due to diminished pressure. In the words of modern aeronauts the tpt is caused by the vertical filling up of a large ‘‘hole’’ in the air. In his later paper on ‘‘ Anemographic observations recorded at Saugor Island from March 1880 to February 1904’’ (published in 1905), Sir John Eliot appears to connect the storms more closely with the normal hot weather depression which stretches from West Bengal through Chota Nagpur to Upper Sind or the North-West Punjab. The three air currents—from the Bay and down the Ganges and pert valleys—create a feeble cyclonic movement, and w the shallow depression ago towards north Bengal the™ Bay winds recurve to pass u 308 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [ Aug.-Sept., 1913. Gangetic plain, and this emphasizing of the cyclonic movement gives rise to ‘‘ thunderstorms’’ over the whole of Bengal. Nor’westers, he records, occasionally pass seawards, but die out not far from land and are therefore only occasionally felt on Saugor Island itself. THe TypicaL Nor’ WESTER. preceding section I have dealt with already recorded facts and theories. It is necessary now to consider more intimately the individual structure of the nor’ wester. Its distinctive features are its rapidity of approach and the rapid transverse motion of the clouds in addition to the forward movement. The storm, in its most typical form, is first seen as a big bank of vapour on the north-western horizon. Its ing briskly towards it from the south and south-east. As the cloud comes nearer it is seen that in addition to the centre core of cloud moving towards the spectator there is a bank of somewhat lower cloud also moving forward but having in ad- dition a very rapid transverse motion from west to east, or the same direction in which the winds revolve in the big cyclonic storm systems. Just before this cloud arrives overhead appears to rise. But this may be only the effect of the dying away of the wind. I have not tested the matter. Under the there is a rotary or churning motion or sometimes even & rapid motion from the south to north towards the second wave. ith the second wave comes a temporary increase of the wind which has been continuing to blow from the north- west. But the main feature of the second wave is the heavy clear up almost completely. As regards the lightning which accompanies the storm, it is associated with all three phases, but is mainly confined to the second wave and the subsequent p : This then is the typical storm. But by no means all nor’- westers follow it exactly. In many cases there is only one transverse-moving wave. In other cases the cloud does not clear up after an hour or more of rain. The rain continues to fall, but less furiously, and a great deal of lightning takes place Vol. IX, Nos. 8-9.j Nor’ westers and Monsoon Prediction. 309 [N.8.] in the cloud canopy, sometimes of an impressive nature. In such cases there is often, but by no means always, a recrudes- cence of the storm late in the same evening or very early next mornin Nor’westers will sometimes come from other even from the south, in 66 case the distinguishing feature being the presence of the wave or waves of cloud moving for- ward rapidly, but with a rapid transverse motion as well. e transverse movement, also is occasionally from east to west, but in such cases the nor’ wester is of very feeble strength. Its FoRMATION. n considering the formation of the storm one must Bese for the wind, temperature and vapour tension noted North. pad Sane % South. nN hint a 4 ia nee ht a A. First storm cloud, moving eno from W.S.W. to E.N.E. and trav mgt towards south south-eas Area of descending catbiale: winds “clear with a few cloud eddies which ss anatase in the cold dr C. Main cloud mass, of which the adeait ancing surface has very definite outline owing to great difference in temperature and humidity of the air-currents. a. Southerly wind from Bay. b. Still air layer between a and c. c. Upper northerly win d, First up-current of lower heated a e. Dust storm at ground level at pone of the two currents. fj. Heavy r g. Upper se wind deflected downwards to pass under main cloud h. Lightning usually occurs most plentifully at this ae in the cloud— seldom cloud to earth, which if it occurs takes at f. = Sir John Eliot, and also for the transverse motion and the urious double layer of nse ara clouds with a stretch of com- paratively clear sky between. My own view is that the storm begins in the first bank "of clouds. In any hot country where the — _ lower layer of - is heated to a high temperature by the sun there must always be a condition of veiled instability desiee the daytime between the light 310 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. { Aug.-Sept., 1913. expanded lower layer, and the cold denser air above. Usually the tendency to large scale vertical currents is checked by a low vertical barometric gradient and by the fact that the air currents of the upper and lower atmosphere are moving fairly rapidly but in opposite directions. Anything, therefore, that would alter the gradient or reduce the speed of the winds beginning to flatten out, with the south wind, suddenly de- ected upwards, produces an aspirating effect which is shown by the dense clouds of dust usually associated with the first cloud. Nor a CyYcLone But Aan OBLIQUE AiR Sir. from the SSE usually. It forces its way up into a northerly air-current. Being a com paratively narrow bank it rapidly acquires the new velocity added to its own and their component is roughly eastward. f this proves ultimately to be the correct explanation of the transverse motion two important corollaries follow e first place it is evident that this motion is not an evidence of any cyclonic motion and the storm we see is not a mild typhoon, rently favourable symptoms. But it is exceedingly seldom that any hail falls. The absence of a large eddy seems sufti- ciently to explain this, and in its turn it supports the above theory of the cloud motion. at at i Peers Mo I dns Ml Vol. IX, Nos. 8-9.] Nor’ westers and Monsoon Prediction. 31% [NV.8.] The second deduction is equally important. This nucleus of the first bank of clouds is carried to the west and with it is carried the upper part of the column of air that feeds it from below. This creates a similar tendency towards an upward movement in the lower air to the west. This is emphasized by the deflection of the cold wind downwards which so increases the pressure on the lower air as to force it upwards. The up- ward and south, but actually creates a similar upthrust on its westerly side. What happens is that the surface—or rather, the layer—of still air separating the lower south wind and the upper north wind is being slit rapidly as the storm travels south-east. Fresh storm material is being formed there during the motion of the storm. It is this which explains the unusually rapid motion of the storm across the sky. Three motions therefore exist. There is first the general is it should easily afford information of its height. The structure of the bank and of the main cloud will afford evidence of the depth of the boundary layer and the conditions prevailing in the upper current. Speaking generally one would expect that if the upper northerly current is, on the average, above its normal strength the advance of the monsoon current will be delayed. But if it is above its usual strength it will probably be colder and 312 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [Aug.-Sept., 1913.] dryer than usual; the difference in constitution and character between the lower and upper currents will be more pronounced ; and the nor’wester will be more definite in cloud outline and more nearly approaching the type described above. On the other hand, if the upper current be weak, thereby indicating little opposition to the approach of the monsoon, then the clouds will be loose in texture and the transverse motion small. That this may possibly prove correct is shown by the fact that the nor’westers of the present year differed strikingly from the described type, the approach of the first cloud bank being anteceded by a smooth very high layer of grey cloud. On the other hand some few years ago when the monsoon was by no means plentiful almost every nor’wester was of the described i. (Investigations for which more than one observer is needed). (2) Length of path of individual storm. (6) Length of storm face. (c) Distribution of simultaneous nor’ westers and the dis- etween them. (d) Velocity of storm travel. (e) Variation of rainfall at different points of its path. (/) Phenomena at commencement of formation of a nor’- wester and during its gradual dispersion. I. (Investigations which can be conducted by isolated observers). (a) Structure of each nor’wester and variation of struc- ture during the year. (6) Variation of structure from year to year. (c) Correlation between the type-structure of the year and the date of arrival and the rainfall of the monsoon. lai at ee 40. Notes on the Pollination of Colocasia Antiquorum. By Mauve L. CLEa@Hory. (With Plate XVII.) grows all the year round, but flowers only in the rainy season from July to September. It is a near relation of the familiar a spadix which is almost completely enclosed in a long narrow yellow spathe. The spadix is much shorter than the spathe and consists of four distinct parts :— (i) An upper smooth pointed portion about an inch or two in length which bears no flowers, called the pores. Each pair of minute openings, with the lobes on either side of it, really represent the top of one of the sessile anthers which make up the synandrium. (iii) A slender middle portion, about an inch long, and corresponding in height to the constricted part of the spathe, composed of a few elongated and irregularly shaped bodies—-rudimentary flowers. (iv) The lowest part of the spadix which is rather thick and about an inch and a half long is enclosed in the green colou flowers. Each pistillate flower consists of three united carpels forming a one-celled ovary and a 314 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [Aug.-Sept.; 1913. sessile slightly three-lobed stigma. Within the numerous orthotropous ovules arranged on three parietal placentas. Neither the staminate nor pistillate flowers have any perianth. In the Kachu plant, as in other Arums, the flowers are protogynous, a condition in which the stigmas ripen first. To adapt this condition to the employment of insect agency for the purposes of cross-pollination the infloresence of the Colocasia passes through three stages. In the first: stage the lower dark lower part of the spathe gradually closes, and by the evening the flies are completely imprisoned in the spathe. The spathe is erect, and the narrow portion is not sufficiently constricted to prevent the flies passing into the upper portion. On the following morning the upper part of the spathe will be found to have partly opened, but the lower part remains tightly closed. This is the second stage; the staminate flowers are mature, and the anthers have commenced to shed their pollen, Journ. As. Soc, Beng. Vol [X. 1953, PLATE XVI, | i Fig 1. First stage. Fig. 2. Second stage. ome — >) ~~ i) u Oo Y ~ ) > } x ) ; p= -OCASIA ANTIQUORUM. Vol, 1X, Nos, 8-9.] The Pollination of Colocasia Antiquorum. 315 [NV.8.] above and passing downwards reach the pistillate flowers, where they are imprisoned until the pollen is ready for disposal. In the Kachu the lower part of the spathe delib- erately opens zai closes to capture the flies, and again opens above to release them. The floral mechanism of the Kachu differs thavetors Hon that of the cuckoo-pint n Arum maculatum the primary attraction is the thick, dasiemiedie end of the spadix which projects out of the spathe ata very early stage, and the subordinate attraction is the decomposing smell of the inflorescence. In the colocasia the primary attraction is the strong and unpleasant odour issuing out of the partially opened spathe in the first stage, and the subordinate attraction, the colour - the appendage and the food for the flies. in the form of po During the rains when the se is very damp the upper part of the spadix while still attached es the plant commences the minute maggots of these flies. It seems, therefore, that the me of a flies, which have been identified in the Indian us ecies of Acalytrate Muscidae, is closely pater with that of the Kachu for the purposes of cross- pollination. BAB PDP 41. The Date of Asoka’s Coronation. By KaAsui-PrasAp JAyaswaL, M.A. (Oxon.). The date of the coronation of Asoka is the mio 2it starting point in the sip of India before the rise of t ptas for the evidence on the point is of the most voliable. kind. The hypothetical dats for the accession of Chandra-Gupta ee ae which is often taken as the starting date is based m surmises, and is far less reliable than the date which we can 5 ie from the data connected with the coronation year of Asoka. As to the date for the latter event there are at present two opinions: according to the one the abhisheka took place in 264? B.c. and according to the other in 269 B.c.,° both assuming 321 B.c. as the year of the accession of Chandra-Gupta Maurya. The difference between the two results partly from a difference Puranas giving twenty-five years, while the Mahavaméa, twenty-eight) and ti! from the tentative calculation under- lying the latter view.* 4 us now see whether it is possible to have a more definite ing. The undated seakoaiet of Asoka, which is numbered xiii by scholars and which is substantively the last among the rock- edicts, gives us the information that when the “edict was Antiochus had come to the throne in 261 3.c.6 The date of the edict must, therefore, fall between these two years. The date of the edict is the date of the publication of the complete series of the rock-edicts, for edict xiii is the conclud- ing? substantive part of the series, and at the same time it is 321 B.c. according to V. Smith (Early pag of Tedée; 2nd Ed., Pp. 39); between. 320 and 315 8.0. according to Kern (Manual of In d. Es p. l hys Davids, Encyclopaedia Britannica (llth ed.), II, 764; Fleet, ibid , XIV, 623; Geiger, Mahavaméa (1912), xxxiii. ’ V. Smith, ‘boobs (1910), p 4 Cf. «*The thirteenth Rook Edict ag mig the synchronism Asoka with five Hellenistic kings... date at which ail i ere alive together . The ro icts belong to the thirteenth and nt coe years of the reign of rec oned fr rites othe ene 960-40 is probably nearly correct.’? V. Sm ith, Asoka, ise Bevan, House o/ Seleucus, i uate 178. 6 Rawlinson, Parthia, p. 45. Bevan , Enc. Bri., h ed., xxiv, 604. 1 The portion numbered ‘ XIV’ by scholars is aaa a colophon to the series ; the series really ends with edict ‘ XIII.” 318 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. {Aug.-Sept., 1913. not an earlier edict reproduced but is a new one written for the occasion. The date of the publication of the series, and there- fore also of edict xiii, cannot be earlier than the fourteenth year of the coronation of Asoka, as a preceding edict (No. v) mentions that year. 258 B.c. would be the latest possible date of rock-edict xiii. The inscription would not have contained the name of Magas among the living, had it been published after 258 B.c., the date of his death. Now the edict itself is at least fourteen years later than the Abhisheka. Therefore (258+14=) 272 B.o. is almost the lowest possible year for the coronation of Agoka. I of the publication of the rock-edicts. It is thus possible that it was 257 B.c. when the edicts were published in the fourteenth on his friendship with these individual rulers, it was a matter of vital importance to those charitable institutions established in Hellenistic kingdoms and to the propaganda generally to send news of a change amongst the personnel of those rulers. ven assuming that the missionaries of ASoka remained silent, emperor’s friends, the news would have none the less travelled into India in a short time. The arch-rebel Magas, who had from the political stage would have with all rapidity reached, and become widely known in, Bactria which was already brewing with the ferment of political ambition similar to that of Magas. And if the intelligence department under the orses (amongst other things), would not have failed to bring the information into this country. If the diplomatic man 1 I, 14, pp. 24-26: I, 16 , 3 I, 16, p. 32. 2 See Artha-Sastra, II, 11, pp. 79, 81; II, 30, p. 133 of Yo > . ; A Bisi mi ht all asad Visas, the neighbours Yonas (ie Bactstana| of phe IE. ot meee ected with some Chi ace a form of Biainas inas or Van. I Hannah of the Calcutta Bar for the latter suggestion, Vol. IX, Nos. 8-9.] The Date of Aéoka’s Coronation. 319 (N.S. failed to do his duty there is no reason why the economic man should have also slackened his activity at the same oment there were resident envoys at the Courts of Asoka friends,' at any rate at that of Antiochus, as there had been Seleucid ambassadors at Pataliputra, and they would have sent all important political news to Pataliputra by messengers and couriers. The news of his death must have reached the court the Abhisheka.* Again, the fourteenth year of ASoka’s Abhisheka could not be dated earlier than 261 B.c., that is, the accession of Antiochus. The first year of the Abhisheka, therefore, could not be earlier than (261 +14) 275 8.c. This would be the highest possible limit of the Abhisheka according to our data. The exact date would thus be somewhere between 275 B.c. and 271 B.c., both years inclusive. Let us test the highest limit and see if we could not reduce was reigning over the Prachis on the Ganges We learn from the Pali authorities that Asoka was conse- years, but its details, which seem to be perfect and borne out in the main by other documents, appropriate only 133 years to the rulers individually. The difference of four years might rep- resent the alleged four pre-sacramental years of ASoka’s reign,* which would have been regarded by orthodox Hindu chroniclers 1 It is implied in the edict (XIII) that Agoka’s envoy did go to Magas: ‘‘ Even those to whom the ditas of the Devanampriya do not go,’’ etc. 2 The unknown passage from the Indus to Susa of Nearchus had taken, with its halts, about six months. A journey overland, at the rate i have been casily accomplished in eight months, even if we exclude the pace of royal couriers who exis India in those days (sighra-vahanas, Arth» Sastra, iI, 34. p. 141). The campaign of Alexander from E a taken, with all the diffi- aulties and delays of war, only six months. 8 For the confirmation of this from Indian data see below, p. 322. 4 Cf. V. Smith, E.H.1., p. 185, n. 320 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [Aug.-Sept., 1913. as a period of interregnum from the point of view of the sacred Hindu Law. In any case there is no reason why we oe dis- believe the datum of the Pali chronicles on the point Taking our highest limit, 275 B.c., we obtain the highest possible date of ASoka’s accession as (275 + 4)279B.c. Ifwea add to this (24 + 25)! forty-nine years, the period covered by the two preceding reigns, we get 328 B.c. according to the calculation as a possible date for Chandra-Gupta’s accession. But this as we have seen above could not have occurred before 325 B.c. ; thatis, at least three years must be deducted from the possible highest limit. Hence the accession of Aéoka could not have taken place earlier than 276 B.c. (279—3=276), and his Abhisheka earlier than (276 —4) 272 8.c. The higher limit, thus, narrowed down, near setae with the lowest as obtained above. w of this result the tentative dates 264 and 269 B.c., it seems, mould now be abandoned. The improbability of the 264 B.c. date is apparent. According to this Magas would be named amongst living kings eight years (264—14= 250 B.C.) ht T ; : 250 B.c., the absence of the name of Diodotus of Bactria, who had been Agoka’s next-door neighbour for about five years” by that date, would be surprising. The proposed calcula- tion giving 264 B.o. would not be gs oe even if we corrected the reign of Bindusara from 28 to 25 years, as even then the difference between the death of Magas and the edict would be too long, viz. of five years.? As to the figure 269 B.c., a similar objection suggests itself. Taking this as the abhisheka year, we get the result that (269-14) three years after his death Magas was described in the edict as a living sovereign. which is Bak ee corollary to our above calculation we have also to revise ths accepted date of Chandra-Gupta’s accession to the throne of Magadha. and there is no reason to reject, the datum of the Pali siehdntaheis. that Asoka reigned for four years before he was legally crowned, the date of his _tontgeot ed Ss accession to the throne would be dated in the year (272 or 271+4+ we 325 or 324 B.c. Thus the date divetally accepted up to s fe When the Pali chronicle assigns twenty-sight aie to Bindusara, it f ASoka’'s rei Taran atha’s Sonia 38 | (Schiefner p. 88) thou h gn the Puranas w 2 regard Warsi 8 incorrect in its seinbh digit confirms win, ves the d Bi ae Per epg sae Pa ate or the a ape of the kingdom of > Thi ay, aly the ees of the proposed date ath and the Pali figure 218 for the years aaied ts in my paper on the § igunaga et reign and the accession of Chaniex: Girt: ee ee Bourse Vol. IX, Nos. 8-9.] The Date of Asoka’ s Coronation. 321 [N.8.] this time of Chandra-Gupta’s succession sot B. oe, has to be shifted back four (or, perhaps, three) years ea The above result would yield the natier-poeres that even while ick cake was struggling through the deserts of Sindh and Baluchistan, Chandra- Gupte was “busy f ounding his own power. The revolt of the ‘‘ mercenary (=Hindu) army put to death the Macedonian general Philippos in command over e Punjab, in 324 , was probably connected with the early ais of Chandra iota! The period 325-324 B.c. appears to have been very momentous to him. He must have been The final crushing of the remnant of the Macedonian power must have followed his capital cil in Magadha and would have to be dated in 324-323 B The entire theory of the hypothetical date of Chandra- Gupta’s accession has been, up to this time, based on the as- sumption that he could not have undertake en his operations beiore the news of the death of Alexander reached India.? But, in the light of the now ascertained date of Asoka’s corona- tion, he does not seem to have waited for an opportunity such as that to be afforded by the death of Alexander. In fact*there was no such necessity, for to all purposes Alexawgier’ s retreat was the demise of his prestige in India. Alexander could anticipate this, hence his herculean efforts to coax the army to march on towards the Nandan forces. His retreat, despite his manu- facturing and leaving gigantic camping relics to impress ‘ future generations’ or more probably the Prasii who might decide fession of weakness. The greatest opportunity was offered by the retreat itself; one had not to wait till his death. The ‘¢ mercenaries’’ removed the symbol of Macedonian power, the representative of Alexander, while Alexander was still alive. Thus the basis of assigning a later date to Chandra- Gupta’s rise, the necessity for waiting till his death, not being maintainable, the earlier date (325-324 B.c.), given to us by historical data of the first eminence, >, ought to be mocepred. 1 The story in the Mudra-Rakehasa of of the murder of the ‘mlechehha Parvata through Chandragupta’s stratagem of vishakanyd is pr robably based a tradition ot the death of Philippos. Philippos in Prakriita would have been changed into Pirabo or Pirabao, which when restored into Recpesritts would yield Parvata or Parvataka. ‘* We may feel assu ed that as soon as the news of the conqueror’s except the small remnant to which Eudamos yore to cling.’’ V. Smith, Barly History of india, pp. 114-5 [Second Editi 322 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [Aug.-Sept., 1913. Indian data: The above conclusion regarding the abhisheka year of Asoka is confirmed from an independent datum which is forded by rock-edict xiii and the date of Alexander’s invasion, we would have been brought to the same conclusion by the Indian datum we are going to consider. The date of the death of Ma aaa the birth of Vikrama or 487 years before the Vikrama i.e., (487 + 58) 545 B.c.! Now Sthilabhadra, son of Nanda’s udu Sakatala, died 219 years after Mahavira, the year Chandra-Gupta obtained sovereignty (1A, 1882, aN The year of oe sae s accession thus would be 220 a.mM., or cir. 325 , and consequently that of Asoka’s wbhishelea (325- 53) 372 B.C. Thus we obtain cir. 272 B.c., both from Indian and foreign sources, as the first year of Asoka’s abhisheka and c. 276 B.c. for his coming to the throne. . Senart’s calculation: Since writing the above note m attention aa been drawn to M. Senart’s calculation in the Indian Antiquary, XX, 242. The Soe is the same as adopted by Mr. V. Sm ith. It runs as follow **As the second edict belongs to ne Madentith year, we are inevitably led to conclude that his twelfth year i to one of the year 260-258 B.c., say, to take ‘am to the year 259. This calculation would fix his “$ wise: at about 269.’’ ee The points of difference between this and the calculation advanced here are these: the basis of my calculation is-edict xiii which contains the names of the five ‘Greek’ kings, while edict ii has only Antiochus and “ his neighbours?’’; and EA. weak, 7, § 13; ef. Dr. Hoernle, On et hppa of the ancient cathe * 13) the Ni irvana of M sieke falls in Oct.). ut mere oo to the Jaina interpretation (ibid.), it would Mea a Spal earlier ( n the latter case Chandra-Gupta’s Lea deeb would be dated in 326 Ger. 85 (Oct.) B.c cannot devep e erroneous and medizeval reckoning of Hemachandra. was the son a ecesso: erse as we find it is not mutilated. The mistake can be easily detected in the light of various other chrono- ion, eg that gee. Subhadra, lier reckoning w diséa 8s hes a ology]. Vol. IX, Nos. 8-9.] The Date of Asoka’ s Coronation. 323 [NV 8.] the date of the former would be the fourteenth as against the thirteenth year assigned to the latter. The difference by M. Senart’s taking the 12th year to fall between 260 and 258 B.C., bese on his own hypothesis the thirteenth falls between 260-258 ‘* of) the Cholas, - the Greek- — Amtiyoka and also those * ki ings + who are neighbours of that Amtiyoka—every dah Devanam - Sea od rat ehiheegre has fo Sc two (ind) of hospita ths ve in Edi he FB And that eonguest (of * Dies wa) “hing beh Poe ed by ‘the Recon dhe both o ‘amongst all his neighbo urs, up t hundred yojxnas ra gh + an ek- eatin called ' mtiyoka (is) aud berend this seu’ ¢ “er adeed: te ed ‘ fo ur . kings jbl rd name of Turama name haere BT as they follow tie ea - eh ee kid nampriya. oS is = be noticed that = the latter edict the named kings are co. e Dha & of unna sie peste ours of Aethiokia nd, 4 e establishment of hospitals (or remedial n-titutions) in their kingdom. " The two references are > distinet and sepurate. RENNIN NN NAN EO 42. The Rev. L. Bernard among the Abors, and the Cross as a Tattoo Mark (1855). A Note by the Rev. H. Hosten, §8.J. To complete Fr. Krick’s remarks on the tattoo- ere of the Abors (Cf. J.A.S.B., 1913, pp. 107-122), I add me was l’Abbé A. Launay, the historian of the Society for Foreign Missions Meteo! though he had at his disposal other materials on Fr. Bernard’s visit to the Abors. Cf. La Mission du Thibet, I. aa 766. We learn from them that, after the massacre of his two companions, Messrs. Krick and Boury, in the country of the Mishmis, Fr. Bernard, now left alone, boldly tried to force his way to Tibet through the land of the Abors. He reached the village nielaah Fr. Krick had been in 1853, but was obliged to return, the savages apprehending danger to themselves, should any aanident befall him. Speaking of the Abor tattoo-marks in the form of crosses, which his colleague, Fr. Krick, may more than once have commented’ on in his presence, Fr. ernard refuses to see in them any Christian origin or signification. Nay, he appears to have had Fr. Krick in view, when he states that only a pious traveller’s imagina- tion could have interpreted them in the sense of Christian signs. These remarks, not mentioned by Lau obs ap greatly the importance attached by Fr. Gaillard (Cf. 115, n. 4) to Fr. Krick’s observalsons t in a eon The extracts are . ollows aikwah, Upper Assam, Deo. 2ist, 1854 (Letter to Arch- ees Dr. P. J. Carew of Calcutta ta): ‘*....lintend starting in a few days on a new attempt to penetrate to our dear Mission. me, and engaged me to trust myself to his father. He said, ‘The Padre [Fr. Krick] promised he would come to us, and, instead of doing so, he went to the wicked Mishmees who killed him. Come to us; we shall accompany you on your journey.’ And showing me a cross he bears on his forehead he said, ‘1 do not know the meaning of this: I am but a child, but our ancients say it is a sign of religion, and that you are our 326 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [Aug.-Sept., 1913. Padres.’! The youth seems to be a single-minded man. Onl I do not know if the acting Deputy Commissioner of Debroo will let me go. I did not say a word about it to him; but, he told me the other day that a chief of some village in daily intercourse with the Aburs told him that be had heard these Aburs saying, ‘ if we can get the Padres a little into the interior, we shall take advantage of it to put them in some trouble.’ I will do what I think the best for the glory of God..... se Shaikwah, Jan. 8th, 1555 (Letter to the same): ‘*....1 am still at Shaikwah. I expect to start in a few days to Thibet, through the Abors, if allowed: but if not, through Feizpore.. 2>8 make a new attempt to enter our dear Mission of Thibet through some of the wild tribes inhabiting the hills north-east of Assam. In the beginning of January, I tried to make my way through the Abars, a very rude and apparently by no means a bloodthirsty tribe. I wished to see, whether it could be possible to penetrate into Thibet through that part of the country, or if, in case of difficulties which could be overcome by time only, they would allow me to remain and establish a Mission amongst themselves. These poor unfortunate savages, after objecting first to my entering their villages, because they had been told that I came to sow some poison’ around their houses to kill them, at length consented to admit me, saying: ‘Well, after all, you may come. you go away, we shall kill a dog, and it will keep the evil spirit away from the village.’ I was exceedingly well received by everybody; but when I informed them of the object of my mission, they told me it was utterly impossible for me to go to Thibet through their country, on account of the snowy hills, and the difficulties I should meet at the hands of the other tribes I should have to go through. As to my remaining amongst them, they had many difficulties which I solved very easily: viz., that they could not give me a nice house, good meat, plenty of wine, etc. But, there was a last one not so easy of solution & Spy sent by the British Government. aca ot et Te Gera Tse on ee mene neoprene ee __} The man had probably learned this from Fr. Krick’s intercourse with the tribe. 2 Bengal Catholic Herald, 1855, vol. iii 8 Ibid. p. | vol, xxviil, p. 18. Vol. IX, Nos. 8-9.] The Rev. L. Bernard among the Abors. 327 [N.8.] village, I was obliged to come down to receive the directions I expected from my superiors at Paris. I promised the Abars that I would come back, if my directors approved of my pars: a mission amongst them, because I think they dress rather indecently. I believe they are simple in their manners; the persons of the other sex are decently dressed, and there, like everywhere, they evince, much more than the men, signs of great kindness. They have no religious preju- dices at all. they only believe in oa existence of some evil spirits residing in the far-off hills. J heard some of them saying that they had been formerly Christians : that they had the cross on their forehead : all this is the mere product of the pious traveller’s imagination. The sign they have on their forehead we can hardly f : not know the meaning of it. They have that sign as the Hindoos have sows other. ‘At present, the route through the Abars is the only one e would certainly obey, but with the certitude of being murdered. Unless I receive other directions from my superiors, I am going to make an attempt through Darjeelling. Some cers in Assam told me they believed I could there find what I want, viz., a village under the protection of the British flag, where I could find plenty of Thibetan or Boutan people to enable me to learn their language. . I do not at all want to go at once to the centre of Thibet. If only, without exposing myself to certain death, I can establish myself amongst some native population, I will be satisfied. When I shall be in possession of the language, I shall be able to do my work slowly. ‘It is in contemplation of these raed attempts that I came down three days ago to Dacca.. I have examined Carl Ritter’ s sabatbacte of Wilcox’s jour- neys of exploration in Assam (1826-27). There is nothing, mission in the south of Tibet among a tribe called Shokhap- (Cf. J.A.S. B., 1913, p. 116 and n. 1.) 1 Jbid., 2 CE. Be. ae me Theil, II Buch, Band III, Berlin, 1834, pp. 357-399. I hav» also ex ned Ritter’s references to Asiatic Journal n Register, xxii oes 7, 434, 439; Febr. i ‘On ly vol, xx iv. 54, 431, alludes to the . 624, Catholic Missions in Tibet between 1624 and 173 cw 43. Notes on the Biological Work of the R.I.M.S.S. ‘* Investigator ’’ during Survey Seasons, IQlO-II and IQII-I2. By Carr. R. B. Sstymour Sewet, B.A., I.MS., Surgeon- Naturalist to the Marine Survey of India, Hon. Assistant Superintendent, Zoological Section, Indian Museum, Cal- culta. (With one chart, X XV.) Up to the present time it has been the custom for succeeding Surgeon-Naturalists to furnish an annual report to the autho- rities of the Royal Indian Marine dealing with the work carried them during each successive survey season. These that all biological work by the R.[M.S.S. ‘“‘ Investigator has ceased, and the post of Surgeon-Naturalist been abolished. The Director of the Royal Indian Marine a proached on the matter, and he has kindly given his consent to the publication in future of these reports in a more suitable periodical. In view of the above-mentioned misconception, I have thought it advisable to make the following ‘‘ Notes ”’ as full as possible, and in consideration of the fact that the creation of the appointment was due largely, if not entirely, to the exertions of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, I have decided to submit the paper to that Society for publicationin their Journa The post of Surgeon-Naturalist was first created in the year 1875, at a time when the “‘ Challenger’’ was still engaged on her voyage of discovery. ‘The first officer to hold the post was Surgeon J. Armstrong: at that time, however. there was no survey ship capable of carrying out deep-sea soundings or biological investigations, and, in consequence, that officer had to confine his energies to shore collecting and dredging or trawl- ing i w water. The R.I.M.SS. ‘Investigator ’’ was Naturalist G. M. J. Giles, 1M.S., and since then an I.M.S. officer been continuously attached to the Marine Survey to carry on the biological observations. 330 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [Aug.-Sept., 1913. A list of these officers and the dates during which they have held the post is given below :— J. Armstrong... -. 1875—79. GM. J. Giles -. 1884—88. James Wood Mason (offg.) .. 1888. A. Alcock a .. 1888—92. A. R.S Anderson -. 1892--19090. J. Wemyss Grant (offg.) .. 1896—97, A. F. McArdle .. .- 1900—02. A. C. MacGilchrist .. 1993—05. R. E. Lloyd BS, -. 1905—07. F. H. Stewart .. -. 1907—10. R. B. Seymour Sewell -- 1910—12 T. L. Bomford (offg.) -. 1912—13 __ The present R.I.M.S.S. ‘Investigator’? was built by Vickers Maxim & Co., in the year 1907, to replace the old survey and biological work. She is a single screw steamer, fitted with a triple expansion direct inverted engine, developing an indicated horse power of 1500. She has a length, over all, of 232 feet 6 in. and a beam of 33 feet, her gross tonnage is of six surveyi Naturalist and a crew of 110 constructed that it would be impossible to us? a beam-trawl, and the present liboratory is merely a small cabin on the starboard side lighted only by the usual two portholes, nor are here any conveniences such a$ a swinging table or a constant » Such as surface tow-nets, which were : c S carpenter. Investigations regard- ing the salinity and temperature of the Sea-water have hitherto ny degree of accuracy, for the onl ents were an ordinary ection cule m ra plier egistering to the nearest degree Fahrenheit and a set of four hydrometer bulbs reading to the nearest degree: nor is the Vol. IX, Nos. 8-9.] Biological Work of the ‘‘ Investigator.’’ 331 [NV 8.] annual grant sufficient to enable the Surgeon-Naturalist to do more than purchase the necessary stains, microscopic reagents, preserving materials, etc. , hecessary for a seven-moniths’ cruise. Marine Survey of India. Although of a simple type and not fitted with any self-closing apparatus, it worked very fairly well and the results obtained amply pete - introduction. It is hoped that in the near future the R.I.M.SS. ‘‘ Investi- *’ will be fully equipped with nets and other apparatus for hydrographical research along the lines laid down ‘by the ‘* Conseil permanent sripiem panes pourl’exploration le la mer’ and thus be in a position to carry out full investigations, as regards both the see atthe ani biological features, of the various regions of the Indian Ocean and its offshoots. n an ordinary year, the R.I.M.S.S. “‘ Investigator ’’ leaves Bombay about the middle of October and proceeds to the survey ground, arriving there about the end of the month. She continues to survey the coast till aboutthe middle of April, and then returns to Bombay, which she reaches early in May. During the time she is engaged in actual survey work there has hitherto been little or no opportunity for making collections of the bottom dwellers, and the work of the Surgeon-Naturalist is “cae confined to investigating the pian routs wee littoral deep-water fauna in the Arabian Sea or Bay of Bengal, as well as to carry out a series of deep sea soundings. At the close of the survey season in May, the Surgeon-Naturalist repairs to the Indian Museum, Calcutta, and spends the recess there working out the collections made, or such portions of them as deal with the particular group or groups of animals of which he is making a specia stu Prior to the year 1911, it had been the custom to give a ‘* Station Number’’ only to those localities, in whic — water observations had been made, but during the r of that year, it was decided, in ; ieaaibbatios with the ahatties of the Indian Museum, that this system of limiting the station numbers to the deep-water trawls was not rp OA satis- factory, and that in future, as is done elsewhere, a sta‘ion num- ber should be given to every locality where electing of any kind was carried out. In see cha - e numbered stations for the last season shows a great ompared with those of any previous year. Unfortunately meter the —— season 1911-12 I was only able to rema he M.S.S. ‘‘ Investigator ’’ till the wa of Novetiber: being re poner to Calcutta to take over temporarily the duties of Professor of Biology in the Medical College. 332 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [Aug.-Sept., 1913. During the remainder of the season, however, the series of observations on the plankton were continued by my assistant Mr. J. Howard, 1.8.M.D., and several mid-water and bottom trawls were made during the run back to Bombay in April, and the results were preserved and forwarded by him to Calcutta. During both seasons 1910-11 and 1911-12 the R.I.M.S.S. ‘* Investigator ’’ was occupied in surveying the Tenasserim coast. Roughly speaking the area in which biological investi- gations were carried out extends from Hinzé Basin to Tavo Point in 1910-11, and from Tavoy Point to the north end of Thamila or Iron Island in 1911-12. _ These two areas present very considerable differences in the general topography of the coast line: in the northern area, the coast consists almost entirely of a series of rocky cliffs and promontories, interspersed with long stretches of clean sand that two areas is to be found in the Tavoy River; this brings down 1912, p. $50.) One of the chief characteristics of the coast is the complete a of any beds of ‘‘ weed’’ or algae. Petersen (1911, According to Petersen, much of the organic food supply in the sea is produced by the breaking down of the tissues of these Vol. go aS 8-9.] Biological Work of the ‘‘ Investigator.’’ 333 [V.8.] plants to form a ‘‘ dust-fine detritus ’’ some of which is deposited the sea-bottom and which appears to form the chief food supply of many of the Uctluaoy. Polychaeta, and Echino- Port Owen, Tavoy Island, produced apparently by the ais tion and decomposition of land ve getation and brought dow to the sea by the streams and rivers at these points. SHORE COLLECTING. ring the course of the two seasons I have been able to f tions on the mainland from those on the various islands scattered along the coast. MarInuaND SraTIons. Hinzé Basin.—The entrance to the Basin consists of a wide channel about two miles in length and gradually narrow- ing from one and a half miles across at the entrance to about three quarters of a mile at its inlet into the Basin proper. Th shores of the entrance partake of the nature of the neighbour- ing coast-line and consist of a series of small sandy bays, separated by reefs of rock and boulders. The Basin itself is as y the union of three large creeks on the north and ast, aid one smaller une on the west; the creek on the south- peers "eventually runs into the sea about fourteen miles further down the coast. The shores of the Basin, as far as they have been sabbapha cane consist almost entirely of Mangrove-swamps and mud-flats I remained in camp here from December Ist to 13th, 1910, and during the whole of that period the water at the entrance to the Basin was frequented by a species of Sirenian. These were all, apparently, examples of Halicore dugong, Illiger, and on one occasion as many as eight were seen together. : Close to the camp was a small freshwater stream that flowed into the sea just insidethe entrance. This was frequented y numbers of larze tadpoles, each marked with a row of three or four eraeaaean 54 ocelli on the tail: it is interest- ing to note that these appear to belong to the same species as certain specimens obtaiied by cock from the Pamirs, at a height of 8,500feet. They have been identified by Dr. Annandale as the tadpole of Rana alticoia, Bingr. (Annandale, 1912, p. 22, pl. iv, fig, 1). 334 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [Aug.-Sept., 1913. PISCES. The receding tide left numerous small pools among the rocks; the e contained many small fish, among which the following were identified. Mugil cocruleo-maculatus, Lacépede. Mugil jerdoni, Day. Mugil waigiensis, Quoy and Gaim. Muraena meleagris, Shaw. Periophthalmus koelreuteri (Pall). Salarias dussumieri, Cuv. and Val. Salarias lineatus Cuv. and Val. Sciena miles, Cuv. and Val. Tetraodon fluviatilis, Ham. Buch. Therapon jerbua (Forsk.). With the exception of the two species of Salarias, all were quite young immature specimens. All the freshwater streams flowing into the Basin were swarming with examples of Haplochilus panchax (Ham. Buch.), and a few exanples of Haplochilus melastigma (McClell.) were also obtiined from the same sources. To one of the larger Specimens of the former a parasitic Copepod, belonging to the Lernaeopodidae, was attached just beneath the left ventral fin. INsEcTA. @ sample by the Chemical Examiner, Rangoon, gave the following results :— Total solids = 6035'12 grains per allon. Chlorides =3024-00 ge i : 9? _The water was thus nearly three times as concentrated as ordinary sea-water and yet these animals were able to live and breed in it freely. Crustace:.—The following species are all fairly common on the beach or in the adjacent Mangrove swamps. Grapsus strigosus, Herbst. Ocypoda ceratophthalma Pallas), Ortm. Ocypoda cordimana, Desm. Sesarma quadratum, Fabr. Sesarma taeniolatum, White. _ The Ocypoda ceratophthalma were exceedingly common ; - is well known these crabs burrow in the sand and make holes or themselves, in which they live. The larger specimens Vol. rr Pha 8-9,] Biological Work of the ‘‘ Investigator.’’ 335 merely dig out the sand and leave it lying in a small mound around the entrance to their burrow, but the smaller examples ith a Ordinarily the ‘‘ pattern ’’ is very simple, the sand balls being irregularly arranged round the entrance with two or three well marked paths running radially oucwards (Fig. 1), but in certain other cases, and frequently in some particular portion Fie. 2. of the sandy beach, these crabs arrange the sand-pellets in a sortie Laeger sometimes forming as many as six concentric es (Fig.2). These seins are not made one after the srining & pipes ing Se when the first had been completed, but all six would be menced siniultaneously and peetcolly continued round -_ fers until the pattern was complete For a long time I was unable to ascertain how the crab nidneeaenioes ehees > little pellets of sand. That they were not 336 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [| Aug.-Sept., 1913. in origin was shown by the fact that they were far too ra ea cases being A Se half the size of the crab itself, and further, the intestinal contents are, on examination found to be quite soft and free from gritty matter. Apparently what happens is this ; the crab with its chelae shovels sand into its mouth and here a sorting process is carried out, anything those specimens, whose burrows were situated in the damp sand between high and low tide marks, were darker in appearance than those who inhabit the dry sand in the upper part of the beach ach. Along the edge of the scrub at the upper part of the beach in The two species of Sesarma were bot of a dark colour, but still showed a distinctly ‘‘ protective’ colouration. The examples of quadratum which were found frequenting crevices in the rocks and Stones, were of a dark-brown colour dotted over with grey and Charybdis (Goniosoma) affinis, Dana. Charybdis (Goniosoma) crucifera (Fabr.), A. M. Edw. Charybdis (Goniosoma) rostrata, A. M. Edw. b Matuta victor, Fabr., Hilgendorf. Varuna litterata (Fabr.), A. M. Edw. were obtained from the waters at the entrance, and the rock- pools were found to be Swarming with examples of a species of eander, many of which were ovigerous females. Vol. IX, Nos. 8-9.] Biological Work of the ‘‘ Investigator.’’ 337 [V.S.] Several examples of Palaemon sp. were obtained from the small freshwater stream, that flowed into the sea near the entrance (vide supra, p. 333). XipHosuRA.—Although no specimens of Limulus were ob- tained, their cast shells were exceedingly common the long stretch of sand, that lies to the south of the entrance (also vide Rec..Ind. Mus., Vol. VII, p. 87, Calcutta 1912). | Motuusca.—A large collection of shells was made in this locality, as in others visited later: unfortunately in the present condition of the collection in the Indian Museum, it is impos- sible to work them out fully and consequently no detailed reference to this group willbe made in this report. A list of the species, which have been provisionally identified by comparison with named specimens in the Museum collection, and their distribution, is given below (Table 1). In all cases the same nomenclature as that in use in the Indian Museum has been retained. Hirvupinga.—Several examples of a leech, probably Lim- natis granulosa (Sav.), were obtained from the same stream mentioned above. These, along with the rest of the collection in the Indian Museum, have been referred to Mr. W. A. Harding of Cambridge, England. CoELENTERATA.—Small dark-red sea anemonies were fairly common on the rocks to the south of the entrance (Kantaung Promontory), and several examples of a stalked species were obtained from a small patch of sandy mud at the mouth of the entrance: these latter were shaped exactly like a wine-glass, ~ having a narrow stalk that suddenly widened out below into a yikhwaaw Bay.—This bay is situated at the extreme end with animal life, among the most conspicuous objects being groups of Serpulid worms and _ brilliantly coloured sea-ane- Pisces.—Numerous species of fish were obtained from the rock pools and from the waters of the bay, and among them the following were identified :— 338 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [Aug.-Sept., 1913. Atherina pinguis, Lacépede Aner fasciatus (White).* be A. novemjasciatus, Cuv. and the nx affinis, Riipp. Capac hippos (Linn Chilodipterus lineatus (Forsk.). Clupea longiceps (Cuv. and Val.). Eleotris muralis (Quoy and Gaim) Cuyv. and Val. quula fasciata, Lacépede. y- Glyphidodon septemfasciatus, Cuv. and Val. [= Abudefduf septemfasciatus (C. V.)] Mugil waigiensis, Quoy and Gai Muraena nebulosa, Ahl. [= Rehidna nebulosa (Ahl ‘a tessdlata, Richardson, (= Sonthone. favagi- chn. Periopihaimus koelreuteri (Pall.). ' ¢Platycephalus insidiator (Forsk.). [= P. indicus (Forsk.)] Platyglossus leparensis pages ns Plotosus arab (Forsk.). tes rs paraded Lacépede.) d Pristipoma furcatum (Bl. Schn.). Salarias dussumieri, Cuv. and Val. Salarias lineatus, Cuv. and Val. Salarias quadricornis, Cuy. and Val. (=S. rivulatus, Riipp.) ena armata , Sau Sebastichthys strongia, a and Val. (=Sebastes strongia a Serranus boenack (Bloch.). Serranus Piece Ree ares Sillago sithama (F. (Fo Stromateoides ae _(Baphr) Therapon jarbua (Forsk Day, but on my second visit I found that they had considerably as regards their colouration; this difference I aie ee : the above list was compiled, Dr. Max Weber has published his account of the fish obtained by the « Siboga ’ >> (Siboga-Expeditio, Monograph LVII. ‘Die Fische ae. Siboga-E iden ayes}. d the moieties. T have given ses where any change has been Vol. IX, Nos. 8-9.] Biological Work of the ‘‘ Investigator.’’ 339 [NV .S.] attribute to the assumption of a special breeding colouration (Southwell and Sewell, 1913, p. 10). Tunicata.—On several occasions groups of Ascidians were washed ashore by the tide; each group consisted of six to eight individuals arranged side by side. The mouth and anal apertures 12” in length and was covered by a separate test, which was impregnated with particles of sand and was of a delicate purple-blue colour. CrustacEa.—As usual thesandy beach was swarming with cordimana Desm, and, as in Hinzé Basin, these species showed the same peculiarities in both colouration and burrowing. The rock reefs were frequented by numerous Grapsoid crabs Grapsus strigosus Herbst and Meiapograpsus messor (Forskal) A. M. Edw. Other species of crabs obtained in this locality are as follows :— Dotilla myctiroides, Edw. Epixanthus frontalis (Edw.) Heller. Gelasimus annulipes, Latr.; Edw. Thalamita crenata (Fabr.) Edw. Thalamita danaé Stimpson. Thalamita prymna (Herbst.) Two of the above species had apparently made their appearance in this locality during the interval between my two visits. The first example was the Gelasimus annulipes: no Edw. Sromatoropa.—Several specimens of Gonodactylus chiragra, 340 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [Aug.-Sept., 1913. Fabr. were obtained among the rocks and boulders of the reef to the west of the bay. EcuInopERMATA.—Several specimens of Astropecten, sp., and one example of Pentaceros, sp., were obtained on the sandy n promontory to the west of the bay numerous examples of a spiny sea-urchin, black in colour, were found. Large Holothurians, Holothuria atra, Jiger, were common on the rock reefs, and two examples of a Crinoid were also alit plete list of the mollusc fauna of the various localities is given in Table I (Appendix). Ihave throughout followed the nomen- jrina margaritifera were found. cording to Brown and Simpson, (1907, p. 10), the channel between Cap Island and the Mainland forms a large Pearl-oyster bed am, however, One or two small specimens of a Polypus were found in the rock-pools and on one occasion a mass of eggs of some fairly large Cephalopod was found attached to a rock near low ide mark. CoeLENTERATA.—Two different species of coral were found growing in the rock-pools, one of these was a species of Porites. ae i siliceous spicules : it belongs to the group Ceratina. 1s Jatter form was interesting as it provided several examples Vol. IX, Nos. 8-9.] Biological Work of the ‘‘ Investigator.’ 341 [V.8.] of commensalism : it formed a habitat for numerous Polychaet worms and small Ophiuroids, which were living in tubes and several specimens of a species of Balanus: these belong to the genus Acasia, and probably represent a new species. A single small Gebia, sp. was also found inhabiting a — cavity in the middle of the sponge; this cavity was about 14” long and had three openings on the surface, while at the extreme blind end was living a small colony of Ophiuroids. On the east side of Tavoy Point, at the entrance to Tavoy sand we get ere the editbas —fialesilions abounds and a single immature, and a single large example of Neptunus pelagi- cus. During my second visit to Byikhwaaw Bay, an expedition was made to Reef Island, which lies close to the right bank of the river near the mouth, for the purpose of obtaining speci- mens of the whip-scorpion Hypoctonus binghami, Oates, which is known to frequent this island. Unfortunately no examples genes embedded in mud: specimens of Periophthalmus koel- euteri and a single example of a crab were found, but with these sebephinin, the shores appeared to be uninhabi ted. SLAND Stations.—A chain of islands extends down the whole length of the coast in this region ; to the north, off the coast between Hinzé Basin and Tavoy Point, are the North, Middle, and South groups of the Moscos Islands, while to the south of Tavoy River lie Tavoy Island and Tron varitg as well as numerous others too small to merit a specific n everal occasions I was able to land on the ‘ialanuds three pal so I will therefore ape Baga together. In every case the shore consists for the most part of rock and boulders with an occasional sandy bay. The general fauna is as follows : so ca of the islands in the Moscos Archipelago are me, from time to time by the Burmese fishermen as their head- qu fartens during fishing expeditions; a few huts are ~~ 342 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [Aug.-Sept., 1913. found here and there on the larger islands, but the majority of the fishermen come off from the mainlan an ae others they catch the following species in fairly large number ee sp. Chorinemus — petri, Cuy. and Val. [=C. moadeita Klun -)» Dicerobatis eS Cantor. Polynemus indicus, Shaw. Pristis, sp. Rhinobatus, sp. Examples of the following species were obtained. Ambassis urotaen Be Se Atherina pinguis, Chilodipterus Vaca ‘ors Clupea longiceps (Cuv. and Val.). Glyphidodon sordidus, fonk). [= Abudefduf sordidus (Forsk. Mugil waigiensis, Quoy and Gaim. Periophthaimus koelreuteri (Pall. ). Platyglossus leparensis (Bleeker). Platyglossus notopsis (Bleeker). Salarias dussumieri nae and Val. Salarias unicolor, Rip Therapon puta, Cuv. pe Val. Immense shoals of young and immature fish on several occasions came in with the rising tide into some of the sandy bays round these islands. These shoals consisted mainly of examples of Therapon, Atherina and Clupea. These young fish are captured by the Burmese fishermen in enormous quantities by means of large pocket-seine nets, in some instances as, long imported into Burma for the manufacture of “ ngapee.”’ On the Mi ddle Moscos North Island a tidal bile was found that contained large numbers of Haplochilus melastigma (McClell.) ; in these e xamples the whole a the caudal fin was edge with a illiant orange-yellow co oe ecg Aw = Pe a Beh Bes | # atra, Jager) oc- eurred in large numbers among the rocks. Several specimens of a black spiny sea-urchin were found in a rock pool on the Middle Moscos South Island: these differed somewhat from those Vol. ve a 8-9.] Biological Work of the ‘* Investigator.’’ 343 LV.S.] obtained in Byikhwaaw Bay on the mainland in possessing longer and more delicate spines, and were apparently of a differ- ent species. A species of Spatangid was also found on the North Moscos Islands. Motivusca.—The crevices and holes in the rocks were filled with large numbers of Chiton (Acanthopleura) spiniger, Sow. which the natives here collect and use as food. Potycouanta.—Examples of Serpulidae are common in the rock pools round the islands. Island it is almost completely absent, only one or two small isolated colonies being found in rock-pools at the north entrance to Port Owen. Numerous species were obtained on these islands belong- ing to the following genera :— Favia (two species). Fungia (a single species). Galaxia cs ag Goniastraea ,, 5 Madrepora (several species). Porites (a single species). Symphillium (a single species). Turbinaria fe oe One of the examples of Madrepora was found to be infested with a barnacle, living in a small crater-like cavity at the tip of nearly every branch. This proved to be Pyrgoma madrepore Borradaile, a species hitherto known only from the Maldive Islands. mauve coloured tentacles, whereas in the second the colours were the exact opposite, the disc being a dull purple with green tentacles. Tavoy Island, Fisher Bay, (station 414). I landed here on November 20th rock; in the bay itself the shore consists largely of extensive mud-flats, which dry at low water, and intervening patches mud and stones. 344 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [Aug.-Sept., 1913. PISCEs. The freshwater streams contained large numbers of Haplo- chilus panchax (Ham. Buch.), andthe mud-flats were fre uented by Periophthalmus koelreuteri (Pall.). The following species were obtained from the waters of the Bay :— Ambassis nalua (Ham Buch.). Apogon lineolatus, Cuv. and Val. [= Archamialineolata oY Equula fasciata (Lacép.). Gerres lucidus, Cuv. and Val. Gerres oeyena (Forsk.). Haplochilus melastigma (McClell.). Hemiramphus dispar, Cuv. and Val. Lutjanus, sp. Mugil waigiensis, Quoy. and Gaim. Platycephalus insidiator (Forsk.). (=P. indicus Linn.) Platycephalus tuberculatus, Cuy. and Val. Sillago sthama (Forsk.). Therapon jarbua (Forsk.). Teuthis vermiculata (Cuv. and Val.). [= Amphacanthus vermiculatus (C. V.)] Such rock pools as could be found contained numerous fish, for the most part examples of— Gobius ornatus, Riipp. Salarias lineatus, Cuv. and Val. Salarias dussumieri, Cuv. and Val. Asingle example of an apparently new species of Cryptocen- trus was discovered concealed beneath a large stone on the beach between tide-marks. A full acccount of this species will be published shortly in the ‘‘ Records of the Indian Museum.’’ UrocuorpData.—A Single specimen of a species of Bulano- glossus was found half-buried in the mud under a stone between tide-marks. Crusracea.—The stony beach was swarming with small crabs and under nearly every stone between tide-marks a small i anid was concealed. e rocks and te) was of a slow and almost rvt accelerated on the approach o Vol. LX, Nos. 8-9.] Biological Work of the ‘‘ Investigator.’’? 345 [N.S.] even less violent in those cases where no female was to be seen in the vicinity : there was no trace of the excitement described by Alcock (1901, p. 67). Pearse (1912, p. 113) has recently given a very good account of the habits of the fiddler-crabs in the Philippines, and so far as they go, my observations agree with his description. The colouration of Gelasimus tetragonum (Herbst.) is peculi- arly striking: the carapace in front is yellow, turning to a pale green in the centre and posteriorly to a bright blue, with a very distinct pattern outlined in rows of black dots. entrally the abdomen was of a purple-blue tinge while the ischium and merus of the external maxilliped was a bright blue. The legs were orange in colour turning to a brown on the carpus and dactyl. The large chela in the male was pale yellow with a splash of orange at the base of the fixed digit. In the female the chelae were splashed with blue on the hands and the carpus of the ambulatory legs was orange, not brown as in the male In addition to the above, the following species were obtained :— Decapoda, Reptantia. Charybdis (Goniosoma) merguiensis, de Man. Clibanarius padavensis, de Man. Epixanthus frontalis (Edw.), Heller. Leptodius exaratus, Edw. Macrophthalmus errato, de Man. Macrophthalmus verreauaxti, Edw. Neptunus sanguinolentus (Herbat). juv. Pilumnus vespertilio, Fabr. Sesarma quadratum (Fabr.) Thalamita crenata (Latr.), Edw. Several examples of the following species proved to be ovigerous females, viz. Gelasimustetragonum, Lepiodius exaratus, Metapograpsus messor, and Pilumnus vespertilio. As regards the examples of Leptodius, these were all, even the ovigerous females, quite small, measuring only 5-6 mm. in the breadth of the carapace: several specimens were found to be infected with a species of Sacculina and it is possible that the small size of the examples was the result of parasitization. Decapoda, Natantia. Peneus indicus, Edw. juv. Numerous, examples of Peneids and Alpheids were obtained from the rock-pools; also examples of species of Callianidea and Gebia. : Stomatopoda.—A single specimen of Gonodaciylus chiragra, 1 Fabr. was captured in a rock-pool. 346 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [Aug.-Sept., 1913. KCHINODERMA. Two species of Asteropecten were obtained, viz. A. indicus, Déderlein and A. andersoni, Sladen. In addition, large black Holothurians, Holothurea atra, J ager, were common on the beach and two specimens of a smaller variety, having a purple colour, were obtained from the same situation. NERMERTINEA. accompanied by one or more young larval fish. A few examples belonging to the genus Cassiopea were also obtained in the bay. As already mentioned above a few isolated colonies of a Species of Favia were found growing in rock-pools near the N See to the Bay, but there were no large beds seen any- where. PoRIFERA.—Two species of Sponge were found growing on the rocks. Dr. N. Annandale has been kind enough to identify these for me: he informs me that one belongs tu the genus Spongosorites and the other is an example of [sodictya tubuloramosa, Carter. This att pecies iginally described from the Mergui Archipelago (Carter, 1889, p. 70). The present Specimens agree closely with the type both in structure an external appearance, except that they are of a bright purple ets ey ereas the type has completely lost any colour it may BOTTOM TRAWLING. During the Survey season 1910-11, it was only possible to carry out four trawls, at stations 388—391, but during the trawls : se all belonged to the Turbinolidae he following species. —— Sewell, 1912 (a) 2 Kemp and Sewell, 1912. Vol. IX, Nos. 8-9.] Biological Work of the ‘* Investigator.’’ 347 N.S Stephanetrochus oldhami, Alcock. Four examples were obtained and although exhibiting inter se a considerable range of variation, they appear to fall into line with other specimens in the Indian Museum, previousl obtained by the R.I.M.S. ‘‘Investigator’’ and described by Alcock (1898, p. 19), under the above name. Flabellum pavoninum, Lesson. A single specimen was obtained and was referred to this place of a ‘‘ sessile scar of attachment.’’ Its occurrence serves to justify Prof. Stanley Gardiner’s (1904, p. 123) opinion that F. pavoninum and F. paripavoninum are, in reality, repre- sentatives of the same species. Flabellum japonicum, Moseley. Thirty representatives of the species were obtained, show- ing considerable range of variation both in the condition of the columella, as described by Alcock (loc. cit., p. 23), and in the form of the septa which varied from perfectly straight plates to a markedly crinkled condition, closely resembling that found in F. laciniatum. : A single example of Cerianthus, sp., was also obtained. — Po azta.—Numerous worms belonging to the family Maldanidae were obtained together with the tubes in which they live. 2 The results of the six-bottom trawls that were made during the survey season 1911-12 are, so far as they have been worked out at the present date, given below :— Station 392. eee a ad at - Depth—400 fathoms. On this occasion three or four sharks about 4 feet in length came up with the trawl. Unfortunately while the trawl was being brought alongside, two or three of the contained — one apparently an example of Coloconger, floated out through the mouth, and, although an attempt was made to recover them by lowering a boat, the sharks had already made use of their opportunity and they were lost irretrievably. PIscEs. gs ct Macrurus macro us, Alcock. Two examples ee obtained and are referred to the above species. EcHINODERMATA. ede Several examples of Ophiuroidea were obtained; also several specimens of Asteropzcten and a single Phormosoma, sp- 348 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [Aug.-Sept., 1913. ALCYONARIA, Examples of both Umbellula and Pennatula were obtained. MADREPORARIA. condition found in F. japonicum, Moseley. As regards the compressed flat sides and sharp wing-like lateral costae, the Specimens were typical of the above species. Caryophyllia, sp. A single dead corallum, with the calicular margin some- what badly damaged, was also obtained and is referred to this genus. Station 395, 13° 29’ 00” N. 97° 30’ 00" E, ; Depth—50 fathoms. Station 396. 13° 29’ 30” N. 97° 37’ 50" } Depth—50 fathoms. These two trawls were made on the same day at a dis- tance of a few miles apart. In both cases the nature of the given after the names of the species or genera refer to the trawl in which the Specimen was obtained. Piscrs. Amblyopus sp. (396). (= Taenioides sp.). Arnoglossus macrolophus Alcock (396). voptery. xanthosticta (Alcock) (395,396). Bregmaceros Sp. (395), Champsodon guentheri Regan (396). Ophichthys sp. (396). Ostracion turritus Forsk. 396). Synaptura altipennis Alcock (395). Tetraodon immaculatus Bl. Schn. (396) Uranoscopus cognatus Cant. (396). Vol. IX, Nos. 8-9.]: Biological Work of the ‘‘ Investigator.’’ 349 [N.S.] CRUSTACEA. Aegeon medium, Alcock and And. (396). Arcania SO anes Alcock and And. (396). Carcinoplax longimanus, De Haan., juv. (396). Charybdis (Geincobelenss) hoplites, Wood Mason (395). Egeria arachnoides (Rumph), Edw. (396). Leucosia obtusifrons, De Haan (396). Neptunus (Amphitrite) aetna Sieaie A.M.E. (396). Pariphiculus rostratus Alcock (39 Tw op oon eee of a small species of Munida were obtained at sintiog 396 M sierra monoceros, Fabr. (396). Parapeneus ib oi Alcock (395). Solenocera sp. (395 ). Gebia sp. (395). STOMATOPODA. example of the rare Squilla fasciata De Haan. was obtained at station 395. CIRRIPEDIA. A single example of the barnacle, Scalpellum rosiratum, arwin, was also secured at station 395. Its occurrence of interest, as this is, I believe, the first occasion on which it has been pooonled fecnii Indian waters, though it is common in the Malay Archipelago. The specimen is also from shallower water than any other species of the genus previously obtained by the R.L.MLS. ‘“ Investigator.’ POLYCHAETA. Several examples were obtained in both trawls. Subse- quent ae shows that they belong to the following three familie oe (395). Polynoidae (395,396). Terebellidae (396). COELENTERATA. ; Examples of Olindias malayensis, Maas, were obtained at both stations, as also were numerous specimens of a Hydroid belonging to the genus Lytocarpus Station 464, 22-iv-1912. 6° 02’ 30” N: 81° 29 E. Total soundings from 68 to 52 fathoms. Net used. Ag- assiz trawl. 350 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [Aug.-Sept., 1913. This haul included a large number of Aleyonacea and Gor- gonacea, representing about twenty different species; several sponges and corals were also present. Attached to these were numerous Ophiuroids and Crinoids. The fish were not numer- ous and those that were obtained were small, but on the other hand the Crustacea were particularly well represented. The following species have been identified :— PISCES. Fistularia serrata, Cuv. (=F. petimba, Lacép.) Scorpaena erostris, Alcock. CRUSTACEA. Cancellus investigatoris, Alcock. Charybdis (Goniosoma) orientalis, Dana. Eumedonus zebra, Alcock. Eupagurus investigatoris, Alcock. Hyastenus gracilirostris, Miers. Hyastenus pleione (Herbst.). Lambrus (Rhinolambrus) cybelis Alcock. Nazxia cerastes, Ortmann. Nazxia sp. (possibly N. hystrix). Ptychogaster, sp. Puerulus angulatus, Spence Bate. Quadrella coronata, Dana. uadrella coronata var. reticulata, Alcock. derson. Sphenomerus trapezoides, Wood-Mas On. Spiropagurus spiriger var. profundorum, Alcock. Tozeuma armatum, Paulson. d in addition several examples of a Munida, an Alpheid, and a Porcellanid. he example of Nawia cerastes is of interest in that, while closely agreeing with the description and the type specimens of mens of WN, cerastes and N. investigatoris, © spines on the distal ends of the meropodites of the » mentioned by Alcock as distinctive of N. tnvestigatoris, are greatl oes StomaTopropa : A single q dactylus, (A. M.-Edwards). As Nobii (1906, p. 336) has pointed Vol. IX, Nos. 8-9.] Biological Work of the ‘‘ Investigator.’’ 351 [N.S.] out, this scarce form is probably not a true species but a post- larval stage of some other member of the genus, probably P. ciliata, Fabr. Station 465. 22-iv-1912. 5° 56’ N: 81° 22’ E. Nature of bottom. Globigerina ooze. Depth of net. 132-109 fathoms. Net used. Agassiz trawl. PISCEs. Antigonia capros (Lowe). Callionymus kaianus, Gunther. Chelidoperca investigatoris (Alcock). Setarches giintheri, Johnson. CRUSTACEA. Calcinus elegans (Milne-Edwards). Mursia bicristimana, Alcock and Anderson. Paquristes calvus, Alcock. Paguropsis typica, Henderson. In addition to the above, examples belonging to the Ce- phalopoda, Gastropoda, Echinodermata and Gorgonacea were ined, Station 466. 26-iv-1912. 9° 32’ N: 75° 45’ E. Nature of bottom. Fine sand and rock. Depth. 105 fathoms. Net used. Aggassiz trawl. While the trawl was being towed it caught on a rock and was badly torn, in consequence the resulting catch was very mall. The following were identified. PISCEs. Champsodon guenthert Regan. CRUSTACEA. Metapeneus coniger, Wood-Mason. Station 467. 26-iv-1912. 9° 55’ N: 75° 41’ E. Nature of bottom— Coarse sand and mud. Depth—75-42 fathoms. Net used—Agassiz Trawl. 352 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [Aug.-Sept., 1913. PISCEsS. Arnoglossus brevirictis, Alcock. Callionymus longicaudatus, Schleg. Champsodon guentheri, Regan. Dysommopsis, sp. Minous inermis, Aleock. Piatycephalus, sp. Rhomboidichthys polylepis, Alcock. CRUSTACEA. Charybdis (Goniosoma) orientale, Dana. Cryptopodia fornicata (Fabr.). Egeria investigatoris, Alcock. Heterocrypta, sp. Neptunus (Amphitrite) argentatus (White), A. M. Edw. Parapeneus longipes, Alcock. y derson. Spiropagurus spiriger, var. profundorum, Alcock. sand and mud with numerous small mollusc shells. The catch, which was small in quantity, consisted of the following :— PiscEs.—Several young examples of Platycephalus indicus Linné) about 2” in length. CRUSTACEA. Philyra scabriuscula (Fabr.). Neptunus sanguinolentus (Herbst.). MoLLusca.—Numerous mollusc Shells. A small specimen of Loligo, sp. EcutnopErmata.—A single Ophiuroid, badly damaged. CoELENTERATA.—A few specimens of Alcyonarians, all be- longing to the family Aleyonidae ; and one or two branches of an Hydrozoon. MID-WATER TRAWLING. P Re the season 191 1-12, for the first time in the history of the Marine Survey of India, a midwater trawl was made use Vol. IX, Nos. 8-9.] Biological Work of the ‘‘ Investigator.’”’ 353 [N.8.] of. Up to the present time four successful hauls have been made. Unfortunately the net in use at present is not a self- closing one, but it is hoped that in the near future this present apparatus will be replaced by one of a newer pattern. Sation 393. 7° 21’ 6” N.; Depth of net—400 fathoms. 85° 7 15” E. | Total sounding—2009 fathoms. Although great care was taken, it was found when the net was hauled on board that a large number of the specimens, especially the smaller fish and the larger crustacea, were some- what badly damaged, but the Copepoda were in excellent con- dition. The following specimens were identified :—- PISCEs. Cyclothone microdon (Gunther). Vinciguerria lucetia, (Garman). Examples of Cyclothone microdon (Giinther) were of com- mon occurrence: hitherto the ‘‘ Investigator’’ had obtained this species on only two occasions, at Stations 13 and 55. Further examples have since been obtained with the mid-water net at Stations 461, 462, and 463, so that it would appear to be a common inhabitant of the mid-water in the Bay of Bengal. A few examples of Cyclothone signata (Giinther) were also obtained. As has been shown by Murray and Hjort (1912, p. 103), this species occurs in great numbers in the middle of the North Atlantic at a depth of 500 metres (approx. 270 fathoms), whereas C. microdon occurs at a somewhat greater depth, about 1,000 fathoms. The depths at which mid-water trawls have been made on the “ Investigator ’’ up till the present time range from 375 to 475 fathoms, and it is probable that the examples of this latter species were caught during either the ascent or descent of the net: this would also account for the difference in the numbers obtained in the two species. A single example of Vinciguerri lucetia, Garman was also obtained at this station. This is, I believe, the first occasion on which this species has been recorded by the ‘‘ Investiga- tor’’: a second specimen was subsequently obtained at Station 463. At Station 452 a small example of a Myctophum sp. was obtained, while at Station 463, examples of a young Argyreo- pelecus sp. and Astronesthes sp. were captured: as regards the latter, it is too immature to be diagnosed with certainty, but appears to be an immature example of A. indicus Brauer. Tunicara.—Three examples of a species of Pyrosoma were obtained, and specimens of two species of Salpa, S. hexagona. 354 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [Aug.-Sept., 1913. Quoy and Gaim. and S. zonaria (Pall.). In both these last cases it was the asexual form that was obtaine CRUSTACEA. Acanthephyra, s Gen nadas eas. “Spence Bate. Sernedas scutatus, Bouvier: juv. Hymenodora, sp. Sergestes bisulcatus, Wood Mason. Sergestes, sp. Numerous examples of Euphausiacea, mostly young, were ed. also obtain CoPEPO AGaeee horrdax: Farran. Bathycalanus richard. ae ne Candacia norvegica, Can Cornucalanus simples, Wolfenden. Disseta palumboi, Giesbrecht. Euchirella dubia, A. Scott. aetanus armiger, Giesbrecht. Gaetanus latifrons, G. O. Sars. Gaetanus miles, Giesbrecht. Heterorhabdus shee (Ri elsundi Heterorhabdus longicornis Giesbrecht). Heterorhabdus papilligera aus). Labidocera —— (Dana). Lophothrix fronta Sik. Lophothrix, sp. Lucicutia pareaiaeo Wolfenden. Lucicutia clausi cgoanea Lucicutia m axima, euer Megacalanus pri Metridia ignota, — Metridia macrura , Sar Metridia princeps, Gissbrechs: cia ath Soi ea ps, Wolfenden. Metridia scotti, Giesbrecht. esorhabdus truncatus, A . Scott. Paraeuchaeta barbata (Brady). Paraeuchaeta bisinuata (Sars). Paraeuchaeta californica, (Esterly). Paraeuchaeta propinqua Esterly). Paraeuchaeta tonsa (Giesbrecht). Paraeuchaeta weberi, A. Scott. Pleuromamma abdominalis Lubbock). Pleuromamma gracilis (Claus). Pleuromamma quadrungulata (F. Da hl). Pleuromamma xiphias (Giesbrecht). Rhincalanus cornutus (Dana). Rhincalanus nasutus Giesbrecht. Scolecithrix frontalis Giesbrecht). Scottocalanus farrani, A. Scott. Undeuchaeta intermedia, A. Scott. Undeuchaeta major, Giesbrecht. Undeuchaeta plumulosa (Lubbock). Undinopsis, sp. Valdiviella brevicornis, Sars. Valdiviella oligarthra, Steuer. Vol. IX, Nos. 8-9.] Biological Work of the *‘ Investigator.’ 355 [V.S.] e occurrence of many of these species is of interest, especially the rare Metridia scolti, of which numerous examples of both sexes were obtained. I am inclined to regard M. air the hitherto unknown male _ macrura, Sars, were also included in the haul. These Stiles can readily be distin- guished from the males of M. princeps, and I cannot agree with Wolfenden (1908, p.15) that they are the same species. OSTRACODA AMPHIPODA COELENTERATA. A oh example of a purple-coloured deep-water Medusa was prese Station 461. Ppa 10210’ No 0o74 Total counding—1 800 fathoms eee reading on chart: an ual sounding was not taken). Depths of net—375 fathoms. \Numerous examples were obtained. PISCES. Numerous small fish, including both adult and larval forms, were obtained, and amongst the latter was one specimen of Antigonia capros, Lowe. TUNICATA. Numerous Pyrosomata, mostly small gy esate colonies of four individuals. Two species of Salpa: S. multitentacu- ye Forskal, seal wee form Crustacea.—As usual sainesoie Copepoda, Ostracoda and Amphipoda were obtained ; these at present have not been worked out. Among the Decapoda were examples of Acanthe- phyra sy terre Wood Mason, and Sergestes, sp. CHa atHa.— Numerous examples of Sagitia, sp. CoELENTERATA.—Siphonophora were common and one ex- ample of a Beroe was obtained. Station 462. 20-iv-1912. ale Ronit aie (a) Surface tow-ne at badd face wha t @) (b) Mid-water net at 475 rachivnti Pisczs. Melamphaes mizolepis, Gnthr. TuNnIcaTA. A Pyrosoma colony, 4” in length. 356 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [Aug.-Sept., 1913. CRUSTACEA. Decapoda. Acanthephyra, larva. nomura, larva Euphausiacea sp., numerous examples. Gennadas parvus, Spence Bate. Gennadas scutatus, Bouvier, var. Gennadas, ®P Pasiphaea, sp. lar Sergestes ae. "Wood Mason. Sergestes, sp. In addition there were numerous Copepoda and Ostracoda. MoLLusca. Three small Cephalopods. POLYCHAETA. An example of a sige Tomopteris was obtained : the pro- portions were as follows Length—2} inches. Length of seta—4 inches, No. of segments—43. The narrow caudal region had been broken off ; a detached caudal ee probably belonging to this specimen, was present measuring | 2”. Station 493. 21-iv-1912. P3t No SF 20k. Nets tae tow net—0 fathoms. Mid-water net—400 fathoms. PIscEs. Vinciguerria lucetia (Garman). CRUSTACEA. Examples of lekecngen bi anage and Gennadas. Numerous Copepoda, e SIPHONOPHORA. Abyla trigona Q. and G. (2) Diphyes appendiculaia Esch. POLYCHAETA, A second lane } Tomopteris sp. was obtained : its propor- tions are as follow Vol. IX, Nos. 8-9.] Biological Work of the Investigator.’? 357 [V.S8.] Length of body—34 inches. »> 4, Seta,—5i inches. No. of segments—43. Unfortunately the tube containing the surface collection was broken in transit and its contents lost. OBSERVATIONS ON THE SURFACE PLANKTON. During both years a large number of collections of the surface-plankton were made at different stations: in the first Survey-season 1910-11 numerous tow-nettings were taken in the region of the coast from the Middle Moscos Islands to Tavoy Point, and during the second year 1911-12, a further series of collections was made at stations extending from Tavoy Point to the north end of Iron Island. In addition to these, tow-nettings were also taken of the plankton at the mouth of Rangoon River (station 394) in Hinzé Basin and at stations 393, 395 and 396, where bottom trawls were also made. The results obtained in the more northerly region as regards the occurrence and distribution of the diatom flora and Copepoda have already been published. (Sewell. 1912 (b), . 349.) pat I have there shown that in this region the plankton exhibits a regular banded arrangement, so that the region can be divided up into four areas: in the more southerly region from Tavoy Point to Iron Island there was no indication of any such division, the planktonic distribution being uniform throughout the whole area. Here the diatoms present were or the most but as they were found equally numerous at widely-distant stations and at stations where on previous visits h tions are not sufficiently numerous for the results to be pad sive, yet they indicate that the surface plankton was, on the whole, more abundant towards the southern end of the area 358 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [Aug.-Sept., 1913. under investigation than in the more northerly region around the mouth of Tavoy River. A study of the various results ob- tained round Port Owen, Fisher Bay (13:06 N: 98:19 E.), also shows that the plankton decidedly increases from early in November to the end of December, and beginning of January and then once more diminishes. In the accompanying tables (Appendix, II and III) I have indicated the presence or absence of most I stituents of the plankton in the various hauls, and below append a few notes on certain animals that appear worthy of further notice :— belong to the genus Citharichthys, and very closely resembles the C. aureus, Day. (1889, p. 440, fig. 156). It is not identical, however, with this species, and a full account will, it is hoped, be published shortly. wo young examples of a species of Monacanthus were obtained at Station 443. In both the whole body and head occurrence of large been observed by Jenkins (1912, p. 51). CEPHALOCHORDA. Amphioxides valdiviae.—A single example of an Amphioxides larva was obtained at station 399, In length it measured ot 0 OOE mm: Proportion of length to breadth ~« 1136 Proportion of post-anal length to total length 7-13 There are twenty gill clefts present, and the mouth extends back to the level of the 8th gill bar. The end of the gill region Vol. IX, Nos. 8-9.1 Biological Work of the ‘‘ Investigator.’’ 359 [N.S.] is at the level of myotome 24; while the anal opening is at the level of myotome 54, and there are twelve post-anal myotomes. There are about five fin ray boxes present to every myomere throughout the whole length of the animal. From the above characters, it would appear that this must be an example of A. valdiviae. TunicaTa.—The two commonest forms of surface-frequent ing tunicates were Salpa cylindrica, Cuv. and Salpa democratica Forsk. on one occasion as many as 500 were obtained in a single haul. They were invariably individuals of the ‘‘ solitary ? type, and in the majority of cases possessed a well-marked stolon, with a chain of developing young. The examples of S. demo- cratica were small, measuring from 6—7 mm. in length. CRUSTACEA. oda.—Numerous examples of Lucifer were obtained in the surface trawls: they all appear to belong to a single species, L. typus, Auct.: during the months of March and ing from its appearance had of Ot a. These females were usually accompanied by numerous young that were clinging to the sides of the barrel ope —The various species of Copep da obtained Point have already been determined and an account of them published. (Sewell, 1912 (b)). In the more southerly region from Tavoy Point to the north of Iron Islan, she van) were obtained, so that it is unnecessary to give any further account of them eason 1910-11, a During the latter part of the survey Seas ( é ; ith a view to investi- I n camp ashore. The results of these investigations have been worked out — are given below. Table LV are sempre’ the results derive from a series of tow-nettings taken while soundings. I have made no attempt to calculate the numbers of Copepoda present per cubic-area of water, Q disposal was not sufficient ; I have instead reduced see caved to the number caught per hour, and, as, in all cases, the 360 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [Aug -Sept., 1913. net was used and the rate of steaming was throughout prac- tically constant, viz. five knots per hour—the figures may, at least, be taken as having a relative value, indicating the varying richness of the Copepod fauna in the different areas at the time of investigation. A consideration of these results shows very clearly that, in this region of the coast, the number of Copepoda frequent- ing the surface bears a very close relationship to the state of the tide, a tow-netting taken at or near low water always show- ing a marked superiority as regards numbers of copepods a 8.am. 3. 2. 10. Copepoda) Bia riby A es J : lam, 2. *. Bae ae Ser eee ete Copepoda. April 5 191. é } pei e4 ai. = Tide. Eta: Ss; Note.—The first column gives the n i second indicates the height of the de ia — sp peers It appears to me that two i : iati 2 sh that explanations of this variation are possible ; firstly, it might be due to a horizontal move- + Vol. 1X, Nos. 8-9.] Biological Work of the ‘‘ Investigator.’ 361 [N.S.] ment, a richer fauna being brought down the coast by the tide, which in this region sets up and down the coast, the direc- tion of the flood being in the main to the N.-N.-W. and of the ebb to the S.-S.-E., or secondly, it might be due toa gon movement, the Copepoda sinking below the surface at the tim of the flood and high water, and rising again when the ebb tide is established. That it is not due to the former is shown by the fact that (1) the alteration in numbers does not exactly coincide with hours before high-water, and (2) although numerous tow-n tings were taken all over the region between the Middle Scdoel Islands and Byikhwaaw Bay, “there was no evidence of any variation in the local richness of the fauna such as this view presupposes to exist. We therefore have to fall back on the second explanation, and such evidence as | have te able to accumulate tends to show that this is the correct on A series of vertical hauls of the tow-net taken a different states of the tide in or near Byikhwaaw Bay, gave the following vertical distribution. No. or CoPEPODA OB- | TAINED. Posirion. | | Se ee | | State of Tide. N Ist 2nd 3rd : soe fathom. | fathom. | fathom. | | | 2,040| 2,550| .. | Adulte. se a ac “] 4,080 11,730 .. — Nauplil. | - 1,750 | 3,890 1,260 | Adults. esd ea es -) 2770 1,210, 3,850 Nauplil. 3,560 | 1,790 1,630 Adults. 16,290 | 1,020 3,310 Nauplii. Bie Te 1,660 | 2,550} 1,910 | Adults. High water ; 5,090 12,200 11,200 Nauplii. he cause of this vertical movement I am inclined to attribute to a change in the density of the sea-water. T - such a change does actually cause a rise and fall of these animals has been shown by Professor Loeb. (1893, p. 96). 2 Observations on the density of the aawhise were taken every morning at 7.30: the readings recorded were the mean 362 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [Aug.-Sept., 1913. of the results obtained from four different hydrometers ; already pointed out, these are only capable of recording to the nearest degree, so that it was accurate result. At the same time t obtained have been converted into salinities by calculating the chlorine equivalent from Ditmar’s tables in the ‘‘ Challenger ”’ Reports (Physics and Chemistry, Vol 1, Table VII, p. 70, and Table IX, p. 80) and by multiplying this figure by the factor 17974, as given by Ernst Ruppin, 1911. Most of the readings were taken at stations widely distant from one another, but a few were taken at different dates in Byikhwaaw Bay. These have been plotted out, according to Rae L.W. Byikhwaaw Bay, Fig. 4, —In this and the succeedi . ‘ : shows the ri \cceeding diagrams, the interrupted line salinity, © rise and fall of the tide, and the continuous line that of the a of os tide at which they were obtained, the necessary tide: chi § obtained from the observations recorded by the party Stationed in the bay itself. The result is shown in =~ accompanying diagram. though the results obtained : : were net very satisfactor they tend to show that In this region, at any dite thas ae 2 tinct fall and subsequent tise in the salinity of the water rise of the tide this water is carri i ried past Byikhwaaw Bay up the coast towards the phe eaeag Islands, a second fall ast rise two streams, Vol. IX, Nos. 8-9.] Biological Work of the ‘‘ Investigator.’’ 363 [N.S.] During the second season 1911-12 a further attempt was made to investigate the changes in the salinity : there was no available apparatus on board for every hour, both at station 399 at the mouth of Tavoy River, and in Port Owen, Tavoy Island, during a period of twelve e rise and fall of the tide. of AgNO. deci-normal strength, but as this could not be done very accu- rately the resulting figures have only a relative value. The results are given below—figs. 5 and 6—and they show ‘very clearly that here at any rate there is a distinct fall in the salinity during the flood tide and a rise at the ebb. SL4) + é | eo ee ae ae a oS x fc | ee} ee ba + S oe oe * es = x «js ’ ae » ase pee Cares vo ee a eas : Boe ; ce Kale per era ee . 46} oon ee Pa ata eee cole 0) ee be ach eee ° pe eee Pal set es cee ee sew [es [eects é | K | ee] setae] oe lee . a) ae cele | .| 1 ae eh ea z . rr are . i ee i o. ee wd jes ° Joa [eed eet ee Bes Ae aa Spa wil ae cathe mien jee " : | x EVO RSSEN ee bax | . re ce pl mee ve eae re eae oe | daca ei iee 1% | | | ioe: | Aah | . gue aes ees ie Being: Pip aot * dw all ae s bee | “| X} | ef ee fer] ee ejeeds we | SER wep ee oe. a hs | ae eee oie? - co] KM] oe] - | oe e nee: Vy a ere se] Kee 3: MK ee eae ve | | ree Ries So he ee . gee a i i eat ae oe ALS J oo] ee] | , | | | | | eS ad oY Peek. 5 Pie Or te eg a Gr en tree ope 6: eee | | | | ara Me Nea Se cs bia ‘Seto Belek eee? = eles eee ek oo As ae" Dag | es ok 2 ae alee ie ee tee Pas Fee Pe eae eee re rf were PR Ley os) 0 fet RE : | | | | | 1 | ppes ae ele oe coe cele Gidea akalee elses be ee] | ge x rpeebee| eel oe| Mp esl mi Me veree| “i A a | eT] Sete bee be ee poate pee ood E | | ere rt bag oer hata a4 lh Weer . ee] . ae | ae] tt cole i Os Pegs opie tee pes es . | | fasber| oe eis Caveat (ois fa Ue, ag aca Re el oo EIS | tes | | x cabee | aa eee fo. Meee ee A 8 OE . ee bs | eer Sak She oe : wel ae es 377 8-9.] Biological Work of the ‘** Investigator.’’ Vol, 1X, Nos. [W.8.] the Plankton obtained with the large surface tow-net. Survey Season, 1911-12. SPF | Sat: YS ee eee ee eee toss tee Lit ts ee eee Paik ies tt Chee fii 3 ft: 1 itt See ek ee ee eer eae 4 eee oo ee om ook eae ge eee ee OF) fo flilitit<. eee ‘SESS ceux tt See ee 507 | Tere | ae fe SS errr eens €0F et ts ee rere ee 308 | cee Ul CRS 1 SU RR. a 23% foe Wl. of hilt: See tS aes ee ¢ hee hae Re ex See errs “uy” i a ae (eee 8 ee tS RA is Sos oe pa eee Al ro igs: tee ey ee ee eee TERPS ese Seem see Je ered tee eee iS oe eee ee Se co ee oe S580: 1 Ch Dh eee Sie M2 $2 ls See LS Sea es me See rea oe rte: le Ste Pee ee WPL Ss 2 ye ee Se tee ee ee po) fits ea ee ed ee te a | ee ete ae yc Ee Wy we ae Mg ee See : : Re oe eee Se reer arrears | a | ee pee RN rs cy ee meri yeeain ae : | CG ee eee eS ee ee eer ley ee eee) Pe aee CPOUR SCR 1g geet es pers | | bz i PERERERMOe Os Ge OE 378 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [Aug. Sept., 1913. Taste ITI.—Occurrence of organisms in the Survey-Sea Pelagic Fish ova Ascidian larvae a Crab zoea an ve Crab megalopa es Copepoda Nr ae Copepod nauplii ey Ostracoda. es | Balanus nauplii ae Balanus cyprides ae: Evadne,sp. .. 2 Lingula larvae a Lamellibranch larvae .. Gastropod larvae aa Ophioplutens larvae... Sagitta,sp. ., a Polychaet larvae a Noctiluc1, sp... ce 7 9) o#) Sal ew po *1 ele ef oo Mee K eae heleol Mle Pl bah SPeie ise setee | Mea lou, | | | } xx a ee | | } { * | Ls | x eles | | 4 | | Se cols eissiog | | ey >| \ Saas Pa | x 1% 13¢] Ix[.ofeele=foat x \*,* eleeles Ix |.-] x Bies eevee | eo Reese | | | laq'| ao i 1D | ty JO Se I [2 |S Visio ssssesseessseeslesee |S |S | | }D | S90 Cl RS wl ie ‘Sg ag 3% BS SS FSSSS$ S/F SS SS SS aS i "4 siaslecl Mleelee| ¥lesle cles lemhe nina n0[ Bi RIKI Ks. rete Klee eeieeleeieeioeice) le ejee! MX a ine a , eae Lee} Kine X Cleelewis eel ele are ee Ale aie ote ee oe Me | | if ae | | ae slaaleslecte 5} el eeis eiam oe | iy Bape | : MMII K KK) KL x pe] KL LLL Loe bod |e Lew Ls 96 pe 1 lpr a | 4 2 eet MPS cl esis lests cles! Rial XM loal KX loal x Bal a a bs) pak | |_| | [oat é pret ee | Miele el eel HK lente el 1K [eel 1K 11 le elec le 0 Em Leena Bobet b | | ond | | } ! } | } | | i Jntjee|ee]% Le}... Heeteslasteaty ytsates ts we lee] X jo opm loam aks eae ea | x |e! | "| | Bape: Bere oo joing ee | j | eleeleclsclecios | eae | | | | } | | | | x | i ! | oe j } Lode fot ‘ Tete ee ce ee ee eel . \ i Lotte Vol. IX, Nos. 8-9.] Biological Work of the “ Investigator.’’ [v.98] Plankton obtained by small surface tow-net. son, IQII-12. NS ee ee | / Bi% |x |X) x sll ise bs ic | x Ix a ae a x : a ae 99 IH 19 {co [rx QUIN int $1518 818) | oe x + Sie eleeleeles|selewla'e fod ecleeloele et { ee) nN a ool Mee MR EM ite le ela. ef x ovleelse Nhs far Oe eeee reise oe } | ; | gelsisies 2s sid sil ail al al f Ml Ries | | | | | ec eeis | | af | pod | | [ sae SeSeeesis } i | 379 Mileetewls of Mia biewls et SUl 1K] Melee te wes x x GES a Mary rare Seed oes Ps ees Bree poem el Bd en ele obi dalieticlaxiw . Jeels | Cae teres oe! oe * ere +e ee oe ee FO 220 Oe OC | OK ae oof |x| a ele ateefet mao | OI OI die | 6 al ea bee fiat pilcsion oe KK Keowee Klesiecieeioe! KM ee ce MIM ae | | ealeets ales ae wee Kee eee ee KK ee ee elee ee ee ee KK ce ee Moe | t / ? i | | ] | | j | | ; awe oof M fos Xe ele ole) x] Ix es | gs a | ee | * | } | | | | bend valeateris ale eel aa aise, MIM isle. K[ xt. . 1 Lx rile Kove ee eee x | { | | | i | j ee H | ete x ee ees wee a eles Kites veil jesteelee 1%} had bee es | | ' i } i Sele ele eleelewicociesiconlisaviesissise Mis soles) Mee ee eelee © 6) 6 ewlesise sale) add | | | : | : i : | | } i ' Loo] 21s 01 1301 enleslow{ora| Me] los] K1M1H 1H leelecle olen! x x oeee|Kiee | eam far } | hele xxl. | x|safvfos}e loots sleelsofoof eviewe P14 | | ] i eee eee ee eves seer iee oe eeleslesioe * | i ; | + oo fea} E | S/o bl hdl Xe. x i | : | i i se 0 { j lee seen ve 380 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [Aug.-Sept., 1913. Taste IV.—Record of tow-nettings from ship during day-time. : ; | “Ga Date. | State of Tide. Position from | Position to Bere | | per hour. | February | 3 ? West of Middle Moscos Islands. | 1386 | . | 7 ? 13.45 | 97.57 | 13.45 | 97.55 | 296 | - | 8 (a) Ge ebb 13.55 | 97.56} | 14 15} 97-56} 4725 | | (0) Flood and | 14.15} / 97.56; 14.13 97.555 | 97:25 [

9 81 1020 2 “WABILI .. ditto | ditto | o< bigi | 1020-32 by ie -+ 13.25 | 98,23 | | 80 | meee 5 400 1411-11, | 13.204 (98. 93. 45! § fms. | [oe 401 Peer 1 116 98. 26 | 81 | 1020 | 1 sa) ihe -+ 13.02 | 98,95 | oe ae | 3 MOATAL-IL ..| 13.20 | 98,23 | 6 | ge | 1019-5}. 2 I7/18-11-11 .. 13. 64 98.19) 123 | 83 |. 10205]. 1 4 | | a eae FOR ERO 796.90 | 1e-| ep | j000-5| os 406 | 19/20-11-11 5 | ve * Takon from ship while sounding. |-13..06 | 98. 20 | 12% 805 1020'5. 120 ae PIRI O22 | 9 |g, | j9a0 2 aD (Steal “+ | 13.22 bea 9-4 ft. 81 1020°5 2°5 409 | 22/23-11-11 ++ | 13,25 | 98,20 i | 82 | 1020 | 1 410 | 23 2411-11 ., | 18.274 / 98.16 | 7:54.) 81 | 1020 | 15 411 | 24/25-11-11 . (23 28 | 98.18 | 64 ft. | 81 | 1021 | 3 412 | 2526-11-11 .. | 13 6} cee 8-2 ft. 81 | 1020 | 72 413 | 26/27-11-11 .. | 13, 63 | 98. 195 | 8-2 ft. | | 10205, 3 415 | 27/28-11-11 .. | 13, 63 98.193 82 ft. 81 | 1020 | 3 416 | 2829-11-11 .. | 13, 63 98.19) es s2 | ate : 417 | 7/8-12-11 | 13.29 | 98.10 | 04.1 ,. | 1019 19 418 | 8/9-12-11 .. 113,95 | 98.18 | ee 81 | 1020 | 12 Vol. IX, Nos. 8-9.] Biological Work of the ‘* Investigator.’’ 387 [N.S. ] TaBie VIII. eee ) as ae | E oe | | Hydro- Total 35 Date, Position. ae | Fabr. meter Plank- x b | reading. ton ces. et ee Sea Fe ol MOS Ce N. E. | 9,10-12-11 .. 13. 6} 98, 194 | | 419 | 8:3 ft as 1019 | | 420 | LO/LI-12-11 .. | 13, 6} | 98.194 | 83H.) 81 | 1019 | 15% 421 | 1112:12-11 ..| 13.38 | 989° | 46%} 81 | 1019 | 2 422 12/13-12-11 .. | 13.33 98.9 | 45 ft.) 81 | 1018 18 423 13/1412-11 .. 1318 | 98.23 44 ft./ 82 0205 42414151211 .. 13.172 98.22 44 ft, | st | 1019) Os 425 1516-12-11 .. 13.14} 98.21 83H. 81 | 1020 | 4 426 16/17-12-11 «| 13.13 “98.23 | 55 ft 81 | 1019 | 4 427 17181211 .. 13.13 “98. 23 | 55 ft. 815 101917 428 | 18/19-12-11 .. | 13.05} 98.23. 74 ft. 81 | 1020 1 429 19/201211 .. 13.06 98.22) 73ft. 81 ws 4 | | 30/31-12-11 .. 13,06: 9819 65 ft. 80 | 1019 105 431 |311-1-12 .. 13.06} | 98.19 | 65%.) .. | 1020 | 200 432 1/2-1-12 .. 13,06} 98.19 65 ft. 80 | 1020 33 | 433 | 2/2-1-12 ..| 13.074 | 98.12 | 17-2 ft. 79 | 1020 | 18 434 3,4-1-12 13. 02 "98.14 171 ft.) 79 | 1019 | 58 435 | 4/5-1-12 .. 13.08} | 9812 | 16 | 80 | 1020 | 116 436 6/6112 .. | 13, 14} | 98.15 | 29 | 81 | 1020 | 14(+) 437 | 67-1-12 ..| 13.06 | 98.18 | 15 | 80 | 10195) 65 438 | 7/81-12 .:| 13,06 |98.18 | 15 | 80 | 1019 | 17 429 8/91-12 ../ 12.56 | 98.13 | 174 ft. 79 10185 10 440 | 9/10-1-12 ..| 12.65 98.13} | 162%. 79 1018 | 7 441 “1o/M-L-12 | 12.58 98. 15} | I52ft. 79 | 1018 | 125 42/12 13:12 ..| 12.65 | 98.92 | 16 | 79 | 1018 7 3 15/16-1-12 ., | 13.00} 98.22 7-1 it. 79°| 1018'| 3 | 444 | 17/18-1-12 ae 06 98.18: 6 | go | 1019 | 35 ! : aw - - 388 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [Aug.-Sept., 1913. 26/27-1-12 446 | 27/28-1-12 447 | 28/29-1-12 448 | 29/30-1-12 449 | 31/31-1-12 450 | 31/1-2.12 451 | 1/2-2-12 452 | 2/3-2-19 453 | 7/8-2-12 454 455 . 456 Taste VIII.—( cence) 1 as mee “ee ae . |12. 49. 30.98. 22. 45 | | a . 13.06. 3098.18 45 13. 06. 30.98. 18. 45 Sound- ‘Temp. Hyde dro- - Tot | Fahe. reading. | ton ccs. | | 30 80 | 10200 83618 : | 6 | 13. 03. 45.98. 31.10 4 80°5 1020 1°25 . |12. 57. 3098.31.30 4:3 ft. 80 | 1020 9 . |12.57.3098.31.30 43 ft. 30 1020 12 | 12.57 98.24.00 13-1 ft. 80 1020 20 12.57 96.26 | 13-1 ft. 80 | _ ° ee © — Ou . 12. 47. 3098. 24.45 64ft.| 80 | 1019 30 | | 80 1019 80 «1019 | | 80 1019 Alcock, 1895 .. Alcock, 1898 . . Alcock, 1901 .. Alcock, 1902 .. Annandale, 1912 REFERENCES. Materials for a carcinological fauna of India. No.1. Journal Asiatic ae of Bengal, vol. lxiv, part ii. le An account of the Deep-Sea Madre- poraria, collected by the R.I.M.S.8. ‘‘Investigator.’’ Calcutta. Zoological gleanings from the R.I.M.S.S. ‘‘ Investigator.’’ Scien- tific ig ia hig Medical mg of the Army in India. Part xii, No. 3 Simla. itl Expedition. Report on the Deep-Sea Madreporaria. Leyden. Zoological results of the Abor Expe- dition. I. Batrachia. fase Ind. Mus., vol. viii, Caleutt Vol. IX, Nos. N.S. Carter, 1889 .. Day, 1889 Esterly, 1912 Gardiner, I. Stanley, 1804. Jenkins, 1912 Johnstone, 1908 emp and Sowell, 1912. Loeb, 1893 Murray and Hjort, 1912 Nobili, 1906 .. Pearse, 1912 ., Petersen, 1911 Rudmose-Brown and Simpson, 1907. Ruppin, E. , 1911 Sewell, 1912 .. Sewell, 1912 .. 8-9.] Biological Work of the “ Investigator.’’ 389 Sponges from the Mergui — pelago. Journ. Linn. Soc., v xxi, p. 61. London. (Repr inted in Anderson’s Fauna of Mergui Archipelago). . Fishes of India (Fauna of British India), vol. ii. London The occurrence and vertical distribu- “ South African corals of the genus pect > Marine Investigations n South Africa ca, vol.ii. Cape Town. ie Obsetiastieia on the shallow-water “Ca leu gis fu jestanmte Physiol. Pflugers, liv. Bon The: depths of ass Ocean. Macmillan “Pans Carcinologique de la Mer Rouge: Décapodes et Stomato- > podes.’ Ann. Da at. Zool., Ser. 9, vol iv. Paris. ‘* The habits of fiddler crabs.’’ The eae s Journa' of Science, vol. i, Sec. D., No. 3, p. 113. Manilla. Raton of the Danish oe Station, XX. Copenh Report on the Pearl Oy ies Wisber: ies of the Mergui Archipelago and Moskos Islan - Government Printing Office on Zeitschrift fur cnr chemie. Ba 232. Leipzig. " Investigator ”’ during the Sur- vey-Season 1910-11. ee Ind. Mus., vol. vii. Caleu (6) Notes on the afore Cope- poda of the Bay of Bengal, 1 and il. Ree. # Mus., vol. vii. Calcutta. 390 Journal of the.Asiatic Society of Bengal. [Aug.-Sept., 1913.] Sewell, 1912 .. rs (-), Note on the development of Lingula larva. Rec. Ind. Mus., vol. vii. cutta. Southwell and Sewell. N: a on the Fish fauna of certain 1913. sin Benga Seni bulletin No. 1. Depart. Agri- cult. Behar and Orissa. Ranchi Wolfenden, 1908 -- Crustacea, VIII. Copepoda. Nation- al Antarctic Expedition. Vol. iv. Zoology. London. NNN NS FN PRINT IN EN Jour. As. Soc. Beng. Vol. IX, 1913. Plate XXV. Stake 421-2. Nauwi Ris 4, I Sta. (Ooi. = Sta. ‘ esta. eri. | \ 410. ny. ie y0 .. v r ie —s@Sta Sta ‘ a ® 418. tig % * hg : : \., & oh . a. 00. a ier ‘ ‘, ' : : g yi ae \ (7) @Sta. 403 } i \ ae : j s@ota \ Stag /O425 ! 1 4249) 1 i \ ee / Sta. , o a , o's. Ng Seen \ a Bee ae ps Vy / : i } . Sta. ! 4388, \ \ @433.) / \ 30 33 ee) Chart of the Burma Coast in the Neighbourhood of Tavoy Island. ie og High : atts, } rl a A / Black Aks © See aa Sia : @Sta 449-50 "eS Bitton @>'2 a iS ‘ ue 451-2 , ’ if _ ; \ Great Canister fe @Sta 439. j B @Sta. +40 ~/ a. Oost, Serene Yeast to; ie: ‘ieee er ae \ eet saat Sylitle Canister — tee TO eb aon ee mows gee pena 0 . a ae o ee i ‘ ta = Fi “~~~ 3 Fathoms , es OMG@soe Ak. 3 a ee ry rs AJ rs - ——————S—— 44. The Limestone Caves of Burma and the Malay eninsula.* By N. ANNANDALE, D.Sc., F.A.S.B.; J. Cogarn Brown, M.Sc., F.G.S.; and F. H. Gravecy, M.Sc. (Plates XVIII - XXII.) Page INTRODUCTION vse i is oo” 39] Part I. Geology of the Cave-bearing Limestones of Burma and the Malay Peninsula. J. Coggin Brown 396 Part II. Fauna of the Limestone Caves of Burma and the Malay Peninsula. N. Annandale and F. H. avely Gr - se ae ». 402 APPENDIX. Notes on clay tablets. B. B. Bidyabinod and C. Duroiselle _ ae 4 va le INTRODUCTION. The caves of the Oriental Region do not possess the interest of those of some parts of Europe and America. As a rule they are not of vast size or impressive interior; few or none of them contain streams or lakes; their fauna does not have not, so far as we know, been the home of races whose civilization is extinct. It is, however, no less necessary to study what is ordinary than what is striking; indeed, the former is in many cases the more important from a scientific point of view. Comparatively little attention has yet been directed to the Structure and fauna of the limestone caves of Burma and the adjacent countries, and it has seemed worth while, if only in order to stimulate further study, to gather together the scat- tered and often somewhat inaccessible references in literature, and to add the results, imperfect as they are, of our own several investigations in the Shan States, Tenasserim, the Siamese and the Federated Malay States. Although the caves are scattered over an area of great extent—it extends from western China in the north to Borneo ee ere ee ee ee ee te ee ee * Published by permission of the Trustees of the Indian Museum and of the Director of the Geological Survey of India. 392 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [November, 1913. d rise conspicuous in flat land devoted to or suitable for agriculture, most commonly contain the caves, eaten out of their centres of the hills, sometimes they open on the face of precipitous cliffs, which may have almost the appearance of white marble, or may be almost black on account of weatherin great chambers within the hill. In many cases there are several series of passages and caverns, the latter of consider- able diameter, of great height and usually of circular form with a domed roof. The passages, which are as a rule less length of many hundred yards. lt is very common for there to be a small aperture like a skylight in the roof of the larger chambers, and sometimes the roof has collapsed more or Vol. IX, No. 10.] The Limestone Caves of Burma, 393 [N.S.] manure, which, both in Burma and in Siamese territory, is collected annually in many of them. The subject, so far as Burma is concerned, is discussed by Mr. I. H. Burkill in a pamphlet issued as No. 1 in the Agricultural Ledger (Calcutta), for 1911. The earliest description of any of the caves appears to be that given by Capt. W. Foley in his ‘‘ Notes on the Geology, etc. of the Country in the Neighbourhood of Maulamyeng (vulg. Moulmein)’’ published in the Journal of this Society for 1836 (Vol. V, pp. 269-281, pl. VII). He mentions as the principal caverns of the district those at Yétséy, Tyokhla, Joe-ka-beng, Damatha, Nyown-beng-zeite, Phabia, and describes the Buddha-cave at Dhammathat (or Damatha) and also a small cave a little further to the south near the summit of the hill name of Khayon or ‘‘ Farm Caves.’ Another cave near Moulmein which Capt. Foley mentions is situated at Phabowng Thowng, a limestone hill on the banks of the Atbaran; this cave has a stream running through it. of different localities; but he did not describe the caves Theobald, another member of the Geological Survey of India, mentions them in his ‘‘Geolozgy of Pegu’’ (Mems. Geo. Surv. Ind., X [2], p. 139) but does not add greatly to our knowledge i lat es Sy ee ea Soild 1 It is probable that these are still in the Society’s possession, but our Burmese MSS. have not yet been adequately catalogued. N i ns the Ataran River. ‘There is a ferry there on the road from Moulmein to the caves, and it is the only village on the journey. 394 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [November, 1913. oulmein and, in an interesting letter ! published by the Geolo- gical Society of Italy (Bull. Soc. Geogr. Ital., 1888) dealt with € Batu caves near Kuala Lumpur in the Malay State of Selangor were investigated by Ridley at the request of the British Association, in whose Report for 1898 (pp. 572-582) he published the results of his researches. Four caves are care- fully described and diagrams of two of them are given; the animals inhabiting their darker parts are recorded with notes on their habits. ings of the Zoological Society of London, 1900-1903), closely allied to those found by Fea in the Farm Caves. In June, July, October and November, 1902, the Jalor caves were visited again by Robinson and Annandale; their collections have been described in Fasciculi Malayenses (Liverpool, 1903- 1905), in the supplement (<< Itinerary ’’) to which notes‘on the caves themselves will be found (pp. vi and xxv-xxviii has given certain particulars about those on the coast of Trang in the Supplement to Fasciculj Malayenses (p. xv) and in the anthropological part of that work (vol. I, p. 63). neient clay tablets found in caves in Trang and Kedah are described in the following papers :—‘* Short Notes on a Buddhist Votive Tablet ’’ by C. O. Blagden (Journ. Straits Branch Roy. 8. Soc , 1903, p. 205); « Clay Tablets from Caves in Siamese Malaya’’ by A. Steffen with notes by Nelson Annandale (Man, vol. IT, No. 125, pl. M, 1902) ; ‘*‘ Notes on Clay Tablets from the Malay Peninsula’? by Rakhaldas Banerji, with an Introductory Note by N. Annandale (Journ, As. Soc. Bengal, {n. s.] vol. II, p. 459, 1907). The date of the tablets from Trang appears to be about the 8th to the 11th century a.D. Professor Kern of Leyden eae _ | Fea’s more detailed account of his wanderings (‘‘ Quatro Anni % Birmaine et le Tribu Limitri ”*)is unfortunately not available in Calcutta. Vol. IX, No. 10.] The Limestone Caves of Burma. 395 [V.S.] {who had, however, seen only a photograph) attributed one from Kedah to the 10th century; but Babu Binod Bihari Bidyabinod of the Indian Museum, who has examined this and other specimens from Kedah which Dr. R. Hanitsch, Director of the Raffles Museum, Singapore, has been kind enough to lend us, informs us that they must be considerably older. He is of the opinion, on palaeographic grounds, that they belong to the 7th century ; his note is printed in the appendix to this paper (p. 423). Inany case their script (pl. XVIII) is North Indian, as is also that of the Trang tablets. are commonly foun caves in Jalor Pahang. These tablets probably date from the 18th century a.p. 0) them bear the image of a Buddha seated beneath a seven headed cobra with expanded hood (pl According to India in the use of the protecting many-headed cobra as an emblem. : Archeological descriptions of limestone caves in_ the Amherst district of Tenasserim are given by Taw Sein Ko in The Indian Antiquary, vol. XXI, p. 377 (1892), and by Temple in vol. XXII, p. 327 (1893), of the same publication. Photo- n Tenasserim and Jalor many limestone caves are still . used as Buddhist temples, while in Trang and other Siamese States, and also in Yiinnan (pl. X XI), they serve the same pur- pose for Chinese worship. n parts of both the British and the Siamese Malay States small caves are occupied temporarily as habitations by jungle-tribes (see Skeat and Blagden, Pagan Races of the il it desecrated by Chinese Single large cavern was, until it was a tuceboecas the Orang Laut Kappir or Pagan Sea-Gypsies (Annandale, ). : The folklore of the caves in Burma and neat aa 4 bably very extensive, as they are universally regarded wi 394 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [November, 1913. : of the caverns themselves, although he makes an important contribution to the geology of the rocks containing them. F the interior of any of the caves. He visited those Moulmein and, in an interesting letter! published by the Ge gical Society of Italy (Bull. Soc. Geogr. Ital., 1888) dealt with their peculiarities and his collecting in them. The zoological results of his journey are published in the Ann. Civ. Mus. Stor. Nat., 1869-1897; many cave-haunting species are described b specialists in this important series of papers. e Batu caves near Kuala Lumpur in the Malay State of Selangor were investigated by Ridley at the request of t British Association, in whose Report for 1898 (pp. 572-582) published the results of his researches. Four caves are cate fully described and diagrams of two of them are given; the animals inhabiting their darker parts are recorded with notes on their habits. ee In 1899 the members of the Skeat Expedition to the Malay Peninsula visited the caves near Biserat in the Sia State of Jalor, which had not previously been invest In these they discovered several new cavern-haunting (described in Reports on the Expedition, mostly in the Pro igs of the Zoological Society of London, 1900-1903), © allied to those found by Fea in the Farm Caves. have been described in Fasciculi Malayenses (Liverpool, It 1905), in the supplement (‘‘Itinerary’’) to which notes ee caves themselves will be found (pp. vi and xxv-xxViil). | The caves of the islands in the Talé Sap are describe Skeat in his report to the British Association (1900) also in his Fi in Siam. Bi 1 Fea’s more detailed account of his wanderings (‘ Quave wmaine et le Tribu Limitri’’) is unfortunately not available Vol. IX, No. 10.] The Limestone Caves of Burma. 397 [N.S.] age of the whole given as Palaeozoic, the Moulmein beds being provisionally placed in the ‘‘ lower carboniferous group of European geologists.’’ In 1863 W. Theobald from the evidence of a few fossils procured from Zwah-ga-byn, a limestone hill which forms a prominent landmark above Moulmein po is popu — known as the ‘*Duke of York’s nose,’’ prono ced the age of the limestone as equivalent to the jarbonirous fiinentotie of Europe. He also regarded it as probable that the limestone met with in the Mergui Archipelago belonged to the same formation.! To quote from Theobald’s Memoir :— ‘*The most marked feature of this limestone is its mode of occurrence in steeply scarped hills, the sides of which overhang, as may be seen in the case of the ve P near Moulmein, which rise abruptly from the low inun plains between the Gaine and the Attaran rivers, a exhibit the precise appearance of what they undoubtedly were at no remcte geological period—sea-girt rocks, such as still stud the Mergui Archipelago, and which from their position in low-lying alluvial plains even now, during the rains, are approachable only by boats, through a mimic freshwater sea,’ Theobald also speaks of the existence of other extensive caves to the north-east beyond Toungoo It is not known what became of ‘the fossils mentioned by B. N. B : llowing nee were determined by F. Noetling* The fo who pronounced = to be of carboniferous (probably upper carboniferous) ag Schonpertas oldhami, Noetl. Lonsdaleia salinaria, Waag. and Wentz. nov Araepora cf ramosa, Waag and Wentz. Polypora cf. biarmica, Keyser Productus cf. sumatrensis, F. Roemer. Athyris, sp. Spirifer, sp. Bellerophon, sp. Vol. vat, Bhs ‘Theobald, On the Geology of Pegu. Mem. “Geol. Surv. India, 0. a F, Neat ing, Carboniferous Fossils from Tenasserim. Ree. Geol. Surv. India, Vol XXVI, Pt. 3, pp. 96—100. 398 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [November,1913. Pleurotomaria afi. durga, Waag. Murchisonia, sp. This fauna is one in which Indian and Sumatran types are mixed and it is probably of the same age as that from Zwah- ga-byn hill. It is in every degree probable that similar limestones of anthracolithic age extend to the far south through the Malay Peninsula, and that the caves of that area are in identical formations ! In the state of Pahang (F. M. S.), an extensive calcareous series consisting chiefly of limestones exists. It has been termed the Raub Series by J. B. Serivenor who writes *:— The big limestone hills form a picturesque feature in the landscape wherever they occur, similar to those on the west of the Main Range. Gunong Sinyum, with its The caves found in the hills are as beautiful as caves elsewhere in limestone country, but present no special feature.’ other structures have been reported, as well as some fairly good remains of Cephalopoda which C. C. Crick believes belong to the genera Orthoceras Cyrioceras Gyroceras and Solenocheilus, rom Lubok Sukum imperfect casts and impressions have been obtained which Messrs. Newton and Crick think may be | Caves in the Malay Peninsula. Brit. Assoc. Repts.,1898, p- 571. . pe ee The Geology and Mining Industries of Ulu Pp Vol. IX, No. 10.] The Limestone Caves of Burma. 399 [V.8.] as er it among them being an Aviculopectinoid impres- sion and some possible Br achiopod remains. J. eM alana is of the opinion that the Raub Series will prove to resemble the limestones and shales of the Southern Shan States described by C. S. Middlemiss. Skeat, observing the occurrence of fossils on some of the images of Buddha in the ono part of the Malay Sune was led to search for the ilps y from which the rock was obtained out of which the i ie gin carved, and it was at length found on the western flank of the great central axis of the Peninsula. From the fossiliferous limestone so obtained Prof. T. Mckenny Hughes determined a trilobite Up roctesh, encrinite stems and arms, hit d brachio- pods, including at least one Chonetes. ‘« Thereis se aalt anceeks ved and highly ornamented Pleurotomaria and a Cephalopod, which by its horse-shoe lobes confirms what is suggested by the general facies, namely, that the deposit belongs to the highest beds of the Carboniferous, or rather, perhaps, to beds intermediate between the Carboniferous and the overlying system to which thecom promise name of Perm o-Carboniferous has been applied. It is interesting to note that Messrs. Newton and Crick consider their fossils younger than the ones referred to above; but according to Dr. Annandale the limestone from which Skeat’s fossils were obtained was very different in structure 2 P. Lo 34. s Nios the above account was W ritten, J rivenor has pu an iferous, age of the rocks; they may be calpenaaecas or permo-carboni Other evidence’ unknown at the time when eee fesile were described, makes it improbable that they are permian’’ (p. 35%) adios shee. © Ichirs. He expressed the opinion, how sulied thet the Raub. Sor ae apparently a southwa d extension _- Portion of the dolomitic Smears of the_ m Shan acne ge ly einai, SE their upper parts and pointing to the teineres he the car ous sea southwards, fellowes ar an eastward retreat 0 he . - * Gotd ; ivanaland. Oceurrence and Geographical Distribution, a tee . Brit. ° Natural Ore oe ee of the Malay Peninsula. Assoc, stig 1901, 400 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [November, 1913. and appearance from that which formed the walls of caves in the neighbourhood. iam, the whole of the great range on the west which h limestone beds are found throughout the Malayan Provinces and in the Ratburi district. The Chieng Mai district towards the north and west, and where the Mekong turns from. east to south they again appear as a barrier of ever-decreasing the junction of the Nam Mun and the main river the great of Central Siam. Limestone pinnacles are found piercing the alluvium of Central Siam, as at Chainat, Prabat, and Permo-Carboniferous limestones are known to occur in Sumatra, Toba-landan, Timor and Rotti2 In Western Borneo they contain caves which are very similar to the Burmese and Malayan ones. Further to the east in Tongking and the Laos, limestones of the same age have been identified. To the north of the Moulmein, Amherst and Thaton districts the limestones stretch through Karenni into the Shan States. Caves are found in them along the edge of the hills bordering on the Shan States and dividing them from the broad plains of the Irrawaddy valley. These caves are well known as they yield large quantities of bat guano.* In the The dark-grey limestone frequently weathers almost , into pin- nacled crags, weather-beaten towers and walls: into deep basins and swallow holes (often as regular and circular as 1 W. A, Graham Siam, Lond 3 : ’ , on, 1912, pp. 86-98. See literature quoted by J. B. Seri L Brit. Assoc. Reve 1993, p “oo es No ie urkhill, Guano in India, The Agricultural Ledger, 1911, Vol. IX, No. 10.] The Limestone Caves of Burma. 40} [N.8.] a gigantic amphitheatre, but sometimes funnel-shaped) : into strange valley systems, without connection one with the other, and that often end mysteriously either as st themselves and become lost, as marshe where evaporation helped out no doubt by subterranean percolation causes a disappearance of th to innumerable caves and passages beneath the ground, some now high and dry from the waters that caused them and others again unknown fame and rich in their eae beauty of stalactitic ulate In the Northern Shan States Bees limestones are well known, and have been described in various papers appearing in the publications of the Geokoalaal Survey of India by T. D. La Touche.» Wherever they have been examined in this area by myself, depressions appearing on che surface of the ground hich they u nderlay have always been a striking feature, as has also been the fact that their drainage very these depressions vary in size from ‘‘ ee : of which the latter are by far the most common, and froth thse to enclosed valleys oe miles in length and breadth, tra- versed by running streams. These phenomena are due to “ahaa dissolution “of the rock and the consequent set- tling down of the roof of a cavity or cavern, too weak to support its own weight. Owing to the c the Sov sireamaes in the Northern Shan States, as a result of the In the Southern Shan States caverns are it is believed that systematic searching would reveal the presence of many others. . Deiner has described rich collections of antbracolithic fossils collected by La Touche and Middlemiss in the Northern and Southern Shes States. His opinion regarding their ages is quoted below ‘In brief the anthracolithic faunas of Burma and of ei Indian region (Salt Range-Himalayas), so closely — rts 1 C. 8. Middlemiss, Report on a Geological Reconnaissance in pa of the Sccuicer ane oa 8 tates nd Karenni. General Rept., esa India, 1899-1900, "130-13 eens especially T. “p, La Touche, stig oS oe the Northern. Shan States. Mem. Geol. Surv. India, Vol. XXTX, P' 402 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [November, 1913. geographically, must be considered as belonging to the same zoogeographical province. Their similarity may be interpreted as due both to their proximity in geographical ition, and to their stratigraphical homotaxis. i correlation places the anthracolithic faunas of the Shan States on the same level as the middle and upper Pro- ductus limestone of the Salt Range or of exotic block of Chitichun No. 1.’’! Although somewhat beyond the region treated of in this paper mention may be made of the fact that both devo- nian and anthracolithic limestones attain a considerable Mogok, Ruby Mines District, and in some of the Jalor caves there are large beds of freshwater shells and mammalian bones. PART IIl.—THE FAUNA OF THE CAVES. ___ The following list of the animals that have been recorded from the limestone caves o Burma and Malaya, or are repre- Malayenses, and from papers on the late Signor Fea’s Burmese collection in the Ann. Civ, M us. Genova (1889-1897). © have added obeservations of our own, more particu- larly on the Orthoptera and Pedipalpi. ! C, Diener, Anthracolithi oe a sae New Series, Vol. II, ep ae Pagans of the Shan States. Pal. Ind., 403 tone Caves of Burma. Vol. IX, No. 10.] The Limes [NV.S.] “AMOY JUEASYIpP B 4B QUSIY Hurye serveds aeorves ouios UII pe] BIOOsse UeEeq cau osu Avul qeyquUnMVYG 4yv Duodouryy eYy yeYyy e[qissod si 41 pue ‘soteds aeSavy youw v jo srequinu [remus Aq pemojjoy o10m 8Bq SSeUL “Froujnow, cage soejiut yZ *uoom]eg ey, uO yesedpy yu oAvO Bw WO; wees esuep 8 Ul snjpoud snwounofiay yo eDUETIOUIE EY} SEeqIIOSep ‘g-/ GR] IEA JeIOyZo eyy Joy vipuy jo Aoarng ourseyy, oyg Jo qlodey uonvaysiurmpy oy3 ut ‘uOsiepuy | ‘soroods Surjuney-eavo uouUIOD Vy By (‘uyong) snypoyd snmourohyy ‘OABD ONT[-[OUUNY ‘34Bp ‘SU0T EYy ur ‘setoeds aeyyo jo uolsnfoxe ey} | Apyuoredde 04 ‘stoquinu eSaey ur punog | -- yeyjyewureyq | -* “Hoon ‘wnpphydosovm puodousyay “Wma, ‘snuanjoo2nE "SOOWI [BIO] OFUI 4SBa] 4B Peprlarp ( wiuley,) 1070929 eq sse[}qnop ][[M 10 Ueeq eavy soroads 04} jo peroAag | pace (Jsa0]) 8NgA.107 uM ‘UoIgNg!44SsSIp Opi Jo sofoads Suryuneq-oavo uouwio, | (“jyood) vmapnep ad | (‘SSpoy) abrwun snuaprsodde zy “JSIOH ‘4ousw et "Js10H ‘stuiflo snydojouryy BOARD WaT | °° ** (uosqoq) vanjads sruozohuopy : (‘YOay) vpopnnoixazdun vikdanyuny ‘SOAGD Ue y O49 WOAT uMouy A[uo ‘osBO OUO UL SroquINU esavy ut Aortpry Aq punowy | ° soaey neg | °° ‘ds ‘snuagdoufig ‘eaoydoayy ‘SOABO JOSABl, OY} JO 9UO 04 dDUBIQUO oy} Ul UOlyIpedxy qroyg oey3 Aq paddea} sem usunaeds y | °° yedlesiqa IVAN |** "* (ABig)) suadsaubou snynoisog *BIOATJOOSUT ‘anduin’y] vyeny avou soaed ul sqsea AJuowu10) | °° soARy ngeg | °° 2 “oy ‘easbeg eyag *BIOATUIBS | | “VITVNWV ‘SHAVING YT ‘ALIIVOOT WAVO “SLI NT [November, 1913. 404 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. ‘SeABD 0} pouyUoD suvew ou £q | | ‘S@ABO UL puNoy st (Moleq eas) osvyd oped ‘ersunf ey} Ul puUNo} Ose yng eAvO vB WO’y poqtosep AT/eUIsIIO ‘ejsunl oy} Ur puno} osye : vpngs ‘uluog Avpep oy} Jo syavd guesoyrp ul seavo ur uoUIUIOD *SOABO UL Spoolg (S161) set “4 “snpy “4g ‘wry “yO ur ;‘aoyxyopAT Aq eumyuayams sisuaqnuns srusoowdng poy[vo st (eov1 40) soroods eyy, ‘soyou quonbesqns oag ‘Avp oy} Sulnp soavo url sdoquinu esae] ur sysoa ATyUoreddy ‘Sunquepes, ‘WY ‘apy Aq peuturexe Useq sey [[Nys [Issojqns y “Weyy 04 aur[noed you 4nq seawo esey} Ul UOUIMIOD ‘SOAWO SOY} JO GUO UI veg Aq USYye] sea UOTUTDEdS V ‘SuUUVNAYT ( «é jose eet aoe oe “yaRiry ‘wadsn ofng ze | (aoyjguny) poqual ‘* " soaeg nyeg | > Jesuejnog Wed 00 4 | *VIHOVULV EG oper fsoaeg nyeg °° a2 *(edog) snuneuan, ak "SIPIGEO "Wi llLd yy sad SaABy nye bee Jesuanog ‘wnprydojoos vuosobhry (‘Kvay) snyayojnd snjphjovpowwhp “BRITT 1008'T ‘WITILAIS YY deg 987, | es euUInyT ‘nypUnuouUL DIQDI0}I0D “SomTqoOLo By “SHAY | iojer | °° Iain ‘ewnyuajons snpapysowmasy | “BigueUTUIN yy ’ aoyep | ** “Away ‘207048 xingehyy M ° ww ° = oe IOTe(’ | ee e* SOAR) IST | °° ** (Away) ‘s27p80pi4jo enanwog “eR uepory | | ‘ALITVOO'T DAVO “INV NT 405 - 10.] The Limestone Caves of Burma, , No [V.8.] Vol. 1X ‘SI[TH 902877 ©Y} Iveu ereymou st qedestyy PUL “qUsedIg¢ pel]vo wpNsuTUEg ABB OY} ut eoed OU ST OO] ‘O1VMB OLB OM SBAIBSOg ~“AOTeL UI 4wAOSTE, Jo pooysnoqysieu oy} WOdF ULB 4f PUB < SII INAV] O43 Wo’ sem Yorym ‘edd, oyy gou st 4I ‘o[spuvuuy “N pus uosuiqoy ‘Op “Ht ‘srssey_y Aq uine=NjYy Ysigiia eyy 07 peyueseid Moueg ABpeyy eYy JO UL[S OY} OF SB JUOUIE}BIS S.10TINB SIZ UT peoljou eq ABU S10dI0 OMY | “Serpry Aq pepsooexy | e ‘AT[Boytoeds peyiuept yoy soavy nivg SOAR) IO]BE OY} WOsy UMOUy ATUG | -° r sore ‘BUIY U4oY JOU WOdy pepsoves OsTy ‘e[sunl oy4 ur punoy seroeds wv yyim [BoryUepT *eABO B UT puNo; AjuUQ | - - SOAR WB ST Arqyunoo uereyy ee ‘wABlB UL 80.80 EpIsyno serseds uoMUIOD ge "* Joyer a6 ‘sse[{no[oo puwe pulfq ‘ sezoeds Surpooeid ygrm punoy ‘soho qyiM pues peinojoo AjyUeTpiIUq { seaRo woij UMOUy AjUQ | '- ny. ‘uedo ey} Ul poom jo sZo[ aopun osje uowUuooun 9ON | *° SOABD UWB T ‘eABD V WOIS UMOUY ATUG, ee cs | { ** soper ‘ABO B UOJ} ST[OYUS pBap Wody UMOUY ATUDO SOABD WIRY "S8AR0 UI SB [[OM SB SYI[O Jepun soloeds uouIMIOD y "MOOG Gag "OABO B UOIJ UMOUY ATUG “BOARD OF OPIS]NO SOIFITBOOT [BIOAES WOI, popsoIo YT o* os ee ** JoTee SOAR) ULB a “ds ‘snanjavoawmsh pr eo ‘ds being peyopupuun rouunig ‘4oz090un cusuaiites (Aquryy ‘auawunug 4g) ‘waoydoporydnyy TAO ‘2oj8ab DyD)Qoanjpadg ( wary ‘punvtsaup 4) ‘ds maunjpdesay “IQB,] ‘O%u0uL saysosyayD ‘s1oydoyqig “* suraiy ‘sunjpnwis snuspoydhp "* surcry ‘opungepnd vanuna yr the Same oireg, i bee PNOC ‘enapur aidne “ernuesAyy, *VLOESNT seyAg ‘apusaan sisdo.ueg soadg “serppunwup DuLojs0yjsydgQ uoyserg ‘suav0uur spadgC ‘SIOW Op ‘asuazayayo, epadosos} esur[09 ‘ennjpw) nuojsojeedhi zy uosueg ‘2hayuny sanjdang *epodosey ‘VOSOTIOY 406 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. {[November, 1913. ~ YSIyM 09 ‘SOABO DSO} JO YSODIB] OY} UT spaeiq Ayjueasddy “s qt ‘deAOMOY OAR IBC] | *” } | if H SOABD NIV | ** *S0ABI 0} pouguod you Ajqeqoig “ Laie . ® “ . . ‘SOABO OF pouUgUod you A\qeqoid ‘! sejou aay * . n ” . ‘soroeds snopootuseavo ong) B sdeyieg * ‘9ABO B UI puNnoy you sem solooeds sty} Jo urroy Teord sy ayy, °° SeARD Ue °° ‘OABO B WOT) UMOUYy AUG | * ies ‘satoeds snojoorudteABo endg BION ** ** qojap | ** ‘soyisvied-qeq | -- ** qoper | ‘(MOTO 99s) [eBuag ut uedo oy} ur punoy soroods wv jo wos ofed v ace as ies ‘so1oeds snopooluaeARd ond] B éqeqoag'| lee “ ae ‘pouyuod 4ou sr 41 SCAB) ULTeg | * “spoarq ATJUo1edde ‘yorum Ul ‘seARd ©} peUyuod suvBoM ou Aq | :: “* sores ‘uletU[NOP, IvEU SEAS UT YUepUNqy | ** SVARO Weg | | ‘SuUVINGY ‘ALIIVOO'TT FTAVO | "awry eae ee ors careers Bere ete os “aou ‘ds ‘snzianypD *souotdioog “VadINHOVay os os ‘ds «é ** (‘q1e,4) suardraap ie *? pIDyNID UL ***(aqe.q) seusoo/6u0z onounun “BISIBJOZIYIG (3000047) ana/ nyduownynqung “IBA "G9090d) pajoo sisdojpqupy TBLIUIG {N7091UL9ADI SnzOUOIDLOGT (s10J0.7) snuDnoon) pu sryany shor “ByyeusopyD *VaOdVINANW dostedg ‘asuampis uoindipoos fr aestedyy ‘wnavpobod nrpuowhoy ea Sat ‘sisUaUroguiD DIRDgQtLIq9A AT T}qeunIg ‘susosaq_nd Danrd “B1OZAICT youre ‘vanjads sihyjsdhup a ‘qan,) ‘sepnj;o1d suns "* goygng ‘seuuadeunf{ senuig *e19ydopida'T "* “IBA JOSOy “s2Uyu0o piaUu0g “e19ydoueuré "aIWV N 407 S = ‘ ma) “pulq Ss! OAD WB E51, YX Jo syydop oy} Ul poom Burdvoep jo sooard Suourw tuoay AToAway) Aq poyoeyjoo podosy ‘> Fe 7e4F SU S119} Ose OFF =*paystjqnd useq eavy 0} savedde seroods sty} so ao\dit9sep ou yey} geyy sn SUIOJUL OBUTT[oH “apy 7 % ~: “ri pallinetaes > —— —— = SS ar tesa apna — — a aaa sara 7 SS re RW Papa Reams ae aA eee eee SS & ; = 1'Setoads oyy Jo royyne ou | oS T2AOdSIP 07 9[q’ Ueeq jou eaBYy eM = ‘Aa(pryT &q pepsoovey | +: Seaey nyeg | -- a snjxusaqur xt = ‘@ABO B WOME UMOUY A(UG) roTes | ** ‘pun'T-oppug ‘snznosn{ur oprpnus cS “epodosy $ | “VYROVISOU,) Ss | SOARD une sa oF oe ‘ds ‘npodoig Pan ‘LIROW S ‘sofoods snojooluseavo ona you A\quqo4sg { Wrusce bc, Ss aie ae uous ‘s1edoup snajoyg ae eh ‘IOUT, ‘engoul endayn py ie | SCAB) WIey | °° "* SOUT, '210G11L4aAn9 saistunpy F a j | | ‘oRouvIy = “UPEW[NOW JO pooynogyFiou ey ur seavo woay uMmouy [UG | ** Wiosse ue], | Se ae ‘IOUT, ‘snprsnd snabojn5 4 ‘soveds yeep | rs os 07 paver Ajosora §saavo 10[Bp) OF 07 pauyuod ATquqoag | °° qmojep | ‘UOIUTY ‘8n199199 snulshydobhig * he ‘(89}0U 0as) UleuTjNOP;, weou svavo oY} 0} pauyguoad Afquqo4y | -* ulosseuay | °° (“401,],) mpoours2an0 snuhahiyd bhig a ot, "80480 O04} OI) UMOUY A;UG ae rs | ‘+ AJOxBay ‘nzootussava (+499 +8) snumozyasy : om | re sn S94VQ *snsousof 5 Hs = S9AB0 07 pouyUuod JON | { SOAR) WIR | .f (se7°Q) 2uospu-poom snuojaodh py S _ ‘tdjedipeg 408 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [November, 1913. MAMMALIA. TInterature. 1876. Dobson, Catalogue of the Chiroptera in the British useum. 1889 Thomas and Doria, Ann. Mus. Civ. Genova (2) VII, 2 1888-1891. Blanford, Fauna of British India, Mammalia. 1900. Bonhote, Proc. Zool. Soc. London, 1400, p. 86: 1903. Bonhote, Report on the Mammals, Fasciculi Malay- enses (Zool.) 1, p. 1 The species recorded in our list are named for the most part on the authority of Dobson, who described one of the bats ; of Oldfield Thomas and Doria, who worked out the collec- recently sent for identification, with the teeth of a large tiger, to the Geological Survey of India. ne of the mammals are cavernicolous in the sense of living in caves without ever abandoning them. The bats, of has collapsed , frequenting them habitually for the purpose of dropping its dung. gg Ss ao) 2 s © =} pou S ° =} oO 2 Ss eS ° © 4 o 5 i=} -— in other antel _ _ Animals such as Mus surifer belong to a third category, 6a it is probable that certain individuals of the species take up 4 permanent abode in cav or the whole of their fo however, not cavernicolous. One of the cave-haunting mammals of Burma or Malaya, to what ver category they belong, appear to be modifi Structurally in accordance with this habit. Most of the species Vol. IX, No. 10.] The Limestone Caves of Burma. 409 [N.S.] have a fairly wide distribution outside caves, but Honycteris spelaea has only been taken in the Farm Caves, and in any case smaller Burmo-Malayan mammals, owing to the intensive study of the Oriental species now in progress in European and American museums. BIRDS. Literature. 1895. Blanford, Fauna of British India, Birds IIL. 1901. Bonhote, Proc. Zool. Soc. London, p. 68. then known, from C. francica (Gmel.), which is found in Ten- asserim, the Andaman and the Nicobar Is., as well as in the Malay Archipelago on the one hand and Arrakan on the other. C. innominata is known from the Andamans and from Tenas- Serim as well as the Malay Peninsula. REPTILES and BATRACHIA. Literature. 1898. Ridley, Rep. Brit. Ass., p. 572. ae 1903. Boulenger, ‘‘ Report on the Reptiles.’’ Fasciculi Malayenses (Zool.) I, p. 133. 1203, 1904. Butler, Jour. Bombay Nat. Hist. Soc. XV, pp. 387 1912. Boulenger, Fauna of the Malay Peninsula, Reptiles d Batrachia. N : the caves of Burma and Malaya, and no species of either hem. 410 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [November, 1913. typical form have been discovered sparingly in different parts of the Malay Peninsula, in which the species (except in caves) is apparently much scarcer than it is in other parts of its range. This is wide, extending from Malaya into Burma and the neighbouring countries, the Eastern Himalayas and North- ern China. No very young individual has yet been found in caves, but the smallest yet obtained in them—it was captured s may be stated with some confidence that Coluber taeniu- however, enter the caves: these find a plentiful food-supply in the bats and so grow to their full size without emerging. This phases (pl. XXII). The lizard Gymnodactylus pulchellus is a species occasion: ally found on tree-trunks in the jungle far from caves. It Tenasserim, it has not yet been found in any Burmese cave. ‘ 8 e other lizard on our list (Lygosoma scotophilum), al- t ne Be it was originally captured in the inner parts of one 0 u Cav : €8, has no striking peculiarity of colouration and has since been taken in the junge Vol. IX, No. 10.] The Limestone Caves of Burma. 411 [NV.8.] trunks in which, owing to the coalesence of the buttresses characteristic of some jungle trees, pools of water accumulate. t is sometimes almost amphibious in habits. The Batrachia recorded from the Batu Caves are noctur- nal species that also occur in the jungle and have no particular spelaeological interest. MOLLUSCA. Literature. 1871. Stoliczka, Journ. As. Soc. Bengal, XL (2), pp. 148, 217. 1902. Collinge, Journ, Malac. IX, p. 71. 1903. Sykes, Proc. Zool. Soc. London, vol. 1, p. 194. 1908. Blanford and Godwin-Austen, Faun. Brit. Ind., Mollusca, I. 1910. Preston, Rec. Ind. Mus., V, p. 33. In addition to the species of Mollusca included in our list there are others that have been found occasionally in caves ; for some land-snails occurring only on the limestone cliffs o the Siamese Malay States and Tenasserim, and also others of less restricted range (e.g. several species of Rhiostoma and Cyclophorus), occasionally make their way into caverns, while floods not infrequently wash in the shells of water-snails such as Ampullaria and Vivipara. Some of the terrestrial species Leas ° 3 5 (71 z cr > a) io) oS = — Sant =) i? pads 1 @ 5s) ot °o R ~ = ® > —) 8 ~—) iv) iva) = ~~) = ® < s ise) ive) 5 © o Qu % S ® So poses of protection or to seek food. The Streptaxis is so com- mon in the Farm Caves that we see no reason to think that it does not do so, while the Prosopeas occurs not infrequently in enormous numbers in the darkest part of the Jalor and Selangor Caves, apparently feeding on bats’ dung. Opeas mnocens, Preston, is only known from the Farm Caves, in which, how- €ver, only dead shells were found. under overhanging cliffs as well as in caves. ? si the The other molluscs, the names of which are given In 412 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal |November, 1913. list, are minute colourless species found as yet only on the floor of caves. They are probably cavernicolous in a strict sense, but nothing is known of their habits or anatomy. INSECTS. Literature. COLLEMBOLA. 1912. Imms, Proc. Zool. Soc. London, p. 80. ORTHOPTERA. 1888. Brunner von Wattenwyl, Verh. K. K. Zool. Bot. Gesells. Wien. XX XVIII, p. 229. 1893. Brunner von Wattenwyl, 4nn Civ. Mus. Genova (2) XIII (X XXIII), p. 193. 1897. Bolivar, Ann. Civ. Mus. Genova (2) XVIII (XXXVIII), p. 32. 1900. Annandale, Ent. Record, X11, p. 75. 1908. Kirby, Rec. Ind. Mus., I, p. 43. HYMENOPTERA. 1913, Wheeler, Rec. Ind. Mus. VIII, p. 233. LEPIDOPTERA. 1903. Swinhoe, « Report on the Moths ’’, Fascic. Malay. Zool., I, p. 99. 1909. Meyrick, Ree. Ind. Mus., I, p. 399. DipTEeRa. 1903. Speiser, “Report on the Diptera Pupipara”’. Fascic. Malay. (Zool.) sp. 1912. Brunnetti, Faun. Brit. Ind., Dipt. Nemocera. A noteworthy feature of our list of the insects of the Bur- mese and Malayan caves is the total absence of the names of beetles. Many species of the order must actually occur, but fication. This is also the case with the few Rhynchota that have been collected. the two Collembola (Neanura pudibunda and Cyphode- rus simulans) described by Imms from the Farm Caves, one apparently because it is colourless and blind; but other species of the genus precisely similar in these respects are found in Vol. IX, No. 10.] The Limestone Caves of Burma. 413 [N.S ] ants’ or termites’ nests and even under stones at the edge of water (see Carpenter, Journ. As. Soc. Bengal, 1913, p. 215). Neanura pudibunda is of a bright red colour and possesses eyes. The two species occur together. Among the Orthoptera of the caves the most interesting are the wingless grasshoppers of the subfamily Stenopelmati- nae, of which three species have been recorded from them, one from the Farm Caves (Diestrammena unicolor, Brunner), one from those of Jalor (D. annandalei, Kirby), and one from the Batu Caves (Diestrammena, sp.). A fourth was discovered by Gravely in the Farm Caves, but its specific identification is a little doubtful. It belongs to the genus Rhaphidophora and is identical with one (probably R. brunneri, Kirby) that occurs in the jungles of the same district. Unlike the species of Diestram- mena, which live as a rule on the cave-walls and on rocks D. unicolor is reported to occur in northern China (Vladi- vostok and Pekin) as well in the Farm Caves, but in Tenas- serim has only been taken in them and in those at Dhammathat in the same district. In the caves it is extremely abundant. It exhibits considerable individual variation in colour, and the nh nhene of our specimens are both antennae complete, but in caves has not been identified, and may be the same as one 0 alor have not been observed to do so. aaa . Most of the other Orthoptera in the list (including the 414 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [November, 1913. earwig Chelisoches morio) are nocturnal species which probably leave the caves at night. " to prove that they are modified in correlation with a caverni- colous life; indeed, they are darker than the typical form of The three species of moths found in the caves belong to two genera both of which are represented by many non- cavernicolous species. Meyrick, who described the Microlepi- dopteron Crypsithyris spelea from the Farm Caves, believes it to be especially modified in that it is colourless except for its eyes, which are, however, well pigmented. A similar moth he four Species of Diptera recorded from the caves three B Nicteribosea amboinensis, Raymondia pagodarum and : no Vol. 1X, No. 10.] The Limestone Caves of Burma. 415 [N.8.] The insects actually identified and recorded from the caves probably represent only a small proportion of those that occur. MYRIAPODA. [nterature. 1890, 1891, 1893. Pocock, Ann. Civ. Mus. Genova (2) X (XXX), pp. 384. 401, XTIL (XXXII), p. 390. 1898. Ridley, Rep. Brit. As., p. 580. 1901. Sinclair, Proc. Zool. Soc. Londen, p- 517. Millepedes are often common in the caves, which. in Jalor at any rate, are a favourite resort of large Polydesmidz (such as Platyrachis malaccanus) by no means exclusively caverni- colovs. It is probable, however, that some Oriental Myriapoda A particular interest attaches itself to the Scutigerae, which are often found in caves as well as under stones and logs in the open, for very little is yet known of the Oriental repre- sentatives of the family. Probably no species of this family on our list is strictly confined to caves, and all are strongly pigmented. An individual seen on an ! Specimens of this species often become brown in spirit, but in life the animal is very nearly white. 416 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [November, 1913. armless and does not attempt to bite when captured. It e have to thank Professor Silvestri and Mr. A. 8. Hirst for naming several of the Myriapoda mentioned in our list. ARACHNIDA. Literature 1889. Thorell, Ann. Civ. Mus. Genova (2) VII (X XVII). 1889 (1890). Oates, Journ As. Soc. Bengal, LVIIL, p. 4. 1898. Ridley, Rep. Brit. As., p. 580. 1898. Thorell, 4nn. Civ. Mus. Genova (2) XIX (XXXIX), 2 p. 279. 1900. Pocock. Faun. Brit. Ind., Arachnida. 1901. Simon, Proc. Zool Soc. London, p. 76. 1912. Gravely, Rec. Ind. Mus., VII, p. 107. Among the Arachnida of the caves the Pedipalpi, of which one of us has made special study, are of particular : Pp : le fi interest. We propose therefore to deal with them family by family in considerable detail. PEDIPALPI, THELYPHONIDAE. Hypoctonus wood-masoni (Oates). Gravely obtained a n Scorpion und The few immature specimens of Hypoctonus which were found in and around the Farm Caves probably belong to this i to the Moulmein form, H formosus, Butler ; Farm Caves resemble those at Dhammathat Vol. IX, No. 10.] The Limestone Caves of Burma. 417 [N.S.] more closely than those at Moulmein, and the Farm Caves do not appear to be separated from Dhammathat more completely than is Dhammathat from the next rocks in the direction of Mulai-yit or the Dawna Range. ’*Hypoctonus formosus, Butler. This species is said by Thorell to have been found by Fea in the Farm Caves (Ann. Civ Mus. Genova [2] VII [X XVII], p. 526), but he does not appear to have seen Oates’ paper species had been described ; nor does he appear to have noticed any such differences himself. Moreover, it is impossible to tell from his paper whether the specimens he saw from the Farm Caves were sufficiently mature to admit of specific identifica- tion. SCHIZOMIDAE. Schizomus (s. str.) cavernicola, Gravely. prising as many non-cavernicolous forms are without recog- nizable eyes, while a species from Prome, on the other hand, has real eyes with a convex vitreous cornea. ne or two immature specimens of this family were seen under stones in a sheltered crevice of the rocks outside, but none oi them were captured and we cannot say whether they belong to this species or not. TTARANTULIDAE. Simon. The former occurs in the caves of northern Tenasserim, the latter in those of Jalor. 418 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [November, 1913. a distinct species; for Saigon must be quite as completely separated from Khayon as Jalor is. Flower records the occur- July 1801. p. 49); doubtless this is also a Stygophrynus. Mr. from Klingkang, a limestone mountain range in Borneo. The great length of the femora of its antenniform legs suggests Stygophrynus cavernicola, Thorell. Thorell described this species from specimens obtained by ea in the Farm Caves (Ann Cir. Mus. Genova (2) VIL. (X XVII) 1889). It has since been obtained at the same place both by Annandale and by Gravely, while the litter found a few specimens also in dark corners of the small! and we'l-lighted Buddha Cave at Dhammathat, but none in the long dark Guano Cave at the same place. are directed a little backwards and upwards, not directly out- wards as in the genus Phrynichus. 1s scorpion-spider, like Phrynichus. seems to regard its extreme flatness as its best protection against ordinary enemies, and on the approach of a collector with a light it only clings the ) ility totouch This m the fact that their cavernicolous life practically limits their food Vol. IX, No. 10.] The Limestone Caves of Burma. 419 [V.8.] supply to insects of the sub-family nine which have enormously long and very sensitive ante ti gerous specimens of 8, sieeraiioe se to have been pees “although Gravely made a special search for them and obtained a number of specimens which appear to be mature. | — the species breeds during the rains, as do Stygophrynus cerberus, Simon, Simon described this species from specimens obtained in caves in the neighbourhood of Biserat in the Siamese State of Jalor (Proc. Zool. Soc., 1901, p. 76). It is much more abundant than the Moulmein species, and is larger, darker in colour, and more heavily built. It is known to breed in May and June, the female carrying her eggs in a sac covering the lower surface of the abdomen as in other species of T'arantulidae. It resembles the Tenasserim species in its habits; both sexes sit on the walls of the caves in total darkness, with the femora of the antenniform legs crossed over their backs; they feed on the Locustid Diestrammena annan- dalei, which they catch with their arms, in spite of the fact that the insect is very active and is cons tantly feeling for the approach of enemies with its enormously long antennae, Sections of the eyes have shown them to be pigmented and apparently well oe but it is sindbis whether they are sensitive to light or n Catagius pusillus, Thorell. Fea obtained the type of this species in the Farm Caves (Ann. Civ. Mus. Genova [2a] VII [XX VIT] 1889, p. 531). Gravely has since obtained other specimens from the same place and from the Buddha Cave at Dhammathat. They live under stones, especially in the large Farm Cave, at the end furthest from the entrance; one or two immature specimens were found under stones in a crevice on the outside of the rocks. No ovigerous specimens have as yet been seen. The antenniform legs are unusually variable in length; as a rule their femora are about twice as long as the carapace is broad, as in non-cavernicolous species; .but in one or two speci- mens they are about three times as long as the carapace is broad, i.e. very nearly as long, in proportion to the size of the body, as in ieee cavernicola. In addition to the Pedipalpi, a species of scorpion of the genus Chaerilus (stated to be new but not described) is recorded by Ridley from the Batu Caves; while three kinds of appar- 1 At k loakt one of them contains ova, apparently ready for extrusion. 420 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [November, 1913. ently cavernicolous spiders are known from different localities in Burma and the Siamese Malay States. One of the spiders (Talanites cavernicola, Thorell) belongs to the family Drassidae. Thorell described this species from a single mutilated specimen obtained by Fea in the Farm Caves, and we believe it to be the one common on the floor of the large Farm Cave and of the Guano Cave at Dhammathat. The other two spiders are Pholcids and spin webs among rocks in the caves, but it is very doubtful whether either of them is strictly cavernicolous ; indeed, one of the two, which lives on the walls in the Farm Caves, is also found in the Karen Cheba Hills ; this is Althepus pictus, Thorell. The other species (Pholcus diopsis, Simon) is only known from the caves of Jalor. everal mites were found on the bat Rhinopoma micro- phyllum from the Guano Cave in Dhammathat, one of which has been referred by Warburton to the genus Uropoda. CRUSTACEA. Literature. 1898. Ridley, Rep. Brit. As , p. 581. 1902. Budde-Lund in Lanchester, Proc. Zool. Soc., p. 379. The only Crustacea recorded from the caves are two wood-lice, one described from Jalor and one recorded from the Batu Caves near Selangor. It is noteworthy that although the former (Armadillo infuscatus, Budde-Lund) is paler in colour some species of its genus, it is no paler than one (4. pal- soy stones or logs, from which it d vat pie Bh ye as much in the dark, and has almost as es oa os for well-developed ‘*feelers,’? as one that ples the darkest recesses of a cave. It is in relation t0 @ Vol. IX, No. 10.] The Limestone Caves of Burma. 42] [N.S] furtive existence in the open that the sensory peculiarities of the Tarantulidae and the Stenopelmatinae have probabl originated. Nevertheless, a cavernicolous life is not in all respects e frequent it by day (especially the bats) bring in with them from outside an abundant food-supply for animals that can in case for the predator to possess organs of perception, in order that it may detect the presence of vigilant prey ; in the other for the prey to possess similar organs whereby it may be form legs of the Arachnid and the antennae of the insect are even longer and more delicate than is usually the case in their respective families. As a general rule, among the groups represented in the Burmo-Malayan cave-fauna, colouration is more readily the moth Crypsithyris spelaea and the myriapod Cambalamor- pha feae) it is probable that feebleness of pigmentation has 422 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. {[November, 1918. cavernicolous life. The question whether we are dealing here with two entirely different sets of phenomena, or merely wit cases in some of which an individual peculiarity has become hereditary, can hardly be discussed without a consideration of the possibility of the inheritance of acquired characters. And sufficient evidence is not forthcoming. In any case, there can be no danger in asserting that no species found in the caves of Burma and the Malay Penin- first. to consider another, to wit, What cavernicolous forms are most highly specialized in the palaearctic zone? Many of from the light of day; these chambers and the passages that lead to and from them contain streams and lakes on which necessarily correlated, the former has undoubtedly played a very Important part in the production of the peculiarities of faunas such as that of the Mammoth Cave the similarit fauna of the countries we are considering is that involved in or m les t , separated localities, but not, apparently, at any intermediate Vol. IX, No. 10.] The Limestone Caves of Burma. 423 [V.S.] point. Any statement as to this phenomenon must be quali- specific identity but with instances of convergence? At present it is not possible to give a satisfactory answer to these questions. APPENDIX. 1. Note on clay tablets from a cave in Kedah. (Plate XVIII). The inscriptions on the fragments of the clay tablet are not sufficiently distinct to be read fully and their subject to be ascertained certainly. From the letters which form a word and render sense, and are identifiable without doubt, my idea is that they contain something more than the usual Buddhist creed, the ‘‘ YE DHARMA,” etc. As regards the age of the inscription, its script pushes it down the later part of the 7th century A.D. The letters which T have identified without doubt are eight in the large fragment and eight in the small one. The eight letters: MA, HA, VO, DHI, forming the word ‘‘MAHAVODHI”’: the ini. tialin fourth line; and TA, THA, GA, TO, forming the word “ TATHAGATO’? placed towards the end of the tenth line of the large fragment, resemble MA, HA, VA, DHA, TA, THA, GA, in table IV, column XVIII, XIX of G. Buhler’s ‘‘ Grundriss der Indo Arischen Philologie und Altertumskunde.’’ And this is also the case with the other eight. In the small frag- ment the four distinct letters DHA, MA, HA, TA, forming word ‘‘ DHA (R) MAH (EK) T(U)’’ in the beginning of the first line and TA, THA GA, TO, forming the word ‘‘ TATHAGA- to his own statement, of 675 .D., and belong to the alphabet of that period which is called the Kutila variety of the Maga- dha alphabet of the 7th century A.D. Consulting the fac- Similes of the inscriptions of that period, I find that the © letters I identified in the tablets are allied to those in the 424 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [November, 1913. inscriptions of Adityasena and Jivita Gupta II published by Dr. Fleet in his Corpus, Vol. III. The letters TA, THA, VA, GA, DHA, HA agree with those in Adityasena’s Aphsad stone and Shapur image inscriptions; while the ‘ MA’ agrees with that in Jivita Gupta’s Deo-Baranark s The rest of the characters, which I did not gather from the tablets as I could not make any sense of them, appear akin to the same inscription. For instanceit may be noted that ‘‘YA’’, the first letter in the second line, *‘ LA’’, the third letter count- ing from the right side in the sixth line of the large fragment, and VI, PU, LA, the three letters occurring after two letters in the second line of the small fragment, conform to those characters ia the said inscription. Moreover the mode of affixing vowels to tir terest agrees throughout with that of the said : : nscriptions. B. B. BrpyaBINoD. 2. Note on clay tablets from caves near Moulmein.' (Plate XX), This representation of Gotama seems to be peculiar to the Burmese, the Shans and the Siamese. It is called in Burma a ‘‘Zabupade’’; it always represents the Buddha in full regal dress; the head-dress is often, as in these tablets, a three-tiered crown surmounted by a pointed ornament; on both sides, attached to the crown, are appendages or wings; from the large holes in the lobes of the ears depend two ear ornaments the ends of which touch the shoulders, both arms have large arm- lets; the dress appears to be richly embroidered, with side ornaments at the shoulders. It is called Zabupade (Pali: Jambupati) because, it is said, there was once in India a king, Jambupati by name, exceed- ingly proud and fond of rich dress; the Buddha, to curb his pride and vanity, assumed miraculously a regal dress in com- parison with which the king’s was simplicity itself, and preached to him a sermon on the vanity of the things of this world. It is to commemorate this event that the Buddha is thus represented. sence of Shan or t ntry. These tablets appear to be not earlier than the 18th ce™ A.D. tury C. DuRotsELLe. sei ils SOS Ne ee es oe ! The specimen figured, which is now in the Indian Museum, is #ro™ the Buddha Cave at Dhammathat and not, asstated on the plate, from the m Caves. The specimen found in the Farm Caves bore the sam design, but was broken in two an was more strongly weathered. Jour. As. Soc. Beng.,Vol IX, 1913. Plate XVIII. Bemrose, Colle. Derty. ENLARGED PHOTOGRAPHS OF FRAGMENTS OF CLAY TABLETS FROM A CAVE IN KEDAH. — Specimens in the Raffles Museum, Singapore. Jour. As. Soc. Beng, Vol IX, 1913. Plate XIX oe ca BSE AG gies or ry ecru ee : a i i Raetthtedinstimstldinsionsianteniiaen, we Bermrose, Colts Derby CLAY TABLET FROM A CAVE IN PAHANG. 4 Specimen in the Raffies Museum, Singapore. Plate XX 3eng., Vol. IX, 1913. As. Soc. Ben, eh ae ae a Benrose, Cotte. Derby CLAY TABLET FROM THE FARM CAVES NEAR MOULMEIN. late XXI. TD |= f GES AT ENTRANCE TO CAVE IN LOWER CARBONIFEROUS LIMESTONE TA~SHIH- “WO, YUNG-CH’ANG FU PREFECTURE, YUNNAN, CHINA. Plate XXI1. Jour. As. Soc. Beng., Vol. IX, 1913. Se a Sa Oe Fete \ IDS ‘ 22 _ ata ARN Ss ~~ ro o bar 3 S — 2 g. a 426 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [November, 1913.] to take place, for the valuation of halogen after the — of some days showed that the substance had remained intact *3474 gave °5470 Cl: Cl=38-95. Cale. for C,H,;. CH,. NC1l,: Cl= 40°34. seen, however, that aft er the lapse of a long time hydrolysis had indeed taken place, benzaldelyde being as before a produc On the other hand, when dichlorobenzylamine was left in a stoppered bottle for a few days, it was found that small crys- tals made their appearance on the sides of the bottle in con- tact with the liquid. On opening the stopper, a pressure was felt from within, and besides the smell of this compound, a dis- tinct smell of free chlorine was gee The bottle was stop- pered again and allowed to remain, the pressure being released from time to time; the whole liquid ultimately solidified into a mass of crystals, which on examination was found to be ben- zoic acid. The reaction is explainable thus :— C,H,CH,NCl, + 0,=C,H,.COOH + HCl + N + Cl. the oxygen required for the reaction being evidently obtained from air confined in the bottle. The above equation necessi- tates the liberation of oe which could not be detected under ~ above circumstances verified. My thanks are due to Professor P. C. Ray:for his encour- agement in carrying on the above investigation. a ‘ ee i ae BP ODO eee 46. India in the Avesta of the Parsis. By SHams-ut-utMAa Dr. Jivanst Jamsueps1 Mont, B.A., PH.D Anquetil Du Perron, the great French scholar, having seen a few stray pages of the Avesta writings in his country, had come to this country as a soldier-adventurer to study that language, and, after passing through this city, had gone and settled at Surat, the then head-quarters of the Parsis. Having studied the Zend Avesta there for some years, he returned to France and published in 1771 his Zend Avesta, containing the French translation of the Scriptures of the Parsis. Sir W. Jones was the first to run him down one duped by the Parsis of Surat. He said that the Avesta books he had brought to the notice of scholars in Europe were not genuine and were a fabrication of the priests. The late Prof. James Darmesteter, a talented country-man of Anquetil Du Perron, who has for the first time translated into Avesta, which it pronounced a forgery. It was the future founder of the Royal Asiatic Society, William Jones, a young Oxonian then, who opened the war. He had been wounded to the quick by the scornful tone adopted by Anquetil towards Hyde and a few other English scholars: the Zend Avesta suf- fered for the fault of its introducer, Zoroaster for Anquetil.... . It is true that Anquetil had given full scope to satire by the stvle he had adopted: he cared very little for literary elegance, and did not mind writing Zend and Persian in French; so the new and strange ideas he had to express looked stranger still in the outlandish garb he gave them.’’' Summing up t . that the Avesta books he had discovered were genuine. Some of them in showing this, took the help of the Sanskrit guage, of the scientific study of which Sir W. Jones h 1 $.B.E., Vol. IV (1880), pp. xv-xvi. 2 Thid., p. xvii. 428 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [November, 1913, laid the foundation. Had Sir William Jones himself lived long, he would have soon corrected his somewhat hasty con- clusion, for which, one must say, the translations of Anquetil themselves were, a certain extent, responsible, because, though they did all credit to him as a great scholar, they were after all crude. Sir ones had no opportunity to see the Ree S88 he eee ee ae ae and in the peninsula of eee As the Parsis are the ruins of a people, so are their sacred books the n this short paper, I want to collect those passages in “that small book, the Avesta,’ which refer to the land of ‘the tolerant Hindus,’’? who kindly gave to the Parsis the h m 99 important branches of the Aryan or the Indo-Iranian stock of people, knew something of each other’s country from ve ti : Mysore Opponents of these Pahlavs. They are supposed by some to e the same as Sa uk general of Alexander the Great. If so, we see in this opposi- Ibid., Xi-xii. aeenores of Hindu Law or The Ordinances of Menu,’’ by W. Q ts Jones (1794), p 294, ee ee ee ee Vol. IX, No. 10.] India in the Avesta of the Parsis. 429 [V.S.] tion another instance of the constant struggle oe the al and the Persians for the su upremacy in the Kas The coins of the Pahlavas were found in the dominions of Kan ‘ahha, a Buddhist king, because they lived in his extensive dominions. These coins had the name of Avesta deities on them Radjatarangini, the History of Cashmir,? si to some Gandhara Brahamins (ara s@qa) of the Mlechha dynasty (Wade aw) in the reign of a king Mihira Cula, the Mirkhul of the Ain-i-Akbari. This Mihira Cula is depicted by the author of the Radjatarangini as a wicked king in whose reign the Mlechhas had an ascendancy. He had founded a temple of Mihiréswara and cos city of Mihirapur ‘‘ in which the Gandhar Brahmans, a low race.............- were permitted to seize upon the endowments of the more respectable order of the priesthoo While t teil in Cashmere some years ago, a learned Pandit of Shrinagar told me, that the Gandharva Brahmans referred to in the Radjatarangini were Zoroastrian Mobads or priests. Some other statements in the Radjatarangini* about them seem to confirm this identification. These references to the Zoroastrians of Persia show that India knew Iran from very old times. Similarly, we nes from the Avesta te Tran knew India from very remote tim o the Iranians of the times of se. Avesta, the then asin world consisted of five countries. These are mentioned in the Farvardin Yasht which is, as it were, the canon of the ancient Zoroastrians. It contains the names of the ancient Iranian saints whose Farohars or good spirits are invoked in prayers. In it, the saints of the following five countries are invoked :— 1. Airyanim dakhyundm, i.e. the country of the Airyas. 2. Tuiryanim dakhyundm, i.e. the country of the Turani- ans. 3. Sairimanim dakhyunam, i.e. the country given to elam by king hala tea country of Rum, or Asia Mi nor and Eastern Europe. Saniniam dakhyunam, i.e. the country of China. D&hinam dakhyunam, i.e. the country of the Dahe, a people of Central Asia. or dian Anti- 1 Vide ** Zoroastrian Deities on Indo-Scythian Coins. (In quary, Vol. XVI Part CCVII). Vide Mon. E. Druin’s aie hegre ‘*Le Nimbe et les Signues de 1’ Apothéose sur les Monn. ora es ego Scythes’’ (Revue Nummismatique. Quatriémme Série, Tome wees Pele 190). r ‘Cashmere and the ancient Persians,’’ arc * Bk. I, slokas 306-309. 5 Farvardin Yasht (Yasht XIII, 144). 430 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [November, 1913. catalogue, the first being Airyana-Vaéja, or the Iran Vej, the Tran proper of the early Iranians, or, what can be called the Hindus. India forms a part of the country of the Airyas named in the Farvardin Yasht. Coming to the question of the direct references to India itself in the Avesta, we find, in all, four references. They are . the following :— I. The Vendidad, Chap. I, 19. If. Yagna (Sarosh Yasht) |g 3 Bee's III. Meher Yasht, 104. IV. Tir Yasht, 32. {. Of these four, the first, viz. the reference in the Vendidad, seems to be the oldest and the most important. The passage runs thus :— anchadasem asanghamcha shdithranamcha vahishtem frathweresem, azem yo Ahuré Mazdao yO Hapta-Hindu, hacha Indus) up to the West of the Hindu. Then, th created therein, as a counter-act (against its excellence) exces- sive menstruation and excessive hea ‘ e learn from this passage of the Vendidad the follow- ing facts about India:— (1) That India was the fifteenth of the 16 Aryan countries, known to the early Iranians as created or blessed by God y : (2) It was known as Hapta Hindu. (3) The country watered by the Indus formed India, and its boundary latterly extended further both ways, towards the East and the West. (4) It had, as it were, two curses or miseries associated with it. Let us now examine these facts. 1. Firstly, let us consi er, why is India spoken of in the Vendidad as the 15th country? The answer to this question the Vendidad, were those to which the ancient Aryan or the {ndo-Iranian race migrated one after another. Others, like Dr. Vol. IX, No. 10.] India in the Avesta of the Parsis. 431 NS. Spiegel, thought, that this chapter only contained a list of the countries known to the ancient Iranians. Prof. Darmesteter took it merely as ‘‘a geographical description of Iran.’’ I think, that the chapter contains an enumeration of the countries which were occupied, one after another, by the ancient Irani- ans, and in which the ancient Mazdayacnan religion prevailed to a more or less extent. e very beginning of the chapter helps us to say so. It runs thus :— ‘““Mraot Ahuro Mazd4o Spitamai Zarathushtrai azem dadham Spitama Zarathushtra aso ramé-daitim noit kudat- shaitim. Yedhi zi azem ndit daidhyim Spitama Zarathushtra aso ramo-daitim ndit kudat-shditim vispo anghush astvao Translation.—Abura Mazda said to Spitama Zarathush- tra: O Spitama Zarathushtra! I have created (all) countries O Spitama Zarathushtra! Had I not created (all) countries to give pleasure to its inhabitants, but had created them as destructive of pleasure, then the whole of the living world have crowded in the country of Airyana Vaeja with large snakes. After creating Iran, as the first of the crowded Iran. Thus, one after another, as one city or country got overcrowded, another was created and made h All such countries had with their advantages, one or another ached to them. India was the fifteenth country in the list, and the disadvantages attached to it were, ‘a) that it was excessively hot, and (b) that there, women had to pass through the state of menstruation at a very early age of life. / e the countries named in the Vendidad are the following :— Names in the Avesta Modern names. 1. Airyana Vaéja - Iran. ae 2. Sugdha (Sogdiana of the Greeks) Samarkan 6uru : :. Merv. . Méur 23 oo 4. Bakhdhi 46. 4 ~~ sealkh. 432 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. 5. Nisaya 6. Haréyi 7. Vaékéréta 8. Urva 9. Veharkana 10. Harakhaiti 11. Haétument 12. Ragha 13. Chakhra 14, Varéna 15. 16. Scholars differ on the question of the identification of some of these countries. mentioned well-nigh last. is very doubtful. re of Panjab Hapt-Hindu The country ne ar Rangha Vedas. The Hapta-Hindu of the {[November, 1913. Nishapur. Herat, or Nimrouz or Seis- tan. Kabul. Gourgan. Sarasvati. Helmand. Rae. Hapta- The word shows Vedic names. Sindhu Vitasta Parushani ipas Satadhru Kubha and . The seven branches were the following :— idek niches Mahabharata Modern names. | names. Indus Lae ewres Sindhu. Hydas .. | Jhelum. Akesinis Tchandrabhaga | Chenaub. Hydraortes Airavati Jaf ew, Hyphasis ipasa Biya. Hesydrus Satadru Sutlej. ophen oe teas It looks strange, but it is a fact, that the co its people were known to the ancient Greeks and are even — Vol. IX, No. 10.] India in the Avesta of the Parsis. 433 [N.S.] now known to the moderns including the cori sete en by their Iranian names. The indigenous Vedic country, through which the Indus (which has veil at nam India, to the country) flows, is Sapt-Sindhu. So, the sitions ought to have been kno wn by the name Sindhustan and sh Hindustan whic th is a fonina of the old Iranian name. river has preserved its old Indian name, viz. Sindhu, but the country has taken its Iranian name Hindu (Hindustan). The all the other Westerners, knew this country and know it even now, by its Iranian name. e Greek name of one of the branches of the Indus, viz. sete eae Jhelum (Vedic Vitasta), i is Hydaspes. This name is Tra e word ‘‘ aspes’’, which forms the second part of sha name, is Avesta ‘‘as a” corresponding to the Sanskrit a4 (asia) ates equus,’ horse. We find the word in the Avesta and Greek names of another Persian river also. It is the Hvaspa of the Avesta,! the Choaspes of the Greeks, the modern Cherkheh. Unfortunately, we have not in the extant Avesta the names of the seven branches of the Indus. But this Greek name of one of the branches shows that the ranch was named by the Greeks after its Iranian name. Similarly, the main river and the country itself were named after their Iranian names In the Sassanian times of the later wings hi commentators of the Avesta, the Indus having only five branches, the covered another reason for the name. ‘They said: ‘‘ Av hapt-Hindukanih hand Aigh sar-khuda haft ait, 8 4.6, i¢ is called Hapt-Hindu, because there are seven rulers over it. Possibly there were seven rulers ruling over the land of the Indus ~ hs tim As stated by. Dr. Haug, at least two facts lead to show that the go in which the name of India occurs as Hapt-Hindu, was written many centuries before Christ. had founded Ecbatana (Agabatana, Hamdan). That was in B.C. 708. This great city of ancient Persia is not mentioned the Vendidad, was written Hane before B.C. 708. Secon ndly,, the city of Balkh, which is named as eee in the Vendidad, is — of there as the vad of ‘‘ Eredh | Zamy&d Yasht, 67. Vide my paper on the river Karun (Asiatic Papers, 1- "Spiegels Text of the Pahlavi Vendidad, p. 7, 1. 1. 3 Bk. 434 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [November, 1913. drafshim,”’ i.e. the city of the exalted drapeau.’’ This state- ment shows that it was still at that time the capital city of Bactria, carrying the royal banner. Now, we know, that ria fell i as Hapt-Hindu, i.e. as ‘‘ the country of the seven rivers of the Indus,’’ a long time before 1200 B.c. - Coming to the third fact, we find that the country of India, as first known to the Iranians, before about 1200 B.0., tarem Hendum,’’ j.e. the country of Hindustan, extends from the East of the Indus to the West of the Indus. This sentence is not found in some of the old manuscripts of the Vendidad.' So, it seems, that it is a later addition by way of a comment. The later Pahlavi rendering of the So, it appears that the Avesta sentence is a later addition _» # commentator. Anyhow, what we find from this passage is this: At first, it was only the country watered by the Hindu was known as the country of Hindustan (India), but latterly, gradually, the country both on the west and the east of the country so watered by the Indus was included: in the name Hindu or India. : astly, we come to the question of the curse on the heat and its women had to pass through a period of menstrua- tion ata very early period of their life. We know that this is true of India even now. F aving examined the four inferences that can be drawn tom the passage of the Vendidad which is the first and the i; I Vide Westergaard’s Text, p. 346, note 5 to para 19, where he says 25 Ko, R omit these six words hacha Hindum.’’ 2 Spiegel’s Text, p. 7, 1. 3. Vol, ren 10.] India in the Avesta of the Parsis. 435 [V.S.] principal reference “ = in the Avesta, we will now look into the other refere bi ee gs apptes to India in the Yagna (LVII, 29) runs thus :— a Yatchit ushastairé Hendv6 ageurvayeité yatchit daosh- tairé Nigné Translation—Who goes from Hindustan in the East to Nineveh in t Here Siaoela, re Yazata or Angel presiding over Obedi- ence, is represented as marching in his chariot of swift horses, from the East to the West. India (Hindva) is here represented as the Eastern boundary and Nineveh as the Western boun- dary of the then known Iranian country. Scholars differ as to the meaning of the last word nigné. Some do not take it to be a proper noun. Darmesteter takes the eastern boundary to be the river Indus, and the western the river Tigris. But Yagna speaks of ‘India as = eastern boundary of the terri- tories of the country of Ira III. The reference to ae in the Meher Yasht (104) runs thus:— Mithrem vouru-gaoyaoitim yazamaidé yenghé daregachit bazava fragerewenti mithrd-aojangho, yatehit ushas- tairé Hindvé ageurvayeiti yatchit daoshatairé ranslation--We invoke Mithra of wide Sashes owe ews whose extended arms bali that person who aks to his promise (mithra), whether that person be in Hindustan in the East of Nineveh in the West he Meher Yasht treats of Mithra, the Yazata or Angel o of Light, who is believed to preside over ‘‘truthfulness.’’ He they happen to be in India in the East or Nineveh in the West. The phraseology ogee = same as that in the Yacna, the aie ee also is the sa Fro e above wi references of the Yacna and the Meher Yasht, we find the following two facts :—- Ve Firstly, they have dropped the word Hapta or seven from the name of the country and no longer speak of it as Hapta-Hindu, bat speak of : only as Hindu. This shows, ~ latterly, the name Hindu r India was not confined to the country watered by the poet but was extended to be other than this. 2. Secondly, the rule of Persia ——— at the time gee Nineveh in the West to India in the Eas . The last reference to India in the Tee that in the Tir Yacht (32). It speaks not of India itself but of one of its mountains—the Hindukush. The passage runs thas :— 436 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [November, 1913. “Aat tat dunman ham-hishtenti us Hindvat paiti garoit.’’ Translation—Then vapour arises from the mount Hindu. Tistrya is the Yazata or angel presiding over rain. So, in the Yasht which treats of an account of this Yazata, the watery vapour which forms rain, is referred to as arising from Mount Hindu, which is identified with the Hindukush. DE INO SUS kX bk ye 47. The Twelve Bhuiyas or Landlords of Bengal. By the Rev. H. Hosrsn, S$.J. Bengal.’’ Prof. Blochmann wrote in Contributions to the Geography M Dr. J. Wise pushed the subject considerably further in J.A.8.B., 1874, p. 197 et sqq.; 1875, pp. 181-183; and Mr. H. Beveridge offered some other important elucidations in J.A.S.B., 1904, pp. 57-63. . Wise quoted among his authorities (1874) the Latin edition of du Jarric. We shall translate presently two pas of Bengala, which comprises about two hundred leagues of sea- coast, was inhabited partly by native Bengalis, who are gener- ally Pagans, partly by Saracens, for the most part Patans or Parthians [Persians], who, having been driven from the King- om of Mogor, which they h 1 Allusion to the events of 1576. 438 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, [November, 1913. above them. Yet, they do not call themselves kings, though they consider themselves such; but, Boyons, which means perhaps the same as Princes. All the Patans and native Ben- galis obey these Boyons : three of them are Gentiles, namely those of Chandecan, of Siripur, and of Bacala. The others are Saracens; however, the King of Aracan, called King of the Mogos, also holds part of it.’’ Cf. Hist. des choses plus memorables...., Bovrdeavs, 1614, Vol. III, 826-827. In Vol. I, 602, we find: ‘‘ The great Mogor attacked them with a powerful army, and having killed the tyrant [King Daud], who had usurped this country, with his chief partisans, he left the government of that kingdom in the hands of twelve per- sons, who plotting secretly against him subdued those of dolin or Maasudalin, as some call him. The King of Arracan also possesses part of it, even of what is on the frontiers, quoted by Dr. Wise through d’ Avily, J.A.8.B., 1875, p. 181. Several other references to the Bhiiiyas can be found in the Portuguese historians. bout 1605, Philip de Brito de Nicote tried to persuade of] Sundiva, where he fortified himself, and the twelve Boides tendered him their submission, and that he determined to march upon Chatigaio [Chittagong] and pass into Arracao; and that, at the very time when the Mogor marched against Siripur, the Mogo went to Bengala with all his fleet, for the sake of attacking his neighbour, the King of Tupara [Tippera], but that he withdrew to Arracio, leaving the greater part of his fleet and artillery at Catigao [sic].’’* 1 Cf. Colleegao d» documentos ineditos tT i . 2 ..., Tom. Vi, 1¢ Serie, Decada = ~ iG da India por A. Bocarro, Lisboa, 1876, pp. 131, 440. - £0id., Tom. VII, 1* Serie, Vol. II, Lisboa 1834, p. 226.—At Vol. IX, No. 10.] The Twelve Bhiiyas of Bengal. 439 [V.S.] Added to this, we have the authority of Manrique, whom his sojourn of a year at Higli, of about 6 years at Chittagong, and his travels in Orissa (1640), to Dacca, Gaur, and Rajmahal, had made acquainted with the whole tract over which the Bhiiyas ruled. The twelve Bhiliiyads, according to him, were those of: 1. Bengala; 2. Angelim [Hijili]; 3. Ourixa [Orissa]; 4, Jassor (Jessore]; 5. Chandevan; 6. Midinimpur [Midnapore]; 7. Catrabo [Katrabuh]; 8. Bacala [Bakla] ; 9. Solimanvas [Sulai- manibad]; 10. Bulvé; 11. Daca; 12. Rajamol [Rajmahal]. (Cf. Itinerario, 1649, p. 20, col. 2.) the twelve Boiones, and ave mentioned them too. The whole tract is most fertile. The largest towns are Daack, or Daca, Rajamol, or Ragmehel, Midinimpur, Burduan, Katra- bo, Cateca. Its most frequented barbours are Vgulim (Higli]. a Portuguese foundation, Piple in the Kingdom of Ourixa, and Balassor in the same Kingdom. It has other harbours; but, being less frequented, they are less known. All these lands are limited to the south by the Gangetic strait, into which by four vast mouths the Ganges discharges its voluminous, rapid and wholesome waters.’’ after Sulaiman Shah of Bengal, and he suggests that the name i j ars son, Prince Selim, afterwards known as Prince Jahangir. i Beveridge, The District of Bakargan), pp. 118-119 “¢In the Introduction to a Samskrt dictionary, the author gives the following genealogy of his patron: Muchha or Murch- 4 Khan: son of ‘Isa Khan, son of ’Silamana Khan. (Note by & —_— a . e . Babi Manmohan Chakravarti.) From the proximity of Soli- of the tain of the lao. Cf. Index, p. 762. 440 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [November, 1913. manvas to the ancestral possessions of ‘Ist Khan we might conclude that it was thus called after ‘Isa Khan’s father. In the case of Solimanvas, the ending vds represents the abad of many Muhammadan towns, altered by the Hindis to a form they understood. As for Ilahabad, the reverse change took place. Cf. J.A.S.B., 1904, p.78. Thévenot and Valentyn wrote Halabas, and Bernier Zlabas. 2. Catrabo.—This place is identified by Mr. Beveridge with Katrabuh or Katibari near Sabhar, in the Manikganj sub- ivision, where there is still a ‘‘tappa’’ called Kathorabo. Cf. Proc. A.S.B., 1903, pp. 133-134. After other attempts at identification, he proposed the same solution in J.A S.B.,1904, p- 62, Dr. Wise had advanced a more satisfactory solution, I believe, in J.A.8.B., 1875, XLIV, p. 182. “Catrabo is Katrabo, now a ‘tappa’ on the Lakhya, opposite Khizrpar, which for long was the property of the descendants of ‘Isa Khan, Masnad-i-‘Ali.’’ According to Dr. Wise, branches of : : ; cp. These con- clusions of Dr. Wise are favoured by the fact that Van den (Tamluk} on the Meghna — Loricul and Siripur goes strongly A : 2 “ 0 have Katrabih), which was ‘Isa’s residence. J.A.S.B., 1904, rose in importance, and that it. was close to Sonargion, Mr. H. Beveridge’s identification of Katrabih with Goraboe of. Vol. IX, No. 10.] The Twelve Bhitiyas of Bengal. 441 [N.S.] Rennell’s map, N. of Dacca, and a little N. of Ekdallah, on the right bank of the Lakhia or Banar (Cf. ibid., p. 59) does not appear to me acceptable. 3. Chandecan.—The kingdom of Chandecan has been identified, correctly I believe, by Mr. H. Beveridge with Dhi amghat, near the modern bazar of Kaliganj, on the Madhu- mati. For the discussion of the proofs, mostly based on the early Jesuit letters (1598-1602) cf. H. BrvERipGE, Bi, 1876, pp. 71-76, and The District of Bakarganj, London, Triib- o Proc. A.S.B. Hiigli itself, was then called the river of Chandecan. In | the Jesuit Residence at Higli was dete as situated i in the Chandecan district.2 Cf. J.A.9.B., 1911, p. 16. ‘* Chandecan or Ciandecan,’’ writes Mr. Beveridge, a evidently the same as Chand Khan, which as we nae from the life of Rajah Pratapaditya by Ram Ram Bosu (modernised by Hari Chandra Tarkalankar), was the name of the former proprie- tor of the estate in the Sunderbans which Pratapaditya’s father mente i got from ines Daoud. Chand Khan relapsed into eile Reis ; would be ruined, as he had taken upon himself to resist the Emperor of Delhi, and therefore Bikramaditya, who was his minister, took the precaution of establishing a retreat for him- ett Linschoten’s Le Grand Routier de “Mer, A maidens - 1638, eo already published as Pt. II of his I — ofte ie _ eee Te orte 1596, Ch. XI. Navigation d& cours des I It is to be regretted a Ventrée du fleuve Ganges au Royaume de Bengala. that Burnell and Tiele did nat oe it in eis Hakluyt edn. of van L cater s work. I made in List of Portuguese Jesuits in Bengal, J.A.S. oe 25. the Catalogu ‘* College of Bengal’’ is eae ed in the Va a a _J., who has had access to tes of Chandecan. Fr. H. Josson, 8.J how the mistake : b above the o, which gave the look of 1664 hs a mis Sear froin "Brass rae 14 Aug. 1913). 3 Masnad-i-‘ 442 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [November, 1913. but to the King of Guouro”? [Gaur]. Seizing his lands would put an end to ‘‘Akbar’s”’ i Bengal.' It was not advisable either that the treasures of the — King of Chandecao, a man de pouco poder e de gente pusillanime, should be let fall into Akbar’s hands? In a letter of Bishop Dom Pedro to Dom Jeronymo de Azevedo, Viceroy of Goa (Lisbon, 15 March 1613), there is t. Beveridge could find no mention of Chandecan in the old maps. I find it referred to as ‘‘Ile de Chandecan’’ in a n ¢ao de documentos ineditos, Tom. VII, 1¢ Serie, Tom. [, Lisbon, 1880, p. : 3 a 354, Cf. ibid., Tom. VIII, 14 Serie, Tom. II, Lisbon, 1884, p. 392. Vol. IX, No. 10.) The Twelve Bhiiyas of Bengal. 443 [N.8.] map of Sir Thomas Roe (1632) reprinted by the Scottish Geo- graphical Magazine, 1902. A copy of it can be seen along the staircase of the Imperial Library, Calcutta. Again, it is to be traced in the earlier editions of van ripen oes Sieg Angelim [Hijili] is placed in the Island of Chandec Father A, Monserrate’s map (ante 1600) mentions also Gunes He places it on the coast, at the mouth of one of the outlets of the Ganges; but, as he did not visit Bengal, his authority in this matter amounts to little. Bernouilli was, probably, not far wrong when he stated that the Province of Satgaon was esate called Kandecan.! The Bhiiyas proposed by Dr. Wise for the period 1576-93 are: — 1. Fazl Ghazi of Bhowal. 2. Chand Rai and Kedar Rai of Bikrampir (Sripar). 3. Lak’han Manik of Bhalua 4. Kandarpa Narayana Rai of ‘Chandradwip. 5. Isa Khan, Masnad- Lae of Khizrpur. 6. Raja Pratapaditya of Jessore. 7. Perhaps, Mukund Rai of Sane (J.A.S.B., 1874, p. 199. Blo-zhmann speaks of the Bhiiyas of Bhaluah, oni Chandradip, Faridpur, the 24- Parganahs. and ‘Isa Khan, tioned in the Akbarnamah as the chief of the Twelve Bhiaiyas (J.A.S.B., 1895, p. 305). These lists do not agree. Taking the Jesuit list of 1599 as our standard, we find that the Masandolin of the Jesuits was ‘Isa Khan, Masnad-i-‘ Ali, yet seat was at Katrabuh, rather than at Khizrpur, as shown y Mr. H. Beveridge, J. AS.B., 1904, p.58. The Bhiiya of Bouts (Bakla) corresponds (?) to Dr. Wise’s No. 4; the Bhiiya of Siripur to Dr. Wise’s No. 2; the Bhiiya of Chandecan is Manrique’s No. 5 and Biosiunann” 8 Bhiiya of the 24- Parganas, (with Jessore excluded, oe Manrique). The Bhuiya of Solimanvas (Manrique’s No. 5), Muhammadan, as we should expect, tallies with Blochmann’ 8 Bhiiiya of Faridpu Even after ata out the Bhiiya of Bosnah in Dr. Wise’s list, we see that his list, which refers to a period only slightly earlier than that of the Sele contains more than three Hindi Bhitiyas, i.e., Nos. 2, 3, 4, 6.” True, we are in 1 Cf. Deser. Histor. et Géogr. de l'Inde, Vol. II, Pt. I, p. 408. — otes on Prataipaditya’s life ef. H. Ratney, f attnees Bes Sel, Krishnagu, in Sel. from the Calcutta Review, VI (Febr.-May wagtt ie 267-287, or Calcutta Review, XXV (July 1885), pp- 104-1163 ot guid : es 1 the son of the Raja of *‘ Busna, Hindi S oecacile a Christian, while in captivity at Chittagong, and took the name of Don 444 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. {November, 1913. the same case with regard to Manrique’s catalogue, the Bhiiiyas of Chandekan, Jassor, Bacala, and Bulva suggesting Hindu Zamindars, and it does not follow that Manrique or Dr. Wise is wrong for the period each refers to. Dr. Wise’s list has the disadvantage of relegating to a enumeration takes in the whole of Bengal. Dr. Wise objected to it because Orissa, ‘* Jagannath,’ and Midinipir could not have had separate rulers, and the name of Bengala seemed to recall the fabulous city on which so much was written by the travel- lers of the XVIth and XVIIth centuries. (J.4.8.B. 1875, 9. o a town, can never have created any difficulty to the travellers visiting Bengal in the XVIth and XVIIth centuries, Unfortunately, so little attention has been paid to the accounts of Bengal written Satgaon, Chittagong, and even such places as Higli an time. It is easy to understand why ‘‘ Bengala’’ should have been placed at Chittagong by Portuguese cartographers. The first Portuguese settlement was at Chittagong from about 1534, and, till the time when they founded Hiigli (1578), ‘to go to Bengala, placed it at Chittagong, on the Cosmi (Bassein) tiver, too. We have letters from Chandernagar dated ‘‘ A a - But, this is no reason why we should get impatient and speak of Bengala as a mythical city, or fancy that it was somewhere in the Sundarbans and has long since been swept Antonio do Rozario. Set free, he vai is rya Fv0 : ’ prevailed on many of his ryats to come Christians. The descendants isti w mostly ; * Ps ge of these Christians are now most Vol. IX, No. 10.] The Twelve Bhiiiyas of Bengal, -- 445 [NV.8.] away by a tidal wave. This theory, lately revived by one of our University lecturers, has no chance of finding favour.' Since the twelve Bhiiyas are invariably represented as vassals of a King Emperor, we should understand that the King was not himself one of the Twelve. This conclusion is borne out by the practice still in vogue in Arakan in 1631. (Cf. infra). We saw above (p. 442) that the Bhiiiydsare spoken of in 1610 as subject to the King of Gaur. Manrique says that the Monarch of Bengala ‘‘who resided formerly at Gaur’? (cf. p. 20, col. 2) had under him ‘‘ twelve petty Kings in the twelve Provinces under him.’’ The Bhiliya of Manrique’s Bengala must then have been governor, not of a mythical city, but of the dis- trict where the King or Emperor had his capital at the time being. Now, since the twelve Bhiliiyas depended in 1640 from the Moghul Emperor, and Gaur was reduced to a heap of ruins, can, who had been Emperor of Bengal before the Moors conquered it,’’ which I find in an unpublished letter of Fr. John Cabral, S.J., November 12, 1633, serves to puzzle i by Babi Cosmographie, ou okes, é of the whole World, and all the principall Kingdomes, Provinces, Isles thereo on 652, jons the following towns in Benga r possibly Chittagong], Ta on, ala, Gouro, Catigan [Satgaon, I ge

“A massive statue of gold, as large as St. Christopher.’ This expression of Biron’s is worth comparing with Friar Odo- ! Cf. our previous notes in J.A.S.B., 1912, pp. 133-144; ad bre ae 2 Cf. C. Biron, Curiositez de la Nature et de V Art, a gong deux Voyages des Indes: l'un aux * Occtdent ¢: MDOCITI p. utre aux Indes d’Orient en 1701: & 1702. Paris M ig $ Cf. Yule, Diary of W. Hedges, IIL, pp. exxv, cxxvi, oxxxvil, * Cf. Ibid., pp. exxi, exxii. 452 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [December, 1913. The idol,’’ says Odoric, ‘is as bi as St. Christopher is commonly represented by the painters, and it is entirely of ted hr round its neck it hath a collar of gems of immense value. And the church of this idol is also of pure gold, roof (and walls) and I, p. 81. less remote from our own days, who had had the advantage of coming closer to Puri. The point to be remembered is that in Odoric. Is it not rather tradition reasserting itself about 400 years later? Biron’s informers had not seen the idol of Puri, described it to Odoric. Yet, in bot es, itis c ared to the giant St Christopher, who according to the Légende dorée de oragine (Paris edn. 1843 | Pp. 179) was ‘* terrible in appear- ance, and twelve cubits hia Wile ___ I must quote still another allusion to diamonds in Jagan- nath’s eyes. I take it from “An account of the Countries, Vol. IX, No. 11.] The Pitt Diamond. 453 [N.S.] ‘Cities and Towns, adjacent to Bengal, contained in Mr. Plaisted’ s Map, by a Gentleman who resided there many years,’”! ; ‘At Jagranaut, there is a Pagod of another kind, which is resorted to by Pilgrims from all parts of India. It stands in a Plain about a Mile from the Sea, and is built of Stone in the shape of a Canary Pipe set on the end. It has no Windows, but is illuminated with Hundreds of Wax Tapers, which burn Day and Night. The Idol is an irregular Figure of Black Stone, with two rich Diamonds placed near the Top to represent Eyes, and the Nose and Mouth are not carved but painted with a red Colour....’’ Our researches have reached a stage where we may con- fidently deny all connection between Pitt’s diamond and the would form a fruitful theme for sagacity and critical acumen ; ut, we do not feel specially tempted just now to bring the texts together. Summary of the Question. Pitt’s allusion to the diamond in his letter (Madras, October 18, 1701) to Sir Stephen Evance, London, supposes an earlier allusion from his correspondent. The diamond was offered to Pitt at Madras in December 1701, bought by him in February (2) 1702, and sent home on October 9, 1702. On cused o v. : ] Company probably apprehended trouble from the Great Moghul, betors honk seal seat appears oe have charged Pitt of that it had lett the country long ago. Pitt’s emphatic declara- tion (Bergen, July 29, 17 10) of how he obtained the diamond from the jeweller Jarchand leaves us in the dark about its pro- venance; but, Hamilton’s account (ante 1728) obtained from Glover, who had introduced Jarchand to Pitt, points to the Golkonda mines. So does the account of Salmon (1752), who absolves Pitt from all manner of compulsion. The diamond had been sold to France in 1717. i ist 1 from Calcutta I 1] Bartholomew Plaisted’s A Journa in Reagan Oe 3 aoe England in the year MDCCL. 2nd _ grrr 1757. “Our Calcutta libraries appear not to possess any copy o ve 60. C : ‘*The East India here [at Cuttack], some of the Factory here [ 17? ] 50." ‘ct z Past and Present, Vols. III & IV, pp. 602-603, through which I quote. 454 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (December, 1913. We have traced the legend of previous stones in the eyes of Jagannath in the following authors :— 1. Friar Odoric de Pordenone (c. 1321) may be understood as describing the idol of Jagannath. had a collar of gems about its neck, and was as great as St. Christopher. . Tavernier, who was at Hugli in 1666, writes that the idol had two diamond eyes, and a diamond hanging from its neck. A jeweller, who was making off with them, was struck down on the threshold by the irate god. 3. The Vabcirat-ul-Nazirin, referring to facts which oc- curred between 1690 and 1713, states that the eyes of the idol consisted of two jewels, and that the statue was sent to Aurang- zib at Bijapur, where it was broken on the steps of the mosque. us Bae given our reasons for considering this story as apocry- phal. 4, The ubiquitous Manucci, writing between 1699 and 1701, relates how two Portuguese, brothers, dressed up as jogis, were a to live in the temple and ran away with its diamonds. 5. On August 4, 1701, C. Biron passing near Puri, heard of two rubies in the eyes of the idol, which was as big as St. Christopher. Note the proximity of this date to October 18, 1701, when Pitt wrote to Sir Stephen Evance about the stone which he acquired so soon after. 6. Fr. G. Tachard, S.J., in a letter from Chandernagar (January 18, 1711) speaks of a Frenchman who, disguised as a jogt, introduced himself into the temple and stole a ruby from one of the idol’s eyes. The story had happened about 30 years before! 7. Fr. Bouchet, 8.J., writing from Pondicherry (April 19, 1719) reproduces part of Tavernier’s description of eS idol, and suggests that the other things he relates (the theft of a ruby, of France. aimed at. Coming so iding the stone in a gash in his thigh, brought it from the mines of Parkat to Madina ane Anquetil du Perron, passing through Puri on June 6. » was told that the idol’s eyes consisted of a ruby and a carbuncle and that a Dutchman had stolen the rub ry . 7: es ave also compared with these stories four eatlier ones hailing from other places, Vol. IX, No. 11.] The Pitt Diamond. 455 [N.S.] According to Alberiini, an idol at Multan had two precious stones in its eyes. e Jesuits relate in 1604 that the idol of Mahesse (Maheswar ?) of Diu had had its eyes (consisting, probably, of precious stones) gouged out by a Portuguese soldier. inally, Faria y Sousa describes an idol seized at Calicut by the Portuguese in 1502, which had two emeralds in its eyes and a large ruby on its breast. Another idol at Cranganor had three rubies on its forehead. The two passages in Faria y Sousa bear some resemblance to Tavernier’s description of the Jagannath idol. eS 8 Oe Oe ss A REPORT ON THE BIOLOGY OF THE LAKE OF TIBERIAS. TuirD SERIES. List of Subjects dealt with in Third Series. Page Planarians ge ; .. R. H. Whitehouse, M.Sc, .. 459 Molluses a & .. H. B. Preston .. .- 465 Aquatic and Semi-aquatic Rhynchota .. Dr. G. Horvath a«. S47 The first series of papers in this Report was published in Vol. IX, No. 1, of this Journal, pp. 17-88 (1913); the second series in the same Volume, No. 6, pp. 111-258 (1913). 49. The Planarians of the Lake of Tiberias. By R. H. Wuirrnovuss, M.So., Queen’s University, Belfast. Communicated by Dr. N. ANNANDALE. (Plate XXVI). . One o them, Planaria tiberiensis, was obtained in three localities, viz. from ‘‘a small brackish spring running into the lake near and from ‘‘a pool near Ain-et-Tineh, under stones.’’ second species (Planaria salina) was obtained from ‘‘ the lower surface of stones in saline water near et-Tabghah’’; while the third (Planaria barroisi) was taken from the edge of the Lake at Tiberias. year they lack sexual organs and reproduce by fission. Thus when only non-sexual individuals are available, their identifica- ays remain uncertain, and the matter cannot be finally settled until periodic observations can be made. of the animals in this collection were non-sexual, and thus their identification is at present only provisional ; but it is hoped that the descriptions and figures given will be a useful foundation for any future periodic work that may be attempted at the Lake of Tiberias. Planania tiberiensis, n. sp. (Pl. xxvi, figs. 1 to 4.) This species was collected in three localities, two near Mejdal and one near Ain-et-Tineh. The only difference between the animals from these collections was that the ees ity taken from the spring at Mejdal were smaller than in the other collections, which merely indicated that most of them were younger specimens. i e a length of the animals from the brackish trunk 13mm ‘ ‘ when apparently full grown. The specimens from the spring 460 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [December, 1913. running into the lake at Magdala were much smaller and measured slightly under 3 mm. in length and barely half a milli- metre in breadth. However one specimen measured 5°7 mm. and another 4 mm., while one attained a length of only 2:4 mm. Dorsally, the colour in spirit is a dull and rather dark brown, and evenly distributed; the ventral surface is some. what paler in colour than the dorsal, though the difference is not very marked ; in fact in many cases the colour was similar on both sides. ! blunt anterior end; as a result of the lappets a well-marked neck region is present. In the collection taken from the spring at Mejdal the form of the head in most cases was semicircular _ Careful search has been made to detect the presence of auricular sense organs (lateral sensory grooves) on the side of the head, but they could not be detected with certainty on the whole animal. Serial sections however revealed these structures Dr. Annandale informs m : Be ee ; @ that the animals were dark rey in colour _ eanented, but that the fixative had the effect of chain the erey to brown. The fixative used was that recommended by Steinmana —30 ce. str itri : : : 40 cv. dist. war a acid, 30 ec. concentrated corrosive sublimate and Vol. [X, No. 11.] The Planarians of the Lake of Tiberias. 46% [N.S.] cedarwood oil. The pharynx normally occupies the middle of the body, but its position may vary considerably; such varia- tion is easily explained if the animal reproduces by transverse fission. for, at least in other species where this method is adopted, the constriction occurs immediately posterior to the mouth of the parent. The mouth is the only aperture present. gut were not so wide and appeared only as a delicate ramify- ing system. It is particularly interesting to trace the course of the digestive system in the bifurcated caudal region of the speci- men which showed this feature prominently. A glance at fig. 4, which was drawn with the aid of a camera lucida, shows: that at the level of the mouth a well-marked branch is given off from the main posterior lateral branch, thus fully providing for the nutrition of this secondary part; moreover, this subsi- diary gut will be seen to form a definite forking a little beyond half-way along its course in strong resemblance to that of the main body. Further, sectionizing proved that the nervous system was represented in the ‘‘limb’’ in the typical way, viz. by two lateral nerves. Without asserting it to be the case, the suggestion nevertheless occurs to one that a new individual It has already been remarked that no trace of reproduc- tive organs could be found; it must be concluded therefore that fission in some form occurs, at any rate at some period. Planaria salina, n. sp. (Pl. xxvi, figs. 5 & 6.) his species was collected in saline water near et-Tabghah. on an average 25mm. and 1 mm. in length and breadth reapece Yo s largest was 3-2 mm in length and 1 mm. in breadth, were of smallest attained only a length of 1:6 mm. and a breadth o ‘8mm. In colour they are distinctly pale; b The short head is typically —— and preg i ern : i a neck; k, with no oe just behind the head, but it can scarcely be called a neck in the same sense ae in the previous species. rounded anteriorly. : e eyes sie a forward position in the body, though 462 Journal of the Asiatic Socrety of Bengal. (December, 1913. relatively far back on the head, being in Jine with the angle formed at the junction of the head and the trunk; they are closer to one another than to the side of the body, and no pigmentless area is distinguishable round them. The auricular sense organs are not visible in the whole animal, but in section they are present as a patch of ciliated epidermis, devoid of rhabdites, with an underlying nervous felt-work situated at about the level of the eyes. As a rule the animal tapers rather suddenly to a blunt point posteriorly. The gut is varied in appearance, sometimes lobate terminations to fine branches. The pharynx varies in position from the middle to almost the posterior extremity. Gonads are completely absent. Planaria barroisi, n. sp. (Pl. xxvi, fig. 7.) Among the Palestine collection was a planarian which probably corresponds to the ‘‘ planaire noire indéterminée”’ referred to by Barrois! as being found in the Lake of Tiberias. nly a single specimen was collected, and from its brittle and contorted body appears to have been dead when collected; in Beas auricular sense organs are very clearly seen as elon gated clear areas exactly on the lateral head lobes. 2 p mouth, the only aperture on the ventral side, is placed Speier: Pipripiid end, and in front of it is the pharynx, is to ha a and °5 mm. wide, no trace of reproductive organs In colour, dorsall : . » dorsally the animal is a very dark brown, pd gi black in spirit ; ventrally the colour is somewhat aa _-t appears to be quite a distinct species from P. tibert- , Snce its size, colour and particularly the prominence and ' Th. Barrois, * Contributi s : ES : : > ution & |’étud de Syrie- Revue Biologique du nord de Ja France T 1. hove eon ges Vol. IX, No. 11.] The Planarians of the Lake of Tiberias. 463 [N.S.] form of the auricular sense organs are quite unlike those of this species. EXPLANATION OF PLATE XXVI. Figures 1, 5 and 7 were drawn by the aid of Bausch and Lomb’s projection drawing apparatus ; figures 2, 3,4 and 6b camera lucida. Fic. 1.—Planaria tiberiensis as seen when cleared in cedar- wood oi E > nlarged 12 times. 2.Form of head in same species, showing position and form of auricular sense organs (a. s. 0.) Enlarged 20 times. 3.Form of the head of a young specimen of the same species. Enlarged 16 times. 4.—Bifurcated caudal region of a specimen of the same species showing the course of the gut in the branch (to left of figure) ; ph. pharynx; g. gut; s. subsidiary lobe; m. main trun 5.—Planaria salina as seen when cleared in cedar-wood il. Enlarged 16 times. 6.—Outline of another specimen of same species. 7.—Head region of Pianaria barroisi as seen when cleared in cedar-wood oil. Enlarged 12 times. Journ.,As Soc. Beng.,Vol. IX,1913. Plate XXVIL. 5x 16. PLANARIANS FROM PALESTINE. so. A Molluscan Faunal List of the Lake of Tiberias, with Descriptions of new Species. By H. B. PREsToN. (Plate X XVII.) The following paper is the result of a request by Dr. N. Annandale to identify an extensive collection of mollusca re- cently collected by him in the Lake of Tiberias. giving at the same time a molluscan faunal list of the Lake with the geogra phical distribution of each species. The student of fluviatile and lacustrine mollusca willat once be struck by either the total absence or paucity in number of the thinner and more fragile genera, such as Limnea, Physa, Ancylus, Pisidium, etc., while the heavier, ‘‘ shelly ’’ forms such as Unio, Theodoxis, and Corbicula appear to be well repre- sented, a fact which is probably due to a surfeit of suspended mineral matter in the waters of the Lake. The species enumerated are given on the faith of the various authorities who have been consulted in the compilation of the list, but the author himself in no way vouches for their specific validity, as many of them (notably those of Messieurs Bourguignat and Lozard) have not been accessible to him. onclusion the author wishes to proffer hanks to his friends Mes ude C. Legassicke-Crespin, to he former for much useful bibliozraphical assist and t Family LIMNAIDAE. 1. Limnza auricularia (Linné). Distribution: Northern Europe, Siberia; two specimens which I am unable to separate from this species were collected by Dr. Annandale at the north end of the Lake; | am unable to find any other record of its having been collected in the Syrian Lakes. [Those specimens were taken, with those of Physa tiberia- densis, in filamentous algae in a boat submerged in the R. Jordan at its entry into the lake.—N. Annandale.] 466° Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. {December, 1913. 2. Limnaea virginea, sp. n. (Plate XXVII, fig. 1.) inflated, marked with oblique growth striae only ; suture im- direction, diffused above into an outwardly spreading, well defined, parietal callus which reaches to the upper margin of the labrum ; labrum acute ; aperture very large, broad and some- what dilated below. Alt. 5°75, diam. maj. 4, diam. min. 3 mm. Aperture: alt. 4:5, diam. 2°75 mm. Hab.—Semakh to exit of the River Jordan (Type) ; also W.-es Semakh (young specimens only) (Annandale). . in about 6 metres of water in the Family PHYSIDAE. 3. Physa tiberiadensis, sp. n. (Plate XXVII, fig. 2.) Shell ovate, perforate, dark brown ; whorls 4 rapidly increas- ing, convex, shouldered above, the last large, marked with rather coarse, transverse growth striae; suture impressed ; umbilicus deep, moderately wide ; columella margin what vitreous, out- wardly expanded and reflexed, rather vertically descending, extending above into a thickish, well defined, parietal callus which joins it with the upper margin of the labrum and gives to this almost the appearance of being continuous; labrum simple, slightly dilated at the base and very slightly bent inwards over the aperture above ; aperture ovate. Alt. 13°75, diam. maj. 9, diam min. 7 mm Aperture : alt. 7:5, diam. 5:5 mm. Hab.—Mouth of River Jordan, N. end of Lake of Tiberias. among algae. (Annandale). Family MELANIIDAE. 4. Meélania tuberculata, Miill. : Mousson, Cog. Terr. Prof. Roth, Zurich, 1861, pp. 60-61, sp- Generally distributed throughout Southern Asia, N. and N. E. Africa, N. Australia and the Mala i 1S Malay Archipelago. Off the Jewish cemetery near Tiberias in 84 metres ; 8S. end Vol. 1X, No. 11.] Molluscan Faunal List of L. of Tiberias, 467 [N.8.] of Lake of Tiberias off Semakh in 4-5 metres; bed of Jordan at its exit from the Lake (dead specimens): between the exit of the River Jordan and Semakh, south end of the Lake (4-6 metres) (Annandale). 4a, Var. elongata, Locard. Arch. Mus. Hist. Nat., Lyon, iti, 1883, pp. 225-226. Occurring generally with the ty pica form. (Annandale). of from 4 to & metres. ’ De ad wells are sebaule common in the R. Jordan at its exit from the lake.—N. Annandale.] 5 M. ies. Noress. ( ?=tuberculata, Mill.) Tristram, Proc. Zool. Soc., London, 1865, p. 541. Lake of Tiberias (Mousson, Tristram). 6. Melanopsis costata. Oliv. Distribution : Spain, N. Africa, Syria. Dr. Annandale’s collection contains examples from Tabghab, Mejdal, Wad-es- Semakh, Ain-et-Tineh and Lake of Tiberias generally, also from the River Jordan at its exit from the Lake and asingle specimen of rather large size from a small mineral spring at Dalmanutha near Tiberias. is mollusc is extremely abundant in the lake, ps puaaed near the shore; it is found as deep as 22 met Annandale.| 6a, Vor: jordanica, Roth. = R. Roth, Moll. species, 1839, p. 25, Pl. IL, figs. 12-13. River Jordan (Roth, Tristram, Locard) ; Lake of Homs (Locard) ; Lake of Tiberias (Barrois). 6b. Var. degenerata, var. n. (Plate X XVII, fig. 9.) iflering from the typical form in its much smaller size and in being proportionately mach narrower ; it is also of a uniform purplish black iets Alt. 8°25, diam. maj. 4m Aperture : alt. 4, diam. re Hab.— Lake of gh me at the exit of see Jordan (Annan- dale). 7, M. buccinoidea, Oliv. Locard, Arch. Mus. Hist. Nat., Lyon, Vol. U1, pp. 204- 205. Syria generally. 468 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [December, 1913. 8. M. praerosa, Lin. Dautzenberg, Rev, Biol. Nord France, 1894, pp. pe” Generally distributed throughout Syria. Dr. andale procured specimens trom Tabghah, Mejdal, etc. : eet in quan- tity from a small mineral spring ~ ees near Tiberias and from the Barada River, Damas [Much more abundant in Aitining ‘water than in stagnant. —N. Annandale.] Family HY DROBIIDAE. 9. Pyrgula barroisi, Dtz. Dautzenberg, Rev. Biol. Nord France, 1894, pp. 345-346. Lake of ‘Tiberias | Barrois) ; exit of Jordan from Lake of Tiberias (dead specimens only). (Annandale). 10. Bithinia badiella, Parr. Dautzenberg, T. C. pp. 347-348 Lake of Homs; Nahr el Tebeath : Tell el Kadi; Stream at Damascus ; marshes of Ain. él Musaieh ; Lake of Tiberias (Barrois). Lake of Tiberias, on lower surface of stones ; exit of River Jordan from the Lake, and from a small dirty pool near the east shore of the Lake. ~(Annandale). [Not uncommon under stones at the edge of the lake. —N. Annandale} ll. Bithinia gennesaretensis, sp. n. (Plate XXVIIT, fig. 8.) Shell perforate, ovately fusiform, semitransparent, polished, shining, pale reddish yellow; whorls s 44, rather rapidly 1 InCreas” ing, convex, marked with ens ; m simple, dilated below ; aperture ovate; operculum calcareous, white, mitltilaminiferous, with central nucleus. It. 7, diam, maj. 4-25, diam. min. 375 mm. Aperture; alt. 3, diam. 2 ab. —Semakh to exit of Jordan. Lake of Tiberias. (Annandale). nly taken in the channel of the Jordan in the lake.—N- Annandale.) Vol. IX, No. 11.] Molluscan Faunal List of L. of Tiberias. 469 [V.S.]} 12. Bithinia semakhensis, sp n (Plate XX VIL, fig. 3.) Shell ovately fusiform, smooth; whorls 4, regularly increas- ing, moderately convex, marked with transverse growth lines and on the upper whorls showing traces of spiral striation ; suture impressed ; columella curved especially above; labrum simple, continuous; aperture obliquely ovate. Alt. 4:5, diam. maj. 2 5, diam. min. 2°25 mm. Aperture: alt. 2, diam. 1:25 mm. Hab.—Wad-es-Semakh, edge of Lake of Tiberias, from a small dirty pool. (Annandale). When the Lake is full, the pool in which this species was found must be joined to it.—N. Annandale | 13. Bithinella contempta, Dautzenberg. Rev. Biol. Nord France, 1894, p. 348. Nahr-el-Haroun; Zerraa: marshes of Ain-el-Musaieh; stream at Damascus; ford across the Jordan at EI-Tell (Bar- rois); Mejdal, Lake of Tiberias. (Annandale). 14. Bithinella annandalei, sp. n. (Plate X XVII, fig. 6.) ing, smooth, without sculpture; suture lightly impressed , broadly margined below; columella gently curved, diffused above into a well-defined, parietal callus which reaches to the upper margin of the labrum ; labrum simple, somewhat dilated the base; aperture sub-elliptical. Alt. 1:75 diam. maj. 1 mm. Hab.—Ain-et-Tineh (Type), also octagonal pool at et-Tab- ghah and Mejdal, Lake of Tiberias. (Annandale). 15. Bithinella syngenes, Sp. 0. (Plate XX VII, fig. 7.) mm. Hab.—Ain-et-Tineh, Lake of Tiberias, from small pool. (Annandale). 470 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [December, 1913. 16. Bithinella galilaeae, sp. n. (Plate XXVII, fig. 5.) Shell imperforate, fusiform with acuminate spire, greenish ; whorls 6, regularly increasing, flattish, marked with closely set, transverse striae; suture impressed; columella descending in an oblique curve; extending above into a well-defined, perietal callus which reaches the upper margin of the labrum; labrum acute, slightly dilated below and bent inwards over the aper- ture above; aperture ovate. Alt. 3°75, diam. maj. 2 mm. (nearly). Hab.—Wad-es-Semakh, Lake of Tiberias, in stream (N. Annandale). 17. Bithinella vexillum, sp. n. (Plate XXVII, fig. 4.) Shell moderately small, perforate, fusiformly conic, dark yellowish brown painted with narrow, equidistant, transverse bands of reddish chestnut; whorls 5, the first two small, the last three large in proportion, the last convex and bearing traces of microscopic, spiral striae; suture impressed; umbilicus somewhat narrow, deep; columella strongly arched above, gently curved below with erect, though slightly bent, margin extending above into a thick, well defined, parietal callus which unites it with the upper margin of the labrum; labrum simple; aperture ovate. Al t. 2°5, diam. maj. 175 mm. Hab.—Octagonal pool at et-Tabghah. (N. Annandale). Family VALVATIDAE. 18. Valvata saulcyi, Brgt Dautzenberg, Rev. Biol. Nord France, 1894, p. 349. Birket- Kosseir ; Homs; marshes of Orontes; Lake of Yamotneh ; stream at Damascus (Barrois). Family NERITIDAE. 19. Theodoxis jordani (Sow ). Dautzenberg, T-C., pp. 349—351. Lake of Homs; Ain Mallahah; Lake of Houleh; El-Tell, Vol. 1X, No. 11.] Molluscan Faunal List of L. of Tiberias. 471 [N.S.] 20. T. michoni (Brgt). yaar Arch. Mus. Hist. Nat., Lyon, Vol. Il], pp. 283— 4. -el-Min, Syria; Tell-el-Kadi Nahr-el-Heroun; Ain- Mellahat El-Tell, River Jordan; stream at Damascus ; Ras el; Ain, near Naplouse: Bir Jalotid; Ain-es-Sultan ; Ain- Feschkah- Ain-Rhoneir ; Ain- Djeddi (Barrois) : Ain-et- Tineh, Lake of dale). Some of the specimens collected by Dr. Annandale, especially those from the exit of the Jordan, would appear to ink up this and the preceding species, from which it would seem that the one is merely an extreme form of the other. 21. T. bellardi (Mouss.). Mousson, Cog. Terr., Prof. Roth, Zurich, 1861, pp. 60-61, sp. 64. Valley of B’ka, between Lebanon and Anti- Lebanon (Type) ; Lake of Tiberias. Family UNIONIDAE. 22. Unio requieni, Mich. Mousson, Cog. Terr., Prof. Roth, Ziirich, 1861, pp. 66-67, sp. 73. Entire circummeditteranean Region. 23. U. pietri, Locard. Arch. Mus. Hist. Nat., Lyon, Vol. U1, pp. 210-2 Lake of Tiberias (Lortet) : Lake of Tiberias Al exit of River Jordan from the lake (Annandale. ) 24. U. tiberianensis, Let. Locard, 7'.C., pp. 216-217. Lake of Tiberias (Letourneux). 25. U. tristrami, Loc. T.C., pp. 209-210. Lake of Tiberias (Lortet). North end of the Lake o Tiberias at the mouth of the River Jordan (Annandale). 26. U. terminalis, Brgt. Bour sch at Test. Nov. Saulcy, 1852, p. 31, No. 9; Cat. rais. Moll. Terr. Fluv. Sauley, Paris, 1853, pp: 76-17, pl. TH, figs. 4-6, 472 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [|December, 1913. Lake of Tiberias (Dr. Sauley, Annandale). oe By far the greater part of Dr. Annandale’s collection is composed of the present species, the series ranging from quite young x eS to what are apparently adult and whic’ corres- pond in every way to specimens in the British Museum labelled as having been collected by Dr. Tristram in the Lake of Tiberias. Bourguignat’s figures are of somewhat larger shells, but in all other respects they agree absolutely with the above. The following are the dimensions of Dr. Annandale’s largest specimen taken with many smaller examples at the exit of the R. Jordan Long. 35°25, lat. 62, diam. 28°25 m [Occurs in the lake at depths of Born less than 1 to over 22 metres.—N. Annandale.] 27. U. jordanicus, Brgt. Mousson, Coq. Terr., Prof. Roth. Ziirich, a p. 66, sp. 72. River Jordan (de Saulcy) ; Lake of Tiberia 28. U. zabulonicus, Bret. Locard, Arch. Mus. Nat. Hist., Lyon, Vol. III, pp. 220- ‘Lake of Tiberias (Letourneux). 29. U. prosacrus, Bret. TG ¢ Lake of Tiberias (Lortet, Letourneux, Annandale). 30. U. littoralis, Lk. Mousson , Cog. Terr., Prof. Roth. Ziirich, 1861, p. 64, sp. 70. Southern Europe ; Asia Minor ; Syria ; Morocco, Algiers. 31. U_ ellipsoideus, Bret. Locard, Arch. Mus. Hist. Nat., Lyon, Vol. ILI, pp. 211-212. Lake of Tiberias (Bourguignat ): 32 U. genezarethanus, Let T'.0.5 park Lake of Tiberias (Letournenx). 33. U. rothi, Bret. 1.0. pp. 2 Lake of Tiberias (Roth. ); River Jordan (Lortet). Vol. IX, No. 11] Molluscan Faunal List of L. of Tiberias. 473 [V.8.] 34, U. simonis, Tristrami. Proc. Zool. Soc., London, 1865, p. 544. Recorded from Lake of Tiberias; River Jordan, River Orontes ; River Leontes ; Lake of Antioch: also ‘‘ off Semakh ”” ale he several specimens obtained from the Lake by Dr. Annandale, though showing slight variation can all undoubted- ly be referred to this species. [The beautiful pink iridescence of the nacre fades con- siderably in a short time.—N. Annandale.] 35. U. galilaei, Loc. Locard, Arch. Mus. Nat. Hist., Lyon, Vol. III, pp. 206-207. Lake of Tiberias (Lortet, Letourneux) ; off Semakh and from Semakh to the exit of the River Jordan, etc. (Annandale). 36. U. raymondi, Brgt. T.C., pp. 208-209. Lake of Tiberias (Bourguignat). 37. U. lorteti, Locard. T.C., pp. 215-216. Lake of Tiberias (Lortet, Letourneux). 38 Unio chinnerethensis, sp. n. (Plate X XVII, figs. 10, i 0a.) Shell elongately ovate, rather thin, pale yellowish olive, both valves marked with concentric growth lines, obliquely angled in a posterior direction from the umbones downward and 474 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [December, 1913. Long. 23°5, lat. 39°5, diam. 16°5 mm Hab.—Lake of Tiberias (Annandale). Family CYRENIDAE. 39. Corbicula fluminalis (Mull.). Bourguignat, Cat. rais. Moll. Terr. Fluv. Saulcy., Paris 1853, p. 79. Distribution: Southern Asia, North, East, West and Central Africa. Taken by Dr. Annandale at Mejdal, Wad-es- Semakh, from Semakh to a. exit of the River Jordan and other locali- ties in the Lake of Tiberias 40. C. cor. Lk. Tristram, Proc. Zool. Soc., London, 1865, p. 5 River Jordan, Lake of Huleh - - Lake of TE ike "ice 41. C, crassula (Mousson). Mousson, Cog. Terr. Fluv. Bellardi, 1854, p. 54, pl. XU. Lebanon : also Lake of Tiberias (Annan dale Dr. Annandale’s collection contains a number of specimens which agree very well with Mousson’s t cimen in the iti useum, of which the dimensions, together with those Pa ac Annandale’s largest and smallest specimens, are as ) Long. Lat. Diam. Type ‘ 13-5 13 10°75 mm. Largest .. 25 24 19°25 mm. Smallest .. 12°5 13 9-75 mm. @ species may sy possibly ultimately prove to be but a variety of the preceding 42. C. syriaca, Bret. Locard, Arch. Mus. Nat. Hist., Lyon, Vol I11, pp. 223-224. Shore at Tiberias ( Annandale). The species is ‘also recorded from Antioch and Hom 43, C. feliciani, Bret. Lake of Tiberias, a single specimen, agreeing with the figures of this species, collected by Dr. Annandale. Vol. 1X, No. 11.] Molluscan Faunal List of L. of Tiberias. 475 [V.S.] EXPLANATION OF PLATE XXVII. Limnaea virginea, sp. nov. Physa tiberiadensis, sp. nov. Bithinia semakhensis, sp. nov. Bithinella vexillum, sp. nov. Bithinella galilaeae, sp. nov. Bithinella annandalei, sp. nov. Bithinella syngenes, sp. nov. », 8. Bithinia gennesaretensis, sp. nov. », 9. Melanospsis costata, Oliv., var. degenerata, nov. Fies.10,10a. Unio chinnerethensis, sp. nov. aS St G8 tO Journ. As. Soc. Beno. Vol. IX, 1913. PLATE XXVII. Fig. ¥, Fig. 2. Fig.3. Fig.5. NEW SHELLS FROM THE LAKE OF TIBERIAS. -$ of India Offices, Caleutta.151¢. Photogravure-Survey rs Aquatic and semi-aquatic Rhynchota from the Lake of Tiberias and its immediate vicinity. on By Dr. G. Horvata. (Communicated by Dr. N. ANNANDALE.) (With 2 figures.) genus Gerris—79 specimens of aquatic and semi-aquatic Rhyn- chota. These represent 21 species, three of which are new to science, viz. Ochterus strigicollis, Micronecta annandalet and perparva. | This small collection shows, in general. the clraracters of the South- European fauna, but it bears in some respects those Rhagovelia nigrians Burm., a widespread species in the E pian and Oriental regions, is confined in the Palaearctic © to Syria and Egypt. Ranatra vicina Sign. described originally from Egypt and recorded since from South Persia and the Western parts of the Ethiopian region hitherto not known from Syria. Semi-aquatic species. 1. Hebrus pusillus Fall.—Edge of the Lake of Tiberias, under stones, 2 ¢ ¢,1 2; Wad-es-Semakh, 2 2 °- ; __ 2: Mesovelia vittigera Horv.—Plain of Gennesaret, | ? ; Tiberias, 1¢. Both specimens apterous. ee . Dipsocoris alienus H. Sch.—Edge of the Lake of Tiberias, under stones, | 3. ro 4. Hydrometra stagnorum L.—Wad-es-Semakh, |! apter- us 9. Gerr g : __Plain of Gennesaret, 29 ,; erris paludum Fabr. — - pees. bee nymphs, Wad-es-Semakh, 1 3, 2 See ee types of these species will be preserved in the Indian Museum. Oras Ak ‘ 478 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [December, 1913. belong to the brachypterous form, with the elytra reaching about to the middle of the abdomen. 6. Limnogonus aegyptiacus Put.—Plain of Gennesaret, 23¢,2 929. All the specimens are apterous with the meso- and metanotum and the abdomen above shining black. The abdomen of the 9° 9 is marked above in the middle with a very narrow longitudinal yellow line. . Naboandelus bergevini Berg.—Plain of Gennesaret, 1 ¢.91; Wad-es-Semakh, 2 9 °. 8. Rhagovelia nigricans Burm.—Plain of Gennesaret, 82 2; Wad-es-‘Semakh, 1 9: mouth of Jordan, 1 9. The two latter specimens are macropterous, the others apterous. . Microvelia pygmaea Duf.—Plain of Gennesaret, 1 2 ; Wad-es Semakh, 1 °. 10. Patapius spinosus Rossi var. nigriceps Horv.—Edge of the Lake of Tiberias, under stones, 1 ¢. This variety is known only from Syria. 11. Hrianotus lanosus Duf. —Edge of the Lake of Tiberias, under stones, 2 9 9. 12. Acanthia variabilis H.-Sch. var. connectens Horv.—Wad- es-Semakh 1 g. The single specimen differs from the European form in the shorter hairs of the surface, the shorter antennae , a8 well as in the less produced membrane: the mesocorium, but limited to the ectocorium ; the black colour of the femora is more extended. ' hierus strigicollis n. sp.—Niger, opacus; capite vergentibus, ab antic articulis duo atiore margineque angusto postico versus latera flavo-testaceis, macula illa nigro-punctata, marginibus lateralibus explanatis 0 edium striola obliqua tt is ornatis, margine laterali maculis quatuor estaceis notato, membrana glauco-consperss ; anguste albido-marginatis ; pedibus albido- nigris, tibiie postage eee ame femorum, tibiarum et tarsorum srs, tiblis posticis spinulis obscure testaceis, e punctis nigris nascentibus praeditis, Long. 54 mill. ad-es Semakh, 1 9. : “ PP os from O. marginatus Latr. in the more prominent ead, the less elevated eyes, the somewhat narrower, less tounded margins of the pronotum, which are marked only with Vol. IX, No. 11.] Aquatic and semi-aquatic Rhynchota. 479 [N.8. a pale oblique streak (fig. 1), and the narrowly pale-margined anterior acetabulae. The laminately ampliated lateral margins of the pronotum of O. marginatus Latr. are broader, more rounded and almost entirely pale, black only at the anterior angle (fig. 2). The exterior angle of the eyes, seen from before, is more elevated than the vertex. Fig. 1.—Ochterus strigicollis n. sp. Fig. 2.—Ochterus marginatus Latr. Head and pronotum. Head and pronotum. Aquatic species 14. Ranatra vicina Sign.—Octagonal pool at et-Tabghah, de See : 15. Plea letourneuxi Sign.—Limestone basin at Ain-et- Tineh, amidst Ranunculus aquatilis, 4 specimens aa mer Anisops producta Fieb.—Plain of Gennesaret,2 ¢ ¢, 3 9 9: mouth of Jordan,3 ¢ 0,5 2° 17. Notonecta glauca L.-- Plain of Gennesaret, 1 omen 18. Arctocorisa hieroglyphica _Duf.—Plain of appar 1 o ; edge of the Lake of Tiberias, 1 2; Wad-es-Semakh, 6 ¢,8 22 19 : : . ope vertice laevigato, medio quam pr be cc etata notato ; pronoto i i lavi late is, margine scutellari c i bus longitudinalibus ee i um instructo, fossula subcostali longa. ee oe elytrorum extensa, membrana elytri sinistri hy : 4} mi ‘ad-es-Semakh, in small dirty pool at edge of Lake WwW : aes M : plicata Costa, but distinguished by the larger 480 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [December, 1913.] size of the body and the almost equai length° of the head and pronotum, as well as by the more transverse pronotum, the anterior and posterior margins of which are less arcuated. : tcronecta isis Horv.—Plain of Gennesaret, 2 ¢ 3, 2 22; Wad-es-Semakh, 1 °. t ta perparva n. sp.—Oblongo-ovata, albida, laevigata, glabra, nitidula; capite antrorsum fortiter producto quam pronoto fere duplo longiore (12: 7), vertice medio ° = 5 & et ° in| S 6B ° aad ° om - fas) 4 a — 2) =) ie] ~_ er = Q. Ll =} oO if] = Ss) 5 @ Q. _ 2 load Lar oO aa ~ — Zz ° o cr optime determinata nigra notato ; scutello distincte transverso : elytris striolis nonnullis longitudinalibus fuscescentibus, sed obsoletis signatis, sutura clavi angustissime nigra, margine costali corii strolis binis nigricantibus notato, fossula subcos- tali longa, retrorsum pone medium elytri extensa; femoribus et tibiis posticis subtus linea subtilissima percurrente nigra pictis, tarsis posticis apice nigris. Long. 1+ mill. . Tiberias, on the surface of the lake, at night, 1 ?. _ This fine species to be placed near M. capttata Horv. from which it differs by the smaller size, the whitish colour of the whole surface, the well-determined black line on the hind margin of pronotum, the more transverse scutellum and by me black lines on the ventral surface of the hind femora and ibiae. 52. NUMISMATIC SUPPLEMENT No. XXI. Note. The numeration of the articles below is continued from p. 559 of the ‘‘ Journal and Proceedings ’’ for 1912. (With plates X-XI.) 122. A FIND OF EPHTHALITE OR Wurie Hun Corns. White Hun coins was found at a spot sixteen feet west of the main monastery wall. I have been allowed to publish these coins, the types of which are in the first of the two plates lustrating this paper. is probable that the rouleau was originally wrapped in or The coins appeared to be of copper, but this turned out to be a superficial deposit only, and was easily removed. On analysis the coins were found to be silver with a small admix- ture of copper. The specimens illustrated are ten in number, the reverse sides of all exhibiting the usual fire altar and its guardians. The first is obviously a double-struck coin, the original being to 5 appe m Coin No. 7 is different, and bears the Brahmi character cha; probably No.6 is the same as No. 7. Coins Nos. 8 and 9 are single specimens, while there were four like No. 10. The design in the left lower field of No. 10 may be a mere ornament, or may be the character thai reversed. Coin No. 10 is the only one which appears to have been previously published—see Sir A. Cunningham’s monograph on the coins of the Ephthalites or White Huns, Plate VIII, No. 14. [Num. Chron. piled He describes the legend on the coin as i the coins now described some kncwn language. I ma Greek inscriptions described in Sieghan’ $ paper The White Hun symbol PV is prominent on these coins, and must have been adopted by the Ephthalites from the Sassanians, because this nomad horde had no money or 482 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [December, 1913. written language of its own at the time of its collision with the Sassanians, and it was customary for the victorious White og very like the planetary symbol =) used by the Indo- Parthian king Gondophares. When the Ephthalites invaded India they struck coins of Indo-Sassanian types exhibit- ing legends in Brahmi characters. So Coins Nos. 2 to 10 belong to a type intermediate between the Sassanian and Indo- Sassanian, as they bear a Brahmi character in the field, but the legends have not become Indian. This accords well with their find-spot on the Indian Frontier. An interesting and clear description of the various types of White Hun coin is contained in Mons. E. Drouin’s paper ‘‘ Le type monétaire sassanide et le monnayage indien.’’ (Mémoires du Congrés International de Numismatique de Paris, 1900). I now described, which is anew type. It is almost identical with the smaller piece, Coins of the White Huns (Cunningham, Num. Chron. 1894), Pl. IX, 23, but the inscriptions differ. : This is similar to White-King Sale Catalogue, Part I, No. 864. The reverse merely consists of the Ephthalite symbol within a double circle. It may be a coin of Napki Malka—Cp. Cunningham, ‘Coins of the White Huns,” Pl. X, 2. No. 138. This coin is akin to the money of Napki Malka. It bears the White Hun symbol, and a legend in what may be corrupt Greek characters . . . . oshano. PLATE X, Journ., As. Soc,, Beng,, Vol. 1X,, 1913, WHITE HUN COINS. N. §. XXI. ART 122 PLATE XI. Journ., As. Soc., Beng , Vol, IX, 1913. 2, WHITE HUN COINS N. S. XXI. ART 12 Vol. IX, No. 11.] Numismatic Supplement. 483 [NV .8.] words [Shahi] Jarukha. This is a new name. Coin No. 13, Pl. VIII of Cunningham’s “‘ Coins of the White Huns,’’ is a very similar piece, but the name on that is Jabula. No. 18. Cp. ‘‘ Coins of the White Huns,’’ Plate IX, No. 1. Cunningham read the inscription as Vaiga, but it may be Khega, or Khege. No Q ae. - ‘*White-King Sale Catalogue,’’ Part I, No. 890. The object in front of the bust looks like a closed umbrella. There was probably an inscription to tight and left of the upper field, but this is off the coin. No. 20. An intaglio probably in agate, of good artistic execution. The male figure is nude except for a waist-cloth, and carries a bow and arrow. To the right is a Kharoshthi legend which I read as Sagavatigasa. he reverse sides of Coins Nos. 11 to 19, with the excep- tion of No. 12, are of the usual Sassanian type. R. B. WurteHzapD. 123. Tar Oxpsst British MURSHIDABAD RUPEE. A most difficult problem has always been to distinguish the native-fashioned Murshidabad rupees into three series = lst—those coined at Murshidabad by the Nawab of Bengal ; 2nd—the same coined under British control ; and 3rd—those struck at Calcutta by the Company; all three sets bearing the mint-name Murshidabad. The latest contribution to this question is, so far I am aware, a paper of Mr. H. N. Wright in J.A.S.B. 1904 (Num. Suppl. No. 28) which can be resumed as follows :— ae (a) Between 1171 and 1176 a.m. the Company's Mint a m . Murshidabad rupees, did not - it seems that no coins were bad during this year. poses a new riddle ; 484 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (December, 1913. it is a rupee of Murshidabad, fourth regnal year, 1176 a.H. (1762- 3) in all particulars resembling the piece of Calcutta No. 67, Brit Mus. Cat. It is undoubtedly of European fabric, struck froma highly polished die, well engraved, perfectiy round and of a superior workmanship. Whether it is steuck in a ring or from a free die is not easy to decide, the edge having probably beer hammered. Calcutta Mint, designed after the order to suppress the word ‘‘Calcutta’’ on the dies of this mint. The pattern and the at this date the mint was again, and for ever, removed from Murshidabad to Calcutta, EK. V. ZAMBAUR, Wiener-Neustadt, Austria. 124. Tur MINT-TOWN ZAIN-UL-BILAD. is very small and it has hitherto been it, like Zinat-ul-bilad, is an epithet or Synonym of Ahmadabad. _ Vr. Taylor has pointed out to me that the period during which the term is found is entirely unrepresented by any coins from Ahmadabad. © presumption for the ascription of the epithet to Ahmadabad is thus strengthened and an extract from the Mir’ ati Ahmadi (Bo Lith. : i ad,’ ‘The City of Ahmadabad, the Glory of sc, _, OO page 4 of the same edition, it is mentioned that the city is also called << Zinat-ul-bilad’? and « ‘Uriis-i-mamlikat ”’ Vol. IX, No. 11.] Numismatic Supplement. 485 [V.S (the Bride of the Realm). I have never met with the latter epithet. ; I have also been shown a Persian document, in which Ahmadabad is called <* Baldat-i-Mahfiza Zain-ul-bilad Ahmad- and I am told that it is a common thing for documents drawn up in Ahmadabad about this period to use the epithet, which is the subject of this note. A. Masrrr. Surat. PROCEEDINGS For the year 1915 JANUARY, 1913. he Adjourned Monthly General Meeting of the Society was held on Wednesday. the Sth Januarv, 1913, at 9-15 P.M. Cotonri G. F. A. Harris, C.8.1., M.D., F.R.C.P..1.MS., President, in the chair. The following members werg present :— Maulavi Abdul Wali, Dr. N. Annandale, Dr. W. A. K. Christie, Mr. F. Doxey, Mr. T. P. Ghosh, Mr. F. ‘i. Gravely, Mr. G. Graves, Mr. H. H. Hayden, C.I. E., Mr. D. Hooper, Dr. C. Hossack, Mr. 8S. W. Kemp, . Indumadhab Mallick, an, R. B. Seymour Sewell, I.M.S., Mr. G. Stadler, Dr. Satis Chandra Vidyabhusana, Rev. A. W. Young. Visitors: —Dr. W. M. Haftkine, Miss A. Karpeles, Miss S. Karpeles, and another. The minutes of the last meeting were read the confirmed. Forty presentations were announced. The General Secretary reported the death of Raja Binay Krishna Deb Bahadur and Pandit Mohanlal Vishunlal Pandia. The Council reported that there was a vacancy in the list of Associate members, and therefore recommended Mr. Ekendra- nath Ghosh, L.M.S., B.Sc., Asst. Prof. of Biology, Medical Col- lege, Calcutta, for election as an Associate member at the next meeting. ie followiny gentlemen were balloted for as Ordinary Members :— # Capt. J. H. Burgess, 1.M.S., Government Place, propos by Major L. Rogers ive M.S., seconded by Capt. J. D. Sandes, [M.S.; Count Karl L. Lurburg, Imperial chanat General for Germany, proposed by Dr. N. Annandale, seconded by Mr. 8. W. oe i Pod; eb Bar.-at-Law, Jubbulpore, proposed Mr. H. Hayden, C.LE., seconded by Dr. -W. A. N Chane: Se S. G. ured: CS. vs FR. if : BH i pe by Dr. N. Annandale, seconded by Mr. S. W. ‘Kem oe following papers were read :— : ew Series of the Double SS oh Barium with tasik LAL Spas of the Hetero-cyclic Ammonium Darra and Hartpas SEN, Part I. Foiennieaied by Dr. P. C. Ray. ii Proceedings of the Asiat. Soc. of Bengal. {Jan., 1913.] 2. The A-ch’ ang (Maingtha) Tribe of Hohsa-Lahsa, Yunnan. By J. Coaain Brown, M.Sc. These two papers will be published in a subsequent number of the Fin . 3. Some Noxious Diptera ge eae: By E. BRuNEITI. Cabaret be Dr. N. ANNA 4. A Forgotten Kingdom esd Bengal. By Nattxti Kanta BHaTTACHARJEE, M.A. cee catpe by Tue Hon. JUSTICE ze AsuTOSH MUKHOPADHYAY ‘ Jour paper will be published in a locals number of the Notes on Fishes, Batrachia and Reptiles of the Lake of Tiberian By N. Annanvatz, D.Sc., ¥.A.S.B. The Adjourned Meeting of the Medical Section of the Society was held at the seamed 3 Rooms*on Wednesday, the 15th January, 1913, at 9-30 p Ligut.-Cot. L. Rogers, C.I.E., I.M.S., in the chair. The following members were present :-— Dr. Sivanath Bhattacharjee, Lieut.-Col. J. T. Calvert, I.M.S., Dr. Gopal Chandra Chat a Dr. K. K. Chatterjee Dr. H. Finck, = C. R. M. Green, I.M.S., Major E. D. W. Grieg, I.M.S., WC. Hossack, Dr. Indumadhab Mallick, Major E. A. RB. Meweaba I.M.S., Lt.-Col. F. O’Kenealy, LMS., Major J. F. A. Rait, LMS. , Capt. J.D. Sandes, IMS Visitors :—Capt. pr Serta wa L M. S., Lieut.-Col. Burke, I.M.S., Dr. A. Gupta, Major A. Gwyther, LMS., ., Capt. Lloyd, I.M.S., Dr. G. C. Mitra, Col. W. B. Sutherland, LM.8 and another The minutes of the last meeting were read and confirmed. Dr. Chartterj rjee showed a large lipomatous tumour removed from the scrotum m and a case of multiple fibromata. Col. Sutherland , read a pa Anaphylaxis and pointed out its use in practic if ie oe oe P al medicine . ao Green, Col. O’K Kenealy, Major Rait, Lieut.-Col. Rogers, tr. Hossack spoke, and Col. Sutherland replied. FEBRUARY, 1913. The Annual Meeting of the Society was held on Wednes- day, the 5th February, 1913, at 9-15 p.m. OLONEL G. F.-A. Harris, C.S.I., M.D., F.B.C.P., I.M.S., President, in the chair. The following members were present :— Maulavi Abdul Wali, Dr. N. Annandale, Mr. J. Coggin Brown, Lieut.-Col. W. J. Buchanan, I.M.S., Babu Nilmani Kirkpatrick, Mr. W. A. Lee, Rev. W. R. LeQuesne, Mr. D. McLean, Hon. Justice Sir Asutosh Mukhapadhyaya, Kt., Dr. Girindranath Mukerjee, Major E. A. R. Newman, IMS. Ca apt. C. L. Peart, Dr. G. E. Pilgrim, Mahamahopadhyaya Haraprasad Sastri, C.I.E., Mr. M. Kazim Shirazi, Mr. G. Stadler, Dr. Satis Chandra Vidyabhusana, Rev. A. W. Young. Visitors. —Babu Hem Chandra Das-Gupta, Mr. P. Sacisoly, Mrs. Newman and others. The President ordered the dara hocee of the voting papers for the election of Officers and Members of Council for 1913, and appointed Messrs. R. D. Mehta ae “F. H. Gravely to be scrutineers. The President also ordered the distribution of the voting papers for the election of Fellows of the Society, and appointed Messrs. R. D. Mehta and F. H. Gravely to be scrutineers. The President announced that sixteen essays have been received in competition for the Elliott Prize for aa Research for the year 1912 which have been sent to the i tor of Public Instruction, Bengal, on of the Trustees, for report, and that the result has not yet been received. I The President also announced that the vag tie Memoria Medal for the year 1913 has been offered to Maj r W. Glen Liston, M.D., C.I.E., I-MS. The Annual Report was then presented. iv Annual Report. [February, 1913. (PNNUAL FREPORT FOR 1012. The Council of the Asiatic Society has the honour to sub- mit the following report on the state a Society’s affairs during the year ending 31st December, 19 Member List. The number of Ordinary Members at the close of the year was 517. Forty-two Ordinary Members were elected during 1912. Out of these, 4 have not yet paid their entrance fees. The number of Ordinary Members, therefore, added to the list is 38. On the other hand 24 withdrew, 8 died oe 8 were struck off under Rule 40. The numbers of Ordinary Members in the past six years are as follows :— lees PayIne, Non-Payina. | . a cera ty lee eg icra gece ven |e | og) ce bgeel ee Ss | ae & ta ee oR ee z eae) 8) 3 |g | € Reel! 3 } ) | =I | ro) } fe | Se ee eas | © Prore OE a See Cm eS Ws 1907 | 174) 176) 290°| 369) 20 30: |" 1 }61 | ae 1908 .. | 181) 1937 17 | 391| 19 | 38 | 57 | 448 1909... | 183 | 217| 13 |. 413| 20 | 40 60 473 | | | 1910... | 209! 917/ 16 | 4421 93 | 49 66 508 | 1911 | 200; 225/ 19 | 444/ 29 | 53 | 75 | 519 | | POLS + | 0908 | 220) 20) deh | ose. 66 | 517 Engen Wg e bio as Wa taltivetn, ines Sri Ram Ohahdca Bhunj , Mr. W. H. Hashes, IC. hand Bural, hehe Mahendra Nath De, ishna Deb, Babu Girish epg aire Lif ember), wie en st i ea hc Bis have ay at ak the death of one Honorary Fellow, ,» Lord Lister; the nu mber is now 27. e number of Special Honorary Centenary Members remains unchanged. om the list of Associate Members, the name of Mr Moore has been removed as he died some years ago. The number now stands at 13. February, 1913.] Annual Report. Vv Two members, the Hon. Justice Sir Ashutosh Mukhopa- dhyaya, Kt., and Mahamahopadhyaya Haraprasad Shastri, I.E., have compounded for their subscriptions during the year. Indian Museum. During the year there’ has been no change in the Society’s Trusteeship and the Hon. Justice Sir Ashutosh Mukhopadhyaya, Kt., C.S.1., DSc., F.R.A.S., F.R.S.E., continues to be a member of the Board of Trustees of the Indian Museum on behalf of the Society under the Indian Museum Act X of 1910. The Hon. Sir William Duke, K.C.I.E., presented to the Society fifteen sculptures from the grounds at Belvedere, and the Council has presented them to the Indian Museum for exhibi- tion in the Archaeological Court in accordance with the provi- sions of the Indian Museum Act. On a suggestion by the Director of the Geological Survey of India, the Council has agreed to the disposal of certain mineral specimens belonging to the Society, with other collections pre- pared for distribution to educational institutions, as loans from the Society. Deputations, Mr. G. H. Tipper, the General Secretary, represented the Society at the 250th Anniversary of the Royal Society of Lon- d Finance. The accounts of the Society are shown in the Appendix under the usual heads. Statement No. XII contains the Balance Sheet of the Society and of the different funds ad- inistered through it. mThe Credit Ralnice of the Society at the close of the year was Rs. 2,32,334-7-8 against Rs. 2,32,014-1-4 at the close of the preceding year. "The Budget for 1912 was estimated at the following figures :— Receipts a yo eee: ri Expenditure .. oe , The Budget estimate of receipts excludes «* Admission Fees ’’ and ‘‘ Compounded Subscriptions. vi Annual Report. [February, 1913. 8 compounded subscriptions. The sum of Rs. 1,400 has been credited to the Permanent Reserve Fund, which now stands at Rs. 1,63,350. The receipts have exceeded the estimate under the heads of ‘Sale of Publications,’’ ‘* Rent f Room,’’ and “ Miscellaneous ’’ by Rs. 610, Rs. 50, and Rs. 171, respectively. The “‘ Sale of Publications ’’ has been increased owing tc demands for back numbers of the Society’s publications. by various libraries and individuals; ‘‘Rent of Room ”’ rent for the month of December 1911 from the Automobile Association of Bengal; ‘Miscellaneous ’’ is higher owing to the sum of Rs. 100 being voluntarily contributed to the Library Ahm usain Khan Bahadur of Partabgarh, and Rs. 90 being realized from Mr. B. N. De, the ‘tag of a typed copy of the manuscript of Tajul Maasir damaged y him. The receipts have fallen short. of the estimate under the head of ‘‘ Subscriptions for the Society’s Journal and Proceed- Ings and Memoirs,’’ owing to non-payment of subscriptions. _ Inthe Budget, the expenditure was estimated at Rs. 28,188 distributed under 17 heads. The actual expenditure has “Salaries’’ have been exceeded owing to increments granted to the Lama attached to the Tibetan Section and the typist. Stationery’ is higher on account of the purchase of dupli- tio p the year Rs. 73,950, against. Rs, 1,61,950 and Rs. 75,350 res- nie year. The Trust Fund at 8. The Budget estimate Shen : 1913 has been calculated at es Receipts and Expenditure for Receipts . Expenditure bi ; ataee. February, 1913.] Annual Report. vii The Budget estimate of Receipts is about Rs. 1,895 less than the actuals of 1912. This is due to admission fees and compounded subscriptions. e Budget estimate of Expenditure is about Rs 2,260 more than the actuals of 1912, owing to the provisions made to the following items, viz.: ‘‘ Books’’ shows an increase of Rs. 1,418 as it is proposed to purchase more books for the ‘ sum of Rs. 2,206-5 has been remitted to the Central Bureau, London. r. D. Hooper continued Honorary Treasurer throughout the year. BUDGET ESTIMATE FOR 1913. Receipts. 1912. I9IZ;: * 1818; Estimate. Actuals. Estimate. : Rs. 8. Members’ Subscriptions oc) 42uv 41,010 11,500 Subscriptions for the Society’s ** Journal and Proceedings ”’ and ‘* Memoirs : ; 1,608 1,560 1,608 Sale of Publications .. .. 2,000 2,610 2,000 Interest on Investments fo 8,388 8,320 8,392 Rent of R , ie 650 600 600 Government Allowances . 3,000 3,000 3000 Do. (for —— in History, Religion, Ethnolog and Folk-lore of Bengal) pp OOO on eens Miscellaneous ia La Loan refunded ‘ 1,500 oon 1,210 Admission fees os ie ee Compounded Subscriptions ae Total ... $2,000 33,905 32,010 Expenditure. Helactes $4 v4 se OOD dey afte ‘Commission cs i 600 “ = Pension .. ne Ke 420 420 Carried over .. 7,570 7,745 7,770 viii Annual Report. {February, 1913. 1912. 1912. 1913. Estimate. Actuals. Estimate. Rs. s. Ss. Brought forward .. 17,570 7,745 7,770 Stationery 3 he 150 205 150 Light and Fans es as 260 ~=1,071 260 Municipal Taxe ee fee BAS 1,503 1,495 Postages .. os e 675 831 700 Freight .. MP Sh 225 330 250 Contingencies z5 ws 700 616 700 Books... .. 1,200 1,182 2,600 Binding .. . -. 1,000 1,405 1,000 ‘Journal and Proceedings ’’ and ‘* Memoirs ’’ es -- 10,600 9,831 12,000 Printing (circulars, ete.) : 350 248 Auditors’ fee S 100 100 150 Petty Repairs es - 75 198 100 Insurance ee vs 188 344 344 Salary (for Researches in History, Religion, Ethnology and Folk- lore of Bengal) -. 3,600 3,600 3,600 Total -- 28,188 29,209 31,469 Extraordinary Expenditure. Repairs vs a s+ 4 e8.:1,930 Agencies, Mr. Bernard Quaritch and Mr. Otto Harrassowitz have continued as the Society’s Agents in Europe. The number of the Copies of the Journal and Proceedings and of the Memoirs sent to Mr. Quaritch during the year 1912 was 147 valued at £24-18-6, and of the Bibliotheca Indica 389 valued at Rs. 466-8. Of these, copies to the value of £26-9-11 Id. The number of the copies of the Journal and Proceedings and of the Memoirs sent to Mr. Harrassowitz during 1912 was 182 valued at £23.1 1-8, and of the Bibliotheca Indica 561 valued at Rs. 919-4. The sale-proceeds have been £28-3-9 and Rs. 803-13 tespectively, Library, The total number of volumes and arts of magazines added to the Library during the year was 1932, of @nioh 103 — bari and 1829 were either presented or received in On an application from Rev. H. Hosten, 8.J., an Associate Member, the Council has agreed to lend him books from the Library in connection with his researches for the Society. February, 1913.] Annual Report. ix Khan Bahadur Shaikh Ahmed Husain, Taluqdar of Pary- awan, Partabgarh, a member of the Society, offered Rs. 100 to the Library Fund; the Council has accepted with thanks his generous gift. With this money, a volume of Turki MSS. consisting of a collection of fifteen Turkish works by the cele- brated Mir Ali Shir was purchased for the Library. copy of the Kanarak Album containing about 250 bromide photographs, price Rs. 300, was also purchased for the ibrary. t has been proposed to prepare a catalogue of the serial publications dealing with Natural Sciences that are available in Calcutta, and a small Sub-committee has been formed to work out the scheme. Various libraries and institutions possessing scientific periodicals have been asked to co-operate, and there will be a meeting of the Sub-committee shortly to consider the matter further. ; In addition to Rs. 600 granted to the Rev. H. Hosten, S.J., during 1911, the Council has sanctioned a further sum of Rs. 400 towards obtaining photographic facsimiles of historical documents referring to the Mogul Empire, Tibet, Bengal an Pegu (Burma). Mr. J. H. Elliott has continued as Assistant Secretary throughout the year. Pandit Balai Lal Dutt, B.A., has been appointed pandit of the Society in the place of Pandit Nava Kumar Lahiri, B.A., and Babu Ramesh Chandra Chatterji has been confirmed in the ost of ist. , The Council has decided to dispense with the services of Munshi Ahmad Hosain from the 3lst January, and to appoint an English-speaking Maulavi on Rs. 50 per mensem, in his place. International Catalogue of Scientific Literature, Messrs. I. H. Burkill and F. H. Gravely acted as joint secretaries of the Regional Bureau until Mr. Burkill’s retirement from India, when the Natural History Secretary took over his work, _ : The Bureau suffered in efficiency during the year by “ge recurring illness of the clerk in charge, and only 387 index slips were despatched. Arrangements have now been made, however, for expediting the she aes Two hundred and seventy-six V £147-7-6 was remitted to the Central Bureau. lumes were distributed and The cost of of the indexing of scientific literature pu taken over by a Regional timated its assent. x Annual Report. [February, 1913. The following — are indexed by the Bureau. Authors publishing elsewhere are asked to submit reprints in order to call attention to their ore _ SociETIES. Journal of the Asiatic Society of ein Memoirs of the Asiatic Society of Beng Journal of the Bombay Natural story ety. - 5, 5, Astronomical Society of India. moo bo OFFICIAL PUBLICATIONS. Meteorology. Annual Summary of the Indian Weather Review. Indian Meteorological Memoirs, Calcutta. = Chemistry. ~J Memoirs of the Department of Agriculture in India, Chemical Series. Botany. Records of the Botanical Survey of India. Annals of the Royal Botanical Gardens, ates 10, Annals of the Royal Botanic Gardens, Peraden 11. Memoirs of the Department of Agriculture in adie, Botanical Series. bak ed Zoology, Animal Physiology and Bacteriology. 12. Records of the Indian Museum. 13. Memoirs of the Indian Museum. 14. Indian Civil Veterinary Department Memoirs. 15. Memoirs of the Department of Agriculture in India, Entomological eae 16. Indian Medical Gaz 17. Journal of ee peerene Science. 18. Paludism Geologs 19. Memoirs of she Geological Survey in India. 20. cords, Geological Survey of India. 21. Palaconologi Indica, Geological Survey of India. Mixed. 22. Scientific Memoirs by Officers of the Medical and Sani tary Departments of the Government of India 23. ‘Indian Forest Records. ad February, 1913.) Annual. Report. xi Fellows of the Society. On the recommendation of the Fellows, the Council re- solved that in future the names of the proposers be ee in each case on the list of members proposed for Fello At the Annual Meeting held on 7th Febroncy, 1912, Mr. H. Beveridge, I.C.S. (retd)., Mr. J. C. Bose, C.S.L, .E., M.A., D.Se., Prof. P. J. Briihl, F.C.S., Capt. S. R. Christophers, I.M. S., and _ C. 8S. Mi ddlemisa, B. A., F.G.S., were elected Welles « of the Society. Elliott Prize for Scientific Research. Twelve essays were received in competition A de 191] and two were awarded Prizes: viz. one on the *‘ Preparation of Potassium Carbonate and Potassium Bicarbonate on a large scale from Nitre,’’ by Babu Jitendra Nath Rakshit, and the other on “A few new Ketonic Dyes,’’ by Jatindra Mohan atta The Trustees have again sanctioned the award of four Prizes for the year 1912 for original work or investigations by the essayist, in Physical, Chemical, Mathematical and Natural Sciences. This notification was printed in the Calcutta Gazette of the 3rd July, 1912. Sixteen essays have been received i rs 0 ee and have been referred to the Trustees for repor Barclay Memorial Medal. In connection with the award of the Barclay Memorial Medal for 1913, the following members were appointed to form a ‘*Special Committee *’ to record their recommendations for the consideration Council: Dr. W. A. K. Christie, B.Sc., Major A. T. Gage, I.M.S., Dr. G. E. Pilgrim, F.C.S., Capt McCay, I.M.S., Mr. F. L Gravely, M.Sc. Society's Premises and Property. ed the The Hungarian Academy of Sciences has present Society with Kp eee bust of Alexander Csoma de KGrés. = President unveiled the bust at the Monthly the ard April 1912, 0 it is placed in the rooms of the snats o the list of the portraits in the he request of the Committee of the is , d The portrait, which is by for safe keeping. by public subscription and the How: Jolin: Collier, was obta: ned ha h the Society’s roo E The Monthiy General I Meeting t table has been repaired at a xii Annual Report. [February, 1915. cost of Rs. 168. It is now in ten separate pieces, and can be removed easily for lectures and other public meetings. ere was a serious outbreak of fire at the main entrance of the Society’s premises caused by the fusion of the main wires of the Electric Supply, but fortunately no damage resulted. The electric fittings have been completely changed by Messrs. Kilburn & Co. at a cost of Rs. 590, and the electric meter increased the amount by Rs. 1,25,000. The new Policy has been issued in favour of the Society by the Alliance Assurance Sub-Committee. Permission has been granted to the Corpora- tion of Calcutta Society for widening Park Street as soon as they require it. Exchange of Publications, During 1912, the Council acce icati , th pted two applications for Le aN of publications : viz. (1) from the Tohaku Imperial eee: Sendai, Japan, the Society’s Journal, Proceedings od Reet in exchange for the University’s Science Reports ; pes ) from the Bureau of Productive Industry, Government ot Formosa, the Society’s Journal, Proceedings and Memoirs in exchange for all publications of the Bureau. An iar i seers with the Editor of the Journal j clerinary Science has been stopped owing to the discontinuance of the Journal by the Gedbieedit of Tin. "4 Publications. ere were published during the year twel : f Journal and Proceedings (Vol. LXXvV, Parts 1.2 Vol VIL, No. 8-11; vidi : - “lesa and Vol. VIII, Nos, 1-8) containing 1102 pages and February, 1913.] Annual Report. xiii’ Of Memoirs only one number was published (Vol. III, No. 5) containing 82 pages. Numismatic Supplements Nos. 16-18 have been published in the Journal and Proceedings, Vol. VII, No. 10, and Vol. VIII, Nos. 3 and 5-6, under the editorship of Mr. H. Nelson Wright. Of the Numismatic Supplement 200 extra copies have been printed ; 70 copies are subscribed for by the Numismatic Society of India and 30 copies are sent to the Numismatic Secretary for distribution ; the remaining 100 copies are for sale. second list of Arabic and Persian MSS. acquired on behalf of the Government of India by the Asiatic Society of Bengal during 1908-1910 has also been published, and copies are supplied to members on application. Mr. G. H. Tipper held the post of General Secretary and editor of the Proceedings until the middle of June when he left for Europe and Mr. S. W. Kemp was appointed to officiate for him until his return. Dr. E. D. Ross left for Europe in the middle of March and Lieut.-Col. D. C. Phillott was appointed to carry on the work of the Philological Secretary and editor of the Philological Section of the Journal duriag his absence. Lieut.- Col. Phillott officiated until May when he retired from India and Captain C. L. Peart was appointed to succeed him. Mr. I. H. Burkill carried on the duties of Natural History Secretary and editor of the Natural History Section of the Journal up to March, when he left for Europe and Dr. W. A a Christie was appointed to act for him. In October, Mr. sf resigned his office, and Dr. Christie was permanently appointed. Dr. N. Annandale was Anthropological Secretary and editor of the Anthropological Section of the Journal until May, when he left for Europe and Captain ‘ appointed serait for hie Dr. Annandale returned in Novem- a and took over charge Bis reg o> andra Vidyabhisana carried on the Pico logical Secrsehty and was in e488 Bibliotheca Indica, while Mahamahopadhyaya Haraprasa astrl, U.1.™> seb ieahan of Rs Search for Bardic ——. . _ work of collecting Sanskrit Manuscripts throughout J oa Aaa r. Ross was also in charge of the Search for Arabic and Fe : Manuscripts until his departure from India, when ah es carried on the current duties of the search. vee Dito ; leaving for Europe, Captain Peart was appol J. D. Sandes charge of the Arabic and Persian Search. oT . continued as Medical Secretary throughout the yous as. Cabinet was in charge of Mr. H Nelson g $i. reported on all Treasure Trove coins sent to the Society. Lectures. _ During the year, the following four in the Society’s rooms: 1. On Rec lectures were delivered: ent Advances in our xiv Annual Report. [February, 1913. Knowledge of the Freshwater Fauna of India, with lantern slides by Dr. N. Annandale, C.M.Z.S., F.A.S.B., on the 27th March. 2. Notes of a Botanist in the Abor Hills, with lantern slides, by Mr. I. H. Burkil!, M.A., F.L.S., F.A.S.B., on the 12th April. 3. On Engravings. illustrated by numerous lantern slides showing the history of the art from 1770 to 1870, by W. H. Phelps, two lectures on the 8th and 9th July. 4. On the Sea of Galilee and its Fauna, with lantern slides, by Dr. N. Annandale, C.M.Z.S., F.A.S.B., on the 13th December, 1912. Philology, ete. In the March number Father Hosten throws some new light on the Asoka Pillars near Bettiah by translating an ex- tract from the writings of Padre Marco della Tomba; and HE DU arious anecdotes concerning the Pitt diamond collected by Father Hosten. x February, 1913.] Annuai Report. Xv India in the July and August number. His note on the tradi- tion that subterranean passages exist, connecting Delhi with several places in its vicinity, has a topical interest ; while in his article on the ‘* Mouthless Indians of Megasthenes,’’ he ad- vances an ingenious theory as to how a historian and an ambas- sador came to report the existence of a people who lived on the smell of fruits, and having therefore no use for mouths, presumably had none. A hundred modern Arabic Proverbs: collected by Captain Murphy of the 30th Punjabis, during a six months’ stay in Damascus, should prove very useful to the increasingly large number of officers, and others who are now interested in modern Arabic. The same Journal—viz. that of August— contains a poem in Persian by the Emperor Shah Alam II. Side by side is a translation by Maulavi Hidayat Hussain. The December number is remarkable for a very beautiful - and ingenious quatrain by the late Mr. Azoo. It is in Arabic written on the quatrain by Dr. Suhrawardy. i The ‘‘Vyavaharamatrka of Jimitavahana ” forms the subject of a Memoir by the Hon’ble Justice Sir Ashutosh i disputed questions as the acquisition of title by prescription, adoption of an only son, etc. abu | “ee a paper on ‘‘ The date of Varaha Mihira” supposes that Varaha Mihira chose the Saka year 427. (a.D. 505) as the starting point of his astronomical calculations very probably to — rate the date of his own birth. ‘ Who were the Sungas ? é is the title of a paper in which Mahamahopadhyaya ri co Shastri maintains that epee ee nore be cachig rt i e Buddhists po pa sper Persian origin aS was previously e Brahmans of the Samavedic rm_horse-sacrifices. Mahamaho- padhyaya Shastri ina note on neal Sata naomi eee iano inane Nath i Shastri in a note on ‘‘ Cavalry mh coos ‘. sein rere Nae nH Brahmana Bhatti sae eo en Dhravasena ILI of Valabhi me ingot, rarer of the China Branch of the xvi Annual Report. [February, 1913. Royal Asiatic Society, has contributed a paper to the Journal throwing a good deal of new light, from Chinese sources, on some important questions connected with the era of Vikrama- ditya and foundation of the Kushan Kingdom in India. It is stated that the word ‘‘ Kyniska,”’ or ‘‘ Kaniska,’’ is not a proper name, but that it simply means a king, and that the real founder of the Kushan dynasty was Kadiphes who was surnamed ‘‘ Ksa- traonam Ksatra Kyniska Kosano,” hero of heroes, King of Kush- anas. Kadiphes who took possesion of the Punjab and Wes- tern Magadha in 57 B.c. is supposed to have been identical with King Vikramaditya of Hindu tradition. . KE. D. Ross reprints in a special number of the Journal, entitled Tibetan studies, fourteen articles by Alexander Csoma de Korés. These articles which were contributed to the Journal by Csoma during the years 1832-1840 are of permanent value to Tibetan scholars. They lay scattered over eight different volumes until they were carefully collected together in one i Ross _ A paper by Lama Dawa Somdup contains the English trans- lation of Gejor Dumpa’s prayer which gives a picture of the viously supposed, and that there is nothing ambiguous or unintelligible in it. Pandit Mohanlall Vishnulall Pandia makes a critical examination of the transcript of Atapura Inscription giving an account of the Belkhara Inscription and the Machli-Sahara grant, Babu Rakhal Das Banerji states that the inscription set upon a stone-pillar at Belkhara in the Mirzapore . an ects King Harisa Candra, son of J aya Candra, e in u seven ‘ ; ri battle of: Ohatilawds Acs amoune Cr eee February, 1913.] Annual Report. xvii Narasimha, by others with Varaha. The writer does not place much reliance on the theory that the temple was originally a Saivite one, and was afterwards converted intoa Vaisnava tem- ple by Ramanuj in the twelfth century a.p. Rai Bahadur B. A. Gupte contributes a note on ‘‘ Somavati Vrata’’ which is a Hindu ceremony celebrated by women on dark Mondays. Natural History, ete, Fourteen scientific papers were issued, all in the Journal, in the year under review, six botanical, five chemical, three zoological and one physical. Borany. Two further instalments of that monumental work, ‘‘ Materials for a Flora of the Malayan Peninsula,’’ both by J. S. Gamble, C.I.E, F.R.S., have been issued, and form Parts 1 and 2 of Vol. LXXV of the old series of the Journal The other botanical papers are :— New and Revised Species of Gramineae from Bombay, and two more species of Gramineae from Bombay-—By K. Burr, Assistant Economic Botanist, Bombay. Corchorus capsularis var. ooci common jute plant— INLOW. Polarity of the Bulbils of Dioscorea bulbifera Linn.—By I. H. BurKILL 3 ZooLoey. Some Recent Advances in our Knowledge of the Freshwa Fauna of India.—By N. ANNANDALE, D.Sc., ot Freshwater Sting-Rays of the Ganges.—By B. L. Cuav- HURI Contribution to our Knowledge of Indian Earwigs.—By Matcoim Burr, D.So., M.A., F.E.S. ter B. XViii Annual Report. {[February, 1913.. CHEMISTRY. Allylammonium Nitrite —By Prarutta CHanpRa Ray and Rastk Lat Datta. On Isomeric Allylamines——By PraruLta CHANDRA Ray and Rasrk Lat Darra. (Preliminary Communica- tion). CH;.CO OH. co? : Na.— Preliminary note on Sodium diacetamide By Jirenpra Natu Raksuir. Piperazinium Nitrite—By Prarutta CHanpra Ray and JireENDRA Natu Raxsuit. (Preliminary Communica- tion). A wossible chemical method of distinguishing between seasoned and unseasoned Teak-wood.— NU CHANDRA Srrcar, M.A., F.C.S. Puysics. . Note on the Secular Cooling of the Earth and a Problem in Conduction of Heat.—By D. N. Matix. Notes were also read on “ Further Spreading of Croton sparsiflorus (Moruna),’’ by I. H. Burkill, “ emi- cal Affinity,’’ by M Banerji, and ‘‘ The Classification, Bae Habits and Nidification of the Ravens of India,’’ by P. T. L of living Pedipalpi, by F. H. Gravely, who contributed a note for the Proceedings on the distribution of the order. Anthropology and Allied Sciences. Much of the work published by the Society as ‘‘ Philo- ogy, i vanished races. In the J February, 1913.] Annual Report. xix that may be claimed as anthropological have been published, and two longer papers (one on the manufacture and distribu- tion of chank-shell ornaments, the other on Pushtu folk-tales) are now in the press for the Memoirs. It cannot therefore be claimed that anything of a nomraheusive nature or of premature results. Next year, however, we may look forward Dunbar, and Messrs. 8. W. Kemp and J. es Brown ander: taken on the North- Bast Frontier of the Indian Empire, in part at least as a result of the Abor Expedition of 1911-1912. Medical Section. Monthly meetings have been held regularly throughout the year and there has been a fair average attendance. Several important papers were read and interesting discussions took place. Major Rogers was, as usu ual, the largest contributor and continued to supply regularly further interesting Gleanings from the Calcutta Post-mortem Records. He also gave a hip on his experiences in Palermo during the cholera epi- den Dr. W. C. Hoss Treatment, Some new "nope of Calcutta, Morbidity of to the most important articles in the M — Journal have been regularly circulated to members pierre ss to act as Medical Secretary eesaghont the year. Lt.-Col. Drury, on Laniden to Behar, resigned his position as Vice-President and was succeeded by Major Rogers. Bibliotheca Indica. b- Of the 42 fasciculi of texts of different dimensions pu lished in the Bibliotheca Indica series during the year under iculi i Bev I kba (vol. III, fase. iT) ; Mahamahopadhyaya Dr. Ganga Nath — Jha f T travartika ( be ‘De ae Chairs Vidyabhigana’ 8 edition of the Sanskrit-Tibetan Amarkosa (fase. ). This fase Amarakosa completes the ‘work. When the bilingual index is XX. Annual Report. [February, 1913. prepared, it will be a reliable Tibetan-Sanskrit dictionary of great historical weight. Of the new works sanctioned last year, 10 fasciculi have been published this year, viz. :— 1. Amaratika-kamadhenu, the Tibetan version of a com- prehensive Buddhist-Sanskrit commentary on the _ Amarakosa, edited by Mahamahopadhyaya, Dr. Satis Chandra Vidyabhisana. The original commentary mal oy hari by a Buddhist sage named Subhiti ‘s bo ee zy 3 a ce aS = hs Q o Ss pt =x oO 2 =e @o = © =] < © Lae er ° =) ° r+ = Cay $1 jot 2 = 2 n et ° | o edited by Dr. E. D. Ross. Sadukti-Karnamrta, edited by Professor Ramavatara arma. The work contains a large number of melo- dious Sanskrit verses collected by Poet Sridhara Dasa during the reign of Laksana Sena in the twelfth century a.p. ag Bhasa-Vriti, a Sanskrit commentary on P&anini’s grammar, by Purusottama Deva with a gloss by Srstidharacarya, edited by Pandit Giris Chandra Vedantatirtha. : a) Smrtiprakasa, a Sanskrit work on the Utkala school of Smrti, by Vasudeva Ratha, edited by Mahamaho- _padhyaya Sadasiva Miéra, Strisarvasva, a Sanskrit work on Utkala Smrti, by Govinda Kavibhisana Samantaraya, edited by Pandit Jagannath Misgra. Gulriz, a Persian fairy tale by Zia‘u’d-Din Nakhshabi. of Badaun who died in 1350 A.D., edited by Agha Muhammad Kazi Plog and the late Mr. A. F. Azoo. ahmasp, a Persi i 60D, C. Philos, PhD. Shah-‘ Alam Nama, a noeepty of Shah-Alam, edited a e. oe oe Ce gle so * a = 43 = 7 g +p! 3 era) bd =! & = toa) g S) iS KS ha 3 oS | 4 1 B x i] 5 01 a o Se a S 5 5 B 99 °.: —_ — by $ = = ea & 8 Be GH Sy = Q 3 & 3 RI = e > = by = Qi ." Search for Sanskrit Manuscripts. Though engaged in the arduous t i | t é ask of catal manuscripts during the year, the Shastri fotnd seine ner se February, 1913.} Annual Report. xxi a small but very important collection of manuscripts, mostly on palm-leaf and very ancient well known as a commentator of Manu. The standard com- mentary on Manu by Kulluka Bhatta of the fifteenth centur The author’s father was Madhava Bhatta, while the father of the king Govindachandra was Madanapala. So the commenta- tor of Manu was not the same person as the king of Kanouj. Smrtimafijari treats of Acara and Prayascitta, and is the oldest compilation of Smrti yet discovered. Along with the manuscript of Smrtimafijari came the manuscript of Parasgara Smrti, written by the same hand, but three years earlier. Library of Nepal, the last page of which has been photographed in the Shastri’s Nepal Catalogue of 1905. The said manuscript of Lankavatara is dated a.p. 908. The present manuscript con- tains a later Buddhist work, probably of the Sahajiy a School. The work is entitled Paramadya Mahakalparaja and treats at some length of Mudras, rituals, mantras and so on. But ing of Karaka, Samasa, Taddhita, Krt and Tip. SekoddeSatip- ani is a commentary on a xxii Annual Report. [February, 1913. Vajrayana School of the Buddhists. The commentary is written by a very great man, Krsnacaryya or Kahnapada, one of the founders of the Sahajiyaé School. A mutilated copy of the commentary in Bengali Law of 1198 is to be found in Cambridge. Coins, g were presented to the Cabinet during 1911. Of these the only one of more than ordinary interest was the gold coin presented which are the words ‘‘Sri Jagadeva.’ The coin may have been struck by a Jagadeva who reigned in South India about the 12th century (cf. Elliot’s Coins of Southern India). The reverse of the coin is blank. others, two were Gadhiya coins, two (billon) of the Pathan series, six Mughal, one Durrani, one of Nadir Shah, one (copper) of the Gujarat Sultanat, three of Native States. even coins were presented by the Bombay Branch of the Royal Asiatic Society, three by the Central Provinces Govern- ment, two by the Commissioner of Ajmere and two by the Agent to the Governor-General in Central India. The Numismatic Secretary examined twelve finds consist- ing of 300 coins during the year for the Central Provinces and Punjab Government. None of these finds contained any coin of unusual interest. Search for Arabic and Persian MSS. 8 for this purpose, and it is proposed to publish even- tually lists of the whereabouts of such important MSS. as the ociety have so far discovered. n compliance with a request made by the Librarian of the Imperial Libra ’ Maulavi Qasim Hasir was allowed to assist in the preparation of a Catalogue raisonné of the books February, 1913.] Annual Report. Xxili of the Bohar library, on which work he was engaged from 6th May to 28th November 1912. Bardie Chronicles, Mahamahopadhyaya Haraprasid Shastri, M.A., C.LE., made his third tour this year in search of Bardic Chronicles. At Bharatpur, he examined a large collection of Sanskrit and ( Bardic manuscripts in the State Library. The best Bardic work is Sujan Carit of the life of Surajmal, the founder of the Jat greatness in the Subah of Agra. The author Sudhan Kavi. The other Bardic works generally contain des- At Bundi, too, the Shastri examined the Raj Library, containing about 2,000 manuscripts both Sanskrit and Bardic. The Bardic works treat generally of the Hada Rajput family of Bundi. The principal work is VamSabhaskara written about 70 years ago by Varhat Siirajmall of Bundi. He was a good poet, a good historian and a voluminous writer. He was abl aided by the then reigning prince of Bundi, who collected for him all the available materials for his history, the history of Hada Cauhans. The author deals with all the Rajput princi- palities that came in contact with the Bundi tate. h work Vam&a Bhaskara was designed to be completed in 12 Rasis or signs of Zodiac. But the author died after the com- pletion of the tenth. It has now been published with a com- Ganga Sahaya, the late Prim fo coral imself a voluminous writer bo Hindi. The library contains many important Bardic works including : 1) Vaméa-Kallola by Dayaram. — an Yasahprakasa by Rao See (3) Satru Salya Rasau by Rao Vagn (4) Vamsavali of the Hadas. See (5) Vamsabharana by Misan mn oy (6) Hambira Rasau by Mahesa a 4 es (7) RanasuyaSascandrika by Mune a ae : (8) VamSavalivartika by Dayaram Sela (9) Visnu Singha Carita by Dayaram taney. — 10) Ummeda Singha Carita by the same. Dungar Singh. XXxiv . Annual Report. [February, 1913. At Ujjain the Bhats sometimes come. But Bardic works: are not much encouraged. There are, however, Jagais who keep the genealogies of all the inhabitants; and these genealogies are very ancient and they are taken as evidence in the Civil Courts in the Native States. Ujjain is a very ancient city and its. exploration by competent scholars is ikely to lead to important results. The city stands on the eastern bank of the Sipra. The ancient town was to the north of the modern city. The site of the ancient city is now a heap of ruins, rising from 10 to 30 feet above the level of the surrounding country. The site of the modern city was anciently occupied by the temple of Mahakala, the palace of the king, his offices, and the gardens belonging tothe temple and the palace. Kalidasa speaks of the royal gardens being on the Sipra and the temple gardens on the Gandhavati ; the latter was a considerable stream in the poet’s time and fashionable women delighted to bathe in it. But the stream does not exist at the present moment and it was only after a good deal of search and investigation that its course has: een found out, Itis no longer a stream now but a narrow drainage channel called the Gandhanala, which, rising at the Gomukhatekri just behind the Ujjain College, passes first through the Ksirasagara, then through the most populous part of the city, and falls into the Sipra at the northernmost point of what is regarded as the most sacred Ksettra on the Sipra. Samvat 1547. The first inscription records the conquest of Malwa by Maharajadhiraja Paramesvara Jaya Singha Deva. But the most important inscription lately discovered in the country of Malwa is at Mandasore. It is dated in the Malava Samvat 464. that is, A.D. 407. It speaks of the reigning prince as Naravarma, the son of Siddhavarma and the grandson of Jaya Varma. Read with other inscriptions, found at Manda- sore and published in the third volume of I nscriptum Indicarum, it gives the history of Western Mal before and after ibs c rh Malwa for about 150 years, both Society of Bengal. (1) Ajita-Carita in verse (contains a hi araj ee = istory of Maharaja vas are Preegictinr I and Ajit Singha. po Seca ; ata or history i hi 1 araj Wea Singh 0 story in prose, from Pufij to Maharaja 3 ata or history j + ae YaSovanta Singha is ne oe wee OR panes y ene February, 1913.] Annual Report. XXV (4) Khyata or history in prose, from, Maharaja Dala Pan- gula Jaya Cand to Maharaja Ajita Singha. i (5) Khyata or history in prose, by Manayet Nain Singh. (6) Gunabhasacittra, a history in verse of Maharaja Gaja Singha. (7) Dholé Maravaniki Vat, a historical tale in prose. (8) Bhojaki panarami Vidya, a historical tale. (9) Jagadevapamarkivat, a historical tale in prose of Jagadevapamar, whose daughter was married to Samalavarma, a king of Eastern Bengal. (10) Giigolikavat, a historical tale. (Ll) Sivas Thakur Kupavat Khiva Karn ki Kundalia. (12) Maharaja Man Singh ki Gita by Sandu Carana Caindan. Besides these, 45 more works are in the course of being copied, 62 have been collected from outside and information with regard to about 193 has been gathered. Thakur Saheb Guman Singh Khici and his staff deserve the thanks of all those who are interested in the Bardic Chronicles of Rajputana. The Regent, Arai i GCs... GC.B., LL.D., is most liberally assisting the Asiatic Society in collecting these chronicles, and he has promised to continue the Bardic Section of the Historical Department of the State as long as the Society held in the first week of December, 1912, by Pandit N anu Ram Brahma Bhat, of some chapters of the real Prthvirajrasau, as inguished ancestor Cand Vardai, the Court large. stor taken by the n ‘ Though a good deal of interest has Deen sedis aati Maharaja of Bikanir in the collection of Bardic State, little has been done, as both the time at his disposal in paying 4 visit to Dilac chief seat of an interesting religion called a ee The religion was preached b od by herr soeits e a survival of the Light Worship of some a oe Iran, as the ancient history of this religion gran pepe the name of Sams-Tabrez, the sun of Tabrez. ; Xxvi Annual Report. [February, 1913. then it has never been allowed to go out. They say it emits no their names have been found even in the Rg. Veda. A study of this book opens a wide vista for research into the origin of di Catalogue of Sanskrit Manuscripts. Mahamahopadhyaya Haraprasad Shastri, M.A., C.LE., and his two assistants Pandits Ashutosh Tarkatirtha and Nani Gopal Banerjee were engaged durin i described during the years 1910 and 1911; 1600 more have tse of the year under review and the 700 Raja Rajendralal Mitra, C.I.E., LL.D., collected altogether 3157 manuscripts. As these manus n to the Shastri, they of the work will be a little more rapid. required to complete the catalogue, are given to him. The descriptive catalogue, so fa of a large number of Jaina, Vaidika and T edge. Bra highest importance in all the vatious branches of knowledge also await description. It is, February, 1913.] Annual Address. " XXVii therefore, undesirable to publish anything before the comple- tion of the catalogue in manuscript. If the cata ogue is pub- lished after its completion, it will be possible to fix the chronology of many important branches of Sanskrit knowledge and also the dates of many important works. Bureau of Information. The Bureau of Information in the Asiatic Society was engaged in preparing a complete catalogue of the manuscripts found in the Bishop’s College, Calcutta. It has also answered questions put to it by Civil Officers. ——>— The Hon. Justice Sir Asutosh Mukhopadhyaya, Kt., Senior Vice-President, delivered an address to the Society. Annual Address, 1913. Mr. PRESIDENT AND MEMBERS OF THE SOCIETY, I deem it a high privilege to be permitted to deliver the aa T tat I may look forward to the this learned audience as I ithstanding the imperfec- tions of my attempt to give, in response to the call from the Chair, a brief outline of the activities of the Society during the last twelve months. “s It is a matter for congratulation that the material pros- perity of the Society has been well maintained during the oa year. There is no substantial falling-off in our numerica er of paying members has in- list of non-paying and our expendi- ay luable Libra quake would mean the complete ruin of our im a cas Saas The question of a substantia! genes of needful expansion on us with increasing insistence. As a result of the Committee during the last twelve mo xxviii ~ Annual Address. [February, 1913. Let us now turn for a moment to the literary and scientific work accomplished by our members during the last twelve months ; here we are gratified to find that a high standard has been maintained from the quantitative as well as the qualitative point of view. In the department of Philology and ne the researches of our members connect themselves work o proper name at all but a generic name for a king, and that the real founder m ya the thesis that the Sungas, who und successfully persecuted the Buddhists and ultimately overthrew February, 1913.} Annual Address. Xxix the Maurya Empire, were not Persians as had been previously supposed, but were Brahmins of the Sama Vedic School accus- tomed to horse-sacrifice. The same writer quotes a passage from a palm-leaf manuscript to show that the poet Bhatti was the son of Sridhar Swami of Valabhi. On the other hand, a young scholar, Babu Surendranath Sastri, endeavours to estab- lish that the poet was no other than the Bhatti Bhatta to whom Dhruba Sen, the third of Valabhi, granted a village in 653 a.p. Babu Brajalal Mookerjee takes up the question of the date of the great astronomer Varahamihira and reaches the conclusion that he chose the ‘Saka year 427 as the starting- point of his astronomical calculations, possibly to commemorate the date of his own birth. Mr. Pargiter, one of our ex-presi- dents, whose retirement from this country deprived us of the last member of the Indian Civil Service who had attained In addition to this paper, ical contributions. Mr. Ramaprasad. Chanda endeavours to establish that the Kam- d that the inscription on the ple of Siva Vaishnabait purposes b ese contributions 4 1 . bee : y ‘igtena oeiearredis ge 8 che ‘ which constitute po Bibliotheca Indica Series are of considerable importance an deserve more than a passing notice. XXX Annual Address. [February, 1913. Sanskrit lexicon, Amarkosh, edited by Dr. Satischandra Vidya- bhushan, who had previously brought to light the text of the lexicon itself from Tibetan sources. We have here a fresh illustration of the great possibilities of useful research in the domain of Sanskrit learning through the medium of Tibetan disappointment that our progress in the pursuit of Tibetan our illustrious member Csoma de Koros, whose collected papers were recently republished by us and whose impressive figure will henceforth adorn our rooms through the courtesy of placed at the disposal of the learned world ; In fact, the zeal has been so great that the publication of these works has € must either press for a substantial Manuscripts is vigorously : ersian carried on, fresh materials are brought to light which it is February, 1913.] Annual Address. XXXF incumbent on us as a learned body to bring within the easy reach of scholars interested in the progress of Oriental studies. To take one illustration only, Mahamahopadhyaya Haraprasad Sastri has, in the course of his searches for Sanskrit manu- scripts, come across a copy of an important work on Hindu Law called Smriti Manjari by Gobindaraja, the great commen- tator on the Institutes of Manu. This manuscript dates back to the year 1145 and effectively contradicts the theory put forward by Prof. Julius Jolly that Gobindaraja flourished between the 11th and the 15th centuries and could be identified with King Gobindachandra of Kanauj. One can imagine without difficulty the stir which would be created in the learned world of Orientalists by the publication of an accurate edition of this work. The Sastri has also been fortunate enough to come across a palm-leaf manuscript of Parasara Smriti, copied in 1142. We cannot but lament that the funds at our disposal ion to generation by the bards ; t : Fat oes eons ie maa, the Gieidital of Rajputana. In the course 0 ay come ‘aston important collections at Ujjain, rape te Mundi, and has discovered the original of the real Erithviraja C illustrious Court-poet o rasau, composed. by Chand, the illustri hi. It is now form, was of moderate length, : : by successive accretions not always easy to renee niin the genuine original. ‘The field of work thus broug c Ss ee e results achieved > * rt of th extensive, and as soon as the final repo Sk tuake ‘out a; strong ; odyin have a number of important papers embory’ this la researches which it is not easy to make ee ne —: mind. It is sufficient to say that two ee — Goonbis we been published of the monumental work © . xxxii Annual Address. [February, 1913. the Flora of the Malayan Peninsula. Dr. Praphullachandra Ray and his pupils have made important contributions, well calculated to maintain the reputation of the chemical labora- tory of the Presidency College. Dr. Annandale has given us a paper on some recent advances in our knowledge of the fresh- water fauna in India, and we are all grateful to him in that he puts the most recondite things in Zoology in a way intelligible to persons, who, like me, can make no pretension to technical scientific papers published in our journal do not by any means afford a fair indication of the true extent of the scientific activities of our members. It cannot be overlooked that their researches are, in the main, published in official periodicals the last twelve months: but I venture to express the hope that even this imperfect account may, in some measure, serve to to wateh ou interest seme® and scholar who has conse . erests and presid ‘ ‘ during the next twelve months. baer er Cole aa Feb., 1913.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. xxxiii The President announced the election of Paves and Mem- bers of Council for the year 1913 to be as follows President : His Excellency the Right Hon. Thomas David Baron Carmichael of Skirling, G.C.I.E., K.C.M.G. Vice- Presidents : Colonel G. F. A. Harris, C.S.I., M.D., F.R.C.P., I.M.S. G. Thibaut, Esq., C.LE. , Ph.D. , DSe., F.AS.B. Mahamahopadhyaya Haraprasad Shastri, C.L.E., M.A., F.A.S.B. D. Hooper, Esq., F.C.S., F.LS., F.AS.B. Secretary and Treasurer : General Secretary :—G. H. Tipper, Esq., M.A., F. eae. :—The Hon. Justice Sir Asutosh Mukhopadhyaya, ., C.S.I., D.L., D.Sc., F.RS.E., F.R.AS., F.A.8.B. Additional Secretaries : Philological Secretary:—Capt. C. L. Peart, 106th Hazara joneer Natural History Secretary :—W. A. K. Christie, Esq., B.Sc., Ph.D. Anthropological Secretary:—J. Coggin Brown, Esq., M.A., F. ¢ Bikes Joint Philological Secretary :—Mahamahopadhyaya Satis Chandra Vidyabhusana, M.A., Ph.D., F.A.S.B. Medical Rechetary :—Capt. J. D. Sandes, M.B., LMS. Other Members of Council : KE. P. Harrison, Esq., Ph.D. H. H. Hayden, Esq., C.LE., B.A., BAL, F.GS., FASB. N. Annandale, Esq., D.Sc., CM.ZS., F.LS., F.AS.B. W. K. Dods, Esq. S. W. Kemp, 6 H. G. Tomkins, Esq.,°C.1.E., ees AS PO Hoth a a LR.CP., LMS. Capt. R. B. sates Sewell, M.R.C.S., The Gta also announced the election of Fellows to be as follow: Major A. - Gage, I.M.S. eT eee ee B.L., B.Sc., A-R.MS., A.B.C.8., F.G.S J. P. Vogel, Esq., Ph.D., Litt.D. S. W. Kemp, Esq. mae: 8 xxxiv Proceedings of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [Feb., 1913.}, The meeting was then resolved into the Ordinary General Meeting. CotoneL G. F. A. Harris, CS.[., M.D., F.R.C.S., I.M.S., in the chair. The minutes of the last meeting were read and confirmed. Fifty-nine presentations were announced. The General Secretary reported the death of Mr. V. Venkayya. Mr. Ekendranath Ghosh, L.M.S., B.Se., was balloted for as an Associate Member. The following papers were read :— l. Indian Dermaptera collected by Dr. A. D. Imms. By Matcotm Burr. Communicated by Dr. N. ANNANDALE. _ This paper will be published in a subsequent number of the Journal. 2. The Composition of the Water of the Lake of Tiberias. By Dr. W. A. K. Curistie. 3. Aquatic Oligochaeta of the Lake of Tiberias. By Masor J. SvEPHENSON. These two papers have been published in the Journal for January 1913. 4. Notes on Fr. C. Gomez Rodeles’ article on the Earliest Jesuit Printing in India. By Rev. H. Hosren, 8.J. This paper will be published in a subsequent number of the Journal. ecm fe _The Adjourned Meeting of the Medica] Section of the Society was held at the Societ y’s Rooms on Wednesday, the 12th February, 1913, at 9-30 P.x. é Dr. W. ©. Hossacx in the chair. The following members were present :— Dr. Adrian Caddy, Major E. D. W. Greig, ILM.S., Lieut . Col. A. H. Nott, I.M.S., Lieut.-Col, L. Rogers. LMS. The minutes of the last meeting were re The following Paper was read :-— On Causes of death and errors of Diagnosis in one thousand Post-Mortems,— By Lrevt.-Con. L,. Racane, C.I.E., I.M.S. FOE ei i a PN ION Ae ad and confirmed. LIST OF MEMBERS OF THE ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL. PN THE 31ST PECEMBER, 1912, LIST OF OFFICERS AND MEMBERS OF COUNCIL OF THE ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL FOR THE YEAR 1912. as President : Colonel G. F. A. Harris, C.S.I., M.D. £m. LMS. Vice-Presidents : 3 The Hon’ble Justice Sir Asutosh spon yoke Kt., C.S. I. M.A., D.L., D.Sc., F.R.S.E., F.R.A.S., F.A.S.B. G. Thibaut, Esq., Ph.D., G.I. E., F.A Mahamahopadhyaya Haraprasid : Sastei, ULE, . 1 Dr. Albert Giinther, m.a., Ph.D., Meche F.R.S. 23, Lichfield Road, K. ew, Rivas. Lingla Dr. Jules Janssen. Observataire PAnrondete Physique de Paris, France. Dr. Alfred Russell Wallace, u1.p., p.¢.1 -» F.L,8., F.Z.8:, ‘RS. Curfe View, Parkstone, Dorset, Baslsad Professor Theodor Noeldeke, Clo Mr. Karl T. Tribner, Strassburg, Germany, Lord Rayle eigh, M.A., D.C.L., D.sc., LL Ph.D., F.R.A.S., PRS. Ferling ee Witham, ove England. i H. Tawney, Esq., M.A. C.1.E. C/o India e, London. Backauees Charles Rockwell Lanman. 9, Farrar Street, Cambridge, Sareea U.S. America. Pierce Edward Bixadts Tylor, D.0.%;, oe mss F.R.S., Keeper, University Museum. Oxford, England. Professor Edw ard Suess, Ph.D, Phas of Geology na, in the Professor John Wesley Judd, ¢.8., u.p.. p. R.8., -F.G.8:, ate Prof. of the Royal College of Science. 30, _ Cumberland Road, Kew v, Englan 0 - |. Professor Hendrick Kern. Utrecht, Holla nd. Perse: Sir Ramkrishna Gopal Bhandarkar, K.C.L.E., a. ‘oon ..| Professor Ignaz Goldziher, PhD., | DAK | TLD Budapest, Hungary all, M.a., K.C.8.1, C.LE., LbD. 82, Cornwall Gardens, London, S.W. lix. : Date of Elections 1904 Mar. 2. 1904 July 2. 1906 Mar. 7, 1908 July 1. 1908 July 1. 1911 Sept. 6. 1911 Sept. 6, 1911 Sept. 6. 1911 Sept. 6. 1911 Sept. 6. Sir William Ramsay, Ph.p. (Tiib.), LL.D., Se.D University College, "Gotwer HO; . George Abraham Grierson, Ph.D., D.Litt., C.LE., S c.s. (retired). Rothfarnham, Camberley, Surrey, nglan The Right Hon’ble Baron Curzon of Kedleston, _— D.O.L., F.R.s. 1, Carlton House Terrace, Lon- “ae a Col Henry Haversham Godwin-Austen, F.R.S., F.Z.Si, a.s. Nora Godalming, Surrey, England. Dr. Es Oidenberg The University, Gottingen. Ger Lieut, Ga ‘Alfred William Aleock, 1.M.8., C.1.E., LL.D., O.M.Z.S, F.R.S. Heathlaniis, Brith Roud. Belvedere, Kent, Ente Prof. Edward M.B., M.B.C.S., L.R.C,P., M-R.A.S. Pe bor: Ootlaye. Cambridge. Dr. A. Engler, Prof. of Systematic Botany, Univer- sity of Berlin, Prussia, Sir Clements Markham, 4 Eccleston se a London, S. Mahamahopadhya se aakbyaneth Tarkavagisa. 111-4, Shambazar ag ee Calcut ta. FELLOWS. Date of Klection. 1910 Feb. 2. 1910 Feb. 2. 1910 Feb. 2. 1910 Feb. 2. 1910 Feb. 2. 1911 Feb. 1. Dr. N. Annandale, D.se. F.L.S. er Hon'ble Justice Sir Y aera VMokhovadby syn: C.8.L, M.A., DeL., D-S¢., F.R.A-S., a ay Burkill, Esq. Mahamahopadhyaya Feeapela ad Sashtri, C.1.E., M.A. Sir Thomas Holland, K.C.L-E., D.Se., A-K- C.8., F.G.S., F.R.S D. Hooper, Esq. T, H. D. LaTouche, Esq., 8 a 2 Babu Monmohan, Chakrayart Lieut.-Colonel D. C. Phillott, "tndian pone Dr. Prafulla Chandra Ray, D.Se. 1.M.8. B.S.5 F.R.C.P., F.B.C.S., Major L. Bement | ¢,L6,, M.D., D Mabamabopedyaye Satis Chandra Vidyabhusana, M.A., Dr. G. Thien, a C.1.E. Dr. M. ses gc., F.R.S. A. Venis, to at G. 4, Weer oa... M,A., F-B.S. , E. A. Gait, Esq., ¢-1.£-, 1.¢,8. lx Date of Election, 1911 Feb, 1. 1912 Feb. 5, 1912 Feb. 5. 1912 Feb. 5. 1912 Feb. 5. 1912 Feb. 5. H. H. Hayden, Esq., c...5., B.A., B.E., F.C.S. H. Beveridge, Esq., 1.¢.s, (retired). J. C. Bose, Esq., a C.1.E., M.A., D.Sc, Prof. x J. Bruhl, F Capt. S taiephahe 1M Charles Stewart Middlemiss, Hin, , B.A., F.G,S. ASSOCIATE MEMBERS. Date of Election, 1875 Dec. 1. 1882 June 7. 1885 Dec. 2. 1886 Dec. 1. 1899 April 5. 1899 Nov. 1. 1902 June 4. 1908 July 1. 1908 July 1. 1909 Mar. 3. 1910 Sept. 7. 1910 Sept. 7, 1910 Dee. 7, LIST OF MEMBERS WHO HAVE INDI moved from the List of Members T ber List o he efela he members f the Revd. J. D. Bate. Folkstone, Kent, Englan Herbert Giles, Esq. Brorope Dr. A. Fihrer. urop Sarat Chandra Das, "Rak Bahadur, ¢.1.n. 32, Creek Row, Calcutta. ae St. John’s Church Road, Pandit Visnu Prasa Raj Bhandari. Chief Librarian, Bir Libra Nabe, Nepal Revd. E. Fra ancotte, s. I. 30, Park Street, Cal- cutta. gist A. H. Francke. Niesky Ober -Lausitz, Ger- Babes ‘Dinesh Chandra Sen. 19, Kantapuker Lane, Cal ibeede Pather J. Hoffmann, s.z, anch Rai Balkrishna op a Gupte, Bahadur. Musenm, Caleu drew Ul tne: Maul Azeez Bag, City-Hyderabad, Decca Anantha Krishna Iyer, Esq. "Dh The Rev. H. Hosten, s.3. 30, Park Meu “Oidesitin: Mauresa House, Indian BEEN ABSENT FROM A THREE DS.* YEARS AND UPWARD ived will be removed from the next Mem- Society under the operation of the above Rule: A. Anderson, Esq. eae Evan Mackeniia lxi Capt. Arthur C. Osburn, R.a.m Major George Alan Robertson, “Tsth Lancers. Prof. E, Sommerfedt. LOSS OF MEMBERS DURING 1912. By RetTIREMENT. Brajendra Nath De, Esgq., .a., 1.c.8. (retired). William Ferrall Bolton, Esq. The Most Revd. Dr. Reginald Stephen Copleston, p.p. Major H. W. Gratten, R.4.M.c J.C. R. Deter Esq. me 9 s, Esq. Major Victor Edward Hugh ee M.B., M.S. James Paster ne Esq., M.A.y 1.C.8. Capt. A. E. J. Lister, Major Ralp h Henry Maddox, LM.S. Capt. John George Patrick itaray, LM.S. Mir Nasir Ali Khan Bahadur. . Nasir Hosein Khan. The Hon Mr. Charles Evelyn Arbuthnot William Oldham, i C.8. Dr. D. Quinlan. Rey. plete Cyril Ridsdale. H. A. Rose, Esq., 1.0.8. Major G. M. Routh. R.a. Capt. H. Stewart, 1. Capt. John Johnson Urwin, M.8., 1.M.S. Capt. Herbert James Magee M.B. S. C. Williams, Esq., B By Dear. Ordinary Members. Maharaja Sri Ram Chandra Bhanj Deb. WwW. 0.8. Raja Binoy Krishna Deb. Babu Girish Chandra Ghosh. Eyre Loftus Preston, Esq. Life Member. Pandit Mohanlal Vishnulal Pandia, ¥.1.S. lx Honorary Fellow. Lord Lister, ¥.R.C.s., D.C.L, M.D., LL.D., D.8C., F.R.S. Associate Member. F. Moore, Esq., ¥.1.s Unver Rute 40. Percy Bramley, Esq. Albert Pendrill Charles, Ksq., 1.¢,8. Dr, Olin Eakins, m.p. Sir Andrew Henderson Leith Fraser, K.C.S.1. Benjamin Grey Horniman, Esq. ELLIOTT GOLD MEDAL RecIPIENTs. BARCLAY MEMORIAL MEDAL. Recipients. 1901 BE. Ernest Green, E sq. 1903 a. Ronald Ross, F.R.C.S., 0.B., C.1.E., F.R.8., I.M.8. re : 1905 Lieut.-Colonel_D. D. Cunningham, F.R.s., ¢.1.B., LMS. (retired). 1907 Lient.- olonel Alfred William Alcock, M.B., LL.D., -LE., F.R.S. 1909 Lieut.-Colonel David Prain, M.A.,, M.B., LL.D., F.R.S., LMS. (retired). 1911 Dr. Karl Diener ade eng acd miei ea ee ee] a= (eee eT oa APPENDIX. | ABSTRACT STATEMENTS OF RECEIPTS AND DISBURSEMENTS OF THE ASIATIC SocIETY OF BENGAL A FOR THE YEAR 1912. lxiv STATEMENT 1912. Asiatic Society Bi To EsTaBLISHMENT. Ra. Wer P. Salaries : G7tsb.3 Deas Officer in charge for Researches in 'fistory, cee oe and Folklore in Bengal) 3,600 0 O ase rea ae ae Bt 611 uv -3 Penk - ta ce 420 0 To CoNnTINGENCIEs. Stationery ... a ae i 204 13 6 axes ae - oe 1,502 8 O Postages 831 0 Freight 329 12 4 Auditing . 100 0 Lights and Fans ne 1,079 12 O Insurance fee as vc me 343 lz O pairs 1,930 0 0 Petty Repairs 197 15 0 Typewriters My oe 219 0 0 Miscellaneous = . 615.9 2 To Lisrary and Co.Ltection. Books ee ee cons on Lis? 3 < Binding 1,404 9 0 Purchase of Manuscripts IEF 0. © To Pustications. ** Journal and Proc oceedings” and ‘‘Memoirs” 9,830 11 9 To printing charges of Circulars, etc. a 248 0 » Personal Account (written off and miscellaneous) ... To EXTRAORDINARY EXPENDITURE. Royal Society’s Scientific Catalogue Balance foe oee Rs. As. 11,344 15 7,405 3 2,697 12 10,078 11 452 2,598 13 2,32,384 7 P: 6 0 7 9 0 6 8 Toran Rs. 2,66,912 5 0 No. 1. of Bengal. By Balance from last Report By Casu REcEIPTs. Publications sold for cash Intere Rent of room in the Society’s prem Allowance from Govechmens of mas for publication of papers on Anthropological — Cognate subjects Do. do. Chief Commissioner of Assam o. Do. do, Government of Bengal es Researches in Hist Religion, Ethnology, aad Folklore in “ee Loan oe Miscellaneous L912. Rs. As. P, Rs. As. P. 2,382,014 1 4 Bags (o} ty Sy oO So i? Mer) Se by Gree 3c Koo oS oo ul Linn Iss 3 B By EXTRAORDINARY RECEIPTS, Subscriptions to Royal Society’s Scientific Catalogue re eee ce 362 2 0 By PersonaL ACcoUNT, Admission fees e = a a as a wm A oo 2 z 3 riptio Compound st hence oeioe Subscriptions for etn . Journal and oceedings”’ and “ Memoirs’ Sales on credit Miscellaneous Tota Rs. D. Hooper, Honora. 1,184 11,335 200 ———_ 16,133 15 2 onorary Treas Asiatic Riclety | of Bengal. 2,66,912 5 0 lxvi STATEMENT 19172. Oriental Publication Fund, No. 1,in Loe: To CasH EXPENDITURE, Rs. As. P. Rs. As. P. Salaries... 1,735 4 3 Commission 68 1 4 Postage... ie ae 288 2 0 Editing charges ba as a 3,413 12 0 Contingencies we 57° 1° 9 Printing charges 6,722 9 O Statione: tip ae aie 14 6 Freig eae ee as me ten a Lights and Fans “ie a 48 8 0 — 12,466 12 8 To Personal Account (written off and miscella- neous) ... : ; ney ae iG 59 2 Balance ae He 3,193 5 5 3 Tora Rs. he 15,719 STATEMENT 1912. Oriental Publication Fund, No.2, in Dr. To Caso EXPENDITURE. Rs. As. y Printing charges on 7,074 3 O Balance 625 3.0 Toran Rs. ee 7,699 6 OQ lxvii No. 2. Acct. with the Asiatic Soe. of Bengal. 1912. Cr. Rs. As. P. Rs, As. P. By Balance from last Report oe he ses 2,488 13 7 By Casu Receipts. Government Allowances ss oo 9,000 0 0 Publications sold sd cash car ne 1415 2 6 Advances recover ies ee 105-9. 7 — 10,520 12 1 By Personat ACCOUNT. Sales on credit He on ue ia 2,709 10 O Tota Rs. ie 15,719 3 8 D. Hooper, Hono Treasu Asiatic Society of Bengal. No. 8. Acct. with the Asiatic Soc. of Bengal. 1912. Cr. Rs. As. P. 6 By Balance from last Report... a ake 6,699 0 By Casu REcEIPTs. 0 0 Government Allowance a $e ae 1,000 ih Tora Rs. 7,699 6 0 D. Hooper, Honorary T Asiatic "Bociety oof Bengal. Ixvili STATEMENT 1912. Oriental Publication Fund, No. 3, in Dr. To CasH EXPENDITURE. Ra. As. iP; To Balance 1198 9 6 Torta. Rs. 1,198 9 6 STATEMENT 1912. Sanskrit Manuscript Fund in Acct. Dr. To CasH EXPENDITURE. Rs. As. P. Rs. As. P. Salaries ~ 1,536 12 6 onus is a ee 37 8 0 Contingencies cae ok sea 119 12 6 Insurance ... me vas Sy 125 0 O Stationery ... ce ay oe 14 7 0 Purchase of Manuscripts ° 219 0 O Postages A $76 — 2,055 15 6. Balance — = 2,394 4 8 Totat Rs. 4450 4 2 No. 4, Acct. with the Asiatic Soc. of Bengal. 1912. Cr. Re: Agro. By Balance from last Report je cee 2 6 ToTat Rs. We ae 35108 28 8 D. Hooper, Honorary Treas Asiatic Society of Bengal. No. 8. with the Asiatie Society of Bengal. 1912. Cr. Rs: As. P. Rs. As. P. By Balance from last Report 1,195 13 11 By Cash REcEIPTs. ent Allowance ove 3,200 0 0 aber sold for cash ae 1G a ; a Advances recovered ue ie ek a By PersonaL ACcoUnNT. as ore 3 Sales on credit ue 5 ae Tora Rs. ine 4,450 4 2 D. Hooper, Honorary Treasurer, Asiatic Society of Bengal. STATEMENT 1912. Arabie and Persian MSS. Fund in Dr. To CasH EXPENDITURE, Rs, As. P. Bao As; 2: Salaries... ane Ms ane 2,198 3 6 onus she = ee. bps 6--0°.0 Contingencies fe re sae 510 0 insurance ... a se nee a1. 4- 0 Stationery... 2 sas Ms L126 Postages ... AS as is baa 6 Loan refunded NES a ae 1,500 0 O _ —— 3,738 1 O Balance me ae 1,230 2 8 Totat Rs. np 4,968 3 8 STATEMENT 1912. Bardie Chronicles MSS. Fund in Dr. To Casn EXPENDITURE. Rs. As. P. He: Ag Fr: Travelling charges a se a Balance re Bok 28810 6 TotaL Rs os 1,153 15 6 xxi No. 6. Acct. with the Asiatie Soc. of Bengal. 1912, Cr. Rs, As. P, Rs. As. P, By Balance from last Report _... ee: ee 634 14 4 By Casn Receipts, ‘Government Allowance ae Ly Pat 4338 5 4 TorTaL Ks. eee 4,968 3 8 D. Hooper, Honorary Trea Asiatic Society tp Bengal. a 7, Aect. with the Asiatio So Soe. of J Bengal. 1912. 4 ad Re. As. F. Rs. As. P. By Balance from last Report .. 1,158 15 6 Tortat Rs. 1,153 16 6 D. Hooprr, Honorary Trea Asiatic Boctety of Bengal. Ixxi STATEMENT TI9{2. Personal Dr. : Bs. As, P. Kea. Ag:: P- To Balance from last Report ae ee Se 5,212 13 3 To CasH EXPENDITURE. Advances a # scone of Manuscripts, ete ... ike 1,053 0-4 To Asiatic Society we 1613816 -.2 ty, Renin Publication Fund, No.1 ee 2,709 10 0 » Sanskrit Manuscript Fund mae oT: 7 3 iii 18 88Y 0° 6 Tota. Rs, fe 25,146 14 O STATEMENT 1912. ; | Invest- or. Value. Cost. Be SP. Ra Ae 8, To Balance from last Report... me a 0 0 2.35.95! 0 10 Tota Rs. oe '2,38,700 0 O 2,35,951 0 10 PERMANENT RESERVE, Temporary KEsERVE. Funps. Total Cost. Value, Cost. Value. Cost. ; Rs, |A|P.| Rs, |AJP| Re [Alp AJP.| Rs. |A.|P. Asiatic Society ++ | 1,63,350} 0! 0} 1,62,035} 9 73, 2 10 Trust Fand | 1,400} 0! 0 11330 al 0 Balt a tod snl 0 Torat Rs. --- | 1,64.7501 0 0} 1,63,874115| &| 78,950) of d 72 570) if 2| 2| 2,385,951 oo lxxili No. 8. Account. 1912 Cr. Rg. As, P, Rs. As. P. By Cash agin soll one ar i 19,421.12 5 » Asiatic Soc as 452 5 O »» Oriental Publicetion Fund, No. 1 ak ou 2 0 —_ — 511 -7...0 By Balance. Due to the Due by the Society. Society. | Rs. | Ase} P. | Rs. |As. | Pe —— 4,091} 10} 10} 186) 6] 0 | uu ir 41 0] . Empl 330 | O} OF 100; OF}; 0 Onna Publication 432; 0} 0 wie srit MA, Fund 300 | Of} OF ... ~ime att a 696 | 15] Of 424/14) 0 5,874 | 14; 7] 661; 4) 0 | cal ie 5,218 10 7 Torat Be. is 25,146 14 0 D. Hooper, Honorary Treasure Asiatic Society ‘of Bengal. NO. O: ment 1912. OF: Value. Cost. Rs. As. P. Rs. As. P. O 2,835,951 010 By Balance “ ” sd mune retort —_— Totat Rs a 2,388,700 0 0 2,35,951 “oh D. Hooper, lxxiv STATEMENT 1912 Trust Dr. Rs. As. P i eee aided 48 0 0 To Pension Pa aiaes Ke = 1,467 11 10 ToTaL Rs. ies 1,515 11 10 STATEMENT Tae. Cash ior. Re; As. P, To Balance from last Report aa 5,688 7 11 RECEIPTs. He. As. P. To Asiatic Socie ++ 18,764 4 6 » Oriental Pubkeation Fund, No. 1 » 1052012 1 9 ‘Do. do. No. ,000 0 » Sanskrit fener Fand 3,216 15 0 » Arabic and Persian MSS. Fund 4,333 4 » Personal ess ant . : 19,421 12 5 Trust Fun iis 0 57,306 1 4 Tota Rs. ee 62,994 9 3 Ixxv No. 10 Fund. 3 1912. Cr. he. Aer bs c Tecra oe he ee ve oF 1,466 11 10 nterest on Investments ; 2 a 49 0 0 ToTat Rs. i 1,515 11 10 D. Hooper, Honorary Treasw Asiatic Society ea Bengal. No. 11. Account. 1912. Cr. EXPENDITURE. Rs Aa. P: Re, «As. P. ate Asiatic Socie — Bie 8 4 99 Ori me Publieation ‘Fund, No. F .. 12,466 12 3 9 Sanskrit ede ripts und wo Arabic and Persian Mancusi tind 8S 2 ,, Bardic Chronicles MSS. Fund oe 867 5 0 Person co 1,053 0 4 Trus 48 0 0 2 oe OLA 18 5 Balance 1,565 11 10 SL rete pacar Torat RBs. 62,994 9 3 D. Hooper, onorary Treasurer, Asiatic Society of Bengal. Ixxvi STATEMENT 1912. Balance LIABILITIES. Be. As -P, Ba. Aa Asiatic Society .. 2,382,334 7 8 Orie ae leant Fund, ay 1. 2 198 5 5 aie 625 3 0 ae No. 3. af: 1198 9 6 pe Manusoripts Fund ae 2,394 4 8 vip and Pers eee Fund ate 1,280 2 8 Bardic cuxticies MSS. Fund “eh 86 10 6 Trust Fund 1,467 11 10 ; 2,42,730 7 8 Tota Rs. Be 2,42,730 7 3 We have examined = above Balance Sheet, and the appended detailed Accounts with the books and vouchers presente d to us, and certify that it is in accordance therewith, pene hs setting forth the position of the Society as at the 3lst December, 1912. 3 Catcurta, Mevueens, Kine & Co., 26th February, 1913. hartered Accountants, Auditor 8. Ixxvli No. 12. Sheet. 1912. ASSETS. Ra, ‘Ag. Po Bs... Ag, P, Personal Accow 5,213 10 7 Investments (3¥l Government Pro. ‘Notes Oost 2, ~ 951 0 10 Cash Accoun 565 11 10 ——_—__ ———. 2,42,730 7 8 3°/, Government Pro. Note at the Bank of Bengal’s Safe a Account, Cashier’s Security Deposit, Rs. 5 Totat Rs, me 242,730 7 3 D, Hoopsr, Honorary Treasure Asiatic Society hy Bengal. MAREH, 1913. The Monthly General Meeting of the sean was held on Wednesday, the 5th March, 1913, at 9-15 p MAHAMAHOPADHYAYA HarapRasaD SuHastri, C.I.E., Vice- President, in the chair. Maulavi Abdul Wali, Dr. N. Annandale, Mr. J. Coggin Brown, Babu Nilmani Chakravarti, Mr. F. Doxey, Mr. Ekendra Nath Ghosh, Mr. T. P. Ghosh, i F. H. Gravely, Mr. H.G Bien Mr. A. H. Harley, Mr. D. Hooper, Rev. H. Hosten, S.J, J. Insch, Mr. K. P. Jayaswal, Babu Broja- gopal Nakheel: “De Satis Chandra Vidyabhusana, Rev. J. att. Visitor :—Mrs. Insch. The minutes of the last meeting were read and confirmed. Twenty-five presentations were announced. The General Secretary reported that Rai Rajendra Chandra Sastri Bahadur and Major H. J. Williams, King’s Dragoon Guards, have expressed a wish to withdraw from the Society. The General Secretary read the names of the gama gentlemen who were appointed to serve on the various Com mittees ties 1913. Finance Committee. Dr. N. Annandale, Dr. W. A. K. Christie, Mahamahopa- W. K. Dods, dhyaya Haraprasad Shastri, C.LE., Mr. Mr. R. D. Mehta, C.I.E., Mr. H. G. Tomkins, CLE. Labrary Committee. Dr. N. Annandale, Dr. W. A. K. Christie, Mahamahopa- dhyaya Haraprasad Shastri, C. LE., Mr. J. A. Chapman, Dr. KE. P. Harrison, Mr. H. H. Hayden, i i Lieut.-Col. F. P. Maynard, I.M.S., Capt. J. D. Sande C.1L.E. Taek C. te Peart, I.A., Dr. G. "Phibaut, OLE. ‘Dr. D. B. Spooner, Mr. J. Coggin Brown. Philoiogical Committee. Mr. Abdulla al-Mamun Suhrawardy, Hon. Mr. E. A. Gait, C.LE., Dr. Girindra Nath Mukhopadhaya, Mahamahopadhyaya H araprasad Shastri, C.I.E., Babu Monmohan Chakravarti, Ixxx Proceedings of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. {March, Babu Muralidhar Banerji, Babu Nogendra Nath Vasu, Babu Rakhal Das Banerji, Dr. E. D. Ross, C.I.E., Capt. C. L. Peart, I.A., Dr. Satis Chandra Vidyabhusana, Dr. G. Thibaut, C.1.E., Maulavi Abdul Wali, Mr. A. Venis, Babu Nilmani Chakravarti. The a EN gentlemen were balloted for as Ordinary Member. ea, P. S. Macmahon, Canning ane Lucknow, pro- posed by Mr. S. W. Kemp, seconded by Dr. W. A. K. Chris- tie ; Prof. T. L. Simonsen, Presidency Callens Madras, pro- posed by Mr. S. W. ee a by Dr. W. A. K, Christie ; Capt. David Munro, M.B., I.M.S., proposed By Lieut.-Col. L. Rogers, C.I.E. , seconded by Capt. iD. Sandes, I.M.S. be i Jayaswal exhibited an elephant-headed drain- -pipe found in 1900 in the ruins of the old Rajagriha of the Brihad- rathas and the Sisunagar. The following papers were read :— 1. Tipulidae and Culicidae from the Lake of Tiberias and Damascus. By ¥. W. Epw WARDS, B.A., F.G.S. Communicated by Dr. N. hein. : This paper has been published in the Journal for January 913. 2. A Preliminary Account of a revised Classification of Indo-Australian Passalidae. By F. H ; This paper has been published in the Journal for Novem- er 1912. 3. Materials for a Flora of the M. alayan Peninsula, No 24. By J. Sykes Gamprez, C.I.E. M.A. , F.R.S., late of the Indian Pekcotee “te cwhioniig Communicated - by the Natural History ecreta 4. : Notes on the Biological work of the RI.M.S. ‘‘ Investi- gator ’’ during the Survey Seasons 1910-1] and 1911-12. By Capr. R. B. Szymour SEWELL, IMS. The Internal Anatomy of the Blind Prawn of Galilee (yphioeari balilee Gas alm). By Ekenpranata Guosz, L.M.S.. 6. A Note on o., digi Galilee. F.Z.S. Communicated bh These ried ber of the Jou: 5 A F. RovussBLET, NNANDA Be aa nt Seg ina ee num- 7. On the enfin of the Soma Plant. By Brasa Lab Mouxueri, M.A This paper has been returned to author for condensation. 1913.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. Ixxxi 8. The Ancient Civilization a rig By MawamaHopPa- DHYAYA HaraprasaD Suastri, C.1.E This paper has not yet been wabaiited to the Publication Committee. ae The Adjourned Meeting of the Medical Section of the Society was held at the Society’s Rooms on Wednesday, the 12th March, 1913, at 9-30 p.m. Cou. G. F. A. Harris, C.S.I., in the chair. The following members were present :— Dr. A. §. Allan, Capt. J. H. Burgess, I.M.S., Major E. D. W. Greig, LMS., Dr. W. C. Hossack, Surgeon-Captain F. F. MacCabe, Major D. McCay, L.MS., Lt.-Col. A. R. Newman, LMS. , Dr. Indumadhab Mallick, Lt.-Col. A. “EL. Nott, I.M.S., Lt.-Col. roe Kinealy, I.M.S., Capt. J. D. Sandes, I.M.S., Honorary Secretary. sitors :—Capt. Green Armytage, I.M.S., Dr. G. N. Chat- terjee, Mtajor Dickinson, I.M.S., Dr. E. H. Hankin an R. B. Lloyd, I.M.8., Capt. E C. Phelan, LMS., r. D. Quinl n, Lt.- Col. A. Smith, I.M.S., Col. Sutherland, L s ‘8. , Major Winter, I.M.S., and two others. The minutes of the last meeting were read and confirmed. I. Clinical cases were shown :— 1. Lt.-Col. Nott showed a case of nerve thickening. 2. Lt.-Col. Newman showed a new form of towel clip and some new dressing materials. II. The following paper was read :— Sero diagnosis of Syphilis—By Lt. -Col. Sutherland, I.M.S. — Greig, Lt.-Col. O’Kinealy, Lt. -Col. Nott, Capt. Green Armytage, Dr. Mallick, Col. Harris spoke, and Col. Suthaiend replied. eal ON i acter cated APRIL, 1913. The Monthly General Meeting of the ey was held on Wednesday, the 2nd April, 1913, at 9-15 p.m His Excellency the Right Hon’ble Toomas Davip Baron ama OF SKIRLING, G.C.I.E., K.C.M.G., President, in the cha The following members were present :— Maulavi Abdul Wali, Mr. J. C. Brown, Prof. P. J. Briihl, Mr. S. W. Kemp, Mr. R. D. Mehta, C. LE., “Babu Brajolal Mukerjee, Capt. C. L. Peart, Mahamahopadhyaya Haraprasad Shastri, C.I.E., Rai Bahadur Lolitmohan Singha Ray, Mr. G. Stadler, Mahamahopadhyaya Dr. Satis Chandra Siac ebhanaks, Rev. J. Wat Visitor :— Mr, G. M. Philips. The minutes of the last meeting were read and confirmed. Sixteen presentations were announced. The General Secretary reported that Major G. P. Lenox- Conyngham nd Mr. H. Wright have expressed a wish to withdraw from ‘the Society. aa ee gentlemen were balloted for as Ordinary es } 2 S. Bhatnagar, rite Judge, Shahpura, Rajputana, si saa by Rai Bahadur Ram Saran Das, seconded by Rai Bahadur Munna Lal; Mr. pereer Cumming Calder, Curator of Herbarium, Royal Botanic Garden, Sibpur, libiione proposed by Mr. D. Hooper, seconded by Mr. 8. ; Mr. M. 8. Rama Swami, Officiating Curator of the Recucin, Royal Botanic Garden, Sibpur, Howrah, , proposed by Mr. D. Hopper, seconded by Mr S. W. Kemp; Ah. pur, roposed by u Bet pe fy Mahamahopadiyaya Haraprasad Shastri, : I ae : Mr. Bernard Alfred White, proposed by tie W. Kirkpatrick, seconded by Col. a. z. * Harris, C.8.1. W. Kemp and J. Coggin-Brown exhibited a Ss. solo illustrati ve of “abet and Galong Ethnology. Ixxxiv Proceedings of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [April, ee following papers were read :— Copies of two Recently Sota Letiers of Major ha Rennell.—By Rev. W. K. Firmince 2. Entomostraca from Lake oie. i: RoBERT GUR- NEY. Communicated by the Natural History Secretary. This bare’ will be published in a subsequent number of the Journ 3. is ‘Srid- -pa-ho: a Tibeto-Chinese tortoise chart of divina- tion.—By Dr. Satis CHaNDRA VIDYABHUSANA. This paper will be published in the Memoirs. 4. Ancient History of Bengal: the portion of Banga Bagadha race-—By MAHAMAHOPADHYAYA HARAPRASAD SHAS- TRI, C.I This ; paper has not yet been submitted to the Publication Committee. 5. Sarcocolla.—By Davip Hooper. ——>—— The Adjourned Meeting of the Medical Section of the Society was held at the Society’ s Rooms on Wednesday, the 9th April, 1913, at 9-30 p.m Masor D. McCay, I.MS., in the chair. The following members were present :— Dr. Adrian Caddy, Dr. K. K. Chatterjee, Col. B. H. Deare, I.M.S., Major H. B. Foster, I.M.S., Dr. Harinath ere Dr. Indumadhay ue Major J. W. F. Rait, I.M.S., Col. L. Rogers, C.1.E., LMS. Visttors:—Dr. Nanilal Pan and Dr. D. D. Wilson. The minutes of the last meeting were read and confirmed. I. Clinical cases were shown. II. Lieut-Colonel L. Rogers showed a diagram and col- oured drawings illustrating the distribution of the lesions of the bowels in dysentery. III. A paper was read by Dr. Hari Nath Ghosh, Rai Ba- hadur, on the results of trial of four indigenous’ drugs at the Campbell Hospital. (1) Ixora Coccinea (Rangon Phull) for dysente (2) Holarrhena Antidysenterica (ure) fo anise: (3) Meia Azadirachta (Nim) for fev: (4) Berberis Lyceum (Sario ixidgs. for fevers. 1913.] Proceedings of the Astatic Society of Bengal. \xxxv Major Rait showed a patient from whom he had removed the spleen for rupture of the organ. Dr. Caddy showed two X-ray photos illustrating a case of Antrum disease. MAY, 1013. The Monthly General Meeting of a era d was held on Wednesday, the 7th May, 1913, at 9-15 D. Hooper, Esq., F.C.8., F.L.S., ees in the chair. The following members were present :— Maulavi Abdul Wali, Mr. J. Coggin Brown, Dr. P. J. ger Dr. L. L. Fermor, Rev. H. Hosten, 8.J., Mr. J. Insch, Mr. H. C. Jones, Mr. W. A. Lee, Mr. G. Stad The Minutes of the last Meeting were read and confirmed. Twenty-three presentations were announced. Henry MacMahon, K.C.I.E.; Major a Frederick Travers O’Connor, C.IL.E., R.A.; Mr. H. T. Cullis, 1.C.S.; Nawab Ali Hossain Khan Sahib, Mr. C. Hocgtiedl! gor Mr. D. Petrie have expressed a wish to withdraw from the Society. The Chairman announced that Mr. G. H. Tipper had taken charge of the office of General Secretary from Mr. 8. W. Kemp. Mu ied erede gentlemen were balloted for as Ordinary “em & < H. Hankin, M.A., D.Sc., Grand Hotel, Calcutta, proposed i Lieut.-Col. L. Rogers ; OLE, se eonded by 5 46 J. D. Sandes, I.M.S.; and Pandit ’ Manoharlal Zutshi Head Mister. Government High School, are he bolt pro- posed by Ram Saran Das, Rai Bahadur, seconded by Dr unna Lal, Rai Bahadur. er following papers were read :— A Synopsis of the Dioscoreas of sieleabea’ with descriptions of new species and of varieti D. Prar and I. H. B This paper will be poate’ in a subsequent number of the rnal. the Old World, Africa es.—By ei nanthemum indicum On Variations in the Flowers of Lim ed by the Natural = Thwaites—By H. M. Carpper. Communi eat Hi Koeors Secretary. a 3. Notes on Pollination of Colocasia eg ad Prema = CLecHorn. Communicated by the Na Secreta Ixxxviii Proceedings of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [May, This paper will be published in a subsequent number of the Journal. 4. A Double compound of mercuric oxide with Acetone.— By Jitenpra Natu Raxksuit. Communicated by Dr. P. C. Ray. Gunning (Zeit. anal. Chem., 24, 147) observed that acetone has the property of dissolving precipitated mercuric oxide and devised the well-known method for the detection of acetone. Emerson Reynolds (Proc. Royal Soc., /7, 431) and Kutscheroff (Ber. 17, 20) have prepared the compound 3HgO, 2C,H,O0 from the solution of mercuric oxide in acetone. By the following rocess another condensation product is obtained. To a saturated solution of mercuric chloride excess of caustic soda is added. The mereuric oxide thus precipitated is washed twice with its equal bulk of water, so that the alkali is not completely removed. Then acetone is added drop by drop with constant agitation, till about two-thirds of mercuric oxide is dissolved, Finally it is shaken vigorously and allowed to f solution of mercuric chloride and acetone by alkali carbonates, ammonia and substituted ammonium bases. e products formed, however, are not of the same appear- ance. Iam engaged in preparing compounds of mercury and pete: metals with other compounds containing ketonic radi- cals, 5. Firoz Shah’s Tunnels at Delhi: a note by Rev. H. Hosten, 8.J. ; I have twice already dealt with this subject (cf. J.A.S.B., 1911, pp. 99-108 ; 1912, pp. 279-281). Sir Edward Maclagan, a letter dated Hodal, June 3, 1857, and addressed by P. H. (probably Mr. Harvey) to Colonel Becher, Camp, Delhi. ‘The Raja of Bullubghur, a scoundrel, sent me the en- closed last night: ‘ There are unknown covered ways running all through the north part of Delhi’; but Metcalfe should know about these, one being supposed to run from Hindoo Rao’s house to the Palace.’’ ! | Cf. Cox. Kurra Youna, Delhi,—1857, London, 1902, p. 77. This reference, being more than a month earlier than the incident related in J.A.S.B., 1912. pp. 280-281, may explain how the soldiers, having got hold of the tradition, ‘‘ would not be convinced but that the rebels were working a mine under their feet.’” 1913.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. Ixxxix I am also informed that Mr. Gordon of the P.W.D. found lately in a cemetery lying between the Ludlow Castle Road and Underhill Road two shafts of an underground passage. They are about 30 ft. deep. Mr. Gordon thought they were almost cer- tainly used for bringing water from the canal to feed some wells under the ridge. The connecting tunnel was about 4 ft. high out and filled with canal silt. The Executive Engineer at Delhi suggested the same explanation. If so, it is argued that the © tunnel would not be earlier than the canal, viz., ‘Ali Mardan Khan’s time. i Since ‘Ali Mardin Khan was at Delhi between 1637 and 1657, I answer that, if the shafts now discovered prove to be connected with his canal, they do not disprove the existence of Firoz Shah’s tunnels, these being mentioned much earlier by Monserrate (1581), by Abi-l Fazl (ante 1596) and Finch (1611). If Firoz Shah’s tunnels had been aqueducts too, how is it pos- sible that, two centuries at most after their construction, and at a time when they were in a much better state of preservation than they may be now, tradition stated they had been used by Firoz Shah to go from one place to another ‘ Firoz Shalf was himself a great builder of canals (cf. Etuior, Hist. of India, III. 300, 483; IV. 8, 11; VI. 225; Vil. 86); but I fancy that these canals must have been open, above ground, Even, if in parts they should not have been so, it would be hard to understand how Aba-l Fazl should have Ae ; : ; ni a : irozaba . Ain, Col. Jarrett’s transl., II. 279. Shah near Firozabad. Cf. Ain, Co CC otyag aie Shah to Delhi, Within the fort of Hisar Firozah ‘a palace and, here in search of him Ss. ( irikh-i Firoz Shahi of This extract is taken from the Tarikh-s aan (Exx107, complete (ibid., p. The underground P cong in the Palace of Hisar Firozah xe Proceedings of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [May, remind us of similar ones found in the Agra and Delhi forts. Tradition says that during the Mutiny two or three soldiers ventured into the underground passages of the Agra Fort, and were never heard of after. Equally curious is a passage in Ibn Batiita, who was appointed judge of Delhi in the time of Firoz Shah’s immediate predecessor, Muhammad IT, ibn Tughlag (reigned 1325-51), son of Ghiyagu-d-din Tughlag Shah I (reigned 1320-25). ain which is the principal * * *?? (ELLIoT st. ] f 589.500). Pp p ( oT, Hist. of India, III It is difficult to see where were those walls within which horsemen and foot-soldiers could pass along from one end of the town to the other: whether at old Dehli or Pithaura, at Siri, where Ghiyasu-d-din Balban had his court and would have stored his grain; or at Jahan-panah, where Muhammad Shah how Firoz Shah, one of the greatest builders, if not the greatest, of the Delhi kings, should have thought of, and cn in, 1913.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. xci connecting Pithaura, Firozabad, the Kushk-i-Shikar and the river by means of three tunnels broad enough to allow the ladies of his harem to pass along in mounted procession. After my visit to Delhi in January 1913, I am by no means sure that the ridge (saltus), which Monserrate speaks of, does pillar on the northern ridge, and the ground near the Kotila is high and broken enough to justify the term salius. If Monser- rate can be understood as referring to the Kotila, the under- ground passage alluded to as going to Old Delhi, must have started from there, and so the tradition voiced by Monserrate, Abi-l-Fazl and Finch would with perfect uniformity have fixed upon the Kotila as the point whence the tunnels started and radiated. This may be an important clue to the archeologist. One of the exits must have been near the river, another near the Kushk-i-Shikar, a third near Rai Pithaura. A small distance from the Kotila, there is a partly covered passage ; but besides appearing too narrow to justify the traditional explanations of Menserrate and Abia-l Fazl, it leads to a well or baoli. Still, I think that the ground should first be explored thoroughly in that direction. In case of ill-suecess, some excavations might be tried in a southerly direction from the baoli near Hindu Rao’s house. If this also fails, let Ahmad Khan’s lines not be forgotten: ‘‘It is evident that by Old Dehli we must under- stand the castle and town of Raja Pithaura, for the third pas- sage is in that place, and very old people say that he [Firoz Shah] went as far as a marvellous place and a special basin [tank].’’ The special basin, according to Ahmad Khan, is the Hauz’ Alai or Hauz-i-Khas.’ . The Life and Works of Muhibb Allah of Bihar.— By N ee Mautavi M. Hipayat HossaIn. his paper will be published in a subsequent number of U T the Journal. 1 J.A.S.B., 1911, p. 100. 2 J.A.S.B., 1911, p. 103, n. 7. awe eee Se opie. CaS JUNE, 1913. Wednesday, the 4th June, 1913, at 9-15 Pp MAHAMAHOPADHYAYA HARAPRASAD SHASTRI, C.I1.E., F.A.S.B., Vice-President, in the chair. The following members were present :— Dr. N. Annandale, Mr. J. Coggin Brown, Dr. P. J. Briihl, Mr. H. G. Graves, Dr. E. H. Hankin, Mr. D. Hooper, Mr. K. P. Jayaswal, Mr. W. Jessop, Mr. S. W. Kemp, Lt.-Col. F. P. May- nard, I.M.S., Hon. Mr. Justice T. W. Richardson, Maulavi Muhamad Kazim Shirazi, Mr. G. H. Tipper. The minutes of the last meeting were read and confirmed. The Monthly General Meeting of the Society was held on 15 P.M. Fourteen presentations were announced. The General Secretary reported that Mr. J. C. Jack, I.C.S., has expressed a wish to withdraw from the Society. General Secretary laid on the table ei following appeal for contributions to the Lister Memorial Fun Tue Roya Society, Buruineton Hovse, Lonpon, W. 19th March, 1913. SIR, ; The remarkable advance of surgical science achieved by the late Lord Lister, and the priceless benefits conferred by him ation of suffering and the for the purpose of raising the funds to his memory, and a comic sey hould be of a ; A t t emorial 8 scribed. It is proposed that the imple marble medal- xciv Proceedings of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [June, either grants in aid of researches bearing on Surgery or rewards in recognition of important contributions to Surgical Science ionality. shall be made, irrespective of nation be willing to assist in this movement to perpetuate his memory. e sum already subscribed or promised is, perhaps, the adequate establishment of the third object. On behalf, therefore, of the Lister Memorial Committee we make this evidence of the appreciation with which Lord Lister’s services are regarded. We trust that in the important institution over which you ister was a member of many learned Academies and Societies throughout the world, and held Honorary Degrees from many foreign Universities. To these various institutions an appeal is also being made for contributions to the Fund. Signed, in the name of the Lister Memorial Committee, -JoHN Rosz Braprorp, Honorary Secretary. The President, Asiatic Society of Bengal, Calcutta. The following gentlemen were balloted for as Ordinary Members :— Mr. P. Chaudhuri, Bar.-at-Law, 2, Bright Street, Bally- gunge, Calcutta, proposed by Mr. K. P. Jayaswal, seconded by Hon. Justice Sir Asutosh Mukherji, Kt.; Babu Romesh Chan- dra Mazumdar, M.A., 16, Chandranath Chatterji’s Street, Bhowanipur, proposed by Dr. Satis Chandra Vidyabhusana, — seconded by the Hon. Justice Sir Asutosh Mukherji, Kt. The following papers were read :-— 1. The Pitt Diamond and the B B? a Duel By Rev. H. Hosten, 8.J. le Lyes of Jagannath, Puri oe paper has been published in the Journal for’ May, 1913. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. xev 2. The a a Asoka’s Coronation (a new caleulation).— By K. P. Jaya 3. The Pay e Bhasa, and sii Darsaka of Magadha.— By K. P. Jay i pion —. will be published in a subsequent ba of the Jou The Action oy Nitrosyl Chloride on Secondary tees Metigihenadase and pis Sagar tari —By AL Datta. Communicated by D ) 5. A New Compound of ipseacau with Mercuric Oxide.—By SaratcHanpRa Jana. Communicated by Dr. P. C. Roy. Ethylacetoacetate, when shaken up with yellow oxide of mercury, gradually combines with it forming a white amorphous powder. This is washed with ether to free it from the excess of ester and dried on the water bath. oie substance on analysis gave C= 246, H=3'4 and Hg=51 The white powder is probably a double compound of neg ester and the oxide having the formula 3HgO . 4CH,CO.CH,COOC,H, Theory for the latter demands C = 24°68, H=3°42, Hg=51°4. The white powder is insoluble in water. It regenerates the ester on shaking up with dilute hydrochloric acid and the oxide of mercury goes into solution. On warming the white powder with strong caustic potash solution the compound breaks up into its components, namely HgO and ester, and the latter undergoes hydrolysis, alcohol and acetic acid being formed— CH,COCH,COOC,H, + 2KOH = 2CH,COOK + C,H,OH. The addition of mercuric oxide to the ester and the forma- tion of the double compound suggests the possibility of the formation of similar double compounds with ketonic esters. I am at present engaged in the preparation of similar double a aa with other organic substances containing the CO he Double Mercuri-periodides of Substituted Ammonium Bases. Terrapropylammonium M ercuri-periodide.—By — ao Darra and Haripas Muxers1. Communicated by Dr P. C. Roy —B CF On T T'wo-shouldered Stone Implements from Assam.—By Hem Cuanpra Das-Gupra. Communicated by the Anthropo- logical Secretary. ihe This ates will be published in a subsequent number o the Jou xevi Proceedings of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (June, 1913.] A new Springtail from Galilee.— By PROFESSOR GEORGE H. Careenter. Communicated by Dr. N. ANNANDALE 2 Polyzoa from the Lake of Tiberias.—By Dr. N. chee: Note on a Sponge Larva from the Lake of Tiberias.— By oO N. pepe: SON PRN ENR RN OO JULY? Fe: The Monthly General Meeting of ne rae! was held on Wednesday, the 2nd July, 1913, at 9-15 MAHAMAHOPADHYAYA MHaARAPRASAD SuHastRI, (C.I.E., F.A8.B., Vice-President, in the chair. The following members were present :— Maulavi Abdul Wali, Dr. N. Annandale, Mr. A. C. Atkinson, Lieut. T. L. Bomford, I.M.S., Mr. B. L. Chaudhuri, Dr. E. H. Hankin, Rev. H. Hosten, 8 J., Mr. W. Jessop, Mr. H. C. Jones, Mr. W. A. Lee, Mr. R. D. Mehta, 0.L.E. , Capt. C. L. Peart, I.A., Mr. =: Stadler, Dr. Satis Chandra Vidyabhusana, Rev. A. W. oun ws :—Mr. K. S. Antia, Mrs. Atkinson, Mr. A r. . ; : Saklat, Mrs. E. C. Spooner, Mr. J. D. Yuzdar, Mr. E. P. Yuzdar The minutes of the last meeting were read and confirmed. Twenty-six presentations were announced. hah nae Secretary reported that Mr. A. C. Mc Watters, LC.S., Major C. C R. Murphy, 30th Punjabis, Mr. R. C. ieee Maice t Mulvany, I.M.S., Rev. Neil Meldrum and Mr. A. Hale have Pee. a wish to withdraw from the Society. The General oe reported the death of Rai Ram Saran Das, Bahadur d that owing to pressure of other ie. GH ‘ai ig resiened the office of General work, Mr. G. H. Secretary and Captain C. L. Peart had been appointed in his plac XCViil Procs. of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (July, 1913.] Ram, seconded by Mahamahopadhyaya Haraprasad Shastri, 37 8 E.; Babu Shiva Prasad, B.A., Offg. Junior Secretary to the Board. of Revenue, United fee ae proposed by Lala Sita Rafa, seconded by Mahamahopadhyaya Haraprasad Shastri, CLE: ; Mr. P. T. Srinivas Iyenger, Principal M.A.V.N. College, Vizagapatam, proposed by Sir Raja A. V. Jugga Row, seconded y Mr. S. P. V. Ranganathasvami. The following papers were read :— 1. Note on the Dragonflies of Syria and the Jordan acs —By F. : LaipLaw. Communicated by Dr. N. ANNANDALE. 2. The Crustacea Decapoda of the Lake of ES —By N. eatin D.Sc., F.A.S.B., and 8. W. Kemp, B.A., F.A.8.B. These two papers have been published in the Journal for June, Seg Mirza Zi-l Qarnain, the tens “ the Agra College soa d.c. 1660).__B y Rev. H. Hosten, This paper may be published in a ae number of the Journal. India in the Avesta of the Parsees. —By SHAMSULOLMA Dr. Jivanst JAMSHEDJI Mont, B.A., Pu#.D. Communicated by the General Secretary. 8 paper has not yet been submitted to the Publication Cntinatttee: ea ee AUGUST, 10913. The Monthly General Meeting of the Society was held on Wednesday, the 6th August, 1913, at 9-15 p.m. MAHAMAHOPADHYAYA HARAPRASAD Swastri, C.I.E., M.A., F.A.S.B., Vice-President, in the chair. The following members were present :— Maulavi Abdul Wali, Dr. N. Annandale, Dr. Lg J. Brihl, Mr. E. Digby, Rev. H. Hosten, S.J., Mr. W. Kirkpatrick, Mr. W. A. Lee, Mr. G. Stadler. The minutes of the last meeting were read and confirmed. Seventy-five presentations were announced. The General Secretary reported that Mr. T. A. Gopinath Rao, M.A., Superintendent of Archeology, Trivandrum, and Capt. F. R. Teesdale, Staff College, Quetta, have expressed a wish to withdraw from the Society. The General Secretary reported the death of Mr. James Luke. : The following gentleman was balloted for as an Ordinary Member :— : Professor C. J. Brown, Canning College, Lucknow, propose by Prof. P. 8S. MacMahon and seconded by Mr. G. H. Tipper. ; i f taking Dr. P. J. Brith] protested against the custom 0 papers as read, and suggested that authors might be asked to attend and read their own papers. The matter was referred to the Council, and it was decided to comply with the request as far as possible. ; Dr. N. Annandale remarked that the ae Gena express its regret that office-bearers of the Bou chs Sooke it convenient to attend the Ordinary Meetings with greater regularity. ne This was reported to the Council and they concurred. — Dr. Brithl proposed that an abstract of — ate be issued in advance, and Father Hosten Phan Sak the abstract might be circulated with the Programm Meeting. The Council agreed to the proposal. c Proes. of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. {August, 1913.) The following paper was read :— 1. Nor’ westers and Monsoon Prediction. By E. Diasy. The reading of the following papers were postponed :— 1. Constitutents of Andrographis paniculata. By Ksuttt- BHUSAN BuapuRI. Communicated by Dr. U. N. BRanMacHARI. 2. Sayings of Lalesvari. By ANAND Kovut. 3. Birat and its neighbourhood. ae ABANICHAN DRA CHAT- TERJI. Communicated by Mr. 4. The Belabo Grant of Poe By R. D. BANERSI. ——$—— The Adjourned Meeting of the Medical Section of the Society was held at the Pie s Rooms on Wednesday, the 13th August. 1913, at 9-30 Pp Lizvt.-CoLongt L, ani C.I.E., I.M.S., in the chair. bs following members were present :— Upendra Nath Brahmachari, Dr. K. K. Sn Dr. tetnk tat Mallick, Dr. Girindra Nath Mukerj Visitors :—Dr. 8. N. Mitter, Dr. H. C. Ganguly. The minutes of the April meeting were read and confirmed. A Clinical Case of Parotial Tumour in which post-opera- tive fever due to previous septre II. The following papers were read :— (1) The Staining Reaction of Anthrax Bacilli. —By S. N. (2) An investigation into the physico-chemical mechanism f haemolysis by specific haemolysins. (Prelimi- pa Conenuniotin’ —By U. N. Brahmachari, M.A., M.D. SEPTEMBER, 10913. The Monthly General Meeting of the Society was held on Wednesday, the 3rd September, 1913, at 9-15 p.m. ManaMAHOPADHYAYA HaraprasaD Sawastri, M.A., C.LE., F.A.S.B., Vice-President, in the chair. The following members were present :— Maulavi Abdul Wali, Mr. J. Coggin Brown, Dr. P. J. Briihl, Dr. Ekendranath Ghosh, Mr. T. P. Ghosh, Dr. E. H. Hankin, Mr. H. H. Hayden, C.I.E., Mr. D. Hooper, Rev. H. Hosten, S.J., Mr. J. Insch, Mr. W. Jessop, Mr. 8. W. Kemp, Mr. W. Kirkpatrick, Capt. C. L. Peart, 1.A., Lt.-Col. L. Rogers, C.I.E., Mr. G. Stadler, Dr. Satis Chandra Vidyabhusana, Rev. J. Watt. Visitor :—Mr. A. H. Kingston. The minutes of the last meeting were read and confirmed. Forty-two presentations were announced. The General Secretary reported that Capt. F. P. Mackie, I.M.S., Babu Satis Kumar Banerji and Shah Munir Alam have expressed a wish to withdraw from the Society. The General Secretary laid on the table the following letter from Mr. H. G. Lyons asking for a contribution to ooker Memoria] :— 5, HEaTHVIEW GARDENS, Rorampton, S.W. August 2nd, 1913. Dear Sir, The Dean and Chapter of Westminster Abbey having assented to a Memorial to the late Sir Joseph Hooker being placed in the Abbey, a sub-committee has been appointed by the Royal Society to take the necessary steps. Your iewerend with which I believe Sir Joseph Hooker was long connected, short inscription, will not cost : ired contributions will suffice to provide the en Se ee Yours faithfully, H. G. Lyons, : Hon. Sec., Hooker Memorial. The Secretary, Asiatic Society, Bengal. cii Proes. of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (September, 1913.] e Chairman announced that the Elliott Prizes for Scientific Research for the year 1912 will not be awarded as the essays received in competition were not of sufficient merit to justify the award of the Prizes The following gentlemen were balloted for as Ordinary Members :— A. Rogalsky, Attaché to the Imperial Russian Consiidates General, — by Dr. E. Denison Ross, seconded by Mr. G. H. Tipper; P rof. Ambica Charan Raksit, M.A., City College, Calcutta, proposed by Dr. Satis Chandra Vidya- bhusana, seconded by Hon. Justice Sir Asutosh Mukhopa- dhyaya, Kt. Mr. S. W. Kemp, on behalf of Mr. E. C. Stuart Baker, exhibited a small collection of birds recently made in the Mishmi Hills by Capt. R. eS aed I.M.S., and presented by him to the Indian Museu Mr. Hooper exhibited a specimen of the gum of Livistona chinensis from Singapore ae following papers were read :— Sy piaerig of Andrographis paniculata. By Ksuttt- slot Baap Communicated by Dr. U. N. BRAHMACHARI. (Postponed ain ee meeting). This paper will not be published in the Journal. 2. Sayings of Lalesvari. By ANanpd Kou. (Postponed from last Meeting). 3. Birat and its neighbourhood. By ABANICHANDRA CHAT- TERJI. Communicated by Mr. K.C. DE. (Postponed from last ). These two papers have been referred back to the authors. 4. The Belabo Grant ny Ne nigat By R. D. BANEBJI. (Postponed from last Meetin This paper will be tiated in a subsequent number of the Journal. NOVEMBER, 1913. The Monthly General Meeting of the eety. was held on Wednesday, the 5th November, 1913, a t 9-1 D. Hooprr, Esq., F.C.8., F.L.S.; F.A.S.B. "Vie Prosigient. in the chair. The following members were present :— Maulavi Abdul Wali, Dr. N. Annandale, Mr. J. Coggin Brown, Dr. E. H. Hankin, the Rev. H. Hosten, S.J., Mr. J. Insch, Mr. W. Kirkpatrick, Capt. C. L. Peart, LA., Dr G. E. Pilgrim, ee -Col. L. Rogers, I.M.S., Mr. G. Stadler and the Rey. . W. Young. Visitor :—Mr. E. M. Hayward. The minutes of the last meeting were read and confirmed. Kighty-four presentations were announced. The Chairman, in unveiling a brass memorial tablet in commemoration of the late David Waldie, made the following remarks :— Da vid Waldie was born at Linlithgow, Scotland, on Febru- ary 27th, 1813. He studied medicine in Edinbur urgh and prac- tised for some time as an apothecary in his native town. ‘Sub. sequently he went to Liverpool as an assistant in the Liverpool eed a it and ultimately succeeded Dr. Brett, the com- pany’s chem While in Liverpool he played an important part in the oe of the annenthilie property of chloroform. Chloroform was discovered by Soubeiran, a French chemist, in 1831, and by Liebig in 1832. It received its present name from Dumas in 1834. In 1837 or 1838 it was introduced into England as chloric ether and was used as a spirituous solution. Waldie altered the process and prepared a liquor of uniform strength without the disagreeable flavour. In 1847 Dr. (after- wards Sir J. Y.) Simpson “made enquiries for a new anaesthetic in place of ether, and Waldie recommended chloroform. Experi- ments were made and the substance proved so satisfactory that the results were communicated by Dr. Simpson to the por Chirurgical Society of Edinburgh on the 10th —— of t : year. Since then it has become ie - the : _ wages mankind in surgical o ons. aldie in 1853 ae BR WN Be works, the first of their kind, at Cossipore, which were afterwards transferred to Konn —— The Adjourned Meeting of the Medical Section of the Society was held at the oe s Rooms on Wednesday, the 12th November, 1913, at 9-30 Pp Lizvut.-CoLoneL W. J. ie I.M.S., in the chair. The following members were present :— Dr. A. 8. Allan, Dr. U.N. Brahmachari, Dr. Adrian eee Dr. Bi Chatterjee, Major E. D. W. Greig, I.M.S., Hankin, Dr. Indumadhab Mallick, Lieut. ee B. _ Newman, I.M.S., Lieut.-Colonel A. H. Nott, ILM. oe, Lieut.- Colonel L. Rogers, I.M.S., Capt. J. D. Sana, I.M.S., Honor- ary Secretary. Visitors :—Dr. C. Banks, Dr. W. S. Allan. The minutes of the August meeting were read and con- firmed. The Emetine and other treatments of Amoebic Dysentery and Hepatitis (including Liver abscess) were discussed. Col. Rogers opened the discussion. Papers were read by Lieut.-Colonel Nott, Lieut.-Colonel Newman, Major Munro and Dr. Seal. The other papers were postponed. SON ER DECEMBER, 1913. The Monthly General Meeting of the cespged was held on Wednesday, the 3rd December, 1913, at 9-15 P MAHAMAHOPADHYAYA HARAPRASAD SuHastTet, C.I1.E., M.A., F.A.S.B., Vice-President, in the chair The following members were present :— Maulvi Abdul Wali, Dr. N. Annandale, Dr. P. J. Brihl, Mr. J. Coggin Brown, Dr. Gopal Chandra Chatterji, The Hon. Mr. J. G. Cumming, Mr. T. P. Ghosh, Mr. H. Gravely, Mr. H. G. Graves, The Rev. i. Hosten, 8.J., Mr. W. Kirkpatrick, Capt. C. L. Peart, Mr. G. Stadler, Dr. Satis Chandra Vidya- bhusana. Visitors :—The Rev. A. Gille, 8.J., The Rev. P. Molitor, S.J., Mr. D. N. Mukerji, Dr. Young. The minutes of the last meeting were read and confirmed. Forty-one presentations were announced. ss A Lane, I.MLS., Mr. W. Leather, Mr. F. radley-Birt, Mr. E. B. Ho well, as Tiwi dee I.M.S., Tis ; Mr. J. H. Towle, Mr. P. N. Mukerjie, Capt. G. King, I.M.S., have expressed a wish to withdraw from the Society. ek sari gentlemen were balloted for as Ordinary Member | abu Prayag Prasad Tripathi, Asst. Master, Govt. Hig School, Arrah repeal by Dr. Satis Chandra Vidyabhusana, hopadhyaya Hara Pe Shastri, C.L.E.; seconded by Mahamahopa 249 tou ‘P Pak haan Major Roger Parker Wilson : Campbell Hospital, Sealdah House, ae proposed y Lieut.-Col. L. Rogers, C.LE., 1.M.8., seconded by Capt. J. D. ; harles Aubrey Godson, I.M.S., Resident Medical Officer, Medical College, Calcutta, proposed by Lieut.- seconded by Major E. aad Col. 1 Rogen, Janes aed Santen, Greig, 1.M.S. ; Capt. James Alire : i ‘MR. , Offg. ye nates of Phymelvgy: Medical College, Caleutta, proposed by Lieut.-Col. L. Rogers , C.LE., 1.M.S, secon by Major E. D. W. Greig, 1.M.S. — following papers were read :— The twelve Bhuiyas or Landlords of Bengal.—By the J. En H. Hoste, 8. evili Proceedings of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [December, cae paper has been published in the Journal for Novem- ber 191 2. The Rev. L. Bernard among the Abors, ~~ hy cross as a tattoo-mark (1855).-- A note by the Rev. H. Hosten, S.J. This paper has been published in the : a re August 13. 3. Jayamangali.—By 8. P. V. RAMANUJASWAMI. 4. Fr. Jerome Xavier’s Persian Lives of the Apostles.—By the Rev. H. Hosten, 8.J., with a pebeed by H. Beveridge and Aga Muhammad Kazim Shirazi These two papers will be publeied ina hibit oc number of the Journal. The Pitt Dimond and the sags 4 Jagannath, Puri. A Acie note by the Rev. H. Hostzn 6. The Nature of moksa in the Nyaya and vaisesika systems.— By VANAMALI CHAKRAVARTI 7. The Localization of certain Genii of the Rigveda.—By MAHAMAHOPADHYAYA SATIS CHANDRA VibyaBHusana, M.A., Ph.D. These two papers will be published in a subsequent number of the Journal. ——<>—— The Adjourned Meeting of the Medical Section of the Society was held at the renal 8s Rooms on Wednesday, the 10th December, 1913, at 9-30 p Lizut.-Cotongen A. H. Nose: I.M.S., in the chair. The following members were present :— apt. J H. Burgess, LMS., Dr. Adrian Caddy, Dr. Gopal Chandra Chatterjee, Dr. K. -K. Chatterjee, Dr. C. H. Visitors mere — ee I.M.S., Dr. W. M. Haffkine, Dr. J. B. Molon Minutes of the last hae were read and confirmed. he Discussion on the Emetine and other treatments of Amoebic Dysentery and Hepatitis were continued and other papers on the subject were read. Col. Newman showed a new steam steriliser. 1913.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. cix Col. Newman read a paper on Liver abscess and advocated opening and drainage as the best treatment. Dr. Chatterjee and Capt. Sandes read papers on the same subject. INDEX TO THE SOCIETY'S JOURNAL AND PROCEEDINGS, Vol. IX, 1918. INDEX. A Abhisheka of Aéoka, 318. aes an n 1068 cinta of 37 expedition 107. Abyla Pare , Q. an nd G. (2), 356. Acanthephyra, larva, 356. = sp., 354. a sanquinea, W o0o0d- ason ecient bri nie ks H.-Seh., var. ectens Horv., 4 dinthomancn: sp., Acetone wit ercuric — a ae nar compound of, Ixx A-ch’ang “(Maingtha) ribe of Hoh an, 137, duckie praciiy Giesbe, 367. long , Giesbr., "307. Adbhutasagara, manuscript of, 274. ge Aleock and And., 9. ria on Sarcocolla, 178. Alburnus sellal, Hekl., 31, 33. Aloiopidae, 366. 365 Allodahlia macropyga, Westw., 186. Almeida, Father Michael vs 157. Althepus pictus, Thor., , 420. Ambalacata, Tamil, Basan, and ‘« Malabar ” Printing in, 165. Ambassis pottaodicrs am. Buch.), rotaenia, Bleeke: er, 342. Amblyopus Us 5 Bi a : mines, ondary, action of sieoeet “abloride 0 n, 207. Ammonium substituted, Double Mercuri-periodides Amphioxides nar omg 358. yar am be 359. Am pullaria aed ses ‘rons, Burm., 219. Anatomy of blind Prawn of G Anderson, cs a ath the A-ch’angs, | 138. \ Anderson, John, on the dress of Men and Women the A-ch’ang tribe, 140, 141 Anisolabis pees Lue. 184. Anomura, larva Angamale and Cranganor, Chaldean Printing in, 16 Anisops producta. Fieb., 479. Anopheles roan haan Giles, 48. palestinensts fc Nala ), 4 Anopheline larvae f the lake ot Tiberias, 22. An Pa Steeda 3 Anthracolithic faunas of Shan tates, age O Antigonia ere, (Lowe). nie 355. ? Antocha opalizans, O Anuraea mie Bthrenberg, "520, Anzarut: SEER Aphrodite Mirth patti fasciatus, Loan 338 v. and Val., "34 seers: 406, 412-420. f Limestone caves of Burma, Araepora, ci. ramosa, Waag and Wentz an, Twelve Bhiliyas of, 448 Arcania quinquespinosa, Aleock and And., 349. pam ns hierogly phica, Duf., 479. — ha dapeuatior Budde-Lund, seid intermixtus, 4 Armadi pasate set ta 18, rn 352. olophus, Alcock, maculatum, sentir pn 3 Asiatic ; Society of ‘Bengal, its ia tock: Agoka’s Coronation, the Date of, doubt about their brightwellit, Gosse, 229. red Stone Im- pene Two-shoulde plements from, 291. exli raced som 357. Asteropecten, 347. » sp., 340. andersoni, Sladen, 346. icus Déderlein, 346. Atherina pinpats: Lacépe de, 338. Athyris, sp., 39 epee abe desmaresti, (Millet), 21, 39, 2 9° Atyidae, fa ravi Augaptilus Hh ae Farr Avadanaégataka, the ocinane Bud- dhistic text, 126. Avanti, ie of the dominating on of, 268. Aves, 404, beat of the Parsin, India in the, 427. B Bacteriastrum. 357. Badaga, Tamil and ‘‘ Malabar "Printing in acer pe nie ake Bahr Tuba ariya : Tiberi Pakbtiyee Khilji, Muhammad-i : ai ham mmad-i-Bakhtiyar Badlnieatoescs iy Balanus Balkh, City as e short note on, Barbier, Father Barbus beddom omes,( fan ol a2, 3a. } & V. 3 31, 33. ind cha ange s, Sir liot’s researches regard- ing, 307. thycalanus onesie 354. Batrachin, 39, 40, of the tans ie Tiberias, ° Pen Beccari, plore Camillo, 153. Beller ophon 397. Bengal. Condition bal before the Muhammadan Cease, Genealogical er of the Sena kin ngs of, 2 ee ears Bhiiyas pe ‘Tend 1 of, 437. Benzylamines, Monochloro and ichloro, preparation and decomposition of, 425 way R ong and the Cross as Tattoo Mark, 325. Inder Beschi, Father Joseph Constantius 166. Bhasa, - to ale e His ie Saka of Magadha paca Bisogpht or Landlords of biases r a Bidyabinod, B. note on the clay veri from a cave in Kedah, ‘ake ee of, before the i i EC Re toa pence a of ae ois of Tiberias, A Report on the, (Second Series), 209. 7. 2208 the Lake of Ti ert on,(T hird noes Biron, = Frene h sti on Jagan- h of Puri, 451. Birds a the Limesta tone Caves of Burma and Malay Peatnadta: Bischopinek, the Jesuit Mission- Bithinala annandalei, sp.n contempta, ‘Dastasaheas 469. 29 aint sp. n., 470. nes, sp. n., 469. sp. n., 470. Bithinia Badcolle, yA , 468. vis coaretensis, p n., scr makh, sp. n Blanc ian tes pilaiblecetien: 218, Blenniidee, 3 31, 33. Blenn arenas ‘ern A Bl, 34. » Risso, 31,. ities. Pree ens "Barak. Bhiai- yas of Bengal, 437 Block-printing, Histo tory of, 149. B “Gaya Inscription, 271 Bosmina —— trostris var. cornuta, Jurine, 231. Bouchet, o.. , on Jagannath of Puri, Brachionus militaris, Ehrenberg, | | Bra achiopoda, 365, 366. — themis leucosticta, Burm., | Brac oN use of the term, 150. Brpesivg. sp., | Buddhism, Northern, 124. note on, 123. Index. Buddhistic oe 123. a; s, Comparison of the oWorthes ern and South- ern, ; Bufo asper, Gravh., 404. >, vtridis, Laur., 39, 40. Burma, The fauna of the Limestone ave , 40 oe Caves of, 391 Bu rnouf, n Buddhism, 125 Sustadiaibe: Juan de, 153. Cc Cabral, Father John, 116. mse arse Father ste eer 116. minor, ( Calon elegans (Milne- -Edwards), 35 Calmette, the Jesuit Missionary ,150. rag acepien ssaneas , Giinther, 351. caudat tus, Schleg., pa este 8 fe eae, 415. ‘ambalopsis calva Passe), var., Candacia norvegica, poles 354. ethiopica, Dana, 3 pene ee ctyla, Daa. 354, Candi at Dalbadar, Dacca, Image Canthocalanus pauper, (Giesbr. ie Caranx affinis, Riipp, 33 a hing 368. bes “ri is. ), 338. Carcharias, 8 sp.; sce wi: longimanus, De Haan, > (gain. Rev. ae e Earlies ait Printing in a endia, 1. Caridina secloeion 244, vxbesaskee ay , 348. Cassiopea Catagius p ies Thorell, 407, oe — Aantificakion of the to Give Limeat one, of Burma and ay Peninsula, 391. tropages furcatus, (Dana), 367. 8 na, 340. Sete tripos, 357. 368. Jertanthus, sp-> Jeriodaphn nia reticulata, Jurine, 231. ete aude. Richard, 231. AGoooocoa Sd is Chae vitae, sp. no Chaetoceras, 357, 307, 368. Chaetognatha, 355, 367 exill Chaetospania thoracica, Dohrn, 185 Cha ser ooo Fees ! in Angamale and 166. yn ite oulgaris, Gray, 4 Champsodon guentheri, nde 348, 351, 352 Chandecan, identification of the of, Chandra ‘Gupta’ s ae. Date of, Oharjodee Sow hoplites, WwW Charybdis ( Gontiooma) affinis , Dana, 336. one ee Bd Fabr.), A.M -» 330. merguienao, de Man, 345 orténtalis, Dana, 350, 352. Sakae Aco M. 99 3° Chelidoperca Gucseneeganurie | Alcock) : Chelisoches morio., Fabr, 405, 414. Chilodipterus lineat tus, (Fo rsk.), Chiton (Acanthopleura) spiniger, ow., : Chorinemus sancti petri, Cuv. and Val., Christianity, note on, 299. Cichlidae, ue ae 34. Cirripedia, eae "aER. peg Day, 358. Cladocera, 231 cera a V.), 3 Packers en, Dana, Clay tablets from Kedah, the Malay sula and Moulmei in, 423. Sama aie rivulata, Valenc, 39, 40. La Clibanarius padavensis, de Clupea a ei. a4 "and val} ), Cochin,—*« Malabar,” Printing in, Coelenterata, age? Met 343, 346, , 350, 352, 355. of praieat Bay, of Hinzé Basin, 337. y Island, Coeurdoux, the Jesuit Missionary, : Coin of Mughigudbin Yuzbak, 288. Coins, Numismatic Supplement si, articles 122-124, 481. CX1V Collembola, 215 Collocalia pant i Guiiak ), 409. ye inata, Hume, 404, Colocasia Antiqu sorum, notes on the ollination of, 313. Coloconger, 347. Coluber taeniurus (Cope) 404, 409, meee taeniurus, var. ridleyz, onlenger, 409. pC oy ner eaD. Conochilus dossuarius, Hudson, 229. SER woo (Wied Copepoda, 231, 232, 354, 357, 359, Corbicula cor, Lk. aabula: {Moussom 474. a jeliciani. B ae flum scspart (afl) 474. : 6yrta rgt., 474. | Cornucalanus soebiae. Wolfenden, Cortispon gills, — nov., 62, 66. 84. barroist (Topsent), 58, 59, 67, 85. Corvospongilla, Annandale, 61, 78. Coscinodiscus, 357, 367. Cox, Major , on Sarcocolla, 177. Cranganor and Angamale, Chaldean Pri . 166. i bead og Crocothemis erythraea, Croix, Father r Stephen de la, 158. oss as a Tattoo Mark among the Abors, 325. Crustacea, 334-337, 339, 342, 344, 349, 350, 351, 352, 354, 356, 359, 366, 368, 407. of Byikhwaaw Bay, 338. ae of thé Limestone Caves oO Back an the alay Peninsula, 420. > of Tavoy Island, D : ' Tiberias, : Orypsithyrsis spelaea, Meyrick, 406, Cryp topodia fornicata, rae 352. shes laticinctus, s oS “oy us, Fic i rs Culicider f jean. the Lake of Damas- 47. cus, 47. »» from the Lake of Tiberias, Tiberias 47. Culicine larvae tg the Lake of Index. Cushing, Dr., on the A-ch’ang people, 143. Cyclophorus, ‘411 Cyclops ieoeckee: —— 231. An TUTUS 232. oma Pither. 231. Cyelothone econo (GHinther), 353. ta (Giinther), 353. Cymopterus, ro 40 Cyphoderus jimiiliese. Imms, 405, Cyprinidae, 31, 32, 33. — odon, 21. bee Yr, oo. ms nto, Hck, 32, 3 Heo une Deir Ble ot 5, 38. hiae, Hekl, 32, 38. Cyprinodontidae, ser Cyprinot entatomarginatus ni rd, 232. na, Brady, 232. Cypris pubera, Maller. var., 232. D Damascus, gichoaee' from the Lake oy Culicidae from the Lake Dinasaygara, manuscript of, 274. Daphnia ——* milis aa 232. Darinesteter, James, on the Avesta, 427, Dargaka, King of onesie and the plays of Bhas Date of Agoka’s joes Bye Elk Py is ndra-Gupta’s accession, Davies, on Ach’ ee tribe, 1 i i ae ae Abie of hs , 143. Dae rises "35, 356, 359. - Rept antia. 345 5 Natantia, 3 Delhi, taba Shah’s Tunnels at, Ixx Deiner, C., i description of An- thrac olithic fossils of Shan tates, 40 Deratonotus cavernicola, 415. apse 183 137. Indian, =p ty by ‘Dr. A. D. Imms, 183. Diaphanosoma adieu. "Liévin, Di aptomus similis, egos 232. Dias, Father Manoel, 1 Dicerobatis eregoodoo, Sher 342. Index. Dichloro and Nee. mines, Lbigerpers mpos ,4 bieiecuadaeee 8, 5, preparation ecomposition of, 425. Diestrammena anna eagree Kirby, oo pe mn sopien Sp-> ease “Nikaya, a Boddian MS., Dina Wass Blanchard, 211. 5 saab Se ets 212. lat Diphyes rappendiculata Esch., 356. Dipsocoris alie a vis Sch 47 Diptera, sa 45, 475 412. cilen: 43. Diplatys faleatus, Burr, 183. Discin este 2 lamta ies me )s 29 > Disomidae, 3 Disseta palu sr ae Giesbrecht, 354. ‘itr pe sie is cavernae, Sykes, vadana, the No rthern-Bud- B Bhiiyas of Benga. Doratonotus cavernt cha Sinclair, tuta, Fabr. ao \dw Tia a - x 7 Ge ey, aie sahuabierr 54 C., on Moulmein, Dutrueil au — Tourist in North In las tablets from pede on Sarcoeall 178. Dysommopsis, SP-> E Eales, te kan on the A-ch’ang peo 143. Bae cenit 340, 342, on 347, 352, 68. 365 of Byikhwaaw eS ay: of Tavey Island, 9° Echinosoma sumatranum, Haan, Edil ur grant, Eggert oe cae (Rumpb.), Edw. investigatoris. Alcock, 352. 2? Elaunon bipartitus, Kirby, 1 Eleotris muralis, (Quoy and peat ! Cuv. and Val... 338, Eliot, Sir J., researches regarding the barometric and wind changes, 307. Emys orbicularis (Linn.), ni 41. Entomobryidae family, 2 Entomo mejecins pe - eg Take of pieces me (Dobson), 403, lophthalite, Ne a Hun Coins, a Bphydatia fh ivi syriaca, 'Top- Bpizantis pista Me (Edw. ) se mare | R 386, Duf EHqu ares ee sciata, Erianotus lanosus, § < 8 3 . 258. 5 ae a new compound of, xev. Eucalanus attenuatus, reas 354, 367. crassus, Gi i “ esbr. an. rire 354. elongatus Buc marina, ( Prestand), 3 Buchel rau A . Scott, 3 wom Checbrosiit, 364. 2 olfe nden, 354. pulehr ’ (Lubbock), 354. Hue ucypris virens, Juri oe 232. Eumedonus zebra, Alcock, 350. Eupagurus goons Alcock, 3 Euphausiacoa, sp, Eudoh meal, pees: 187. Europe, a, ioe abe reser ag OA, Faria, Father de, | Fauna F of the setlaeosoe caves of urma, 402- ae the Limestone. caves of ah, 402. Fausbill, 128. Favia, 3 Fea, 0 on the caves of Burma, 394. Felis tigris, Fernandez, Firoz = oat Tunnels Father ‘Antonio, 156. at Delhi, @XVi Index. Fishes - the Lake of Tiberias, notes Fis folate serrata, Cuv., 350 Flabellum japonicum, Moseley, 347, fi laciniatum, 347 ” paripavoninum, tie ok, Be: num, Lesson, 347. Fiakohe see 6 Satooouthe. 177. Flowers of Lim mnanthemum indicum, | Thwaites, on variations in the, 5 Fo oraminifera, 367. Foley, Capt. W., on the Caves of | pia a and Malay Peninsula, 93. Forcipula indica Kirby, 184. trispinosa, Dona, 184, Forficula aceris, 186. 86. ranciscan issiowiaries of the mbs XIVth Century, Two to of, 170. Fredericella cunningtoni, Rousselet, | s sultana vse mma 225. a danica, 223. Fungia, 343. G Gaetanus oe G. O.. Sars, 354. gt vag sere "364, Ga te Gaudhans Brahmins, a short note on, 429. Gandharbsena, King of eae brief series of, 198 Ganeé Koul, 1 Galilee, sea a see also Lake of Tiberias. e noyri t fram gl js fot 43. fe on the Internal Anatom my ye" 7 blind Prawn of, anote on Rotifers from, 229, w Springtail from, 215. Gemedpian: 373-375. Gebia, sp.. 349. pada Kanjars, Marriage cere- mony and = of, 89. Gelasimus annulip Latr tetragonum [Betet), 344, Genealogical tables of the Sena kings of Ben: 284. gal, Gennadas, 7356. cole ae 191- Geolog of the Limestone Caves of , 396. ae of the cave-bearing Lime- of Burma and Malay eninsula, 3 96. Geranomyia annandalei » 47. Gerres . act Cuv. and Val. “344. Forsk.), 3 nae ( Gerris i Baty Fabr., 4 71. poe mes family, 213. | Glyceridae, | Capaioden nota, Day, 338. em/asciatue, Cuv. Qorisstesed: 2 Gon nodactylus 2 | Go ees paige Srolcaka), 410. Bro the ‘be le 15 59, ROE jor wi i a of Kanauj, 281. Govindapaladeva of Magadha, 278 | Grapsus grapsus (Linn.), 344. 5 strigosus, Herbst, 334, 339. | Grierson, Sir G. n the dialects | Guldé | Gunjidah : see ee inaah. 177. _ Gurdon, Col., | Gurney, Robert rt, on Entomostraca from the Lake of Tiberias 23 Gymnodactylus pulchellus (Gray), Gypsies, Europe ean, Comparative Vocabulary of, 93. H Haemopsis Sengsestga, (Linn.), 211. Halichondrina, 340. Saeed dugong, Illiger, 333. nxleden, eds Jesuit ‘Missionary, Haplochilus melastigma (McClell.), > panchax (Ham. Buch.}), Hasan, the Historian al a a brief account of, Index. Hausegger, the Jesuit Missionary, Hebrus pusillus, ae 477. Helodrilus lacustris nov., 6 Hemichromis sacer, ’Glinther, my 34, Hemidactylus turcicus (Linn.), 41. Hemiramphus par., Cuv. and Val., 344. Herpobdella wight lineata (O. F. Miiller), 211. ek subf. concolor, nov., 212. Herpobdellidae, family, 213. Heterocrypta, sp., 352. Heterorhabdus grimaldi (Richard), és aha ee Same - brecht), 3 ry papilligera peer 354, Romnichal and Collo- Comparative Me abe 93. Hindustani, qui rial, ary of the language of Hinzé Basin, 333. Hippoboscidae, 44. Hippobosca equina, Hipposiderus armiger ( ), 403. + bicolor (Temm.), 403. 9 diadem a (Geo off. ), 4 403. larvatus aeigie “ 403. Hirudines of Hinzé Bas Hirudinean a of he cree of Tiberias any History of Kasm 195. Hodgson, tag Houghton 124, ue Hohsa-L , the A-ch’ang (Main he) tbe of, 137. Holothuria atra, Jager, 340, 342, 34 46. Homotages feae, Borm., Houghton, on cag yee aap 143 Hpon tribe Hughes, T. perils, on the Lime- stone Caves of Burma, 399. Husain, Mir Muhammad, on Sarco- colla, 177. Hyastenus pletone neha ), 350. Hydrometra stagnor 77 Hyla arborea sa itt “Au douin, D., 354. 12. nee 341. exVii Hypurgus humeralis, Kirby, 187. Hyastenus sb sag Misrs, 350. ons grotet, Gra I I lyocypris gibba, Ramdohr, 232. India in the Avesta of the Parsis, 27. India, Earliest Jesuit Printing in, Indian Data of the Date of Asoka’s Abhisheka, 322. + ee collected by Dr. mms, Music, Psychology of, 299. Inscription ie the time of Laksma- va, “eh Laieciptianie, four in Gaya Dist, 1 L. 3 Portu the Kap alegvara pln at Mailaps r (Mad- ant ey 43-45, 47-51, “ise 405, eee Insect: el Pep ase Caves ‘Bir Tranians, a carers of Aryan Stock, Isodictya tubuloramosa, Carter, 346. J Jagannath. Puri, Pitt Diamond and the Eyes of, 189, 451. Japyx ie , 405. Jatakas, abvawhar a Fecd, work of Muhibb Jesuit Missions in India, Ethiopia, d Japan, gr sik of, an recente, gant a — ing, Earliest, i in India, Jo&o iL int, ‘King D., and Indian , 156. Jones, Sir ae Willie; on the Avesta, i 3 on ‘Indian Music, 304. neaahea Ride conde d Syria, ne ote on he Dragon flies of, 219. Julis Pe (Linn.), 368. K | Kaissa, a Mishmi chief, 107. Kalocrania picta, Guer., 183. Kamran, Mirzé, his work Mirza Kanauj, Govindcandradeva of, 281. eXxvili Kapalesvara Temple of Mailapur Madras), two rehasacaiey In- scriptions in Kashi-Prasad Ja Zyasw wil, on the Date of Agoka’s Coronation, 37. Kaémir, Histo 95. ory of, Kleuker, on the Avesta 427. KeSavasena, son of Laksmanasena, Kiclhorn, on the era of Lakgmana- iekbard pserrn 157. Kun-judah : see Sarcocolla, 17i, L Labia curvicauda, Motsch., 185. oe i tea, Borm., 1 ronata, Stil, 185. tabiden, | fami i} Labidocera deruncate (Dana), 354. minuta, Giesbr., 367. Labidura erent, Dohrn, 184. tparia, Pa ve 4, Labiduridae, fami nee 84. ache : ae ng. © f Kagmir, a brief 199. tahsa Hohea, ce Aaa (Maing- tha) tribe of, 137. Latiopteryz zanthosticta, (Aleock), Lake of Tiberias : : see also Galilee, sea 0: composition of e water of, 2? 9 explanation of the photo ne, of ‘the fishes sol. ” ies eieohansien: of, im Laksmanasena, 271. Laksmanasenadeva, Inscription at the time of, 289. dhistic text, 126 La ee: Leach, 352. ” nolambrus) elie, Aleock, 350. Ni Lamellibranchia, 368, 3 371, 372. Landlords or Boggs e Bhuiyas of in North India, 125, of the Lake of Tibet 211. Lepidoptera, ag 412. Leptocephalus, 358. Index. Leptodius exaratus, Edw., 345. | Leucosia obtusifrons, De Sidon: 349. unidentata, 3 352. | Leuctscus zaregt, Hekl., 31, 32, 33. | Levi, M. Sylv: vain, his rem s. Search in N Fi awe 129. | Limestone paves of B a, Fauna of, of Bott and Malay __ Penin- yg Reptiles, Limnaea =a aa (inne ), 465. in scum, variations e flowers of, 191. Limnias cenalophylt Schrank., 230. Limnogonus aegyp Limnophora tonitrui, Wie Limulus so peas nus, 341. Lingula, 3 neal a, 365. Lithostrotion, ane; nov., 397. Loligo sp., mang jsalinaria, Waag and oO Lophotheths fae 354, ce frontalis, | Giesbrecht, i ities C. C., on = classification of © A chin Lunia ere a Waieketin: 354. ’ rh (Cosh aagety 354. ma, Steuer, Luwifer typ, tome 359, 366. Lupocyclus tundatus, Adams and Whi pie hg sp., 344. Tychatenien, 346. ; Ly scotophilum, Boulenger, 410. pedapte sm a mi inuta, Bezzi, 43. Lyphoderus, Nicole ti; ZEB, ” genne. serae, sp. nov., 215, 217. Lytocarpus, 349. M Maclaren, a M., on aig ena! Caves of Burm Macrophthalmus erato, de ‘Man, 246. Mins trte laticornis, Jurine, 232. Macrurus Pranoouiaar us, Alcoe k, Madanapaladeva, 280 Madrepora, 343. Magelonides: 668 pe Aga e_ Norther-Buddhis tie t Index. pees (Madras), the Ka = snl a Temple of, Two Por pase se Inscriptions in, 169. Maingtha = ibe of Hohsa-Lahsa, Yiinnan: see A-ch’ang Tribe, Majthima Nikaya, a Buddhist MS., Malabar Badaga, and Tam Py a ning in Arba , 165. : Ponting in Cochin, of the term, st Malay gare Limestone Cave of, Mammalia, 40 3, Manr , on tl Bhiiyas of 1,4 Manucci, = Jagannath of Puri, 454. Maru dialec Matuta neselg habe ), Hilgendorf, — 339. vera v4 & Media, ‘Desc of, 433. M egacalanus princeps, Walfenden, 54. Meher Pais reference to India in, ike mizolepis, Giinther, 53, 355. 4q, 20. iene ‘rothiana, Noress, 467. berculata, Mull, 466. 9 elong a, Lacord, 461. —— buccinoide | arr 467. ” fordanaéa, oth, 467. praerosa, Lin., 468. elea agrina margaritijera var. 5 e on 8 . i] Mareutigedatds of substituted Ammoni onium , 205. Mercuri-periodide, Tetra-propy!- ammonium, A Mesorhabdus truncatus, A. Scott, Mesovelia Psiote kare Horv., 477. etapeneus coniger, Wood-Mason, Bien onoceros, Fabr., 349. Methylbenzylnitrosamine, 208. 116. | Mirza, a short note ma | var. r degenerata, 467. CxXix Metopograpsus messor ( . : rs : . l ob Metridia ue 0 Batol, pte , 354. ber S Guataes 354. rot, " Giesbrecht, 354. ‘Malcohnerot 84. Micronecta annandale’, SP 479. Paces a, n, ? Pes eae Me, OP gsi oy pauls Microvelia Liha Duf., 478 Middlemiss, C. 8., the Limestone os of Maine Peninsula, Mihira “Ch la; 429, Minhaj Ayr account of the conquest f engal, Minous inermis, ’ Aleock, 352, Mir Jumla, Mirza Namah of mo with an English bneraas Mirzaship, on the rules of the code of, 3, 4. Mollusca, ie tt 343, 352, 356, of Byi ikhwaaw Bay, 340. of Hinzé Basin, 337. Molluscan ior list of the Lake of Tiberias, with descriptions ot new 6 Monacanthus, caper ats a Dichlorobenzy- es, the preparation and res pune ion of, 425. Monochlorobenzylamines, prepara- and decomposition of, Monsoon ‘and Nor’westers Predic- ‘tion, 30 the Jesuit missionary, Yuz bak, tog of, oa _ Use é- . CxXX gem nt i he Bihar, the life and orks Mula Ahmnd, iis Persian History oO a Muraena melon 8, 334, sellata, ‘Richardson, 338. Murchisonia sp., Mur ee a gh, ee ‘Twelve Bhiiyas akan, Marshidpna casi the oldest British, 483. Mursia biritimana, Alcock and An peaks Mus ee Mille r, 404 Muscllnn atS ia ‘work is Mabibb Alla Musca domestica, L438. sp 43. Masoidas: Hs Muscinae, 43 Music in bite ide an, Bechet SS 299. eau ue: a note on, 173. Mira Insti. Alcock, 352. Myriapoda, 405 is of the Limestone Caves f Burma, 415. Myrmecaelurus, sp., 4 N Nabonndelus ye eta Berg., 478. act ele Nath Vasu, on the era of Narayan of Bhisa. Tracked with that of a Navia cerastes, Ortm ann., "350. Naria. sp , 350. Navia' tnvestiqatoriz, Aleock, 350. Neanura pulibunda Imms, 405, Nemachilus galilaeus, Gthr., 31, 32, leo ntiiae; Lort. , 32, 33. N emorhaedua swettenhami, ‘Butler, 408. Nereidae, 366 N ermertinea Neuroptera. ), 220, 405. Nephelis arse pe 12. us ( ; “Rondani, Nitrosyl chloride, the action of , on secondary amines, 207. Index. N’mai Hka Valley, Silat Father ie ae 150, 165. Noe ia F, on the species deter- ned by, 397. Nor’ westers ae Monsoon Préedic- 305. Nudiah, pie roads from Bihar to, Notonecta glauca, L., 479. Nudospongilla, gen. nov taht 84. Nudosponyilla aster, sp. nov., 58, 9, 5, 85. vy mappa,sp. nov., 58, 59, 64, 85, 221. Pp sah sp. nov., 58, eaperovs vis XXI, , 122-124, 4 Nyemenenn amboinensis, Rondani, Nyctinomus plicatus, (Buchn.), 403. O ieee strigicollis, n. sp., poda ceratophthalma Ortm., 334, 3 ae cordim mana, Desm., ( Pallas " 339. 334, Odoric, on Jecaduath of pila, 452. Ovsinies socialis, Weber, Oikopleura, 359. Oldham Lae pl A the Limestone s of Peco 396. Ghia: 53-56. » sept go ee the Lake : as, 53; Olindias haiays nsis, ste > 349. Opeas innocens, Preston , 405, 411. Ophichthye, sp., 348. Ophiopluteus ; 365. Ophistho ostoma annandaleti, Sykes, piesa: music, 300. rth et Simi are aaa Burm., 219. Orthocesra. 405, 412. Ostracion turritus, Forsk., 348. Ostracoda, 232, 355, 368. Pr Pachydictyum, oe 62, 81. Padam Tribe, + Pcs marks among, Pagur — bidet ca, Henderson, 351. Palaka, s f Pradyota » 322, Palaemon » digestive, vascular > re paacat ae. nervous erat of, 233-239. Palnenionidas, family, 245. Index. Panca-Ratra, work of se ge 262. Paquristes c an Alcock, 351. Paracalanus aculeatus, Gleb 367. Parasnniae Wena: rs), 354. iM cali cin pide 9? propingua, tonsa, (Giesbrecht), | ero: Scott, 354. Parapeneus lisiyipea: Alcock, 349, | Paratilapia magdalenae, (Lort.), 32, Pariphiculus tesaneas eee 3 i dia in Avest ‘ Hania ie: larva ors’ Garden, a fe Sk; 158. Pudusubinned: nov., 60. Pienaar and some obsc gen — Shen ere Le asic ‘spine os eps, Boe 478." Peditia. War aI soins aaemene o' bch ngs Limestone Caves Pelletier, ahs “chemical Aampreaainat f Sarcocolla, hese Tourist on aes India, 125. Pen 178. se ae. 178. Peneus indicus, Edw. Juv.. 345. Pennatula, ¢ 348. Pentaceros, sp., 340. Periophthalmus bod wer (Pall.), 334, 33: , 044. epee 1h cp ( 2? americana, , 405 eat ‘Agipectil Du, 427. ae = , his story of theft of Pitt Diamond, 189. Persian History of Kaémir, by Mula A 195. © Philaema NSUGNIS , Philyra scabriuscula, (Fabr.), 352 Phlebotomus minu Rond., 44. papatast, Scop., 44. Pholeus diopsis, Simon, 407, 420. P osoma, sp., Phronima, 359. Phyllodocidae, 366. Phyllopoda, 232 Physa tiberiadensis, Piiumnus vespertilio, Fabr., 345. Subfamily, — Pi a the Jesuit missionary, Plc a 39, 334, 337-339, 341, 342, 344, 347, 348, 350, 351, 352, 353, 3 358. 366. CXxi Pisces, of Byikhwaaw Bay, 337. of Ta Pitt ye oer Jagannath, Puri, 189, | »Placobdella o carinata, Diciaay 213, “ catenigera, (Moq-Tand.). Planaria barroisi, n. sp., 462. y alina, n. sp., be sberisiiles Planarians of the Lake ot poi Plankton, Surface, Observations on, 49. _ Planktonic Sr ie the succes- Plétyoaphiittas, da 352. indicus, 352 insidiator , (Forsk. ), 338, 344. tuberculatus, Sage R and Va Platyglossus resect “1 Blockae), 338, 9? me notopsis, " (Bleeker), sles sinc malactanus; 415. (Peters), Plea tetourneurt, Sign. 479. Plesiops nigricans. Riipp-. 3 Pleuromamma nidowivealile (Lub- bock), oon ( Cla us), 354 o? quadrungulata, (F. ahl), 354. rs scabies (Gies- brecht), 354. Pleurotomaria, aff. durga, Waag, Plotosus ~~ hese ),.338. Plumatell Aare nov., 227. Poe cilochaetus, sp., Polychae — st 347, 349, 356, 366, 367, 3 Polynemus sips Shaw, 342. Polynoidae, Polypora, ae: 397. Polystomella, i 201238. ae of the Lake of Tiberias, Pomacentrus littoralis. Cuv., and al., 338. Pons, the Pontellina plumata, Dana, 367. Porifera. eet ee 221, 222. 340, 346. exxll Poriféra, of Byikhwaaw Bay, 340. of Tavoy Island, 346. Porites, 343. Portuguese eoercip the palesvara ais at £Nailipox (Madras), Ae histo orians, reference mel Barah Bhiiyas 438. Potamogeto Pota 8 hall, 62, 80. Lotonadapiiie. < nov. , ak md 84. Potamon "fuviatile, nteill}, et An potamioa, Rathbun, ery 257 Goan Key to the Crabs of, 251. Group, Measure- Se of crabs De Potamonidae, family, “249, S eee a contemporary of Ajata. ve Pratijna- a ee a play of Bhas Preston, rH a Mollus faunal list or the we “ te vii with descriptions cies, 465. areca "Barlvet Jesuit, in India, Pre ress, origin at Goa, 153. Pristis, sp., 342 Pristipoma furcatum Productus, F. Roem Proenga, "Pathe Rana de, 165. Prosopeas - A a de Morg, 405, 4 (Bl. Schn.), Protozoa, 36 a Vad 184. femoralis, Dohrn, 184. Paoudbeotioie” ‘ini, sp. n., 184, Pseudosquilla monodactylus (A. M. Edwards), 3 Psilocnemis kervillei, Martin, 219. Dayoholgy: of ae usic, 299. chogaster, sp., Puerulus iene Us, "Spence Bate, Punicael, ‘Tamil bi in, 164. ait erin family, 183. Pyralis, 414. 3 tpennis, Butler, 406, 14. » pictalis, Curt., 406, 414. Index. | Pyrgula barroisi, Dtz., 468. Pyrosoma, 353 Q Quadrella coronata var reticulata, Aleoeck, 350. R 0 oe Printing in, 161. Radiol: Rafi ‘1- eee ‘Mirza, La Ragas, theory of, 3 ae Rana alticola, Blngr., ‘ culenta reeoete. Pallas, 39, > gla ndulos Osa, ag 404. me hora bose ther), 4 oo of Kemi, a brief unt eo 197. ie eeek. Queen of Randaditya, 00 oc ak, Raninoides serratijrons, Ricca, 7 Raub Series, a note on, 398. Raymondia pagodarum, Speiser, 406, 414 Rennell, Major James, two letters of, 173. Report on ‘tho Biolo of Tiberias, gy of the Lak (Recond Series), Reptiles of the Lake of Tiberias, note on, 31. ;, of the Limestone Caves of ntti and Malay Penin- Reptilia, 39, 40, al, — asia Rhagovelia ica Phsshidiophors (? caers, “icisby), Rhincalanus cornutus, (Dana), 354. nasutus, Giesbrecht, Rhinolophus affinis, Horsf., 403. Rhinolophus minor, Horsf., 403. Rhinopoma microphyllum, Geoff. , 403. Rhiostoma, 411. Rhizomys sumatrensis, (Raff.), 404, Rhizosolenia, 357, Rhomboidichthys ie Alcock, 352. Aquatic and Rhynchota, Sem uatic, from the Lake of d Tiberias and its immediat vicinity, 477. Index. Rhys Davids, Ribeiro, hie Diego, 157. Rodeles, Rev. o Gomez, on the E srliost pe Printing ndia, Romnichal or “colloyuied ae » a Comparative voc hoe of, 93. Roth, ee ihe Jesuit missionary stu ei te Sanskrit, 150. Rotifera, "220, om ae a note on, Rousselet, C. F gg on Rotifers from Ga. ce Roz, Father Coe ar 8 rages 355, t. Thomas, regen of, in India, Salarias dussumiers , Cuv. and Val., 334, 338 342, 344, lineatus, Cuv. and Val, 38, 344 quadricornis, Cuv. and MM es p Se 7, Riipp. Saldanha, Fa ee Antonio doy 164. Salpa cylindrica, Cuv 355, democratica, eed. 59. a> hexagona, Quoy and Gaim., 353. ’ ’ multitentaculata, Quoy and ard, ae Pia ria ‘a (Pall), 35 Satabsena, King of Kasi, a brief unt S44 ‘ enccaolld. Wire chemical examination 9? of, 180. composition of, 180. Sawbwas or chiefs of Hohsa and Lahsa, 139. ee jpeoketer t 349. Schizo icola, Gravely, 7. ieaasaey : Noetl, 397. atridorsalis (Gray), 404. Scolecithrix frontalis (Giesbrecht), na armata, Sauv., { pae auv., 338. ; Scott, Sir George, on the A-ch’ang people, 143. _ Scottocalanus farrani, A-Scott, 354. CXxiii Scrivenor, J. B., on the Limestone Ci vei aves of isorin, - 406, 4 oe Peet ne sied 415 ais as (Fete. ), 406. , 406. Sebastishthys spr sok Cuv. and Val., 338. Sena Kings of Bengal, genealogical tables of, 284. Senart, on Buddhism enart, M., on the “ot ie Asoka’s ates ska, 322; ssiiefousin sp.» 354, 355, 356. bisulcatus, Wood-Mason, 354, Serranus boenack (Bloch -), 338. pantherinus (Lacépede), Sesarma quadratum, Fabr., 334, 9, niolatum, esi Se Setarches inter, : —— | Shan s, Age artnet ite of, 401 Sillago pices Pons ), 338, 344. Siluridae Sipbonophors, 286 Skea flay on the Limestone ae Burma, 399. Solenocer Solim anves, wien esate of the own of, 439. Soriculus metres 8, 403. Sousa, Fr. Francis ds his study of Sanskrit 150. Spelacoblatta geatroi, Bolivar, 405, Sphenomerus seperate: W ood- Mas Spionidae, 368. Spirifer, sp., 397. Spir urua spirig cit ett sat , Ale iy 350, 352. Sponges S the take of Tiberias, an pro- L iberias rg’ wd pe distribution Sponge-Larva from the Lake of Tiberias, note on, 221. S fa : ae 78 Sen o note on Dermal Pore- ce in, ee observations on cer- tain gen wot ongilli > 59, 78, 84. ep mi ts classification of some obscure genera of, CXxXi1V Spongosorites, 346 ' Spongovostor semiflavus, Borm. Sprin ngt tail, wh tke re Galilee, 215. ta cals e lhydrazine, inh “aie pester F., 49. — Tourist in North cubic aaa ' eldhami, Alcock, S tephens, Father Stephen, 161. —— — J., Aquatic Oligo- dips, the Lake of Ti- nese Shauiabobade, 339, 345, 349, 350, 365. 3 of Byikhwaaw Bay, Stomoxys calcitrans, L., 43. Stone Implements from Assam, Two-s aes red, 291. venlcclriey ay Str sar Bsn., 405, 411. Rendchianociics sinensis, Euphr., 338, 3 Stygophrynus cavernicola, Thorell, 406, 418. a cer bers. Simon, 406, 413, 417, "419. Sullum eh tim. work of Muhibb Sirak, “King of oro a brief of, 1 ative, Taseipciok in the walls of the shrine of, sage Vasavadatt, chief work of Bhasa, Syllida , 366. Sy sainhithele, 343. TS : —— Alcock, 348. e Jo Syria and t on Pra Tiesicciaflien of, 219. gi Tabaqat-i-Nasiri, 285. Tabpirat-ulN fain, on Jagannath , 454, Thchand, Fr. a. on Jagannath of i, 454. bee “ Mababar” Ambalacata, 65. Taphozous longimanus, Hardw., > _ saccolaemus, Temm., 403. rdan Valley, note Index. Tattoo marks among the Padams, Tattoo Mark, the Cross asa, among e Abors, 325, even on Sihsnsseish of Puri, Temora discaudata, Giesbr., 367. ylifera, Dana, 367. ihetedes 349, 366. piss tbera, Pallas aodon fluvi atilis, ie -Buch., iA Smehaculatus, Bl. Schn., ii aa Mercuri- Teuthis ecaiealun (Cuv. and Val.), Thalassios ostr Thala dae. ) Edw., 345. * rit nae, Stimpson, 339. mna, ( Harbst: ), 339. Thelyphonidae, bts Theobal wae Dies Dress oe of Bae Theodozxis bellar di, jpvaconst * 471. ay jordani, (Sow.), 470. on 7 2b.), 471. therapin or (Porak. ), 334, 338, 344 puta, C and Val., 342. Tiberias (Lake atid pire hea of the sponges e, 57. 4 Aquatic Otackbecta from the, $s Aquatic and Semi-aquatic Rhynchota from the, i Bibliography oe the adh of ee 5. Bi Climate o , 19 9s si wings a oe of 41. i Culicidas from the, 47. re Entomostraca from the, ng 59 Hirudinean fauna of the, it 35 Leeches of the, 211. x Molluscan faunal list of the, with descriptions of new species, 465. 2 Planarians of he, 459. Py Polyzoa of the, 223. »» Report on the Biology of the, 17, 209, 459. %> itr sree from the, Tipulidse m the, 47, Tieffentaller, the reer missionary. 150. Index. Tilapia Rook jovenbé. (Lort.), 32, 33. », galilaea, (Artedi), 32. 93 0 > * | - nis, Ae »» eztllit, (Gervais), 32 geese from the nig of Tiberias _ amasc Tit ake, Se spo to. India in, | 5. ba oa of Franciscan Missionaries the XIVth oe 170. Torroptetsdae, er mr tee Sp., Topsent, on iphviatia fluviatilis | syria os Tozeuma arma , Paulson, 350, Triacanthus esac Sete , 341. 3 revirostria. 341. Trionyx triunguis, Forsk., 39. Trithemis annulata, (Palisot de | Beauvois), 219. Tunicata, oe Lhe 355, 359, 366. ne waaw Bay, 3 : Tufjina, King” of ra a a brief | account of, 1 Tunnels of Firoz Shah at Delhi, | Ixxxviii. | sbaparae (S43; | welve, sacredness of the number, 8 o 2° Typhlocaridinae, subfamily, 245. Typhlocaris, oe c the pool, "nhabiteted by, pail, sep 21, Typhlops simont, bea: Cs aE Typton, 245. U Udayana, oo of Dargaka, 260. Umbellula, 34 ndeuchaeta padi A. Scott., major , Giesbrecht, 2? 354. re plumulosa, Lubbock, Pie ndinopsis, sp., 354. Undinula zd Dana, 367. Unio, chinneret iene sp. — 473. ee aol ee yee 344. Uro jordanieus, Brgt., 472. CXXV Unio, tens: Lk., 472. 3. 0Or é, Locard, 473. os petra, is prosacrus, Bret. 472, ee amo ie ieominatta, Brgt., ah 3, tiberianensis, Let., 471. tristrami, rd, 471. zabulonicus, Brgt , 472. eroot : see A t,t Upanisads, evolution of Buddhism Uranotaenia unguiculata, sp. n,, 51. , 407. iene: ada: 61, 79. Vv _ Vainyaditya, King of sage a bri or of, 20: Vaipicot Vajraditya, “Kin ng of ief account of Kaémir, a 20%). oligarthra, Steuer, 354. Valignano, — ewan tee 159 Vallisneria, Valvata kegs, rgt., Varicorhinus soles Ba, “(C. WD; Pe sauvagei, Lort., 31, socialis, (Hekl.), 31, syriacus, (Gthr.), 31. Varuna litterata (Fabr.), A. M. Vatsa territory, 267. luspa, 61, pagan“ reference of India in, Vinciguerria lucetia, (Garman), 356. ree libetina xanthina, (Gray. ), Viévardpasena,, son of Laksmana- sena, Vivipara, 411. WwW Ww , David, a short life of, ciii. Webb Morgan; on the A-ch’angs, 138, Wilford, Fr., on Barah Bhiiyas of Bengal, 437. Wise, Dr., on Barah Bhiiyds of Bengal, 437. Wind and Barometric changes Sir ye researches poh gar Worms of he Lake of Tiberias, 22. x Xantharpyia (Geoff ), 403. Xavier, St, Francis, his catechism, amplexicaudata Xiphosura, 337. . L BPP LO Index. Yagna, reference to India in, o. Tribe of Hohew. Bye: 137. Z Zain-ul-Abdin, King of Kagmir, 196, Zain-ul bilad, the mint-town, 484 Zend Avesta, 427. Zi diale Z ialect, 143. ooplancton of Lake of Tiberias, 21. Zott, 93. PLP OSS